Electrical Specifications

NEOM ADVANCED HEALTH CENTER
DESCRIPTION ELECTRICQL SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION NO: 1600000
REVISION NO: REV. 0
DATE: 09 FEBRUARY 2021
1
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 16060 EARTHING SYSTEM
SECTION 16075 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SECTION 16111 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS SYSTEMS
SECTION 16118 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
SECTION 16120 WIRES, CABLES AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
SECTION 16121 CONTROL/SIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA
SECTION 16145 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
SECTION 16264 STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
SECTION 16265 AC/DC MONITORED CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
SECTION 16440 MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SECTION 16442 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
SECTION 16443 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
SECTION 16481 MOTORS & STARTERS
SECTION 16501 GENERAL LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 16715 STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
SECTION 16761 NURSE CALL SYSTEM
SECTION 16780 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SECTION 16850 SATELLITE AND MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION
SECTION 16910 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM, ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE
INTELLIGENT INERACTIVE SYSTEM WITH VOICE EVACUATION
SECTION 16920 IP ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 16951 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 16970 ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
Neom community
health center plus Specifications
SECTION 16010 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15 & 16.
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
1.2.1 The scope of electrical work for the Neom community health center plus project will include but is
not necessarily limited to:
A. Power Supply and Distribution consisting of:

1. Co-ordination with the Saudi Electricity Company “SECO” for power supply, MV
metering and MV substation,
2. Private MV switchgear & MV/LV transformers
3. Main distribution boards,
4. Distribution, sub-distribution and final branch circuit panel boards,
5. Cables, wires and related accessories,
6. Conduits, wireways, supporting systems and related accessories,
7. Earthing system,
8. Automatic Transfer Switches “ATSs”,
9. Capacitor banks and power factor correction equipments.
B. Standby Emergency Power Distribution capable of catering to 100 per cent of the emergency
load and consisting of:
1. Diesel engine driven generator(s).
2. Generator protection board (mounted on the generator(s)) housing the circuit breaker
and other protection devices,
3. Automatic transfer switches,
4. Totalizing Panel,
5. Load Management System.
C. Lighting and Power Installations including:

1. Functional indoor and outdoor lighting installations,
2. Electrification for the decorative indoor and outdoor lighting installations,
3. Electrification for the facade and landscaping lighting installations,
4. Lighting control such as normal switches and lighting control system,
5. Wiring devices including all lighting switches, isolating switches, socket -
Outlets, plates,
6. Emergency Lighting System. D. Lightning protection system.
E. Communication, life safety and low current systems consisting of:

1. Fire detection and alarm system with voice evacuation and emergency voice/alarm
communications systems,
2. BMS; Building Management system
3. Telecommunication system, including voice, data and infrastructure for IP CCTV,
IP Access Control, Nurse Call System, BMS… distribution networks,
4. Security Systems (CCTV, Access Control, Video-Intercom and related interfaces
to other systems as specified and indicated on drawings). 5. Nurse Call System
Section 16010 Page 1 / 13

Neom community
1.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, includes the supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the complete electrical systems, equipment and materials shown on
the Drawings and/or described in the Specification together with all associated ancillary
work, support work and builder's work in connection.
1.2.3 Incoming power supply and connection will be provided by the Local Power Authority
at 13.8 kV and stepped down to 230/400 V (all equipment shall be able to operate
continuously at full load under 230/400 V) to the location shown on the Drawings.
1.2.4 All mechanical vibration and noise isolation issues to be coordinated and approved by
the acoustic consultant.
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY
A. Carry out electrical work in accordance with the Drawings, Specification and
Regulations, ensuring compliance with design and performance requirements, to
provide safe and protected systems with equipment readily accessible for operation,
maintenance and repair.
B. Installations are to be complete, ready for operation and fully integrated and
coordinated with all other work.
C. Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.
D. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or

recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer of the equipment or accessories.
1.3.2 EQUIPMENT SPACES AND ROOMS: check that dimensions, structure, ventilating and
cooling arrangements and other provisions in equipment spaces and rooms are
suitable for installation, operation and maintenance of proposed equipment. Note any
discrepancies on the shop and construction drawings. The Contractor is responsible
of planning the erection of the electrical equipment such that it is not interfering with
any other trade in the building.
1.3.3 POWER SUPPLY: liaise with the Local Power Authority to confirm:
1. Characteristics of supply and system earthing
2. Location of incoming supply shown on the Drawings
3. Space requirements and associated builder's work for the Authority's
installations.
4. Make necessary arrangements at the earliest opportunity to ensure connection
as and when required, and inform the Engineer in the event of any foreseen
delay.
1.3.4 KWH-METERING: liaise with the Local Power Authority and provide necessary
instrumentation, enclosures and accessories required by them to effect a complete
medium voltage KWH-metering installation.
1.3.5 Systems used before substantial completion for the benefit of the Contractor are to
have all consumable elements, such as lamps etc. and defective equipment replaced
by new, within 7 days prior to the date of substantial completion

Neom community
1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS
A. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:

1. Medium voltage : 13.8 kV, 3 phase, 500 MVA short circuit power,
2. Low voltage : 400 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed neutral
3. Frequency : 60 Hz,
4. Earthing System : TN-S (solidly grounded neutral with separate grounding
conductor)
B. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS are to be supplied or derived from the voltage system previously
described, as shown on the Drawings, or as otherwise specified.
C. EQUIPMENT is to be designed for the system voltage and frequency previously described,
unless otherwise specified. Special provisions are to be made for equipment sensitive to
power supply frequency and voltage variations and for equipment operated at other
voltages/frequencies or by direct current sources.
D. KWH-METERING: public metering will be at medium voltage.
E. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays,

lighting fixtures, motors etc., is to be designed and de-rated for continuous and trouble free
service under the following climatic conditions:
1. Altitude : at sea level
2. Maximum ambient temperature: 50 C (in the shade)
3. Minimum ambiant temperature: -5 C
4. Maximum relative humidity: 60 %
5. Atmospheric conditions: 1 bar
F. Where design and operating conditions, different from the above are required for particular
equipment, they are described in the specification of the equipment concerned.
G. REGULATIONS: carry out electrical work in accordance with the current issue of the SBC
Standards and IEC Regulations for Electrical Installations where not in contradiction with the
local codes of practice and regulations, herein referred to collectively as 'the Regulations'.
H. CONFLICT should an instance occur in this specification or on the drawings in which material
or construction methods called for are less than minimum requirement of the Regulations, the
Engineer shall be immediately informed in writing. Consequent to Engineers approval, supply
the materials and perform the work as through called for to minimum code standards.
I. STANDARDS: unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be manufactured

and installed in compliance with the relevant recommendations of the following:
1. IEC : The International Electro-technical Commission
2. SBC : Saudi Building Code
3. ISO : The International Standardization Organization
4. BS : The British regulation
5. NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
6. EN : European Norm
7. NF-USE : The French Regulation
8. CCITT : The International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative
Committee
9. CCIR : The International Radio Consultative Committee
10. CISPR : The International Special Committee on Radio Interference
11. EIA/TIA : Electronics Industries association /
Telecommunications Industries Associations.
12. IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.

Neom community
Or other equal and approved standards, herein referred to as 'the Standards'. Local
standards, where enforced and relevant, are to have precedence over the Standards.
1.5 THE DRAWINGS
A. EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS shown on the Drawings indicate the approximate locations and
general layout of equipment. Exact and final locations and layouts together with dimensions,
weights, mounting methods and accessories, where relevant are to be shown on the shop
and construction drawings. All protecting device shall show: the short circuit current value for
single and three phase current, the voltage drop, the indirect protection function in case of a
fault with respect the earthing system.
B. WIRING LAYOUTS shown on the Drawings are to be used as a guide only to defining basic
positions, circuiting, loading and switching arrangements. Actual layouts and details of routing
of circuits are to be shown on the shop and construction drawings.
C. WIRING LAYOUTS shown on the Drawings for work not included in the Electrical Work are
shown for convenience and reference only.
D. SYMBOLS: in order to provide sufficient detail and a minimum degree of clarity on the
drawings, the symbols used for the various electrical devices, particularly wall mounted
devices, take up more space on the drawings than the device does on the wall. Because of
drafting limitations these locations must be considered as being symbolic rather than exact
physical locations of the devices.
E. The devices shall be installed with prime regard for convenience of operation and the best
usage of the wall space for this and other purposes rather than string the devices out along
the wall so as to coincide with the scaled locations of the symbols. In locating the outlets,
follow the criteria provided on detail drawings where provided, and co-ordinate with furniture.
Submittal of detail drawings is required for this purpose before execution. Do not scale from
design drawings.
1.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. AVAILABILITY: confirm availability of equipment and materials proposed for use in the work
prior to submission for approval. If, after approval, equipment or materials cease to be
available, submit alternative items of equal quality and type for approval.
B. ACCEPTANCE BY AUTHORITY: confirm that proposed equipment and material
characteristics where required are compatible with the requirements of the Local Power
Authority or other authorities having jurisdiction and are acceptable to them. Inform the
Engineer of any modifications necessary to comply with the specifications.
C. MANUFACTURERS' STANDARDS: equipment is to be the latest standard product of the

manufacturer. Component parts are to be the product of a single manufacturer, unless
otherwise approved and provided that components made by other manufacturers are of a
standard design and are interchangeable.
D. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS (Only western European, Japanese and North American

are approved): listing of approved manufacturers does not necessarily constitute approval of
their standard products as equal to those specified. As certain that listed manufacturers are
able to supply equipment and material in conformity with the Specification.
E. FACTORY ASSEMBLY: equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory assembled

units ready for installation on site. Disassembly necessary for transportation or other
purposes is to be arranged to limit site work to simple reassembly and inter-wiring of control
and power cabling.

Neom community
F. STORAGE OF MATERIALS: equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved

location, under cover, free from humidity, dust, debris and rodents. Equipment sensitive to
heat and humidity is to be kept in climatically conditioned areas until installed and handed
over.
G. DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT: the Employer reserves the right to operate operable defective
equipment during the Defects Liability Period until it can be removed from service for repair
or replacement.
H. WARRANTY: where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

manufacturer (including his agreement to replace promptly, defective equipment or parts
thereof, as instructed by the Engineer) covering materials and workmanship for the period
stated in the Specification, starting at substantial completion. The Contractor is to assign the
benefits of such warranty to the Employer.
I. SPARE PARTS: not later than the date of substantial completion, provide spare parts required
by the Specification, together with suitable means of identifying, storing and securing same.
J. TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS: not later than the date of substantial completion, provide sets
of tools and instruments required by the Specification, together with suitable means of
identifying, storing and securing same.
K. LABEL AND IDENTIFY all equipment, instruments, controls and electrical devices etc. to
indicate duty service or function, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Labels are to be anodized
aluminum discs with black surface and white core with incised lettering in English or Arabic
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Alternative methods of labeling may be submitted for
approval. Fix labels with non-corrodible screws to equipment, or to adjacent permanent
surfaces or as approved by the Engineer.
L. EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES are to be non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and

firmly fixed to equipment at factory. Nameplates are to indicate name and address of
manufacturer, model, serial number, basic characteristics and ratings of equipment and are
to include elementary diagrams etc., all in accordance with the Standards.
M. FIREPROOFING: Where cables, cable trays or conduits pass through floors and fire rated
walls, pack space between wiring and sleeve full with materials and seal with approved
caulking compound.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Approval of submittal: Approval of a submittal does not relieve the contractor from the
specifications and contractual obligations. Each submittal should show a schedule of
compliance sheet, addressing each point mentioned in the specifications and/or in the
BOQ, these points should be numbered and each number should be highlighted with the
relative number on the original certified catalogue. Any deviation or omission from the
specifications shall be clearly stated in a compliance sheet.
B. Coordination: Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related

construction activities to avoid delay, and allow for 2 weeks’ time for review. C. Submit
all required data in 4 copies minimum.
D. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal (including
shop drawing) for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each
submittal on the label or title block.
1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action
taken:

Neom community
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Reference number for the submittal with revision number if the same submittal
has been submitted before.
d. Name and address of the Architect.
e. Name and address of the Contractor.
f. Name and address of the subcontractor.
g. Name and address of the supplier.
h. Name of the manufacturer.
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
E. Product Data: Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of
construction or system. Product Data includes printed information, such as
manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing in
diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.
1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data
includes information on several products that are not required, mark copies to indicate
the applicable information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Type of usage and location.
c. Reference number in contract documents (Specifications, drawings)
d. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
e. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
f. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
g. Notation of coordination requirements.
2. Provide complete original catalogues of product when relevant or when requested.

3. Include Installation and Operation manual with each applicable submittal.
F. SAMPLES: Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and
physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections
of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets,
and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
G. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Include Operation and Maintenance manual for each
equipment. Identify each equipment and include the local supplier’s name and full address,
the manufacturer’s manual, in addition to recommended spare parts.
H. Organize the Operation and Maintenance Manuals by system and sub-system. Describe for
the whole system and each sub-system separately, the proper normal operation, shut down,
access, routine preventive maintenance and describe intervention needed in case of failure.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or

otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract
Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard
information prepared without specific reference to the Project will be rejected.
B. Submit Builder’s Work drawings showing Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate
penetrations in floors, walls, and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and
installations.
C. Shop drawings shall be prepared electronically editable on AutoCAD similar to the edition of
the original drawing. Layers, sizes and all other drawing requirements shall be followed as

Neom community
per instructions of the Architect/Engineer. These shall be made and presented to suit for the
elaboration of composite drawings.
D. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules,
patterns, templates and similar Drawings. Include information as required by individual
sections, in addition to the following information:
a. Dimensions, distances, invert levels, operating clearances, location of access
required.
b. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.
c. Accessories, connections to other services, electrical connections, etc.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full-size Drawings, submit
general layouts on 1/50 scale, and details on 1/20.
f. Submittal: Submit 4 blue- or black-line prints for the Architect's/Engineer review.
The Architect/Engineer will return one print.
g. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action
taken.
h. Submit electronic copy after approval of drawing.
E. Shop drawings are to be checked thoroughly and coordinated to avoid interference

with structural elements, finishing requirements and the work of other trades.
F. Shop drawings and redesign shall be prepared electronically editable on AutoCAD

similar to the edition of the original drawing. Layers, sizes and all other drawing
requirements shall be followed as per instructions of the Architect/Engineer. These
shall be made and presented to suit for the elaboration of composite drawings. Shop
drawings and redesign should be done even if changes on Architectural drawings are
important and even if redesign of some parts of the areas is requested.
1.9 COORDINATED COMPOSITE DRAWINGS
A. Participate in site meetings to coordinate shop drawings between all construction

trades.
B. Submit coordinated composite drawings showing interference of all trades on one

sheet, including composite sections and elevations.
C. Submit Composite drawings showing reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate
installation of air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communication system components,
sprinklers, drainage pipes, water supply and other ceiling-mounted items
1.10 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A. As-Built Drawings: On completion of the works of each area, system or floor, submit
four sets of prints of each applicable drawing for the mechanical and plumbing
installation, showing the exact position of all apparatus, plant, duct and pipe work runs,
valve positions, grille and diffuser locations, etc. with all appropriate labeling to the
Architect/Engineer's requirements. All as-built drawings must conform in all respects
to the pattern of the Contract Drawings, and to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.
B. As-Built drawings shall be submitted directly after approval of the installation, and prior
to testing and commissioning. A draft copy shall be submitted before closing shafts,
ceiling or any obstructing element.

Neom community
C. The words "As Built Drawing" shall be clearly indicated on all drawings adjacent to the
title cover. As-built drawings will be subject to Architect/Engineer approval. Contractor
to submit hard copies and also soft copies of all as built drawings on CD ROMS to the
Architect/ Engineer after the approval of the as built drawings.
1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A. Before Final Handing over submit a draft copy of a complete Operation and
Maintenance manual that include:
1. A documentation Directory
2. Emergency information
3. Operating manual
4. Maintenance Manual
5. Test reports
6. As built drawings
B. Documentation directory: Submit an index of all O&M documents in a well-organized manner

identified to ease the access of information and reflecting the hierarchy of the project: System,
sub-system, Equipment, component.
C. Emergency information: a document that should be readily available for emergency situation
that include, for each system, information needed for type of emergency, with the notification
activity and the responsibility of the personnel.
D. Operating manual: A document that contains all information needed for day-to-day operation
and management of the building systems. Two parts required: one intended for the building
manager focused on the systems and one for the building operators focused on the technical
information of the equipment, with the normal operation, access and shut down of equipment.
E. Maintenance Manual: In addition to manufacturer supplied maintenance manuals, provide for

each equipment:
1. Description of equipment
2. Recommended maintenance procedures and their frequency.
3. Recommended list of spare parts with their number and reference.
4. Original purchase order number, supplier’s name, address and phone number.
5. Intervention needed in case of failure and Installation information.
F. Testing reports: Include test results from the testing and commissioning process.
G. Construction documents include AS-built drawings, specifications, approved submittals,

schedule of equipment, warranty certificates, …
1.12 GENERAL SUBMISSIONS
A. GENERALLY: submit for approval, manufacturers' technical literature, shop and construction
drawings and other information required by the Specification, before ordering equipment or
materials and before executing any related work on site.
B. TECHNICAL LITERATURE is to include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original

catalogues or catalogue cuts, characteristics, model number, application and operating
criteria of all equipment and materials, together with other information necessary to satisfy
the Engineer that proposed equipment and systems are suitable and adequate.
C. LIST OF PROPOSED MANUFACTURERS of all equipment and materials, including all items
for which choice of manufacturer is at the discretion of the Contractor, is to be submitted for
approval.

Neom community
D. TEST CERTIFICATES AND REPORTS: where required by the Specification, submit

manufacturer's type and routine test certificates and reports for equipment and devices.
Complete test results are to be submitted in clearly identified and organized booklets,
indicating item of equipment, make, model, type, date of tests, type of tests, descriptions and
procedures.
E. LABORATORY TESTS: if manufacturer's test certificates are

considered unsatisfactory, then independent laboratory tests are to be carried out on
equipment in accordance with the Specification and the Standards, as required by the
Engineer.
F. SPARE PARTS SCHEDULES: submit with the Tender itemized schedules of spare parts
to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state against each item the
manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
G. TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS SCHEDULES: submit with the Tender itemized schedules
of tools and instruments to be provided, as required by the Specification, and state
against each item the manufacturer's unit price including packaging and delivery to site.
H. LABELLING SCHEDULE: submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all

equipment and devices to be labeled and the suggested details, lettering, position and
fixing methods of each label indicating its application.
I. SAMPLES: submit samples of all equipment and materials for approval. Major items of
equipment for which samples cannot be submitted are to be demonstrated in existing
installations or by manufacturer's information, test certificates and reports.
PART 2 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
2.1 REQUIREMENTS
A. CONSTRUCTION: electronic components of communication systems, security systems and

special systems and electronic components forming part of the power generation and
distribution system are to be solid-state integrated construction, unless otherwise approved.

Neom community
B. TEMPERATURE LIMITS: manufacturer is to indicate maximum and minimum ambient

temperatures acceptable for the equipment to operate continuously and normally and beyond
which electronic components may suffer permanent damage.
C. ALTERNATIVE ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT may be submitted for approval, provided such

equipment meets or exceeds the functional capabilities and/or performance parameters of
the equipment specified. Proposals for alternative equipment will be considered only if
accompanied by the following information: 1. List of operational characteristics and
performance parameters.
2. List of differences in operation and performance between proposed and specified
equipment.
3. List of changes required and resulting implications.
4. Drawings indicating changes required to system wiring.
5. Statement of advantages of proposed equipment over that specified.
D. PROTECTION: solid state equipment under normal conditions of operation is to withstand

any surges which might be produced by sudden mains or standby power switching
operations. Protective devices are to be provided to protect against surges, failure of output
stages due to open circuit, short-circuit or impedance mis-match. In the absence of IEC or
BS standards comply with IEEE standard 472 (ANSI/IEEE C37.90 "Guide for Surge
Withstand Capability Tests". System/equipment which may be adversely affected by short
duration power blackouts shall be capable of riding through such a disturbance by having an
internal battery back-up to the memory / microprocessor, etc.
E. INDICATOR LIGHTS shall be Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).
F. ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAYS and control/small power transformers are to be designed to

withstand the 500 V a.c. test voltage between winding and winding or winding and core.
G. DUST COVERS, easily removable for inspection and servicing, are to be provided for all
relays and sensitive elements.
H. OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT, electronic or other, is to be designed for maximum ambient

temperature or direct sun and is to be protected/enclosed, as applicable, against dust and
weather conditions.
I. EXTERNAL INTERFERENCE: carry out field investigations and tests to determine possible
interference from outside sources. Design electronic equipment to ensure trouble-free
operation.
J. SEGREGATION OF WIRING: design wiring so that low current circuits are

Segregated from power wiring, using different conduits and wire ways for the purpose.
Composite wiring is acceptable for the same system in accordance with the relevant codes.
Cable insulation is to be same grade for all conductors in a common enclosure.
K. POWER SUPPLY UNITS for low current systems which are fed from the LV supply are to be
independently fused on the live conductor and are to have front panel mains indicator light,
on/off switch and standard cartridge type fuse holder. Blown fuse indicator lamp is to be
provided when fuse does not have an indicator.
PART 3 - TESTS ON SITE, RECORDS, TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE
3.1 TESTS ON SITE
A. GENERALLY: carry out inspection and acceptance tests on site on each complete system,
before final placement into service, in accordance with the Regulations and Standards, as
described in the Specification and required by the Engineer.

Neom community
B. TEST SCHEDULES AND PROCEDURES are to be submitted for approval and are to include
details of testing equipment to be provided.
C. WITNESSING: inspection and acceptance tests are to be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer and, when required, by an authorized representative of the Local Power Authority.
D. VISUAL INSPECTION: visually check proper installation, connections and nameplate data
before testing.
E. INSULATION RESISTANCE: test the feeders and busducts, lighting and power circuits,
motors and other power equipment of low voltage installations with a megger of not less than
500 V D.C for installations rated up to 500 V (R.M.S value of A.C supply) and 1000 V D.C for
installations rated above 500 V up to 1000 V, and as required by the particular Section of the
Specification.
F. INSULATION RESISTANCE: unless otherwise specified or approved, test the circuit

insulation resistance related to communications and security systems with a megger of not
less than 500 V operating voltage, with equipment disconnected. G. CONTINUITY: test all
feeders and circuits for continuity.
H. OPERATIONAL TESTS: carry out operational tests on all equipment and complete systems
to verify proper performance in compliance with the Specification. Tests are to be carried out
under normal operating conditions for not less than 3 days, and as required by the Engineer.
I. SPECIFIC TESTS: carry out specific tests required by the Specification and any other tests
required by the Engineer to verify compliance of the installations with the Specification.
J. LOAD BALANCE: upon completion of the building and immediately prior to final inspection
and take-over, check load balance on all feeders and at distribution centers, panels, etc.
Conduct tests by turning on all possible loads in the building and checking the load current
balance. If load unbalance exceeds 15%, rearrange and reconnect circuits to balance the
load after Engineer's approval.
K. VOLTAGE CHECKS: perform voltage checks throughout the building and if directed by the
Engineer, adjust the transformer tap settings where a transformer is provided on the supply
end, or report to power authority for adjustment necessary.
L. CURRENT CHECKS: In cooperation with the mechanical sub-contractor, take clip-on

ammeter readings on all phases of all mechanical equipment motors with motors operating
under full load conditions. Test readings shall be submitted to the Consultant.
3.2 RECORDS
A. GENERALLY: not later than the date of substantial completion, provide the Engineer with
four copies of all approved as-installed drawings, test records, manufacturers' guarantees
and warranties, operating and maintenance manuals and other records required by the
Specification.
B. PRESENTATION OF RECORDS is to be in A4 size plastic covered, loose-leaf ring

binders or other approved binders with hard covers, each indexed, divided and
appropriately cover titled. Drawings larger than A4 size are to be folded in the binders so
that they may be unfolded without being detached.
C. AS-INSTALLED DRAWINGS are to contain the complete assembled information included

on the construction drawings, prepared in the same manner, and up-dated to indicate the
systems, labeling, referencing, mounting methods, routing etc. as installed. Submit

Neom community
complete drawings for approval. Provide the Engineer with one set of transparencies in
addition to the four copies required.
D. TESTING COMMISSIONING: Include test results from the testing and commissioning
process. Tests for all and each of the equipment and accessories should be done in
presence of the manufacturer representative, the commissioning to be done by a
specialized team with the knowhow of similar jobs. Schedules to be performed for each
type of equipment and accessories showing that performances during the test, meets the
expected and specified one
E. TEST RECORDS are to include test certificates of type tests, routine tests, site tests,
commissioning and performance tests and all other tests on equipment and installations
described in the Specification and required by the Engineer. Information is to include test
procedures and results, conditions under which tests were carried out including set points,
temperatures and the like, dates, location and attendance by authorized representatives
etc.
F. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS are to contain the following:

1. Technical description of each system and item of equipment installed, written to
ensure that the Employer's staff fully understand the scope and facilities provided.
2. Diagrammatic drawings of each system indicating principle components and items
of equipment.
3. Schedules (system by system) of equipment installed giving manufacturer,
catalogue list numbers, model, rating, capacity and operating characteristics; each
item is to have a unique code and number, cross- referenced to the diagrammatic
drawings and layout drawings.
4. Name, address, telephone, telex and fax numbers of the manufacturer of every item
of equipment.
5. Name, address, telephone and telex numbers of equipment agents/representatives
for emergency services and procedures.
6. Manufacturer's service manual for each major item of equipment, assembled
specifically for the project, including detailed drawings, illustrations, circuit details,
operating and maintenance instructions, modes of operation, control provisions,
sequences and interlocks and preventative maintenance program.
7. Schedules of all fixed and variable equipment settings established during
commissioning.
8. Procedures for fault finding, where applicable.
9. Manufacturers' lists of recommended spare parts for items subject to wear and
deterioration, giving expected running period and indicating specifically those items
which may involve extended deliveries.
G. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: prepare two temporary copies with provisional
record drawings and preliminary performance data and make available at time of testing and
commencement of commissioning to enable the Employer's staff to familiarise themselves with
the installations. Temporary copies are to be in the same format as the final manuals with
temporary insertions for items which cannot be finalised until installations are commissioned and
performance tested.
3.3 TRAINING
A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING: before the date of substantial completion, explain
and demonstrate to the Employer's maintenance staff the purpose, function and operation of the
installations including all items and procedures listed in the operating and maintenance manuals.
Include for not less than thirty days for this purpose.

Neom community
3.4 MAINTENANCE
A. MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS: where required by the Specification, submit supplementary

proposals for annual maintenance contracts. The proposals are to:
1. Include for maintaining the installations in efficient working order including routine and
emergency service checks, adjustments, lubrication and the supply and replacement of
damaged parts etc.
2. Set out the terms of the offer, the work to be carried out, the guarantees of performance
and the price of the work or part thereof for the first twelve months after substantial
completion.
The proposals will not be considered as part of the Tender.

Neom community
SECTION 16060 – EARTHING SYSTEM
Electrical Work Generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of Section 16010 of the
Specifications.
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A complete equipotential earthing system installation that provides a properly sized earth
connection to every source of energy. The system also provides protective earthing and
equipotential bonding to all building elements and systems to eliminate electrical hazards
based on the TN-S earthing system arrangement. The earthing system includes but not
limited to the connection of the following:
A. Electrical Power sources earthing systems (transformers and generators neutrals).
B. Main earthing system including but not limited to earth electrodes.
C. Main earthing terminals or bars.
D. Transformers’ rooms earthing terminals.
E. Emergency generators’ room earthing terminals.
F. Mechanical plant rooms earthing terminals.
G. UPS rooms earthing terminals.
H. Low current rooms earthing terminals.
I. Exposed conductive parts of electrical equipment.
J. Extraneous conductive parts.
1.2 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS:
Carry out work in accordance with the following:

A. IEC publications 364-3 and 364-4 Electrical installations in Buildings.
B. Latest edition of NFC 15-100 Regulations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS:
Definitions of terms used on the Drawings and in the Specification are as follows:
A. EARTH: conductive mass of the Earth whose electric potential at any point is conventionally
taken as zero.
B. EARTH ELECTRODE: conductor or group of conductors in initial contact with, and providing
electrical connection to, Earth.
C. EXPOSED CONDUCTIVE PART: any part which can be readily touched and which is not a
live part, but which may become live under fault conditions.
D. EXTRANEOUS CONDUCTIVE PART: any conductive part not forming part of the electrical
installation such as structural metalwork of a building, metallic gas pipes, water pipes,
heating tubes etc. And non-electrical apparatus electrically connected to them i.e. radiators,
cooking ranges and metal sinks etc. And non-insulating floors and walls.
E. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR:
Conductor used for some measure of protection against electric shock and intended for
connecting together any of the followings parts:
1. Exposed conductive parts.
2. Extraneous conductive parts.
Section 16060 Page 1 of 8

Neom community
3. Earth electrode (s).

4. Main earthing terminal or bar (s).
5. Earthed point of the source (s).
F. ELECTRICALLY INDEPENDENT EARTH ELECTRODES:
Earth electrodes located at such distance from one another that maximum current likely to
flow through one of them does not significantly affect the potential of the other (s). These
apply to earth electrodes for electrical installation grounding, functional earth electrode and
lightning protection earth electrodes.
G. MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL OR BAR:
The terminal or bar provided for the connection of protective conductors, including
equipotential bonding and functional earthing conductors if any to the means of earthing.
H. EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING:
Electrical connection to put exposed and extraneous conductive parts at a substantially
equal potential
I. EARTHING CONDUCTOR:
Protective conductor connecting main earthing terminal or bar of an installation to earth
electrode or to other means of earthing.
1.4 EQUIPMENT DATA:
Prior to ordering materials, submit data for approval including, but not limited to,
manufacturer’s catalogues for earth rods, connecting clamps, earthing conductors,
protective conductors, bonding conductors, connectors and other accessories, exothermic
welding kits and tools etc., and samples of samples conductors as requested.
1.5 SHOP AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS:
Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connection.
2. Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross-section, depth of
laying and covering.
3. Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors
4. Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generators room, switchgear,
distribution panelboards etc., indicating fittings used, insulation, plates and marking,
passage and routing of earthing conductors, conduit, sleeves, grooves, niches etc.,
giving sizes and dimensions of component parts.
1.6 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: obtain materials from one of the following:

1. Erico – Cadweld (USA)
2. Copperweld (U.S.A.)
3. Furse (UK)
4. G.E.C. (UK)
5. Kingsmill (UK) Or other equal and approved.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS EARTHING SYSTEM (TYPE TN-S)

A. COMPONENT PARTS of earthing system are to include the following:
1. Earth electrodes (rods, tapes, etc…)
2. Main earthing terminals or bars.

3. Earthing conductors.
4. Protective conductors.
5. Equipotential bonding conductors.
6. Functional earth electrode, for electronic equipment (if required on drawings).
7. Earth electrodes for the lightning protection system (if required on drawings).
8. Accessories and termination fittings, bonding, welding kits and other materials.
B. EARTH ELECTRODE is to consist of one or more earth rods, interconnected by buried
earthing tape or cable, which is to have a total combined resistance value, during any season
of the year and before interconnection to other earthed systems or earthing means, not
exceeding 3 ohms (or less if required by local regulations) otherwise use additional earth
rods. Distance between two rods is not to be less than twice the length of one rod driven
depth. Alternatively, a bare copper conductor of section not less than 70mm2 (or as indicated
on drawings, whichever is greater) can be installed in a ring configuration (grounding loop),
in the natural soil, not less than 0.8 meters below that natural soil’s surface. The required
resistance of the grounding loop shall be as indicated for earth rods system. Earth rods and
grounding loop can be used in conjunction if required.
C. FUNCTIONAL EARTH ELECTRODE (if required on drawings) is to be provided separately
from, but interconnected to general bus collecting all the earth conductors in the building and
to other earth electrode(s) through a transient earth clamp. Functional earth electrodes are to
be used for earthing electronic equipment (communication equipment, digital processors,
computers etc.) as required by the particular Section of the Specification and
recommendation of manufacturer. The required resistance of the functional earth electrode
shall be as indicated for other earth electrodes systems above.
D. ALTERNATIVE EARTH ELECTRODE: other types of earth electrode may be used, after
written approval and if not in contradiction with the local codes, including:
1. Cast iron pipes with special surround material
2. Copper plate (s)
3. Tape mats (strips)
E. MAIN EARTHING BAR is to be provided at point of service entrance or main distribution
room, and as described in the Specifications or shown on Drawings, to which all earthing
conductors, protective conductors and bonding conductors are to be connected. Two
insulated main earthing conductors are to be provided, one at each end of the bar, connected
via testing joints to the earth electrode at two separate earth pits. Conductor is to be sized to
carry maximum earth fault current of system at point of application with final conductor
temperature not exceeding 160°C for at least 5 seconds. Main earthing conductors are to be
minimum 70 mm2 bare copper conductors.
F. TESTING JOINTS (TEST LINKS) are to be provided, in an accessible position, on each main
earthing conductor, between earthing terminal or bar earth electrode. A bus system shall allow
the disconnection of the lightning earth cable from the other earth cable in order to provide a
separate test for each earth.

Neom community
G. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS are to be separate for each circuit. Where protective

conductor is common to several circuits, cross-sectional area of protective conductor is to be
the largest of the conductor sizes. Unless otherwise mentioned the selection of sizes is to be
in accordance with IEC 364 or NFC 15-100 (whichever is greater).
H. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS are not to be formed by conduit, trunking, ducting or the like.
Where armored cable is specified and armor is steel, it may be used as a protective
conductor, if approved and if not otherwise shown on the Drawings.
I. CONTINUITY OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS: series connection of protective conductor
from one piece of equipment to another is not permitted. Extraneous and exposed conductive
parts of equipment are not to be used as protective conductors, but are to be connected by
bolted clamp type connectors and/ or brazing to continuous protective conductors which are
to be insulated by molded materials.
J. EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE: for final circuits supplying socket outlets, earth fault
impedance at every socket outlet is to be such that disconnection of protective device on
overcurrent occurs within 0.4 seconds, and for final circuits supplying only fixed equipment,
earth fault loop impedance at every point of utilization is to be such that disconnection occurs
within 5 seconds. Use appropriate tables and present same approval by the Engineer.
K. SUPPLEMENTARY EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING: all extraneous conductive parts of the
building such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, other service pipes and ducting, metallic
conduit and raceways, cable trays and cable armour are to be connected to nearest earthing
terminals by equipotential bonding conductors. Cross-section of protective bonding conductor
is not to be less than half of the protective conductor connected to respective earthing
terminal, and minimum 4 mm 2.
L. MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING: main incoming and outgoing water pipes and any other
metallic service pipes are to be connected by main equipotential bonding conductors to main
earth terminal or bar. Bonding connections are to be as short as practicable between point of
entry/exit of services and main earthing bar. Where meters are installed, bonding is to be
made on the premises side of the meter. Cross-sections of conductors are not to be less than
half of the earthing conductors connected thereto, and minimum 6 mm2.
M. IDENTIFICATION: connection of every earthing conductor to earthing electrode and every
bonding conductor to extraneous conducting parts is to be labeled in accordance with the
Regulations, as follows:
N. SAFETY ELECTRICAL CONNECTION- DO NOT REMOVE.
O. IDENTIFICATION: protective and earthing conductors are to be identified by combination of
green- and - yellow colors of insulation or by painting bar conductors with these colors, as
approved.
P. IDENTIFICATION: source earthing conductor is to be identified along its entire length by
continuous green/yellow insulation labeled ‘earthing’.
2.2 EARTHING OF MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS, PANELBOARDS,

LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS AND WIRING ACCESSORIES
A. MAIN EARTHING BAR is to be provided in location mentioned on drawings and connected
to earth network by insulated conductor (size as mentioned on drawings) via testing joints.
B. EARTHING BARS OF GENERATORS (chassis of generators and common/neutral point)
AND ELECTRICAL ROOM to be connected by insulated earthing conductor, directly to main
earthing bar. Common point / neutrals of generators and MV/LV transformers shall be
connected by insulated earthing conductors to their respective earth electrode earthing bar
which is connected to the main earthing bar (as per TN-S earthing system requirements).
C. DISTRIBUTION, LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS are to be connected by
protective conductors run together with incoming feeder cable, connecting earth terminals in
panelboards with respective main building earthing bar.

Neom community
D. SOCKET OUTLETS are to be earthed by protective conductor looped around with the branch
circuit and connected to earth terminal within socket outlet box and to which socket outlet
terminal is to be connected.
E. LIGHTING FIXTURES AND OTHER EXPOSED CONDUCTIVE PARTS of electrical
installations, such as switches, heaters, air conditioning units etc. are to be connected by
protective earth conductors to earthing terminals of respective panelboards.
2.5 MECHANICAL PLANT ROOMS AND FIXED MACHINERY

A. MAIN EARTHING BAR OR LOOP is to be conveniently located in mechanical plant rooms,
and connected by earthing conductors to exposed conductive parts of motor control center at
its earthing bar, and to motors, switches and other electrical equipment etc… at their earthing
terminals, using 20 x 2mm bare copper strips or 35 mm 2 bare copper conductor (minimum
size) or as required on drawings to carry maximum earth fault current for 1 second with final
conductor temperature not exceeding 200°C. Conductors are to be securely fixed, recessed
in floor grooves or niches, or fixed to walls by appropriate staples. Earth bar or loop is to be
securely fixed to building wall with copper or brass saddles.
B. MAIN EARTHING BAR OR LOOP is to be connected at two extremely separate points
to earth network, directly through two test joints by insulated earthing conductors, or
connected to main earth bar by protective conductors.
C. MOTOR AND OTHER EQUIPMENT EARTH TERMINALS are to be connected also by
protective earth conductors of each branch circuit to earth terminal/ bar at motor control
center, panel or distribution unit.
2.6 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. EARTH ROD: copper clad steel, 20 mm diameter, 2.4 m length (in soil, to be extended as
required to reach earth pit at finished floor level), extendible as necessary (minimum 2) to
obtain required earth resistance. Earth rod is to be complete with couplings, head and bolted
connector of sufficient size, and number of bolted clamps to connect all cables terminated
thereto.
B. BURIED EARTH CONDUCTORS: annealed copper conductors 70mm2 cross-section (as

indicated on drawings, whichever is greater).
C. TAPS MATS: where earth rods are not likely to be used, earth electrode is to consist of
parallel and perpendicular copper strip, 2.4 m apart, welded together by exothermic welds
to form a grid. Tape is to be 25x25 mm strip conductor.
D. EARTH PIT: pre-cast, square or circular section concrete hand-hole (minimum 450 mm
internal diameter), with concrete cover, and extending to about 150 mm below top of earth
rod. Earth pit is to be provided for each earth rod where connected to an earthing conductor.
Cover is to have inset brass plate with inscription ‘Earth pit-Do Not Remove.
E. EARTHING CONDUCTORS: insulated (green/yellow) or bare copper conductor as
described in the Specification for the particular application.
F. TESTING JOINTS (TEST LINKS): copper or copper alloy, with bolted end connections,
disconnectable by use of a tool, and suitably sized for earthing conductors or earth bar
connection. Links are to be fixed to porcelain or other approved insulating supports. Contact
surfaces are to be tinned.
G. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS: single core stranded annealed copper, PVC insulated
cables, having rated insulation grade compatible with circuit protected, or to be a conductor
forming parts of a multi-core cable, color coded.
H. MAIN EARTHING BAR: hard drawn copper, 125x10 mm (Height x Width) where formed into
a closed loop, and 150x10 mm (Height x Width) where open ended. Earth bar is to be
labeled Main Earth Bar and is to be drilled, for connection of conductors, at a spacing not

Neom community
less than 75 mm, and is to be supplied with copper alloy bolts, nuts and washers and wall
mounting insulators.
I. PROTECTIVE BONDING CONDUCTORS: bare copper strip conductor, annealed stranded
copper cable or flexible strap (flexible braid) of cross- sectional area as described in sub-
section 1 hereof.
J. EARTHING ACCESSORIES: copper or copper alloy, purpose made, of approved design,
compatible with points of connection, and of adequate cross- section and current carrying
capacity. Connectors and clamps are to be bolted type. Bolts, nuts and washers are to be
high quality phosphor bronze or copper silicon alloys.
PART 3 - FIELD AND INSTALLATION WORK
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. CONTINUITY: ensure that complete earthing system is electrically continuous and
mechanically secure.

Neom community
B. EARTH RODS: while implementing earth rods, ensure that resistance areas associated with
individual rods do not overlap. Earth rods are to be located at a distance greater than 800
mm from foundations of buildings. Where rocks are encountered, a hole of sufficient size is
to be drilled before lowering the rod. Conductive filler such as Marconite or Bentonite or equal
filler that will not corrode is to be provided around the rod.
C. BURIED EARTHING CONDUCTORS are to be laid at a depth not less than 0.8 m (1 meter if
a grounding loop or ring earth electrode is used) from ground surface.
D. EARTHING CONDUCTORS are to be following shortest path between earth rods and main
earthing terminals or bars, and are to run in PVC conduit (duct) fastened to building structure
by approved supports and extending 0.2 m above level, and are to be protected against
mechanical damage and corrosion.
E. PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS: separate protective conductors, which are not part of a cable,
are to be fixed on same support or drawn into same conduit as circuit conductors.
F. PROTECTIVE BONDING: remove any non-conductive paint, enamel or similar coating at
threads, contact points and surfaces and ensure that bonding is made by fittings designed to
make secure bonds.
G. PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION: protect bolted connections against corrosion either
by filling with Vaseline or coating with a special anti-corrosion compound and proper capping.
H. CONNECTIONS: earth connections are to be readily accessible. If inaccessible earth
connection is permitted, approved exothermic welding or brazing technique is to be
employed.
I. CONNECTIONS: where earth connections between dissimilar metals must be made, use
bimetallic fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous paint or
compound, or by wrapping with protective tape to exclude moisture.
J. Waterproofing integrity restoration (to the satisfaction of the architect and the waterproofing
specialist) affected by the works described above (including earthing, grounding and lightning
protection earth electrodes, down conductors, bonding conductors….etc) shall be provided.
3.2 TESTS ON SITE AND RECORDS

A. COMBINED RESISTANCE of earth electrodes is to be measured during dry season and
checked against specified resistance.
B. ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY of all earthing and protective conductors including main
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked.
C. EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE of all circuits is to be measured and checked against
calculated impedance figures.
D. OPERATION of residual current protective devices is to be checked.
E. RECORDS: submit the following:
1. Scaled drawings, as-installed, showing actual layout and specification of all
components of earthing system
2. Nature of soil and any special earth arrangements etc.
3. Date and particulars of soil conditioning method and agents if used
4. Test conditions and results obtained.

Neom community

Neom community
SECTION 16075 – IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements
in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes and standards. Use
consistent designations throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
Section 16075 Page 1/7

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length
of color field for each raceway and cable size.
B. Color for Printed Legend:

1. Power Circuits: Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable.
C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of
legend label.
D. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves,

with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place
by gripping action.
E. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic

sleeves, 50 mm (2 inches) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable
it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 50 mm (2

inches) wide; compounded for outdoor use.
2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION

MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 0.08 mm
thick by 25 to 50 mm wide.
B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.35-mm thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for
permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50 by 50 by 1.3 mm with stamped legend, punched for
use with self-locking nylon tie fastener.
E. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.38 mm thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and
polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2.3 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Description: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, polyethylene tape.

1. Not less than 150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line.

Neom community
2.4 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 & 101
B. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted,

celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 1-mm galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend,
and size required for application. 6.4-mm grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size,
250 by 360 mm.
C. Warning label and sign shall include in English and arabic, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 915 MM." CAUTION!!!BURIED
ELECTRICAL CABLE BELOW
2.5 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1.6 mm thick for signs up to. 129 sq.
cm and 3.2 mm thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with [black letters on white face]
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm. Overlay shall provide
a weatherproof and ultraviolet-resistant seal for label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting.
White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be
25 mm.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1. Minimum Width: 5 mm.
2. Tensile Strength: 22.6 kg, minimum.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.
4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.
B. Paint: Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting
Sections.
1. Exterior Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
1) Primer: Exterior concrete and masonry primer.

Neom community
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.

2. Exterior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss acrylic enamel.
3. Exterior Ferrous Metal:
a. Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer:
Exterior ferrous-metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
4. Exterior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
Exterior zinc-coated metal primer.
2) Finish Coats: Exterior semigloss alkyd enamel.
5. Interior Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry):
Interior concrete and masonry primer.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss alkyd enamel.
6. Interior Concrete Unit Masonry:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler.
1) Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler.
2) Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
7. Interior Gypsum Board:
a. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. 1) Primer:
Interior gypsum board primer.
8. Interior Ferrous Metal:
Interior ferrous-metal primer.
9. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal (except Raceways):
Interior zinc-coated metal primer.
C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Raceways and Duct Banks More Than 600 V Concealed within Buildings: 100-mm wide black
stripes on 250-mm centers over orange background that extends full length of raceway or
duct and is 300 mm wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED HIGH VOLTAGE
WIRING" in English and Arabic, with 75-mm high black letters on 500-mm centers. Stop
stripes at legends. Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 300 mm of a floor that
is in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed
in the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables More Than 600 V: Identify with "DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE" in English and Arabic, in black letters at least 50 mm high, with snap-
around labels. Repeat legend at 3-m maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and
Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange snap-around label.
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with
color-coded, [self-adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands],[snap-around, color coding bands]:
1. Fire Alarm System: Red.
2. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.
3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue.
4. Security System: Blue and yellow.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow.
7. Control Wiring: Green and red.
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors 50mm 2 and
larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use metal tags. Identify
source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify
phase in addition to the above.
F. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three
branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use metal tags. Identify each ungrounded
conductor according to source and circuit number.
G. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source
and circuit number.
H. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals,
and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system
used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground-line
warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway.

Neom community
J. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply
with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self-adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with
black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment
including, but not limited to, the following: a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise
indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar
equipment in finished spaces.
K. Instruction Signs:
1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment
operation.
2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red
background with minimum 10-mm high letters for emergency instructions at equipment
used for power transfer and load shedding.
L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is
provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless
otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 13-mm high letters on 38-
mm high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 50 mm high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate
for viewing from the floor.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
c. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Transformers.
e. Electrical substations.
f. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
g. Motor-control centers.
h. Disconnect switches.
i. Enclosed circuit breakers.
j. Motor starters.
k. Push-button stations.
l. Power transfer equipment.
m. Contactors.
n. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
o. Battery inverter units.
p. Battery racks.
q. Power-generating units.
r. Voice and data cable terminal equipment.
s. Master clock and program equipment.
t. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations.
u. Television/audio components, racks, and controls.
v. Fire-alarm control panel and annunciators.
w. Security and intrusion-detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and
racks.
x. Monitoring and control equipment.
y. Uninterruptible power supply equipment.

Neom community
z. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for
signal and control functions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach no adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate
to the location and substrate.
F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall
completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact,
side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-
foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in
congested areas.
G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for
ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.
1. Color shall be factory applied.
2. Colors for 230/400-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Brown.
b. Phase B: Black.
c. Phase C: Grey.
d. Neutral: Light Blue.
e. Ground (PE): Green-Yellow.
3. Alternative colors for 230/400-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Red.
b. Phase B: Yellow.
c. Phase C: Blue.
d. Neutral: Grey.
e. Ground (PE): Green-Yellow
4. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum
distance of 150 mm from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate
bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
H. Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and
accessibility.
I. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 150 to 200 mm below finished grade.
Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete
envelope exceeds 400 mm (16 inches) overall.
J. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 9 painting
Sections.

Neom community
SECTION 16111– CABLE TRAYS AND LADDER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes mild steel cable trays and ladders with related accessories.
B. Cable trays and ladders systems are defined to include, but not limited to trays straight
sections, covers for cable trays (if required), bends, tees, elbows, drop-outs, supports and
accessories.
C. Related specifications sections to include, but not limited to, the followings:
1. Division 7: Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems” for firestopping materials
and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings and other fire rated elements.
2. Division 16: Section “Basic Electrical Requirements”: for trays supports not specified in
this section.
3. Division 16: Section “Raceways, Boxes and fittings”: Conduits, fittings and boxes for
raceway systems.
4. Division 16: Section “Wires, Cables and related accessories”: Cables and conductors.
5. Division 16: Section 16060 – Earthing System
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer documents including, but not limited to, data on trays
material types, finishes, fittings, technical characteristics, test certificates, etc...
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of tray.

1. Show fabrication and installation details of cable tray, including plans, elevations, and
sections of components and attachments to other construction elements. Designate
components and accessories, including, but not limited to, clamps, brackets, hanger
rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths, and fittings.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and sections, drawn to scale. Include scaled cable trays
and ladders layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural, electrical,
and mechanical elements. Show the following:
1. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions.
2. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays.
3. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cable trays and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire suppression system, and partition assemblies.

Neom community
B. The drawings indicate the general routing of the cable tray systems. Data presented on
drawings are as accurate as preliminary planning can determine until final equipment
selection is made. Field verification is required.
C. Specifications and drawings are for assistance and guidance, but exact routing, locations,
distance, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. Contractor must make field
surveys as part of his work prior to submitting system layout drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cable tray components through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in IEC EN
61537, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with:
1. IEC 61537 standard for installation, load testing and classification
Specifications;
2. DIN 4102-12 standard for fire testing certification;
3. Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) recommendations;
4. EN ISO 1461 standard for cable trays hot dip galvanized after fabrication;
5. ISO 9001 certification for Quality Control / Quality Assurance (QA / QC)
6. SBC (Saudi building code);
D. Do not install damaged equipment.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cable trays shall be stored indoors to prevent water or other foreign materials from staining
or adhering to cable tray.
B. Cable trays shall be loosely stacked, elevated off the ground, and ventilated to prevent
staining during storage.
1.7 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:
1. OBO Betterman (Germany).
2. Tolmega (France)
3. Cablofil (France) for basket
type cable trays.
4. Vergokan (Belgium)
5. Legrand (France)
6. MK (UK).
7. Defem (Sweden)
Or other equal and approved.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE TRAYS
A. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1. Cable Trays shall be manufactured from mild steel of a minimum thickness of

1.5mm. they shall be light or heavy duty type, perforated or blind, with or without
cover as required with return flanges, and hot-dip galvanized finish. Bends,
corners, etc..., shall be specially manufactured for the purpose.
2. Perforated type, made of carbon steel sheet grade DC01 Am as per EN 10130
and EN 10131 standards, having a U-profile section with (360°) safety shaped
rolled flanges and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication (perforation and bending)
as per above mentioned EN ISO 1461 standard.
3. Zinc coating thickness shall be according to above mentioned EN ISO 1461

standard specifications. Cable trays shall be of appropriate design and thickness
to provide a high mechanical strength enabling to withstand a total weight of
(main, secondary or terminal) cables of up to 90 kg/m according to the distance
between supports. The perforation must allow continuous aeration of the cables
laid on, providing a minimum opened area of 15% as per IEC 61537 class
designation “C” (perforated type) or of 30% as per IEC 61537 class designation
“D” (basket type). Flange height shall not be less than 48 mm unless otherwise
indicated and shall be not less than 72mm where cables exceed 45mm as
overall diameter.
4. Sizes and Configurations: Refer to the design drawings for specific requirements
for types, materials, sizes, and configurations.
2.2 CABLE LADDERS
A. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1. Cable ladders shall be manufactured from mild steel, with hot-dip galvanized finish.
Bends, corners, elbows, offset reducers, etc... , as well accessories shall be
furnished as to function, and to the manufacturer’ standards.
2.3 CABLE BASKET
A. APPLICATION
1. Suitable for indoor installation to support, store, and manage low current and electrical
cables, either overhead, under raised floor or mounted vertically on a wall.
B. MATERIALS AND FINISHES
1. Description: Cable basket shall be made of high strength steel wires and formed into a
mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. Wire ends along sides (flanges)
shall be rounded during manufacturing for safety of cables and installers. Straight section
longitudinal wires shall be straight with no bends.

Neom community
2. Basket type used and installed in servers and control rooms, above false ceiling or under
raised floor. Basket trays shall have safety flange and adapted diameter of wires to
optimize load admissibility for safe cabling installation, and shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication (welding and bending) as per above mentioned EN ISO 1461 standard.
2.4 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES
A. Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, of same materials
and finishes as cable tray.
B. Covers: Solid type of same materials and finishes as cable tray.
C. Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as cable tray.
D. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by

cable tray manufacturer.
2.5 WARNING SIGNS
A. Lettering: 40-mm high, black letters on yellow background with legend in English and arabic
"WARNING! NOT TO BE USED AS WALKWAY, LADDER, OR SUPPORT FOR
LADDERS OR PERSONNEL."
B. Materials and fastening are specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions at the job site where electrical work is to be performed to insure proper
arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine the Contract Drawings and specification in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.
B. Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.
C. Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage
items.
3.3 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with recommendations in IEC EN 61537. Install as a complete system,

including all necessary fasteners, hold-down clips, splice-plate support systems,
barrier strips, hinged horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers, tees, and
crosses.
B. Cable trays shall be installed in a way enabling easy withdraw, installation and
attachment of cables. Coordination shall be ensured to prevent that other networks,
such as ducts or pipes, make difficult the access to the cable tray.
C. Pressurized water and waste water pipes shall be installed under the cable trays.
Exceptional crossing with pipes over the trays could be tolerated. Moreover, cable
trays shall not be installed parallel below conduits which may cause condensation,
unless if special arrangements have been made to protect the cables from
condensation. Cable trays shall be installed at a sufficient distance from heating pipes,
hot air ducts, and smoke exhaust pipes, to prevent the cables from being heated to a
detrimental temperature.
D. Remove burrs and sharp edges from trays.
E. Fasten trays supports to building structure.

1. Cable trays shall be supported by means of galvanized brackets. The width of
the brackets shall not be less than 4/5 of the supported cable trays width. The
distance between supports shall be chosen in order to minimize the sag in the
middle of each span resulting from the load of the laid cables, and to prevent
any permanent residual deformation.
2. Cable trays supporting brackets shall be mounted on galvanized channels, fixed

directly to walls, or suspended from the ceiling throughout pendants with base gussets.
Trays, brackets, and pendants elements shall be assembled using screws and nuts;
the use of pins is strictly prohibited.
3. The distance between supporting brackets shall not exceed:

a. 1.20 meters for cable trays supporting main cables
b. 1.50 meters for cable trays supporting secondary and terminal cables

Neom community
c. A calculation note for the main cable trays supports (including Seismic Restraint
Requirements) shall be submitted prior to installation.
4. The use of threaded rods supports shall be strictly limited to cases where reduced
volumes are available in the suspended ceilings voids due to the presence of air
conditioning ducts, concrete beams, or main plumbing pipes.
5. The connection between trays shall be made through L-shaped galvanized splice
plates, located at a distance from the tray bracket not exceeding 1/5 of the distance
between brackets.
6. Manufacture center-hung support, designed for 60 percent versus 40 percent eccentric

loading condition, with a safety factor of
F. Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to tray and to equipment.
Support cable tray and ladder independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of trays on
equipment enclosure.
G. Install expansion connectors where tray crosses building expansion joint and in cable tray
and ladder runs that exceed dimensions recommended in IEC EN 61537. Space connectors
and set gaps according to applicable standard.
H. Make changes in direction and elevation using standard fittings.
I. Make cable tray and ladder connections using standard fittings.
J. Cable trays are not to span any space unsupported. Do not support cable trays from ductwork.
K. Earth continuity shall be ensured all over the layout of the cable trays by 16mm² earth
continuity connectors. The cable trays shall be grounded at the panel board termination.
When a stripped copper earth cable is supported by the cable tray, it shall be suspended to
the cable tray edge with special hooks to prevent from galvanic couples between steel and
copper.
L. Seal penetrations through fire and smoke barriers according to Division 07 Section
"Penetration Firestopping."
M. Sleeves for Future Cables: Install capped sleeves for future cables through firestop-sealed
cable tray penetrations of fire and smoke barriers.
N. Workspace: Install cable trays with enough space to permit access for installing cables.
O. When cable trays cross walls or partitions, covers must be provided to protect the cables.
P. When cable trays cross slabs, a cover up to the height of 2 meters above the finished floor
level shall be provided.
Q. After installation of cable trays is completed, install warning signs in visible locations on or
near cable trays.
3.4 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Install cables only when cable tray and ladder installation has been completed and inspected.
B. Fasten cables installed on perforated trays and ladders with hot dip galvanized cast steel
clamps for cables sections equal or higher than and with cable ties for the lowest sections.
Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Install
cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.

Neom community
C. On vertical runs, fasten cables to tray every 500 mm. Install intermediate supports when cable
weight exceeds the load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
D. Where required or specified, install covers after installation of cable is completed.
E. Electrical and low current cables shall be installed on separate cable trays to avoid
interference.
F. Medium voltage cables shall be installed on covered cable trays.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, cable trays shall be sized for a single layer for main, secondary
and terminal cables, with 30% of spare capacity at the completion of the works.
H. According to fire protection standards, cables supplying safety loads shall be laid on separate
cable trays, routed as far as possible from the normal cable trays.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground cable trays and ladders according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor with cable tray and ladder, in addition to
those required by IEC 364.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized, survey for
compliance with requirements. Perform the following field quality-control survey:
1. Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners, protuberances in
cable tray and ladder, vibration, and thermal expansion and contraction conditions,
which may cause or have caused damage.
2. Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in tray do not exceed that permitted
by IEC 364.
3. Verify that there is no intrusion of such items as pipe, hangers, or other equipment that
could damage cables.
4. Remove deposits of dust, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and
any blockage of tray ventilation.
5. Visually inspect each tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical continuity.
Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and retorque in
suspect areas.
6. Check for missing or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found, replace with
specified hardware.
7. Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray and ladder
grounding; verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to tray.
B. Report results in writing.

Neom community
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed cable trays and ladders.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by cable tray
and ladder manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended
by cable tray and ladder manufacturer.
3. Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to protect exposed cables from
falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and trays
can be constructed of wood or metal materials until the risk of damage is over.

Neom community
SECTION 16118RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ELECTRICAL WORK GENERALLY: is to be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 16010 of the Specification.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: raceways including conduits, wireways and related installations and
accessories necessary to support and protect cables, feeders, branch circuit wiring and wiring
of low current systems, communications and signal cables.
1.3 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS: conduits, wireways, cables trays and fittings are to be
designed, constructed and installed to give safe installation and reliable mechanical
protection for wires and cables in accordance with the Regulations. Standards of products
are to be as specified. Local production is prohibited.
1.4 TECHNICAL DATA: submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
A. Manufacturer’s catalogues with specifications of raceways including conduits, trunking etc…

and related accessories.
B. Samples of each type of raceway and accessory.
1.5 SHOP AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: submit drawings for approval including, but not limited
to, the followings:
A. Exact routing of conduits, trunking etc. With indication of boxes, accessories and expansion
joints, size of conduits and boxes.
B. Typical assembly details of installation of trunking, trays etc…
C. Construction details of pull boxes.
D. Typical installation details including connection of conduits to metal enclosure. Connections

of flexible conduits, vapour- tight installations in cold rooms, liquid tight flexible metallic
outdoors etc. and earthing connections.
1.6 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS: obtain conduit, wireways and related accessories from one of
the following or other equal and approved:
A. UNIVOLT (Austria)
B. EGA Tubes (England)
C. DECODUCT (UAE)
D. ARNOULT (France)
E. AL ADASANI (Kuweit)

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS
2.1 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES
A. RIGID & FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (Local production is prohibited).
1. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: steel, cold rolled and annealed, non-threaded type,
formed from continuous length of helically wound and interlocked strip steel, with
fused zinc coating on inside and outside.
2. RIGID METAL CONDUIT: Black enameled or hot dipped galvanized, L= 3m,

screwed on both ends to applicable US or European Standards.
3. LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT: is to have PVC jacket extruded

over core.
4. FITTINGS GENERALLY: thread less, hinged clamp type, hot dipped galvanized or
cadmium plated malleable cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are to
be specially treated.
5. STRAIGHT CONNECTORS: one piece body, female type, hot dipped galvanized
or cadmium plated malleable cast iron. Fittings used in corrosive atmospheres are
to be specially treated.
6. ANGLE CONNECTORS: of 45 or 90 degree and terminal connectors are to be as

specified for straight connectors, except that body is to be two-piece with removable
upper section.
B. RIGID MEDIUM GAUGE PVC CONDUIT (Local production is prohibited).
1. MATERIAL: rigid un-plasticized, could form a bend with PVC accessories, polyvinyl
chloride with high impact and high temperature resistance, flame retardant, non
hygroscopic and non- porous, compressive strength 750 N, to CEE 26, EN 50086,
DIN 49026 or other equal and approved standards conforming to IEC 423.
2. FITTINGS GENERALLY: unbreakable, non-flammable, self-extinguishing, moulded

plastic.
3. ASSEMBLY: conduits, boxes and accessories are to be assembled by cementing,

using manufacturer’s recommended products and appropriate connectors or spouts
are available use smooth bore male PVC bushes and sockets.
C. FLEXIBLE MEDIUM GAUGE PVC CONDUIT (Local production is prohibited).
1. MATERIAL: flame retardant, heat resistant, non-hygroscopic PVC, high resistance to

impact, plain non corrugated construction.
3.1 CONDUIT AND WIREWAYS GENERALLY
A. USE: unless otherwise specifically indicated all light and power circuits, communications,
signal and low current systems wiring are to be drawn inside conduits or wireways up to
the various electric power consuming equipment as shown on the Drawings. Separate
conduit and wireways installations are to be used for LV cables/wires normal lighting and
power circuits, emergency lighting and power circuits and communication, signal and
other low current systems wiring.

Neom community
B. BOXES: junction, pull and splice boxes of ample capacity (with 30% spare at least) are to be
provided as indicated or required. Boxes are to remain permanently accessible. Minimum
outlet, junction or pull box depth to be 50mm clear. Boxes installed outdoors, unless fully
embedded shall be metallic and painted to prevent corrosion.
C. TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES: for forming and installing conduit and wireway systems are to
be purpose made for the particular application and used in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
D. FIXING: conduits and wireway installations are to be concealed as much as possible.
E. SIZES: Unless otherwise specified conduits and wireways sizes, not shown on the Drawings,
are to be selected in accordance with the tables on design drawings and in relation to the
number and size of conductors. Minimum size of conduit for all applications is to be 20 mm
diameter, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
F. MECHANICAL CONTINUITY: conduits and wireways are to be effectively joined together

(special cement) and connected to electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets (glands) to provide
firm mechanical assembly. Earthing jumpers are to be installed on steel conduits where
required to ensure effective electrical continuity irrespective of whether a protective earth
conductor is required or not.
3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY
A. RIGID MEDIUM GAUGE PVC CONDUIT: unless otherwise specified or mentioned on

drawings or contradictory to local codes; is to be used generally in underground, in screed, in
duct banks installation for lighting, power and light current circuits.
B. FLEXIBLE MEDIUM GAUGE PVC CONDUIT: is to be used for lighting, power and light
current circuits in under tiles and walls installation unless otherwise specified or mentioned
on the drawings.
C. RIGID LIGHT DUTY (EMT) STEEL CONDUIT: is to be used in technical plant rooms
(generator room, electrical rooms, low current rooms, mechanical plant rooms, fuel
rooms…etc) and unless embedded under 5cm of concrete, for security systems (access
control, CCTV) wiring including structured cabling connections.
D. RIGID INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMT): is to be used for all above ground
(unburied) outdoor installations, for all systems; unless embedded under 5cm of concrete. All
outdoor metallic conduits shall be painted to prevent corrosion.
E. FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUIT: is to be used for connection to motors, vibrating and non rigidly
fixed equipment and fixtures installed in false ceiling.
F. FLEXIBLE LIQUID-TIGHT STEEL CONDUIT: is to be used, in rooms subject to ingress and
at the outdoor spaces, for connection vibrating and non-rigidly fixed equipment, lighting
fixtures and where requested by IEC-364.
G. EXPOSURE TO DAMAGE: conduit considered being subject to undue risk of damage by

shock or corrosion is to be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
H. CROSSINGS: conduits are not to cross pipe shafts, vents or openings.
I. CLEARANCES: install conduits at least 100 mm clear of and preferably above pipes of other
non-electrical services.
J. SLEEVES: obtain approval for positioning sleeves where conduits pass through reinforced
concrete. Additional openings may be allowed in finished slabs but are to be drilled and not
broken. Fix sleeves rigidly to maintain position and alignment during construction work.

Neom community
K. EXPANSION FITTINGS: provide in each conduit run over 30 mm in length and at crossing of
expansion joint in structure.
L. WATERPROOF CONSTRUCTION: conduits are not to cross waterproof construction unless

permitted by the Engineer. Specially designed and approved fittings are to be used.
M. MAKE GOOD all holes for conduits passing through walls, floors and ceilings with cement or
similar fire-resisting material to full thickness.
N. BENDS: conduit runs between outlet, fitting and fitting or outlet and fitting are not to contain
more than the equivalent of 2 quarter bends (180 degree total).
O. BENDING is to be made without damaging conduit or tubing and without reducing internal
diameter. Methods of field bending are to be approved.
P. CUT ENDS are to be reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges.
Q. CONDUITS ENTERING COLD STORES are to be made vapor tight, so that vapor from
outside cannot enter conduit.
R. DRAINING: arrange conduits so that condensed moisture can drain to screwed plug at lowest
point.
S. BEFORE WIRING, conduits are to be swabbed through. Do not draw cables into any section
of system until conduit and draw boxes are fixed in position.
T. CAPPING: conduits are to be properly capped until wiring conductors are drawn in.
U. CONDUITS AND FITTINGS INSTALLED OUTDOORS are to be watertight and highly

resistant to corrosion. Use appropriate fittings, threaded and hubbed boxes, gaskets with
screw on covers and the like.
V. TERMINATIONS: do not terminate or fasten rigid conduits to motor frame or base.
W. LENGTH AND RADIUS OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT used for motors and vibrating equipment
is to permit bending of feeder cables without damage to conductor or insulation.
X. FLEXIBLE CONDUIT FOR SLIDE RAIL MOUNTED MOTOR is to have sufficient slack to
allow for movement of motor over entire slide rail length.
Y. PULLING WIRE: install 3 mm galvanized stranded steel wire or equivalent strength cord with
wooden blocks fastened at ends, in empty service conduits (power, low current and signal).
Z. STANDARD ELBOWS are to be used for conduit sizes equal or greater than 20mm.
AA. TAGS: fit to conduits entering or leaving floors, walls or ceilings for identification of conduit
and circuits. Tags are also to be placed at suitable intervals throughout the systems. Tags
shall be approved by the engineer and have their durability at least equal to those used for
power feeders.
3.3 PVC CONDUITS
A. COUPLING OF CONDUIT and/ or termination into spouted fittings is to be made watertight

and permanent using special cement.
B. TERMINATION: connect conduits terminating in switchgear, panel boards, trunking,

adaptable boxes or non-spouted enclosures etc, with smooth bore male PVC bushes and
sockets.

Neom community
C. ENDS OF CONDUIT end conduit fittings are to be cleaned and jointed using PVC cement
recommended by manufacturer.
D. SEMI-PERMANENT ADHESIVE: use in joints requiring expansion couplers.
3.4 EMBEDDED CONDUITS
A. CONDUITS IN CONCRETE SLABS: place conduits parallel to main reinforcing steel.
B. CONDUITS IN PARTITIONS OR SIDE WALLS: horizontal or cross runs are to be avoided.
C. PULL-BOXES are not to be used. If unavoidable, pull-boxes may be approved if located

inconspicuously.
D. CONDUITS IN FLOOR OF BEDS ON GRADE: encase in concrete, minimum thickness 50

mm or to thickness allowed by architectural detail.
E. PVC CONDUITS IN REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURES are generally to be installed

after placing reinforcement and before concreting, if protected against damage, or are to be
placed in grooves in formed in the concrete, if approved.
3.5 EXPOSED CONDUITS
A. CONDUITS ON WALLS: run neatly, horizontally or vertically.
B. SUPPORTS: use approved clamps, hangers or clips fastened by machine screws to

expansion sleeves in inserts or to lead anchors.
C. SPACING OF CLAMPS OR CLIPS for supporting steel conduits is not to be greater than:
Conduit Size mm (inches Maximum Spacing of Supports meters
20 (3/4) 1.0 m
25 (1) 1.0 m
32-38 (1-1/4-1-1/2) 1.25 m
D. SPACING OF CLAMPS OR CLIPS for supporting PVC conduits is not to be greater than.
Conduit Size Maximum Spacing of Supports

mm (inches) meters
20 (3/4) 0.50
25-50 (1-2) 0.50
63-75 (2-1/2-3) 0.75
E. BENDS AND FITTINGS: firmly fasten conduit at each side of bends and within 900 mm of
each outlet box, junction box, cabinet or fitting.
F. OUTLETS: do not run more than one conduit to any surface wall outlet. Install junction box
on home run near to ceiling level and tap-off vertical conduit to outlet box below.

Neom community
3.6 WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Components are to include wireway base, clip-on covers, couplings, end plates, wall flanges,
panel to trunking rubber grommets, elbows, tees, adaptor plates and necessary hangers,
supports and accessories.
B. Steel Trunking: To BS 4678 Part 1, galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.5 mm thick, protected
internally and externally with corrosion resistant finish such as zinc or cadmium with top coat
of enamel.
C. PVC Trunking: to BS 4678 Part 4, high impact, heavy duty, self-extinguishing, rigid PVC with
grooved double locking action of the clip-on cover. Design is to be approved by the Engineer
before ordering materials. Trunking is to be capable of receiving functional slot-in hangers
and demountable separators to segregate wiring systems as needed.
D. Sizes: As required to accommodate number of conductors permitted by the Regulations

and/or as shown on the Drawings.
3.7 WEATHERPROOF WIRING AND CABLE TRUNKING
A. Type: hot-dip galvanized sheet steel trunking of 1.5 mm thick (minimum) and cover, 1 mm
thick, to BS4678 Part 1 for trunking and BS729 & BSEN550 – 1461 for galvanizing. For
outdoor locations, cable trunking is to be painted to prevent corrosion.
B. Construction: Trunking is to have outwardly turned flanges to receive cover, and internal
sleeve coupling between sections, permitting cutting of trunking on site.
C. Gaskets: Neoprene bonded cork gaskets are to be fitted throughout, between any two
attached surfaces.
D. Screws: Removable flanged covers are to be secured with galvanized steel holding screws.

Neom community
SECTION 16120 - WIRES, CABLES AND RELATED ACCESSORIES.
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and all general Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for low voltage
electrical distribution systems.
1.3 STANDARD
A. LV single and three core cables, armoured or unarmoured, conforming to IEC EN 60502-1.
B. Single core LV wires, Cu/PVC to IEC EN 60227.
C. Fire resistant low smoke, flame retardant cables to IEC 331 & IEC 332-1.
D. Plain copper with concentric stranded conductors to IEC EN 60228.
E. Conductor screening conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
F. Cable insulating: conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
G. Insulation screening: conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
H. Armour: conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
I. Sheath: conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include electrical characteristics, dimensions, installation method, supports,
materials, firestops, and weatherstops for each cable.
B. Shop Drawings: Installation details of LV cables including plans, elevations, sections,
component details, and attachments to other construction elements. Detail connections to
switchboards and transformers. Detail supports and connections to building.
C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
D. Field quality control test reports.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to
conduct the cables testing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain cables and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in IEC
60502-1, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they
are constructed.

Neom community
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner
of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Contractor and manufacturer, agreeing to
replace any component of the LV cabling network that do not meet requirements or that fail
within the specified warranty period.
C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.

A. Bahra Cables (Saudi Arabia).
B. Saudi Cables (Saudi Arabia).
C. Riyadh Cables (Saudi Arabia).
D. Prysmian Cables (Italy).
E. Draka (UK, part of Prysmian Group) Accessories:
F. 3M (USA).
G. Legrand (France)
H. Wago (Germany).
Or other equal and approved

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SINGLE CORE WIRES (NYA) Cu/PVC TO IEC EN 60227
A. This specification covers single core, PVC insulated wires, intended for internal wiring in dry
locations, concealed in conduits.
B. Conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed plain copper with concentric stranded
conductors, to IEC EN 60228.
C. Minimum conductor size used shall not be less than 2.5 mm 2.
D. All wires for lighting and power systems pulled inside conduits shall be single core, insulated
with PVC compound, of grade not less than 300 / 500 volts, to IEC EN 60227.
2.2 MULTI CORE POWER CABLES Cu/PVC/PVC & Cu/XLPE/PVC TO IEC EN 60502-
1
A. Power cables shall be used for supply of power to main distribution boards, secondary
distribution boards, pumps, HVAC equipment and all external lighting and equipment.
B. This specification covers single, two, three or four core cables, PVC or XLPE insulated and
PVC sheathed, rated at 600V/1000 V unarmored and armored type.
C. Conductor shall be plain, annealed electrolytic copper, circular or sectorial stranded,

conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60228.
D. The insulation shall be PVC or XLPE based (as indicated on drawings) thermoplastic material
conforming to the applicable requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
E. The assembly shall consist of insulated conductors filled where necessary with non-
hygroscopic material and covered with an additional layer of extruded thermoplastic material
or non-hygroscopic binding tape.
F. The sheath shall be PVC based thermoplastic material, conforming to the applicable
requirements of IEC EN 60502-1.
2.3 FLEXIBLE CORDS
A. The flexible cords used for the connection of fixtures to circuit wiring shall have finely stranded
copper conductor with PVC insulation, type NYFAF, 500V grade.
B. Cords used for water heater connections shall be of high conductivity tinned copper wires, (4
mm2 unless otherwise indicated) insulated with ethylene propylene rubber, three cores
twisted together, filled and sheathed with chlorosulphonated polyethylene (EPR CSP),
300/500 V rated, and shall withstand an operating temperature of 85°C.
C. Cords used for pendant lighting points and between 230 V / 12 V transformers to lighting
fixtures, shall be circular three core (1.5 mm2) silicon rubber insulated, glass fiber braided
300/500 V rated and shall withstand an operating temperature of 170°C.
D. Cords used for extract fans and fan coil units shall be of plain annealed copper conductor (2.5
mm2 unless otherwise indicated), PVC insulated, circular three cores twisted together, PVC
overall sheeted 300 / 500 V rated and shall withstand an operating temperature of 70°C.

Neom community
2.4 CONTROL CABLES
A. Control cables where used underground direct burial shall comprise stranded annealed
copper conductor of minimum 2.5 mm 2 cross-section insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl
chloride, nylon sheathed with a tape binder applied over the assembly, overall PVC jacketed
Control cables shall comply with IEC EN 60502-1.
B. Number of conductors shall be equal to the maximum number of functions plus 20% spare.
C. Cable shall be 600 /1000V insulated and sheathed grade.
D. Junction boxes shall include all necessary terminal connector boards with proper labels.
E. Contractor shall make sure that the cross-sectional areas of the conductors are sufficient to
cater for the voltage drop due to the long runs involved.
F. Control cables where used in ducts underground or in conduits above ground shall comprise
stranded annealed copper conductor of minimum 1.5 mm 2 cross-section for cables in ducts
and 0.75 mm2 for cables in conduits insulated with high dielectric polyvinyl chloride, and PVC
sheathed. Control cables shall comply with IEC EN 60502-1.
2.5 FIRE RESISTANT CABLES
A. Description
a. Fire resistant cable 600/1000 Volts rated, for use where fire resistance, flame retardance
and low smoke and corrosive gas emission properties are required.
b. For power limited cables and emergency wiring terminal circuits, fire rated cables shall
be 300/500 V rated.
c. It shall provide uninterrupted power supply and preserve circuit integrity in the event of
fire.
d. “X” x CSA mm 2, plain or stranded Copper, Mica/Glass tape, cross-linked insulation and
LSOH sheath overall; rated 600/1000V.
B. Fire Resistance/Low Smoke
a. The cable shall meet the requirements of IEC331 and BS6387 for categories C, W and Z
(950°C for 3 hours, water spray test and mechanical shock test).
b. When the complete cable is tested in accordance with BS7622 Pt 2 (IEC1034-2) it shall
meet the minimum light transmittance requirements as stated in BS7622 Pt 2 (IEC 1034-
2).
c. When tested in accordance with BS6425 Pt 1 (IEC754-1), all non metallic components
shall give a level of HCI not greater than 0.5%.
C. Flame Retardance
The cable shall meet the requirements of BS4066 Pt 1 (IEC332 -1) and comply with BS6387
categories “Flame Retardant”.
D. Certification
The cable shall be certified by an approved authority to comply with the standards and
requirements listed herein.
E. Construction Conductors

Neom community
1.0 mm2 to 630mm2. Plain copper stranded circular conductor complying with BS6360 Class
2.
F. Insulation
Mica/Glass Fire Resistant tape, covered by an extruded cross-linked insulation, complying
with BS7655 type GP8 or type GP6, operating temperature 90°C. The crosslinked insulation
shall prevent thermoplastic flow and give high short circuit withstand ratings.
G. Core identification
Cores shall be identified as follows:

Single core black or red 2 core black,
red
3 core red, yellow, blue.
4 core red, yellow, blue, black.
7+ core white with black printed numbers.
Sheath
Abrasion resistant extruded LSOH sheath complying with BS7655 type LTS4.
Sheath color Orange.
Sheath Marking
Marked as follows:
Fire Rated Cable LSOH “X” x CSA ELECTRIC CABLE 600/1000V
H. Installation
Cables should be installed in accordance with the appropriate regulations including IEC 364,
IEE Wiring Regulations or any other national regulations.
Range and Availability
Single core 1.0 - 630mm2 2 core 1.0 -
300mm2
3 core 1.0 - 300mm2
4 core 1.0 - 300mm2
7, 12, 19, 27 & 37 core 1.0 - 2.5mm2
Temperature Limits
The cables shall be suitable for operation in the range of -25°C to +90°C.
I. Quality Assurance
The cables shall be manufactured under a strict Quality Management System that is certified
to meet the requirements of ISO 9001.
N.B.:
Unless otherwise mentioned on the drawings or in the specification, all equipment dedicated
for life safety such as , fire pumps, fire fighting systems, voice evacuation systems, fire alarm
and detection system, emergency lighting and emergency motors/pumps shall be wiring
using fire rated cables.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRES & CABLES
A. All wires shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the approved codes
and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. The number of wires and sizes of conduits indicated on the Drawings is a guide only and are
not necessarily the correct number and sizes necessary for actual equipment installed. The
Contractor shall install as many wires and conduits as required and necessary for a complete
electrical system, and shall provide adequately for the equipment actually to be installed.

Neom community
C. Where more than one conductor is used per phase, each phase, neutral if any and ground
wires shall be run in each metallic or non-metallic conduit.
D. Conductors shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and no splices shall be made except
within outlet or junction boxes.
E. At every outlet and pull box, wires and cables passing through shall be left slack by an amount
equivalent to 20 cm of cable length to allow inspection and connection to be made therein.
F. No cable bend shall have a radius of less than eight times its diameter.
G. The Contractor shall not change any circuit number, especially from a phase to a different
phase. If such a change is necessary due to modification on site, the Contractor shall bring
this matter to the attention of the engineer.
H. All conductors to be contained within a single conduit shall be drawn in at the same time.
I. A wire pulling compound shall be applied to conductors being drawn through conduit. Pulling
compound shall be soap tone or other approved material.
J. Wires and cables for feeders, sub-feeders, control, and branch circuit wiring shall be color
coded as per IEC regulations.
K. Wire and cable sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings; however in no case shall their
size be smaller than required by the approved Code.
L. Unless otherwise indicated, no conductor for lighting and power wires shall be smaller than
2.5 mm2.
M. All branch circuits for internal lighting and appliances shall be single conductor cables run
inside conduits, unless otherwise indicated.
N. Feeder and sub-feeders shall be multi-conductor cables run exposed on cable trays or in
underground ducts as shown on the Drawings.
O. Single cables unless otherwise specified and shown on drawings, could be fixed directly to
walls or ceilings. Where 2 or more cables are run in parallel, they shall be fixed on hot dip
galvanized steel perforated trays or other approved special cable supporting and protecting
arrangement.
P. Cables shall be fixed to supporting structures with approved hot dip galvanized cast steel
clamps at distances not exceeding 20 diameters.
Q. No joints or splices shall be accepted on main feeders.
3.2 FIRE STOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Division 07 Section "Penetration
Firestopping."
3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF WIRES & CABLES
A. Identification scheme shall be as required by IEC Standards as a minimum.

Neom community
B. Individual conductor or circuit identification shall be carried throughout, with circuit numbers
or other identification clearly installed on terminal boards and printed on directory cards in
distribution cabinets and panel boards.
C. In junction boxes, cabinets, and terminal boxes where the total number of control, indicating,
and metering wires is three or fewer and no terminal board is provided, each wire including
all power wires, shall be properly identified by means of a plastic, wire marker.
D. Wires including motor leads and other power wires too large for connection to the terminal
boards shall be identified by wire markers as specified above.
E. In manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, junction boxes and at both terminals each cable shall
be properly identified by a plastic tag located so as to be easily seen. Wires and cables shall
be identified by cable number indicated on the Drawings.
3.4 CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 35 mm 2 and smaller such as for lighting,
branch circuits etc…, self insulated pressure cage clamp type connectors shall be utilized for
all splices or joints. Where flexible cables (NYFAF) are used from ceiling outlet box to
recessed lighting fixtures, 3M caps shall be utilized.
B. For the wiring of circuits consisting of wire sizes 50 mm 2 and larger, connectors shall be of
the bolted pressure type, with a pre-insulated sleeve shall be used.
C. Connectors shall be manufactured from high conductivity electrolytic copper with soft tin-lead
plating (Sn60Pb40).
D. Connector bodies shall be manufactured from Polyamide (Nylon 6.6).
3.5 CABLE GLANDS
A. Cable glands shall be provided at the termination of all cables at the enclosure of a distribution
board or any other equipment.
B. Cable glands shall be indoor or outdoor type, ordinary or weatherproof according to the
location of the termination and the installation standard and to the approval of the Engineer.
A. Cables tests are to be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the Regulations and
Standards.
B. Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the field tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
C. Test Equipment: Provide megger testers of various ranges as applicable. Use 500 V megger
on installations with nominal voltage up to 500 V, and 1000 V megger on installations with
nominal voltage over 500 V up to 1000 V.
D. Insulation resistance for LV power and lighting installations is to be carried out in accordance
with IEE Regulations 73-5 through 713-8 and 713-04
E. Insulation resistance for control and signal cables is to be minimum 10000 MegohmKm for
PE insulated cables and 100 Megohm-Km for PVC insulated cables, all measured core-core
and core-earth, in accordance with the Regulations.

Neom community
F. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to
determine insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.
G. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuit.
H. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then
retest to demonstrate compliance.

Neom community
SECTION 16121 — CONTROL/SIGNAL TRANSMISSION MEDIA
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of control and signal transmission media:
1. Coaxial cable.
2. Twisted-pair cable.
3. Multiconductor control cable.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for building wire used for
control or signal circuits.
2. Division 16 Section "Wires and Cables" for building wire used for control or signal
circuits.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For control/signal transmission media.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transmission media certifying that the
products furnished comply with requirements and that they have been coordinated with and
accepted by manufacturer of connected equipment.
C. Samples of each of the following cable types for approval:
1. Coaxial cable (1 for each type).
2. Twisted pair cable (1 for each type).
3. Multiconductor cable (1 for each type).
D. Maintenance Data: For transmission media to include in the maintenance manuals specified.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain all cable of each type through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As
defined in CENELEC, IEC and or BS.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications.
C. Comply with IEC.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with and obtain review of cable characteristics and certification for use with the
connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRONIC CABLE
A. Single-Conductor Coaxial: 75-ohm characteristic impedance, solid polyethylene core, 97

percent coverage, copper-braid shield, polyethylene jacket; complying with MIL-C17, Type
RG-6A/U or RG-11 or ½ inch as indicated on drawings.
B. Multiconductor Cable: Quantity of conductors indicated; 1mm tinned-copper conductors;

color-coded, low-loss PVC insulation; aluminum/Mylar shield; No. 22 AWG tinned-copper
drain wire; PVC jacket.
C. Twisted Pair: Quantity of twisted pairs indicated; 23 AWG, 0.55mm tinned-copper conductors;
color-coded, PVC insulation; overall aluminum/polyester shield (shielding where applicable);
0.5mm tinned-copper drain wire; PVC jacket.

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and other elements to receive cables for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of transmission media. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cable as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install transmission media without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.

1. Do not bend cable, in handling or installation, to smaller radii than minimum
C. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.

1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.
2. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not
deteriorate conductor or insulation.
3. Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips
that will not damage media or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
F. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with cable material.

1. Make no splices except at indicated splice points.
G. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 07 Section

"Firestopping."
H. Bond shields and drains conductors to ground at only one point in each circuit.
I. Connect components to wiring system and to ground as indicated and instructed by

manufacturer.
J. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
IEC standards.
K. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
L. Identify cables according to Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

Neom community
A. Copper Cable Testing Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test cable for continuity
and shorts. Use time-domain reflectometer with strip-chart recording capability and anomaly
resolution to within 12 inches (300 mm) in runs up to 1000 feet (300 m) in length. Test cable
segments for faulty connectors, splices, terminations, and the integrity of the cable and its
component parts.
B. Replace malfunctioning cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance.

Neom community
SECTION 16140 – WIRING DEVICES AND DISCONNECTS, DRY TYPE TRANFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL WORK GENERALLY is to be in accordance with the requirements of

Section 16010 of the Specification.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: wiring devices, lighting switches, socket outlets, cord outlets, automatic
and manual lighting control equipment, dimmers, outlet boxes and plates, disconnect
switches etc…
1.3 STANDARDS: components are to be standard manufactured items, uniform and modular,
complying with one set of approved Standards.
1.4 EQUIPMENT DATA: submit data for approval, including catalogues, detailed literature,
manufacturer’s name, catalogue number, rating, specification, overall dimensions and special
features, as applicable for each item.
to, the following:
A. Exact indication of position of each item and outlet box and fitting on layout drawings, with
box and equipment types and sizes.
B. Installation details of special items including LV transformers, isolating switches, fans etc…
C. Wiring diagrams of special items.
1.6 SAMPLES: submit samples of each type of device for approval, unless otherwise agreed in
writing by the Engineer.
1.7 SPARE PARTS:

A. provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for replacement and one year’s maintenance
including, but not limited to, the followings:
1. Wiring Devices Faceplates: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than two units of each type.
2. Lighting Switch: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than five units of each type.
3. Socket Outlet: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less
than five units of each type.
4. Lighting Contactor: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but
not less than one unit of each type.
5. Dry-type transformer: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but
6. Switch Disconnector: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but
7. Push-Button: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less
than five units of each type.
8. Manual Switch: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than five units of each type.

Neom community
9. Surface Mounted Outlet Boxes: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
1.8 WARRANTY
replace any wiring devices component that do not meet requirements or that fail within the
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 3 year from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCT AND SYSTEMS
2.1 FITTINGS
A. OUTLET BOXES AND PLATES GENERALLY
1. SURFACE OR RECESSED BOXES are to be suitable for type of related conduit or
cable system. Shapes and sizes of boxes are to be compatible standards as switches,
socket outlets and lighting fixtures selected and of various types and mounting methods
required.
2. UNUSED OPENINGS in outlet boxes are to be closed with knock-out closers
manufactured for the purpose.
3. BLANK PLATES: blank plates are to be installed on outlet boxes on which no apparatus
is installed or where apparatus installed does not have suitable cover for box. Blanks
plates for wall outlets are to be attached by a bridge with slots for horizontal and vertical
adjustment.
4. FLOOR OUTLETS AND PLATES are to be water-tight and impact resistant.
B. METALLIC OUTLET BOXES
1. RECESSED AND CONCEALED BOXES: galvanized pressed steel, with knock-
outs for easy field installation. Special boxes are to be punched as required on Site.
2. EXPOSED SURFACE MOUNTED BOXES: galvanized cast iron with threaded hubs.
3. OUTDOOR SURFACE OR RECESSED BOXES: galvanized cast iron with threaded
hubs and PVC gaskets to ensure water tightness and with stainless steel or non-
ferrous, corrosion resistant screws.
4. FLOOR BOXES: watertight, cast iron or cast metal alloy with corrosion resistant finish,
adjustable mounting, standard duty, round or square, factory drilled and tapped for
required conduit sizes, and with brass cover and flange with brushed finish free from
markings other than required for mounting screws.
5. FLAME- PROOF BOXES: malleable iron or cast iron, with gas threaded hubs, special
covers with silicon rubber gaskets, gas tight, and watertight. Boxes are to comply with
the Regulations for explosive areas.
6. MANUFACTURERS: obtain metallic outlet boxes from same manufacturer as conduit
or other approved, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. MOULDED PLASTIC OUTLET BOXES
1. TYPE: boxes and covers used with PVC conduit systems are to be heavy gauge
pressure moulded plastic, minimum 2 mm thick, self extinguishing, with softening point
not less than 85°C. Boxes are to have provision for securely terminating conduits and
are to be manufacturer’s standard for required application.
2. FITTINGS: boxes are to have brass inset threads to receive cover screws and for
mounting devices or accessories, push- fit brass earth terminals, and steel insert clips
to provide additional support for pendants or for heat conduction. Neoprene gaskets
are to be provided for weatherproof installations.
3. MANUFACTURERS: obtain moulded plastic outlet boxes from:
a. Legrand (France)
b. bTicino (Italy)
c. Merten (Germany)
d. Gira (Germany)
e. Berker (Germany)
D. PLATES AND CORD- OUTLETS

1. DESIGN: square, rectangular or round, designed to cover outlet box and to closely fit
electrical device, and with polished chromium plated recessed head fixing screws.
Combination plates are to be used for grouped outlets and devices.

Neom community
2. CORD EXTENSION PLATES are to have threaded cord grip bushings of same material
and finish as plates.
3. PLATES:
a. General Use (offices, associated corridors, entrances & similar): Heavy gauge,
break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color.
b. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress (electrical, mechanical, storage
rooms and similar): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, grey
color, IP56.
4. MANUFACTURERS: obtain plates and cords outlet boxes from:
a. Legrand (France)
b. bTicino (Italy)
c. Merten (Germany)
d. Gira (Germany)
e. Berker (Germany)
5. CABLE/ CORD OUTLET are to be used for up to 45 A, 250 V rating for connection of
power/ control cable of fixed appliances. Plate is to have threaded cord grip to anchor
cable securely to cover. Box is to include fixed terminal block and cable clamp for
termination of cable/cord within.
E. SWITCHES
1. GENERALLY: quick- make, quick- break type with silver alloy contacts in arc resisting
moulded base, with toggle, rocker or push- button as specified, for inductive or resistive
loads up to full rated capacity, and arranged for side and/or back connection.
2. TYPES: single, two- way or intermediate, single pole or double pole, as shown on the
Drawings.
3. GENERAL LIGHTING SWITCH: 10 A 250 V A.C, rocker operated, grid- switch with
plate, for indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated. The switches shall
be available in single or multi-gang, one-way, two-way and intermediate configurations.
a. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress (electrical, mechanical plant

rooms, outdoor, storage rooms and similar): Heavy gauge, break
resistant, pressure molded plastic, grey color, IP557
1) Manufacturers: Legrand Plexo or approved equal
b. All other spaces (offices, patient rooms, associated corridors, waiting rooms,
entrances & similar): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic,
white color (or other finish subject to Architect and Engineer approval)
1) Manufacturers:
a) bTicino Light Tech – Metallic finish
b) Legrand Arteor – Mirror White
c) Arnould (for floor mounted devices, IP44 –IK08)
d) Merten (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
e) Gira (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
f) Berker (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
4. PUSH BUTTON SWITCH: 10 A 250 V A.C, push-button operated, gridmounted with

plate, for indoor installations in general, unless otherwise indicated. The push-buttons
shall be available in single or multi-gang
a. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress (electrical, mechanical plant

rooms, outdoor, storage rooms and similar): Heavy gauge, break
resistant, pressure molded plastic, grey color, IP557

Neom community
1) Manufacturers: Legrand Plexo or approved equal
5. All other spaces (offices, patient rooms, associated corridors, waiting rooms, entrances
& similar): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color (or other
finish subject to Architect and Engineer approval) a. Manufacturers:
1) bTicino Light Tech – Metallic finish
2) Legrand Arteor – Mirror White
3) Arnould (for floor mounted devices, IP44 –IK08)
4) Merten (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
5) Gira (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
6) Berker (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
6. MANUAL SWITCH: 2 pole, for fractional single and three phase motors and appliances,
to interrupt motor and induction loads, rated 20 A at 415 VAC, toggle operated, with
positive and luminous indication of on/off position of contacts.
a. General Use (non decorated area): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure
molded plastic, white color.
b. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress: Heavy gauge, break resistant,
pressure molded plastic, grey color, IP56
c. Manufacturer (Back of the House): Merlin Gerin or other equal and approved.
Unless otherwise mentioned on the drawings, the one gang manual switches
(single phase) references shall be Merlin Gerin part Nos. 15006 + 13392; the
one gang manual switches (three pole) references shall be Merlin Gerin part
Nos. 15007 + 13392; the one gang manual switches (four pole) references shall
be Merlin Gerin part Nos. 15008 + 13392.
2.2 SOCKET OUTLETS

A. GENERALLY: to have injection moulded plastic base with self- adjusting, nonexpanding
contacts to prevent permanent distortion, arranged for side and/or back connection and with
screw terminals accepting at least three parallel branch- circuit wires.
B. TYPES: general-purpose socket outlets are to conform to German standard practice
concerning layout & rating).
C. DUPLEX SOCKETS are to be mounted in parallel under one common plate with break- off
feature for two-circuit connection.
D. WEATHERPROOF SOCKET OUTLETS are to be any of the types indicated, enclosed in
surface mounted cast metal box and with cover comprising spring- retained gasketted hinged
flap. Enclosure is to be predesigned box and cover for type of socket outlet specified.
E. GERMAN STANDARD SOCKET: single phase, three wires, for plug with round pins, with
grounding in accordance with German Standard practice and rated 16 A, 250 V
A.C. UPS sockets shall be by construction (color, engraving…etc) distinguishable from
standard supply sockets.
1. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress (electrical, mechanical plant rooms,
outdoor, storage rooms and similar): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded
plastic, grey color, IP557
a. Manufacturers: Legrand Plexo or approved equal
2. All other spaces (offices, patient rooms, associated corridors, waiting rooms, entrances &
similar): Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color (or other
finish subject to Architect and Engineer approval) a. Manufacturers:
1) bTicino Light Tech – Metallic finish
2) Legrand Arteor – Mirror White
3) Arnould (for floor mounted devices, IP44 –IK08)
4) Merten (approved equal to the above specified finishes)

Neom community
5) Gira (approved equal to the above specified finishes)

6) Berker (approved equal to the above specified finishes)
2.3 PLUGS
A. TYPE: compatible with type of socket outlet specified, break resistant, of impact resistant
moulded insulating material (separable construction), with solid brass pins and cord grip and
of shape providing easy hand- grip for removal.
B. QUANTITY: supply number equal to 20% of total number of each type of socket outlet
supplied.
2.4 SWITCH DISCONNECTOR (DISCONNECTING SWITCH)

A. RATING: 690 V, 2,3 or 4 pole, load break, short- circuit make, in accordance with IEC 947-3,
unless otherwise mentioned, utilization category 22 for heating and lighting loads, category
23 for motor circuits, and with ampere rating shown on the Drawings.
B. DESIGN: non-fusible, air-break switch disconnect, single throw, safety type, housed in
separate metallic enclosure with arc quenching devices on each pole.
C. OPERATING MECHANISM: quick-make, quick-break, independent of operator, with external
operating handle mechanically interlocked to prevent opening door unless switch is in open
position. Switch disconnect is to have provision for by-passing interlock. Position of handle is
to be positive and clearly indicated on cover.
D. ENCLOSURE: General purpose injected polycarbonate for indoor use IP42 (as a minimum
unless otherwise specified on drawings), robust thermoplastic enclosure, IP54, for indoor
areas subject to ingress (like technical rooms) and weather-proof type aluminium alloy
enclosure, IP65 and IK08, for outdoor locations, unless otherwise required or shown on
drawings. Locking of operating handle is to be possible in open and closed positions.
E. MANUFACTURERS: obtain switch disconnect from one of the following of the following or
other equal and approved:
a. Merlin Gerin (France)
b. Klockner Moeller (Germany)
c. ABB (Germany)
d. Katco (Italy)
e. Socomec (France)
f. Legrand (France)
2.5 SPECIAL DEVICES

A. LIGHTING CONTACTORS
1. TYPE: unless otherwise indicated single pole for single phase and neutral circuits, and
three pole for three phase circuits, mechanically held electrically operated or with local
built-in bypass for locking in OFF or ON positions, rated 500 V, of current ratings shown
on drawings and complying with IEC-1059 category AC7a.
2. CONTACTS: copper alloy, with silver cadmium alloy double break contacts designed
for switching inductive ballast loads and switching of tungsten lamp loads.
3. AUXILIARY CONTACTS: as required to provide specified interlocks and signals as
shown on the Drawings.
4. ENCLOSURE: unless forming part of system housed in sheet steel panel, contractor
is to be provided with IP 42 enclosure for indoor use or IP 65 enclosure for outdoor use
or locations subject to ingress (like technical rooms).
5. CONTROL: each contractor whether part of a system or separately enclosed is to have
on/off pilot lights and set of on/off/ automatic toggle switch mounted on cover.
B. CONTROL PANELS IN CONNECTION WITH AUTOMATION SYSTEMS

Neom community
1. GENERAL: control panels are to be of equivalent construction to panel boards with

respect to cabinet and interior standards of manufacture, and are to be surface
mounted with see- through door and lock.
2. CONSTRUCTION: non- standard modular, factory assembled cabinets, designed to
receive appropriate, relays transformers and the like as required in conformity with the
Drawings for operation of system locally and remotely from central control and
monitoring system console.
3. CONTROL: switching relays controlled remotely by the automation system are to be
provided with over- riding manual local individual controls. Appropriate interface
components are to be provided and coordinated with the system described.
4. RELAYS, SWITCHING COMPONENTS, PILOT LIGHTS,
CONTROL
TRANSFORMERS, FUSES ETC. are to be neatly arranged and mounted inside dust-
tight and, where necessary, watertight cabinets. Control and indication devices are to
be continuously visible and accessible for monitoring and control.
5. EQUIPMENT is to be electrically front shielded and enclosed by sheet metal barriers,
readily accessible and demountable. Wiring is to be neatly arranged, clipped and
terminated in pressure type terminals. Hardware is to be non- corroding and robust
material, approved by the Engineer.
6. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS are to have auxiliaries to enable connection to
automation system.
7. OVERCURRENT RELAY is to be provided with all other accessories. Upon detecting
fault on monitored control panel, corresponding bolt-on breaker unit is to trip, and fault
signal is to be sent to the automation system.
8. INSTRUMENT AND INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS are to be provided as required
and/or as indicated on the Drawings.
9. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: bar primary type to IEC 185 class 0.5 for metering.
Current rating is to be the next higher standard value above maximum demand load
current.
10. TEST BLOCKS AND PLUGS are to be provided for testing all instruments and
instrument transformers.
PART 3 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where indicated on the Electrical Drawings drytype
transformers as manufactured by Legrand or approved equal. Ratings shall be as indicated
on the electrical plans.
B. Transformers (except for earthing system change) shall have a 230 V primary and a 110 V,
48 V, 24 V, 12 V secondary. Transformers shall be supplied with 2-2 1/2% full capacity taps
above and 4-2 1/2% full capacity taps below primary voltage. Transformers shall comply with
comply with IEC 61558-2-4 & 6, EN 61131-2, EN 60204-1.
C. Transformers for converting from TN or TT to IT earthing system hall have a 230/400 V

primary and a 230/400 V secondary (1: 1 ratio). Those Transformers shall be isolating
transformers (with reinforced insulation between primary & secondary) and comply with IEC
61558-2, EN 61131-2, EN 60204-1.
D. Transformer coil must be vacuum impregnated with non-hygroscopic thermosetting varnish.
Each layer shall have end fillers or tie down to provide maximum mechanical strength. No
splicing acceptable.
E. Materials incorporated must have at least a minimum of one year of proven field usage,
accelerated laboratory tests not acceptable in lieu of this field usage.
F. Transformer coils shall have a final wrap of electrical insulating material designed to prevent
injury to the magnet wire. Transformers having coils with magnet wire visible will not be
acceptable.

Neom community
G. The core and coil unit shall be completely isolated from the enclosure by means of vibration
absorbing mounts. There shall be no metal to metal contact between the core and coil and
the enclosure.
H. Transformers shall be provided in a ventilated enclosure.
I. Transformers shall be suitable for wall mounting, except those for earthing system change
that shall be pad mounted.
J. The maximum top of case temperature, shall not exceed 35°C, above ambient. The entire
transformer enclosure shall by degreased, cleaned, phosphatized, primed and finished with
baked enamel. Air dry finishes will not be accepted as being equal.
K. The core and coils shall be visibly grounded to the frame of the transformer cubicle by means
of a flexible grounding strap of adequate size.
L. Sound levels shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer and substantiated by certified tests on
each unit furnished. The sound levels are not to exceed the following values: 0 to 9 dB (except
for transformers used for earthing system change).
M. Suppliers asking consideration as an approved equal shall submit full guaranteed
performance data on similar units in service for one more years.

Neom community
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. LOCATIONS: the Drawings generally show approximate locations of outlets and equipment.
Exact locations are to be determined from interior finishing and detail drawings. Any condition
that would place an outlet in an unsuitable location is to be referred to the Engineer. Locate
switches at strike sides of doors, whether shown on the Drawings or not. In locating outlets
allow for overhead pipes, ducts, variations in arrangement, thickness of finishing, window
trim, paneling and other architectural features.
B. MOUNTING HEIGHTS for outlet boxes and similar equipment are to be uniform within the
same or similar areas. Mounting is to be as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the
Engineer. Unless otherwise shown or instructed, mount lighting switches and socket outlets
generally at 1200 mm and 300 mm from finished floor level respectively. Mount switches with
long dimension vertical and operating handle, if of the toggle type, up when in the on position.
C. SINGLE POLE SWITCHES are to switch the phase wire. Do not run neutral wire through
switches having neutral shunt or bridge.
D. ADDITIONAL OUTLETS to those shown on the Drawings are to be provided as required by
equipment manufacturers for control or other wiring.
E. EXPOSED OUTLET BOXES: securely fasten to wall with machine screws to permanent
inserts or lead anchors.
F. RECESSED OUTLET BOXES: make neat openings, to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
allowing for thickness of finishing and use extension rings if required. Repair damaged
finishing to original condition before installation of fittings or plates.
G. APPEARANCE: install exposed boxes and plates plumb, square and parallel to finished wall
surface. Exposed plates covering recessed boxes are to rest neatly on wall surface without
gaps, and fully covering the box.
H. GROUPED OUTLETS: arrange neatly so that use of fittings is convenient and clear.
I. WATERPROOF AND EXPLOSION- PROOF FITTINGS: follow manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and connection to conduit system to fully achieve required degree of protection.
J. DAMAGED FITTINGS: reject damaged fittings or plates with damaged finish. Protect fittings
and plates against damage after installation and handed over.
K. CONNECTION OF APPLIANCE:
1. Where appliance is designed to adapt directly to outlet box, extend electrical wiring to
incoming terminals inside appliance.
2. Where appliance is not designed to adapt to outlet box, install connecting wiring in
flexible conduit firmly fixed to outlet box cover plate and to terminal box on appliance.
4.2 INSPECTION AND TEST ON SITE

A. VISUAL INSPECTION: fittings and equipment are to be inspected for fixing and workmanship.
B. MEGGER TESTS are to include switch and socket outlet tests together with insulation
resistance of wiring installations.
C. OPERATION: devices are to be tested for operation and are to perform as intended at full
load without any signs of heating.
D. EQUIPMENT is to be insulation tested and observed, under full- load for not less than 3
days operation, with respect to undue heating and performance in general.

Neom community
SECTION 16145 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, to be in accordance with the requirements of
section 16010 of the specification.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole
lighting relays and contactors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features, components, and ratings for lighting
control devices.
B. Samples: Occupancy sensors for color selection and evaluation of technical features.
C. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For lighting control devices to include in maintenance manuals.

A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total
responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components specified in this Section.
B. Comply with SEC, IEC, EN or BS standards.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of devices specified in this Section with systems and components specified
in other Sections to form an integrated system of compatible components. Match components
and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
1.6 SPARE PARTS

1. Occupancy Sensors: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but
not less than two units of each type.
2. Multi poles Contactors & Relays: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than two units of each type.
3. Time Switches: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than one units of each type.
4. Photoelectric Relay: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but
5. Programmable Control Relay: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type
installed but not less than one unit of each type.

Neom community
1.7 WARRANTY
replace any lighting control device or component that do not meet requirements or that fail
within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Retain above for nonproprietary or below for semiproprietary Specification. Refer to Division
1 Section "Materials and Equipment."
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Contactors and Relays:
a. Merlin Gerin.
b. Telemecanique.
c. Moeller.
d. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.
2. Time Switches:
a. Merlin Gerin.
b. Telemecanique.
c. Moeller.
d. Siemens.
e. Legrand.
f. Grasslin Controls Corp.
3. Photoelectric Relays:
a. Merlin Gerin.
b. Legrand.
c. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.
d. Grasslin Controls, Corp.
e. Honeywell Inc; Home & Building Controls.
f. Johnson Controls.
4. Occupancy Sensors:
a. WattStopper / Legrand
b. Honeywell, Inc.; Home and Building Controls.
c. In decorated areas, esthetics to be approved by the architect.
5. Programmable Control Relays:
a. Telemecanique.
b. Siemens.
c. Moeller.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICE REQUIREMENTS

A. Line-Voltage Surge Protection: Include in all 230 Volts (or less) solid-state equipment.
Comply with IEC or BS for each category.
2.2 TIME SWITCHES
A. Description: Solid-state programmable units with alphanumeric display complying with IEC or BS
standards.
1. Digital dial.
2. Two contacts (one NO and the other NC), rated 30 A at 220-V ac, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Two pilot-duty contacts (one NO and the other NC), rated 2 A at 220-V ac, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Seven-day program uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.
5. Skip-day mode.
6. Battery backup for 100 hours.
2.3 PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS

A. Description: Solid state, with one NO and one NC dry contacts rated to operate connected
relay or contactor coils or microprocessor input, and complying with IEC or BS standards.
Photo electric relays (Photosensors) connected to BMS system, shall communicate an
analogue value of the reading to the BMS for further processing. These shall be auto-
recalibrating to account for dust accumulation on the sensor.
B. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 0 to 3500 Fc (0 to 37 673 lx), with an adjustment for turn-
on/turn-off levels.
C. Time Delay: Prevents false operation.
D. Indoor Ceiling or Wall-Mounting Units: Adjustable for turn-on/turn-off levels, semiflush,
calibrated to detect adequacy of available daylight in perimeter locations, and arranged to
turn artificial illumination on and off to suit varying intensities of available daylight.
2.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Ceiling-Mounting Units: Unit receives 24-V DC power from a remote source or 230 V if
provided with a built-in power supply and on sensing occupancy, actuates (changes) the
positions of one NO and one NC dry contacts that provide signal input to a remote
microprocessor-based lighting control system, BMS system or directly energizes the
corresponding lighting fixtures (dry contacts shall be 16 Amps rated).
B. Switch-Box-Mounting Units: Unit receives power directly from switch leg of the 220V AC
circuit it controls and operates integral power switching contacts rated 220V AC, minimum.
C. Operation: Changes its dry contact state when room or covered area is occupied and off
when unoccupied, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Time Delay for Turning Lights Off: Adjustable over a range from 1 to 15 minutes,
minimum.
2. Manual Override Switch: Turns lights OFF or ON manually regardless of elapsed time
delay.
3. Ambient-Light-Level Control: Adjustable for setting a level of ambient illumination
above which sensor will not turn lights on when occupancy is sensed.
4. Isolated Relay Contact: Operates on detection of occupancy or vacancy, as indicated,
to activate an independent function.

Neom community
D. Auxiliary Power and Control Units: As follows:

1. Relays rated for a minimum of 20-A normal ballast load or 13-A tungsten filament or
high-inrush ballast load.
2. Sensor Power Supply: Rated to supply the number of connected sensors.
E. Dual-Technology Type: Uses a combination of passive-infrared and ultrasonic detection

methods to distinguish between occupied and unoccupied conditions for area covered.
Particular technology or combination of technologies that controls each function (on or off) is
selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.
2.5 MULTIPOLE CONTACTORS AND RELAYS

A. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, and complying with IEC or BS
standards.
1. Current Rating for Switching: BS or IEC listing or rating consistent with type of load
served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballasts with 15
percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
2. Control Coil Voltage: Match control power source.
3. Contactors shall have a built-in local by-pass for locking contactor in ON or OFF
positions.
2.6 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL RELAYS (other than KNX relays)

A. The programmable control relays shall consist of a universal logic module that integrates the
following:
1. Controls
2. An operating and display unit
3. Power supply
4. Interface for expansion modules
5. An interface for program modules and a PC cable
6. Ready–to–use basic functions that are often required in
a. Day–to–day operation, e.g. functions for on/off delays,
b. Current impulse relays and soft key.
7. Time switch
8. Binary markers
9. Inputs and outputs according to the device type
B. The programmable control relays shall provide the following:
1. Solutions for domestic and installation engineering (e.g. for external lighting, sun blinds,
shutters, shop window lighting etc…), switch cabinet engineering and mechanical and
apparatus engineering (e.g. for gate control systems, ventilation systems, or rain-water
pumps etc...).
2. The programmable control relays shall be able to be implemented for special control
systems in conservatories or greenhouses, for control signal processing.
3. The programmable control relays shall be equipped with an expansion interface that
allows at least 30 ready to use basic and special functions for creating programs.
4. Each programmable control relay shall include two expansion interfaces for connecting
additional modules.
5. The programmable control relays shall be available in different main and expansion
modules that offer structures and precise adaptation to the specific tasks.
6. Every basic main programmable control relays unit shall be able to be expanded with
expansion modules of the same voltage class. Mechanical encoding (pin in the
housing) shall prevent interconnection of devices of different voltage classes.

Neom community
A Technical Data
A.1 General Technical Data
Criterion Complies with Values
Main Programmable Control Relay:
Installation on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths or wall
mounting
Programmable Control Relay Expansion module:
Installation on a 35 mm profile rail
4 module widths or wall
mounting
Climatic environmental conditions
Ambient temperature Cold: 0 ... 55 °C
Horizontal installation IEC 60068-2-1 Heat:
0 ... 55 °C
Vertical installation IEC 60068-2-2
Relative humidity IEC 60068-2-30 From 10 to 85 %

no condensation
Mechanical environmental conditions
Type of protection IEC 60529 IP20
Vibrations: IEC 60068-2-6 5 ... 9 Hz (constant amplitude 3.5
mm) 9 ... 150 Hz (constant
acceleration 1 g)
Shock IEC 60068-2-27 18 shocks (Half–sine wave 15g/11
ms)
Drop IEC 60068-2-31 Drop height 50 mm
Free fall (packaged) IEC 60068-2-32 1m
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Interference emission EN 55011 Limit class B group 1
Limit class for ASi operation
Electrostatic discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Severity 8 kV air discharge

3 6 kV contact discharge
Electromagnetic fields IEC 61000-4-3 Field strength 10 V/m
HF conductance on IEC 61000-4-6 10 V
cables and cable shields
according to:
Burst pulses IEC 61000-4-4 Severity 2 kV (supply and signal lines)
3
Energy carriers IEC 61000-4-5 Severity 0.5 kV (power lines) symmetrical
Single pulse (surge) 2 1 kV (power lines) asymmetrical
Information on safety
Measurement of IEC 60664, Fulfilled
clearance IEC 61131-2,
and creepage distance EN 50178 UL 508,
CSA C22.2 No.142
VDE 0631
Insulation strength IEC 61131-2 Fulfilled
A.2 Specific Technical Data:

Neom community
Main Programmable Programmable Control Relay

Control Relay Expansion module
Power supply
Input voltage 115/240 V AC/DC 115/240 V AC/DC
Permissible range 85 ... 253 V AC 85 ... 253 V AC
Permissible mains 47 ... 63 Hz 47 ... 63 Hz
frequency
Power consumption
115 V AC 10 ... 30 mA 10 ... 30 mA
240 V AC 10 ... 20 mA 10 ... 20 mA
Voltage failure buffering
115 V AC/DC typ. 10 ms typ. 10 ms
240 V AC/DC typ. 20 ms typ. 20 ms
Power loss at
115 V AC 1.1 ... 3.5 W 1.1 ... 3.5 W
240 V AC 2.4 ... 4.8 W 2.4 ... 4.8 W
Buffering the clock at 25 typ. 80h
°C
Accuracy of the real– max. ±5 s / Tag
time clock
Digital inputs
Number 8 4
Electrical isolation No No
Input voltage L1
Signal 0 < 40 V AC < 40 V AC
Signal 1 > 79 V AC > 79 V AC
Signal 0 < 30 V AC < 30 V AC
Signal 1 > 79 V AC > 79 V AC
Input current at
Signal 0 < 0.03 mA < 0.03 mA
Signal 1 > 0.08 mA > 0.08 mA
Delay time at
0 to 1 typ. 50 ms typ. 50 ms
1 to 0 typ. 50 ms typ. 50 ms
Line length 100 m 100 m
(unshielded)
Digital outputs
Number 4 4
Output type Relay outputs Relay outputs
Electrical isolation Yes Yes
In groups of 1 1
Activation of digital Yes Yes
input
Continuous current Ith max. 10 A per relaymax. 10 A per relay and max. 20 A across
all 4 relays
Incandescent lamp load(25,000 switching cycles) at:
230/240 V 1000 W 1000 W

Neom community
115/120 V 500 W 500 W

Fluorescent tubes with 10 x 58 W (at 10 x 58 W (at
choke 230/240 V AC) 230/240 V AC)
(25,000 switching
cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, 1 x 58 W (at 1 x 58 W (at
conventionally 230/240 V AC) 230/240 V AC)
compensated (25,000
switching cycles)
Fluorescent tubes, un- 10 x 58 W (at 10 x 58 W (at
compensated (25,000 230/240 V AC) 230/240 V AC)
switching cycles)
Short circuit proof Power protection Power protection B16 600A
cosΦ 1 B16
600A
Short circuit proof Power protection Power protection
cosΦ 0.5 to B16 B16
0.7 900A 900A
Derating none; across the none; across the total temperature range
total temperature
range
Parallel switching of Not permitted Not permitted
outputs to increase
power
Protection of output max. 16 A, max. 16 A, characteristic
relay (if desired) characteristic B16 B16
Switching rate
Mechanical 10 Hz 10 Hz
Ohmic load/lamp load 2 Hz 2 Hz
Inductive load 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment level and plumb according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and
requirements of "Basic Electrical Requirements."
C. Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit
for wall-mounting devices.
3.2 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified "Conductors and Cables" for low-voltage connections and "Voice
and Data Systems" for digital circuits. Always terminate on pressure type connection (for sizes
< 35mm2) terminal boards (WAGO or similar) for power and control signals and IDC modules
for copper communication signals. Fiber optic cables shall be arranged in fiber optic drawers
and terminated on small form factor connectors.
B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Division 16 Section "Raceways
and Boxes," unless run in accessible ceiling space and gypsum board partitions. C. Bundle,
train, and support wiring in enclosures.
D. Ground equipment.
E. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufaturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components, power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Basic
Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Identify components, power and control wiring according to Division 16 Section "Elec-
trical Identification."
A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least seven days'
advance notice.
B. Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
C. Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous six
months. Use manufacturers recommended torque values.
D. Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months.
E. Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state
components. Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Continuity tests of circuits.
2. Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and
capabilities in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating
functions.
a. Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational
conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional
observations.

Neom community
F. Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
G. Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.
H. Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as

specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and
preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of three hours' training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
3.7 ON-SITE ASSISTANCE

A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three
Project site visits, when requested, to adjust light levels, make program changes, and adjust
sensors and controls to suit actual conditions.

Neom community
SECTION 16264 — STATIC UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
PART 1 - GENERAL

Conditions and the requirements of section 16010 of the specifications, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section defines the design, manufacture and testing characteristics required in view of
supplying and putting into operation an Uninterruptible Power Supply (referred to as a
UPS in the rest of this document).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control and
indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating modes and
any load limitations that may apply.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals
and interconnections identified.
2. Battery: Sizing calculations.
3. Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet locations and routings of raceway connections.
4. System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method
of operation and supervision of circuits and sequence of operations. Manufacturer's
standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For UPS to be included in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
E. Operating instructions: for mounting of the UPS.
F. Product certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
G. Special Project Warranties: As specified in this Section.
A. Test reports/certificates by recognized test laboratories (such as TUV, VERITAS) shall be

submitted to prove compliance with the specifications.

following:
1. SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC (France).
2. SOCOMEC (France).
3. EMERSON-LIBERT (USA).
4. EATON (SWEEDEN)

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PARALLEL UPS SYSTEM (3 UNITS), THREE-PHASE (INPUT/OUTPUT), 200 kVA EACH (as
indicated in BOQ and drawings) DESIGNED FOR INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS
A. Purpose
1. The purpose of this specification is to describe three-phase continuous duty, on-line,
double conversion, solid-state uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to as
the UPS. The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the existing building electrical
system to provide power conditioning, back-up and distribution for critical electrical
loads. The UPS system shall consist of, as required by the project, the UPS module,
battery cabinet(s), maintenance bypass, and other features as described in this
specification.
B. Brief description
1. The UPS system shall be made up of 3 identical, parallel-connected modular UPS
units, all having the same power rating. Each modular UPS unit shall operate in double-
conversion mode and shall be of the VFI-type as per standard IEC 62040-2. The
system shall operate with 1 redundant modular UPS unit among the total (2+1
configuration).
2. Each modular UPS unit shall have a rating of 200 kVA and shall be made up of the
following components, described in detail in this specification:
3. Rectifier
a. Battery charger
b. Inverter
c. Battery
d. Automatic bypass (via a static switch)
e. User and communications interface
f. Battery management system.
4. the UPS system shall also include:
a. A common external bypass for all the modular UPS units, that shall be
installed in a cabinet
b. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance,
including circuit breakers, switches, etc.
C. Operating principle
The double-conversion UPS (also called on-line) shall operate as defined below:
1. Standard Double Conversion: Utilizing normal AC power, the critical load shall be
continuously supplied by the Inverter. The Inverter shall power the load while
regulating both voltage and frequency. The Rectifier shall derive power from the
normal AC source and shall supply DC power to the Inverter. Simultaneously, the
Battery Charger shall charge the battery.
2. Battery: Upon failure of the normal AC power, the critical load shall continue to be
supplied by the Inverter, which shall obtain power from the batteries without any
operator intervention. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or
restoration of the normal AC source.
3. Recharge: Upon restoration of the AC source, the Charger shall recharge the batteries
and simultaneously the Rectifier shall provide power to the Inverter. This shall be an
automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.
4. Bypass: If the UPM must be taken out of the standard double conversion mode for
overload, load fault, or internal failures, the static bypass switch shall automatically
transfer the critical load to the commercial AC power. Return from Bypass mode to
Normal mode of operation shall be automatic. No-break transfer to and from Bypass

Neom community
mode shall be capable of being initiated manually from the front panel. In scalable UPS
the bypass capacity shall always be rated according
to designed final load. Redundancy shall be of the n+1 type, i.e. 1 modular UPS units will be
redundant out of the total of 3 modular UPS units.
5. Energy Saver Feature: The UPS shall continuously monitor the voltage and frequency
of the bypass source. When the source parameters are within acceptable limits, the
UPS will utilize a minimal/optimal combination of its internal subsystems to ensure
acceptable power is always delivered to the critical load, at a system efficiency of 99%
or greater, over the range of 10% to 100% load. The Energy Saver System shall be
enabled by the user, and shall be adjustable. It shall incorporate a “High Alert Mode”
to automatically (without user intervention) provide maximum power conditioning any
time bypass source variation levels exceed preset, adjustable limits. When Energy
Saver System is utilized, the UPS must attenuate ANSI C62.41-type line transients to
within IEC and ITIC limits. The Energy Saver System shall be able to distinguish
between upstream (utility) faults and downstream (load) faults, and react appropriately
to protect and support the critical load, without interruption. The transfer from energy
saver mode to double conversion, when required shall take place in 2ms.
6. Variable Module Management System Feature: The modular UPS shall offer the ability
to scale its capacity and/or redundancy by automatically shifting load to fewer 300 kVA
power modules. The UPS shall provide an optional Variable Module Management
System, which will control the UPS to selectively place unnecessary modules in the
“ready-state” based on the sensed output load level. This is in order to drive the load
higher on the remaining modules. The Variable Module Management System feature
shall operate both in unit level as well as system level in parallel configuration.
7. The automatic bypasses of each modular UPS unit shall be connected to the same bypass AC
source.
a. If a major fault occurs on a modular UPS unit, it shall automatically disconnect and
its inverter shall no longer supply the load. Given that the system is redundant, the
remaining modular UPS units shall continue to supply the load. In that case the
initial level of redundancy shall be reduced by one unit, falling from n+1 to
nonredundant operation.
b. If another modular UPS unit shuts down, the resulting level of redundancy shall
determine whether inverter operation is still possible.
c. Loss of redundancy is in all cases signalled by an alarm.
d. If redundancy has been lost, shutdown of another modular UPS unit shall result in
automatic transfer, without interruption, of the load to the bypass AC source via the
bypass of each modular UPS unit, including the units shut down, if the AC bypass
is within tolerances and synchronised with the inverter outputs.
e. If required, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-
interruption (adjustable from 15 to 1000 ms) if synchronisation with the bypass
source has not been established, to enable operation in downgraded mode and
enhance supply of power to the load.
f. In all cases, to ensure load transfer in complete safety, the system shall
simultaneously control all the static switches.
8. UPS maintenance
a. All power and control electronics of the modular UPS units making up the UPS
system shall be accessible from the front of the UPS.
b. In a redundant system, it shall be possible to shut down a modular UPS unit and
isolate its charger and inverter for maintenance, with the other inverters in the UPS
system continuing to supply the load.
9. Battery maintenance
For safe maintenance, the battery of each modular UPS unit shall include a circuit breaker to
isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When the battery is isolated
from the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without interruption or disturbance,
except in the event of a normal AC source outage.
10. Cold start (normal AC source absent)

Neom community
The battery of each modular UPS unit shall be capable of starting the UPS if the normal AC
source is absent and continue supplying power to the load within the specified backup time.
Cold start on battery power shall be possible on the condition that the system shall have
started at least once on normal AC power.
D. Sizing and general characteristics

1. Technology
The UPS system technology shall be based on IGBT transistors for all the power converters
(rectifier, charger and inverter with variable chopping frequency).
2. Rating
a. The UPS system shall be sized to continuously supply a load of 450kVA at a
power factor of 0.9 without redundancy and a load of 300kVA at a power factor
of 0.9 with redundancy.
b. The UPS system shall be made up of 3 identical, parallel-connected modular
UPS units, each having a power rating of 200 kVA.
c. The total installed power rating shall be 600 kVA. It shall be
possible to use 1 modular UPS units for redundancy.
3. Battery backup time
a. The battery backup time in the event of a normal AC source outage shall be 20
minutes, for a load power factor of 0.9.
b. The battery of each modular UPS unit shall be designed for a service life of 10
years. It shall be selected and sized correspondingly, for a load power factor of
0.9.
4. Types of loads accepted
The UPS system shall accept high crest factors (3:1) without derating (kW) to ensure correct
operation with computer loads and loads where the leading power factor can reach 0.9.
The total harmonic voltage distortion at UPS output (THDU downstream) shall respect the
following limits:
a. THDU downstream ph/ph
b. 3% for non-linear loads.
5. PFC sinusoidal-current input rectifiers
The UPS system shall not draw a level of harmonic currents that could disturb the upstream
AC system, i.e. it shall comply with the stipulations of guide IEC 610003-4.
The PFC input rectifiers of the modular UPS units, using sinusoidal-current IGBTs, shall have
the following performance levels:
a. total harmonic current distortion (THDI) upstream of the rectifier not exceeding
5%
b. input power factor (PF) greater than 0.99 from 50% load upwards.
6. Outputs without a transformer
To reduce losses, dimensions and weight, the output of each UPS unit shall be of the
transformer-less type and the neutral shall be recreated electronically.
7. Efficiency
Overall efficiency (between the rectifier inputs and the UPS output) shall be greater than or
equal than 94.5% from 50% load to full rated load (In).
8. Noise level
The noise level for each unit, measured as per standard ISO 3746, shall be less than 72 dB
E. AC sources
The UPS shall be designed to receive power from the sources listed below.
1. Normal AC source (Rectifier input)
The normal AC source supplying the UPS shall, under normal operating conditions, have the
following characteristics:
a. Rated voltage Un: 380 - 415 volts RMS at full rated load Pn;
b. Input Voltage Range: 250V to 470V volts, (Un ± 15%) at 70% Pn;
c. Number of phases: 3 + earth (neutral not required);
d. Frequency: 50Hz ± 10%.

Neom community
2. Bypass AC source (Static-bypass input)

The bypass power supplying the UPS in the event of an inverter shutdown (maintenance,
failure) or an overload (short-circuit, heavy inrush currents, etc.) shall have the following
characteristics:
a. Voltage: 230/400 volts, ± 10%;
b. Number of phases: 3 + N + earth; (a non-distributed neutral should be possible
when required on drawings);
c. Frequency: 60 Hz ± 5% (adjustable up to ± 2 Hz).
Outside these tolerances, it shall be possible to supply the load, but in downgraded mode.
F. Electrical characteristics
1. Rectifier and charger input
a. Nominal three phase input voltage: 400 VAC:4-wire plus ground
input
b. Operating input voltage range: + 15%, - 15% of average nominal input voltage without
battery discharge.
c. For 50Hz systems, operating input frequency range shall be 45 to 55Hz.
d. Input power factor 0.99 lagging.
e. Normal input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable input
current limit settings while operating in normal mode:
a) Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100 to 115% of
full-load input current.
f. On generator input current limit: The UPS shall have the following programmable
input current limit settings while operating in normal mode on generator:
a) Rectifier/charger input current limit shall be adjustable from 100% to 115%
of full-load input current.
b) Battery recharge input current limit shall be adjustable from 10% to 15%
of the UPS full load input current regardless of the actual load on the UPS.
g. Input current total harmonic distortion (THD) shall be less than 3.0% at full load.
h. Power walk-in: Ramp-up to full utility load adjustable from 3 seconds to 60
seconds.
i. Optional input circuit breaker may be chosen with 50 or 100 kAIC rating (depending on
UPS configuration)
2. Bypass input:
a. Synchronizing bypass voltage range shall be +/- 10% of average nominal input
voltage.
b. Synchronizing bypass frequency range is centered on the nominal frequency.
c. Bypass and rectifier inputs must have common ground, can be supplied from out
of phase sources if required.
d. Input surge withstand capability: The UPS shall be in compliance with IEC62040-
2.
3. Rectifier/charger output:
a. Nominal DC voltage shall be 480VDC.
b. Steady state voltage regulation shall be +/- 1,5%.
c. Voltage ripple shall be less than 0.5% (peak-to-peak).
d. Capacity: The rectifier/charger shall support a fully loaded inverter and recharge the battery
to 90% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge when input current limit is set at
maximum.

Neom community
e. Low line operation: The rectifier/charger shall be capable of sharing the DC load with the
battery when the input voltage falls below the specified operation input voltage range, the on
battery indicator shall enunciate operation in this mode.
f. DC sensing: Redundant DC voltage sensing methods shall be incorporated for providing
battery over-voltage protection.
g. Battery charger characteristics: The UPS battery charging system shall have the following
characteristics:
a) The charger shall be capable of being configured for several charge modes
including:
(1) A charging mode that increases battery life by allowing the battery to rest,
reducing positive plate corrosion
(2) A charging mode floating the battery at a set level, which can be adjusted
via software, used for flooded cell applications (a) Nominal Float Voltage:
2.27 V per cell.
(b) Equalizing Voltage: 2.31 V maximum per cell (adjustable).
(c) Automatic (time based) or manual (user initiated) equalization
available
b) Power module will automatically adjust battery shutdown based upon loading and
battery capacity.
(1) The module shall automatically adjust the final discharge voltage between
1.67 and 1.75 Volts per cell based on the existing load and the rate and
length of discharge.
(2) The absolute minimum operational voltage is 1.67 V per cell (adjustable).
4. Batteries
h. Each UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the sealed lead-acid type, factory
mounted and wired in a cabinet identical to that of the UPS with a service life equal to at
least 10 years.
i. Each battery shall be sized to ensure continuity in the supply of power to the corresponding
inverter for at least 20 minutes, in the event of a normal AC source failure, with the inverter
operating at full rated load, i.e. 200 kVA (as required in BOQ and drawings) at a power factor
(pf) of 0.9.
j. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0° C and 35°C
k. The UPS shall include devices to ensure:
a) Effective battery protection (see section "Protection - Battery")
b) Battery management (see section "Battery management").
5. Inverter
The inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of 200 kVA (as required in BOQ and drawings)
at 0.9 pf and shall satisfy the specifications listed below:
a. Output voltage
a) Rated voltage 380 / 400 / 415 volts RMS +/- 1%, finely adjustable via the
user interface to Un +/- 3%.
b) Number of phases 3 phases + neutral + earth.
c) Steady-state conditions: The variation in the rated voltage shall be limited to
± 2% for a balanced load between 0 and 100% of the rated power,
irrespective of normal AC input and DC voltage levels, within the limits
specified in section “Normal AC source” and “Rectifier/charger - Operating
modes and DC-voltage levels”.

Neom community
d) Voltage variations for load step changes: Output voltage transients shall not
exceed ± 1% of rated voltage for 0 to 100% or 100 to 0% step loads. In all
cases, the voltage shall return to within steady-state tolerances in less than
100 milliseconds.
e) Unbalanced load conditions: For a load unbalance between phases, the
variation in the output voltage shall be less than
1%
b. Output frequency
a) Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz.
b) Variations in free-running frequency mode: ± 0.5 Hz.
c. Synchronisation with bypass power

a) When bypass power is within tolerances
To enable transfer to bypass power (see conditions below in section "Static-
bypass"), the inverter output voltage shall be synchronised with the bypass
source voltage whenever possible. To that end, during normal operation, a
synchronisation system shall automatically limit the phase deviation between
the voltages to 3 degrees, if the bypass source frequency is sufficiently stable
(within adjustable tolerances of 0.5% to 8% with respect to the rated
frequency).
b) Synchronisation with an external source
It shall be possible to synchronise with all types of external source.
For example, if the bypass source is a generator set, the synchronization
tolerances shall be approximately ± 2 Hz (adjustable).
c) Autonomous operation following loss of synchronisation with bypass power
When the bypass source frequency deviates beyond these limits, the inverter
shall switch over to free-running mode with internal synchronisation,
regulating its own frequency to within ± 0.02 Hz. When bypass power returns
to within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically resynchronise.
d) Variation in frequency per unit time
To avoid transmitting to the inverter any excessive frequency variations on
the bypass AC source when it is within tolerances, inverter frequency
variations per unit time (dF/dt) shall be limited to 1 Hz/s or 2 Hz/s (user
defined).
d. Overload capacity The UPS shall be capable of supplying for at least:

a) 10 minutes a load representing 125% of the rated load
b) 1 minutes a load representing 135 % of the rated load
c) 30 second a load representing 150% of the rated load.
d) For the specified power rating of 200 kVA, the inverter shall be capable of
current limiting to a peak capacity of 300% for 150 ms to allow highly
disturbed transient operating states without transferring the load to the
bypass.
e) The overload capacity shall be capable of taking into account temperature
conditions for more than ten minutes, by allowing a continuous, 10%
overload when the temperature is less than or equal to 20°C.
e. Higher power ratings for lower temperatures
It shall be possible to increase the power rating when the temperature is less than
35°C. The rating can be raised by +3% for 30°C, +5% for 25°C and +8% for 20°C.
6. Automatic bypass
a. Load transfer to the static bypass
Each modular UPS unit in the UPS system shall be equipped with an automatic
bypass comprising a static switch. The automatic bypasses of each modular UPS
unit shall be connected to the same bypass AC source.
Instantaneous transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power and back
shall take place without a break or disturbance in the supply of power to the load,

Neom community
on the condition that the bypass source voltage and frequency are within the
tolerances specified in "Bypass AC source” and that the inverter is synchronised.
Transfer shall take place automatically in the event of a major overload or an
internal inverter fault. Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronised with
the inverter, automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power shall
take place after a calibrated interruption adjustable from 15 to 1 000 milliseconds.
b. Static-switch protection
The static switch shall be equipped with an RC filter for protection against switching
overvoltages and lightning strikes.
c. Automatic-bypass withstand
For the specified power rating of 200 kVA for each modular UPS unit, each static
switch shall be capable of handling an overcurrent of 16 times the rated current of
the modular UPS unit to facilitate discrimination within the electrical installation.
7. Discrimination and short-circuit capacity

If the bypass power is within the tolerances specified in section "Bypass AC source" section,
the presence of the static switch shall make it possible to use the short-circuit power of the
bypass source to trip the downstream protection devices of the inverter.
To ensure tripping in a selective manner, the available power shall be sufficient to trip
protection devices with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, where In
is the rated inverter current).
If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, the inverter on its own shall, for the
same discrimination requirements, be capable of tripping circuit breakers rated In/2 or UR
fuses rated In/4, irrespective of the type of short-circuit.
8. System earthing arrangement
The UPS shall be compatible with the following system earthing arrangements:
a. Upstream source: TNS
b. Downstream installation: TNS
If the upstream and downstream earthing arrangements are different, galvanic
isolation shall be provided on the static-bypass line.
G. Mechanical characteristics
1. Mechanical structure
The UPS and batteries shall be installed in cabinet(s) with a degree of protection IP20
(standard IEC 60529). Access to the subassemblies making up the system shall be
exclusively through the front.
2. Modular design
The UPS shall be designed to allow the installed power to be easily increased on site by
connection of additional UPS units, either to meet new load requirements or to enhance
system availability by introducing redundancy.
This transformation shall be possible directly on site, without returning the equipment to the
factory and without causing excessive system downtime.
3. Dimensions
The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be possible to
install the UPS with the back to the wall or back to back.
4. Connection
To facilitate connections, all terminal blocks must be easily accessible from the front when
the UPS is installed with the back to the wall. Entry of upstream and downstream power
cables, as well as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible through the bottom for a false floor.
The UPS shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the standards
listed in section "Standards and tests".

Neom community
The cables shall comply with the standards listed in section "Standards and tests" and be
mounted in compliance with the stipulations in section "Safety". The neutral conductor shall
be oversized for any third-order harmonic currents and their multiples (the size of the neutral
shall be 1.5 times that of each phase).
5. Ventilation
Cooling of each modular UPS unit shall be by forced-air ventilation. To facilitate layout of the
modular UPS units (particularly when installed back to the wall), air input shall be through
the front and bottom, exit through the top.
All power electronics shall be equipped with a redundant ventilation system including fault
detection.
H. Environment conditions 1. UPS (not including battery)

a. Operation: The UPS, not including the battery, shall be capable of operating under
the following environmental conditions without loss of performance:
a) Ambient temperature range: 0° C to +35° C;
b) Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C;
c) Maximum temperatures: 40 °C for 8 hours
d) Maximum relative humidity: 95% at 25° C;
e) Maximum altitude: 1000 meters.
I. Protection
1. Modular UPS units
Each modular UPS unit in the UPS system shall include protection against ACsource
overvoltages (as per standard IEC 60146), excessive external or internal temperature rise
and vibrations and impacts during transport.
2. Rectifiers and chargers

Each rectifier and the corresponding battery charger shall accept external orders provoking
automatic shutdown in the following cases:
a. EPO (emergency power off), in which the battery circuit breaker also opens
b. if the temperature exceeds the limits specified in Error! Reference source not
found.
The rectifier shall automatically shut down if the DC voltage reaches the maximum value
specified by the battery manufacturer or if the temperature exceeds the limits specified in
Error! Reference source not found.
3. Inverter
The load shall be protected against overvoltages resulting from a loss of voltage regulation at
the output of the inverters.
Each inverter (and the corresponding rectifier and charger) shall shut down automatically
when the DC voltage reaches the minimum voltage specified by the battery manufacturer.
In the event of an overload exceeding system capacity (AC bypass absent), each inverter
shall be equipped with an automatic shutdown system to protect its power circuits. A load
short-circuit shall provoke the static shutdown of each inverter without fuse destruction.
4. Batteries:
a. Protection against deep discharge and self-discharge
The UPS system shall comprise a device designed to protect each battery
against deep discharges, taking into account the characteristics of the discharge
cycles, with isolation of the batteries by a circuit breaker.
b. Independent regulation and monitoring systems

A regulation system shall regulate the battery voltage and the charge current of
each modular UPS unit.

Neom community
A second system, independent of the regulation, shall monitor the battery voltage
and the charge current. Consequently, if the regulation system fails, the
monitoring system steps in to shut down the charger and avoid overcharging.
c. Regulation of the battery voltage depending on the ambient temperature
A temperature sensor adapts the charge voltage to the ambient temperature.
This regulation system takes into account the chemical reaction and prolongs the
battery service life.
The permissible temperature range is set in the personalisation parameters.
An alarm shall be issued for temperatures outside the permissible range.
J. Battery management
Batteries are components whose service life is sensitive to operating conditions, i.e. particular care
is required for their management. In addition to the protective systems indicated in section 2.2I.4
battery management shall include the systems listed below:
1. Self-test: The battery shall include a self-test system initiated in two manners:
a. as necessary by a manual command;
b. automatically at user-defined intervals.
This self-test system shall update the battery parameters and detect any
abnormal deterioration to facilitate preventive maintenance.
2. Measurement of actual backup time

The battery function of each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with the means to know at
all times the real backup time available (AC power available) or remaining (AC power not
available) for the battery of the unit, taking into account the true load on the inverter, the
battery temperature and battery ageing.
3. Digital battery monitoring

Each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with a system for battery digital management.
Based on a number of parameters (percent load, temperature, battery type and age), the
system shall control the battery charge voltage and continuously calculate:
a. The true available backup time
b. The remaining service life.
4. Block by block monitoring

To further optimise availability and service life of the batteries, it shall be possible to equip
the UPS system with an optional system to continuously monitor all battery strings and
display a block by block failure prediction. The system shall include the functions listed
below:
The system shall include the functions listed below:
a. Continuous measurement of the voltage of each block.
b. Continuous measurement of the internal resistance.
c. Identification of faulty blocks (trend curves).
d. Possibility of replacing individual blocks.
e. Remoting of all information via Ethernet, dry contacts or JBus or Modbus.
K. User interface and communication
1. User interface
a. UPS system operation shall be facilitated by a user interface on each of the modular
UPS units, comprising: a) Graphical display
b) ON and OFF control buttons (independent of the display)
c) status indications with mimic panel.
2. Graphic display:
a. The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation parameters, configuration,
operating status and alarms and indication of operator instructions for switching

Neom community
operations (e.g. bypass). It shall be capable of supervising a given modular UPS

unit or a parallel system (up to eight UPS units with the external bypass).
b. Display of measurements
It shall be possible to display the following measurements for any one of the
modular UPS units or for the entire system: a) inverter output phase-to-
phase voltages
b) inverter output currents
c) inverter output frequency
d) voltage across battery terminals
e) battery charge or discharge current
f) rectifier/charger input phase-to-phase voltages
g) rectifier/charger input currents
h) crest factor
i) active and apparent power
j) power factor of the load
k) battery temperature
l) battery percent charge
m) available backup time
n) remaining battery service life.
c. Display of status conditions and events
It shall be possible to display the following indications: a) load on
battery power;
b) load on UPS;
c) load on automatic bypass;
d) general alarm;
e) battery fault;
f) remaining battery backup time;
g) low battery warning;
h) bypass AC source outside tolerances;
i) battery temperature.
Additional information shall be provided in view of accelerating servicing of the
system, as specified in section “Maintainability”.
d. Display of operating graphs
It shall be possible to display bargraphs of the measurements mentioned above on
the screen over significant periods.
e. Statistics
Number of overloads, number of transfers to battery power, cumulative time on
battery power, maximum power levels, demand power levels.
f. Log of time-stamped events
This function shall store in memory and make available, for automatic or manually
initiated recall, time-stamped logs of all important status changes, faults and
malfunctions, complete with an analysis and display of troubleshooting procedures.
It shall be possible to time stamp and store at least 2500 events.
3. Controls
Each modular UPS unit shall comprise the following controls:
a. two ON and OFF buttons
Located on the front panel of the UPS, they shall control UPS-unit ON/OFF status.
It shall be possible to turn OFF the UPS externally via an isolated dry contact.
b. EPO terminal block
The UPS shall be equipped with an emergency power off (EPO) terminal block for
complete system shutdown following reception of an external control signal. The
EPO command shall result in: a) shutdown of UPS units
b) opening of the static switches on the bypass line and of the battery circuit
breaker
c) opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable card.

Neom community
c. alarm reset button

This button shall turn off audio alarms (buzzer) (as per 2.2K.4). If a new alarm is
detected after clearing the first, the buzzer sounds again.
4. Status indications with mimic panel
a. Indication of status conditions shall be distinct of the graphic display. Three LEDs
on the control panel indicate the following status conditions:
a) Load protected;
b) Minor fault;
c) Major fault.
b. The mimic panel shall represent the UPS and indicate the status of the load supply
using at least five two-colour LEDs:
a) load supplied (LED at UPS output on mimic panel)
b) inverter on (inverter LED on mimic panel)
c) operation on battery power (LED between battery and inverter on mimic
panel)
d) bypass activated (bypass LED on mimic panel)
e) PFC rectifier on (rectifier LED on mimic panel).
A buzzer shall warn the user of faults, malfunctions or operation on battery
power.
5. Communication
a. Standard communication
It shall be possible to remote the following controls, indications and measurements.
To that end, each modular UPS unit in the UPS system shall have as standard
equipment a programmable card with four inputs and six outputs.
b. Required Communications options
The UPS system shall include a multi-standard communications card with two
outputs:
a) RS485 serial-link implementing the JBus/ModBus protocol for connection to
a building management system (BMS)
b) Ethernet 10/100 Mbps using one of the protocols below:
-XML-Web for direct UPS connection to an intranet network, without
connection to a server, capable of supplying
information via a standard web browser
-SNMP for connection to a computer-network management system
c. Variable Module Management System

a) The Variable Module Management System feature shall have three
configurable modes of operation: Double Conversion, Double Conversion
with VMMS, and High Alert mode. All modes will be selectable from the front
panel.
(1) Double Conversion Mode: the unit shall operate by
supplying power through each of the power converters
(providing equal load-share between all available
power modules).
(2) Variable Module Management Mode: The unit shall
operate as a traditional double conversion UPS.
However, the unit will place identified Power modules
in “ready state” based on system load.
(3) High Alert Mode: all ready-state power moduless are

active for one hour (user adjustable). At the completion of the hour, the
UPS defaults back to Variable Module Management Mode. If the high

Neom community
alert command is received again during the one hour, the one hour
timer will be restarted.
b) Variable Module Management Mode shall support both distributed bypass
and centralized bypass (SBM) parallel configurations. SBM configurations
shall support up to 8 parallel units (4 modules per UPS lineup)..
c) Operation: Power Module transfers to Double Conversion Mode if any of the
following event occur:
(1) A utility outage that results in the unit going to battery.
(2) Greater than a +/- 3 % (adjustable) voltage variation on the output.
(3) Any power module exceeds current limit.
(4) A UPS or power module exceeds user adjustable load
level
(5) Battery test initiated.
(6) Battery charging required.
(7) Any power module being serviced.
d) The UPS shall be detectable by supervision software for large UPS systems
(supervision software to be provided) in addition to a “Shutdown and
Administration” basic software.
L. Maintainability: For optimum safety during servicing, a maintenance bypass shall be available
to completely isolate the UPS.
1. Local and remote diagnostics and monitoring - E. Services
a. The UPS shall be equipped with a self-test system to check operation of the
system as a whole each time it is started. To that end, the supply
control/monitoring electronics shall offer: a) Auto-compensation of component
drift;
b) Acquisition of information vital for computer-aided diagnostics or
monitoring (local or remote);
c) Overall readiness for remote supervision services provided by the
manufacturer.
M. Standards and tests

1. Standards: All equipment shall be designed and built in accordance with accepted
engineering practice and applicable international standards, in particular the standards
listed below:
a. IEC 60140-4: UPS - Performance.
b. IEC 62040-1 and EN 62040-1: UPS - Safety.
c. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC),
level B.
d. IEC 62040-3 and EN 62040-3: UPS - Performance.
e. IEC 60950 / EN 60950: Safety of IT equipment, including electrical business
equipment.
f. IEC 61000-2-2: EMC, levels of compatibility.
g. IEC 61000-3-4: Limitation of emission of harmonic currents in lowvoltage
power supply systems for equipment with rated current greater than 16 A.
h. IEC 61000-4: EMC, immunity tests.
i. IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies.
j. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
k. ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
l. CE marking.

Neom community
2. The equipment shall comply with eco-design and eco-manufacturing criteria in view of
sustainable development and to that end, the manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate:
a. R&D and production on an ISO 14001 certified site
b. manufacture with over 90% recyclable materials
c. capacity to recover products at the end of their service life and provide proof
of destruction by a certified organisation
d. the environmental profile of the product, which shall be supplied with the sales
offer.
3. Certification of conformity: The manufacturer shall provide, on request, a complete

qualification file demonstrating compliance with the above standards. What is more, the
indicated levels of performance shall be confirmed by certification from independent
laboratories (e.g. TÜV or Veritas).
N. Quality system and test procedures
1. Test procedures:
The manufacturer shall provide proof of a quality-assurance system. In particular, the main
manufacturing steps must be subject to suitable tests such as:
a. inspection of incoming components, tests on discrete subassemblies
b. complete functional checks on termination of manufacture.
The equipment shall be subject to burn-in under load conditions prior to shipping. Final
checks and adjustments shall be recorded in a report drafted by the qualityinspection
department of the supplier.
Certification of the industrial facilities in compliance with ISO 9001 or 9002 shall be
required.
2. Quality system
The UPS design procedure shall be covered by an ISO 9001 quality system as well as a
dependability study to ensure maximum reliability.
O. Services
1. Maintenance: The supplier shall propose contracts covering four levels of maintenance.
a. Level one: simple checks and settings, procedures accessible without any
dismounting and involving no risk.
b. Level two: preventive maintenance, checks not inhibiting continuous operation
of the system and preparing operators for Manufacturer services.
c. Level three: trouble-shooting. Repairs by standard exchange of subassemblies
and functional power and control components. Preventive-maintenance
operations, both systematic and when indicated by qualified diagnosis.
d. Level four: major preventive and corrective maintenance operations or
technical upgrades during start-up, operation or renovation of the UPS
installation and recycling of equipment or components representing a risk.
These operations require the use of devices and means that have been
calibrated by certified organisations.
2. Technical competency
a. Customer operators: the supplier shall offer a level 2 training program.
b. Service personnel: the supplier shall ensure that service personnel are
qualified for level 4.
3. Functional components - organisation of supplier services

a. Sufficient geographical proximity of the supplier or an authorised agent shall
ensure reasonable access times to the customer site in view of reducing the

Neom community
mean time to repair (MTTR). The supplier shall be in a position to offer a

contract limiting the response time to four hours.
b. The supplier's logistics system and the availability 24 hours a day of original
replacement parts shall similarly contribute to reducing to the greatest extent
possible the mean time to repair (MTTR).
4. System start-up
a. The system and equipment shall be started up on site by the supplier or its
authorised agent. The procedure shall include checks on the characteristics of
the upstream and downstream protection devices and on the UPS installation
parameters.
5. Replacement parts
a. The suppler shall undertake to provide certified original replacement parts for
at least ten years following the date of delivery.
6. Recycling and renovation/substitution

a. At the end of the UPS system service life, the supplier shall guarantee the
continuity of service of the customer's installations if necessary, including
dismantling of equipment and replacement of equipment, in compliance with
applicable standards on environmental protection.
P. Warranty
The components making up each modular UPS unit (rectifier, charger and inverter
subassemblies) shall be guaranteed (parts and labour on site) for one year following the start-up
date.
The sealed lead-acid battery shall be covered by the same warranty as the UPS.
Q. UPS.Installation services 1. Required services include:

a. Supply of the UPS and any accessory parts or elements;
b. Carriage-paid UPS transportation and delivery to the site.
c. UPS handling and installation on the site;
d. Connections between the battery and the UPS;
e. Connection of the normal AC source to the rectifier/charger;
f. Connection of the bypass AC source to the input transformer or bypass input;
g. Connection of the load circuits to the UPS output.
R. Electrical diagram

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST PROCEDURE
A. The UPS manufacturer shall provide proof of a stringent Quality Assurance program. In
particular, the main equipment manufacturing stages shall be sanctioned by appropriate tests
such as:
1. incoming components inspection, discrete subassembly testing;
2. Complete functional checks on the final product.
B. Equipment shall undergo on-load burn-in before leaving the factory.
C. Final inspection and adjustments shall be documented in a report drawn up by the supplier’s
Quality Inspection department.
D. ISO 9001 certification of the production site is compulsory.
3.2 START-UP
A. UPS start-up on site shall be carried out by the manufacturer or an approved representative.
B. It shall include on-site acceptance during which a check on system characteristics shall be
made.
3.3 REPLACEMENT PARTS
A. The supplier undertakes to provide replacement parts for at least ten years following the date
of delivery.

Neom community
B. A set of emergency spare parts shall be supplied with the UPS.
3.4 SERVICES
A. Required services include:

1. Supply of the UPS units and any accessory parts or elements;
2. Carriage-paid UPS units’ transportation and delivery to the site.
3. UPS units handling and installation on the site;
4. Connections between the battery strings and the UPS units;
5. Connection of the normal AC source to the rectifiers/chargers;
6. Connection of the bypass AC sources to the input transformers or bypass inputs; 7.
Connection of the load circuits to the UPS-system output.
3.5 CLIENT TRAINING
A. The contractor shall provide training to the client maintenance staff. The training shall be
provided by certified trainers. Based on the training sessions, the attendees from the client
maintenance staff shall be given a certificate for the proper operation and maintenance of the
system from the manufacturer of the UPS system.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and
schedules. Provide a minimum of 6 hours' training.
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual
as a training aid.
notice.
3.6 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
A. Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative
to provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work,
covering routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply
of necessary standard spare parts.
B. Maintenance Contract Terms:

1. Maintenance Contract shall be for 2 years from date of handing over.
2. Equipment shall be supplied with 2 years warranty. The warranty shall include
replacement of any damaged spare parts (including labor)
3. Contractor shall perform all Maintenance work and Preventive maintenance tasks in
frequencies, in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and the best-
established practices, procedures and standards recognized by the related industry.
There shall be no less than 12 visits 12 year.
4. The supplier should respond to an emergency call within 4 hours and should replace
any defective part within 24 hours. An emergency is defined as that which involves
total or partial loss of a system that may lead to a total loss of the service provided.
5. Other than emergency calls, service calls shall have a response time of next working
day as a maximum. The maintenance contractor shall work continuously until the
problem is resolved and the system is back to normal operation.

Neom community
6. The maintenance contract shall include the cost (material and labor) of replacement of
consumables not included in the general warranty conditions through scheduled
preventive maintenance visits performed by the supplier according to manufacturer’s
recommendation.
7. The maintenance contractor shall provide the needed stamps on client’s copy of the
contract.

Neom community
SECTION 16265 – AC/DC MONITORED CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and the requirements of section 16010 of the specifications, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fast-transfer battery systems that automatically sense loss of normal
AC supply and transfer loads to battery supply on supply power failure, and that automatically
retransfer to normal supply when normal power is restored.
B. The emergency lighting system & all its components shall be designed & installed to meet the
local civil defense requirements.
C. The Central Battery System shall supply power to 230V/216V AC/DC emergency luminaries
in accordance with DIN VDE 0108 dated 10/89, DIN EN 50272-2, BGV A2 (VBG4) with
individual luminaire monitoring. The implementation of the system shall also comply with
BS5266-1 as applicable to this project.
D. The system shall provide failure detection on each individual emergency luminaire, in
conjunction with special electronic ballasts that incorporate monitoring modules; without
additional data cable.
E. The emergency back up time duration shall be 1 Hour.
F. The central battery system shall be composed of electronic assemblies of modular plug-in,
easy to service design. Wiring shall be arranged on factory assembled pressure terminals.
G. The central battery system shall have a large connection space that meets safety regulations,
plug-in terminals accessible from above or below protected against inadvertent physical
contact in accordance with DIN VDE 0100. Circuit protection and built-in terminal blocks for
battery and mains supplies to the substations shall be provided.
H. Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,
1. Illuminate the escape routes.
2. Indicate the escape route direction clearly.
3. Provide the Exit signs on all the Exits.
4. Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment’s & other life saving equipment’s
on the premises are illuminated.
5. Permit operations related to safety measures and inhibit any hazardous processes.
I. All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001
certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards & shall bear the
CE certification for Electromagnetic compatibility. The product shall be field proven in the
Middle East.
J. The number of central battery substations (if required) shall be appropriately planned for
maximum reliability and to ensure continued emergency supply. There shall be no single point
of failure in the system. The substations (if any) shall also be able to operate in stand-alone
mode in the event of the central panel malfunctioning.
K. The system shall be interfaced to the BMS for reporting the alarm and status functions of all
system components. The interface shall also be used to control the system test function,
operating time test function, block and enable manual reset and activate maintained light
switch monitoring from any BMS workstation.

Neom community
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include dimensions and data on features and components for each product
specified. Include wiring diagrams and elevation view of front panel showing control and
indicating devices. Include data on ratings, and a detailed description of operating modes
and any load limitations that may apply.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
of operation and supervision of lighting circuits and sequence of operations.
Manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
5. Details of graphics display panel.
requirements. Comply with NFPA 101, DIN VDE 0108 dated 10/89, DIN EN 50272-2, and
BGV A2 (VBG4).
D. Maintenance Data: For central battery to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division
1.
E. Operating instructions: for mounting of the central battery.
F. Product certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products
G. Special Project Warranties: As specified in this Section.
A. Test reports/certificates by recognized test laboratories (such as ASTA Certificate services,

ASEFA, KEMA) shall be submitted to prove compliance with the specifications
B. Comply with NFPA 101 (installation and emergency lighting illumination requirements) & EN
60 598-2-22.
C. Systems should be implemented in accordance with IEC regulations and NFPA 101.
1.5 WARRANTY
replace any component of the system including batteries that do not meet requirements or
that fail within the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component except
batteries. As for batteries, full warranty applies for the first year; a pro-rata warranty
thereafter for 4 years.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Neom community
1. Emergency Circuit Modules: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not
less than one unit per type installed.
2. Selective Emergency Lighting switch: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed,
but not less than one unit per type installed.
3. Emergency Lighting fittings associated mounting accessories, lamps, control gears and
pictograms: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less than one
unit per type installed.
4. Fuses: Quantity equal to 15 percent of amount installed, but not less than 5 units per
type installed.

following:
1. CEAG (Germany).
2. INOTEC (Germany).
3. COPPER (UK).
4. BEGHELLI (Italy).

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL SYSTEM CONSTRUCTION
A. Mechanical Construction
1. The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP21 with removable
screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The
electronics section shall have IP21 sheet steel enclosure with transparent
polycarbonate window for all central systems & IP54 sheet steel enclosure with full
metal door for all substations.
2. The electronics compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries
from top via four or more un-drilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables
& looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per
EN/VDE0100. All outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant
components via plug-in type pressure terminals 2.5 mm 2.
3. Where the space required for the batteries does not permit the installation in the same
standard enclosure, the batteries shall be installed in an identical batteries cabinet.
B. Electrical Construction.
1. The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in type
design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. One module
shall be used for each separate switchable outgoing circuit with maximum load of
6Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108. If circuits are 2 Amps & below, one module with two
separately switchable outgoing circuits shall be used. Each circuit shall be protected
within the system on mains & battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each
module. The fuses shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply
& battery mains cables shall be protected by molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs).
2. Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with at least five spare fuses for each size
used in respective panel.
2.2 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULE

A. Display of operating states and luminaire failures on 4-line display
B. Integrated log book memory
C. DB25 Centronics interface for the connection of a commercially available DOS compatible
printer.
D. Integrated remote switching facility via two contacts
E. Electronically controlled 24V outputs for voltage monitoring as many sub-distribution boards
for the general lighting system as required in conjunction with 3 three-phase monitoring
F. LED indicator for power, mains failure, battery operation, group failure
G. Potential-free contacts, power, battery operation, group failure
H. Straightforward programming using three keys can be programmed as standard:
1. Manual reset
2. Automatic reset
3. OFF-Delay on mains return 1-15 minutes
2.3 CHARGING DEVICE
A. Microprocessor-controlled charging (IU characteristic)

1. Battery Charger: Constant voltage, current limited type with electronic solidstate
controller. Voltage shall be controlled to within 2% of setting at up to 10% mains supply
variations.

Neom community
2. Minimum Charger Efficiency: 85 percent.

3. Equalizing Charge: Automatically applied to battery every 90 days.
B. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 15
hours.
C. Temperature based with automatic boost charging circuit. The charger voltage shall be
automatically adjusted with reference to ambient temperature for optimizing charging &
battery life.
D. Temperature sensor built into battery cabinet.
E. Design as switched primary, switched-mode regulator.
F. Charging monitoring for the detection of open battery circuits.
G. Insulation test device.
H. Boost charging unit with electrical isolation.
I. LED indications for:
1. Charging module ON.
2. Boost charging ON.
3. Indication of battery capacity > 10 %, > 50 %, 100 % 4. Insulation fault.
5. Charging failure.
6. Mains present.
J. Potential-free contacts for:
1. Charging failure.
2. Boost charging.
3. Insulation fault.
2.4 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM MODULES ASSEMBLIES:
A. Emergency Circuit Modules

1. Individual switch-over per emergency lighting circuit with free programming for
maintained or non-maintained mode and two-pole circuit protection in accordance with
VDE.
2. Easily accessible circuit protections on the front of the module.
3. Electronically isolated mains monitoring for maintained and non-maintained modes
4. LED indicators for failure and power ON
B. Maintained Light Switch Monitoring (MLS) [if indicated on drawings]
1. Shall be used for the common switching of general and emergency luminaries during
mains operation using existing light switches.
2. Freely programmable allocation of maximum 2 independent light switches per
emergency lighting circuit.
3. Includes 8 switch inputs
4. LED indications for failure and switch state ON
C. Selective Emergency Lighting Switch ON (SLS)
1. The module shall be used for selective switching ON of the emergency lighting in the areas
affected by the mains failure.
2. The module shall include 8 x 24V current loops for monitoring the subdistribution boards
of the general lighting systems in conjunction with 3-threephase monitoring.
3. The module shall include 8 x LED indicators for mains failure.
D. Relay Module (RM) for signaling the following operating states using potential-free contacts
[required unless BMS interface specified]:
1. Emergency/mains operation.
2. Emergency lighting/charging failure.
3. Deep discharge protection.

Neom community
4. Test function ON/OFF.

5. Operating time test ON/OFF.
6. The module shall include 8 x LED indicators for the indications given above
E. Event Printer (PRN)
1. It shall be provided for the logging and storage of the operating states of the central battery
installation or any of its substations.
2. The event type and time-period for the printout shall be selectable using a menu.
3. The event printer shall be based on a built in 4-neSECOe-print mechanism.
F. BMS Module for the integration of the emergency lighting in building automation (BMS)
1. The module shall include a suitable (depending on the system selected for the project)
transceiver for the connection to the BMS.
2. The module shall be used for the output of the following data to a BMS system:
a. Installation blocked.
b. Deep discharge protection.
c. Battery open-circuit.
d. Battery voltage.
e. Current and temperature.
f. Insulation fault.
g. Booster failure.
h. Charging module failure.
i. Bus error, mains failure.
j. Residual capacity.
k. Circuit failures.
3. The module shall be used for the input of the following data from a BMS system:
a. Start and cancel test function.
b. Start operating time test.
c. Block and enable manual reset.
d. Activate maintained light switch monitoring (MLS), via switch.
G. Phase Selector Module (PSEL)
1. The phase selector module shall be used to switch-over to an intact phase upon the failure
of one or two phases. It shall be electronically controlled.
2. The phase selector module shall be built into central battery cabinet or in an external wall
cabinet, depending on its rating.
H. Battery Block
1. The battery block shall include sealed leak-proof, stand-by, maintenance-free,
stationary block batteries. Other battery types shall not be accepted.
2. The nominal operating time provided by the battery block shall be as indicated
previously in this document, for 100% lumen output of all emergency lighting fixtures
at the end of the discharge period.
3. The battery block shall be extremely low gassing such that no special precautions are
required.
4. The service life of the battery block shall exceed 10 years at 20 °C.
5. The battery block shall have a low self-discharge.
6. The battery block shall be designed to DIN requirements.
7. The Batteries post bushings shall be sealed against electrolyte and atmospheric
oxygen.
2.5 INSTALLATION
A. Clearance: According to manufacturer's written instructions, but not less than 1.0 meter in front
of unit.

Neom community
2.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify equipment and components according to "Basic Electrical requirements” and “wires and
cables” sections.
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Supervision of unit installation, connections, and adjustments

by a factory-authorized service representative. Report results in writing.
B. Tests: Perform tests listed below according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test unit
functions, operations, and protective features. Adjust to ensure operation complies with
Specifications. Perform tests required by BS 5266-1: 1999 & EN 60 598-2-22. Perform tests
on completion of unit installation and after building circuits have been energized. Provide
instruments to permit accurate observation of tests. Include the following tests:
1. Simulate Malfunctions: Verify protective device operation.
2. Demonstrate low-battery-voltage shutdowns, and transfers due to normal source
failure and restoration.
3. Verify emergency-supply duration.
4. Test for Successful Supply: Operate each type of load served by the unit for this Project
without symptoms of abnormal supply such as noise, vibration, or pulsation of the load
or its output.
C. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
2.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and abrasions in finish to match original finish. Clean
unit internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
2.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1. Conduct a minimum of 10 hours' training.

2. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
2.10 COMMISSIONING
A. Battery Equalization: Manually equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's

written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

Neom community
SECTION 16440 – MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. Where Paragraphs of this Section conflict with similar paragraphs of the General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, requirements of this Section shall prevail.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment to furnish and install all of the items specified
herein, indicated on the drawings and as necessary for the proper and complete performance
of work and conformance with all applicable code requirements.
B. Section includes:
1. MDBs: Main Distribution Boards feeding the normal electrical loads;
2. SMDBs: Sub Main Distribution Boards feeding the normal electrical loads;
3. ESMDBs: Emergency Sub Main Distribution Boards feeding the emergency and
essential electrical loads;
4. ATS: Automatic Transfer Switch.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Publications listed below (including amendments, addenda, revisions, supplements, and errata)
form part of this specification to the extent referenced. Publications are referenced in the text
by the basic designations only:
1. International Electro-technical Commission:
a. Circuit breakers are to comply with IEC 947- 2 as specified.
b. Other components, where not otherwise specified, are to comply with the relevant
IEC standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. EQUIPMENT DATA: submit for approval detailed description of main distribution boards and
major components supported by manufacturer’s catalogues, indicating compliance with the
Standards, equipment characteristics, details of construction, operating data, dimensions and
weights etc. Give details of miscellaneous items including incoming and outgoing feeder
terminal arrangement, connections at busbars, isolating, earthing, interlocks, control devices,
digital indicating and metering instruments etc.
B. TEST AND CERTIFICATES: submit complete certified manufacturer’s type and routine test
records, in accordance with the Standards.
C. Shop Drawings: For each main and sub-main distribution board:

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, details including clearance around panels and
service space around equipment.
2. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the
following:
a. Show ratings, type and details of each functional unit.
Section 16440 `Page 1/15

Neom community
b. Short-circuit ratings of busbars and functional units.

c. Horizontal and vertical bus capacities.
d. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
functional unit.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting-wiring diagrams (power and control) pertinent to
class and type specified for main and sub-main distribution boards. Schematic diagram
of each type of controller unit indicated.
4. Cable terminal sizes.
5. Where applicable the following information shall be submitted to the Engineer.
a. Busway connection.
b. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.
6. Foundation details, grouting holes and installation details.
D. TECHNICAL LITERATURE: submit the following for approval prior to placing orders for
equipment manufacture:
1. Schedule of circuit breakers application, indicating type, range, features and
characteristics, short-circuit ratings, time- current curves etc.
2. Method of setting of protective devices for overload, short- circuit and earth- fault
current as coordinated with upstream and downstream systems based on specific
coordination curves of protective devices used and specific calculated prospective
short- circuit currents at various points.
3. Test methods on site and references.
E. Coordination Drawings: Detailed drawings, drawn to scale, showing the followings: 1. Main
and Sub-main distribution boards drawn to scale in the electrical/technical rooms.
2. Available working clearances around the Main and Sub-main distribution boards.
3. Interconnection between the Main and Sub-main distribution boards and electrical
feeders.
4. Relationships between Main and Sub-main distribution boards and adjacent structural
and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each
support.
F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer, installer and testing agency.
G. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For Main and Sub-main distribution boards and
components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to
items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the
following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device that allows adjustments
I. Main and Sub-main distribution boards Schedules: For installation in Main and Submain
distribution boards. Submit final versions after load balancing.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts,

and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain similar Main and Sub-main distribution boards devices through
one source from a single manufacturer.

Neom community
C. Comply with IEC EN 61 439 & IEC 364 for construction form as indicated on drawings.
Additionally, comply with local regulations.
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for Main and
Sub main distribution boards, including clearances between Main and Submain distribution
boards and adjacent surfaces and items, and are based on types and models indicated.
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
B. Contractor to store, protect, and handle Main and Sub-main distribution boards in accordance
with recommended practices listed in manufacturer’s Installation and Maintenance Manuals.
C. The contractor shall store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory protection or cover with
heavy canvas or plastic to keep out dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. Provide
temporary heaters as required to prevent condensation.
D. Handle Main and Sub-main distribution boards according to, "Instructions for the Handling,
Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Main and Sub Main Distribution boards." Use
factory-installed lifting provisions.
E. Field Measurements
1. Contractor to make all necessary field measurements to verify that equipment shall fit
in allocated space in full compliance with minimum required clearances required by the
manufacturer and/or specified in IEC and local regulations.
2. Coordinate installation with other trades and notify the Architect in writing of any
interferences or conflicts.
1.7 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement and/or one year’s
maintenance including, but not limited to, the followings:
1. One set of fixed and moving contact for every type of replaceable (consumable) contact
set.
2. One operating motor and/ or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker
or contactor.
3. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs etc.
1.8 WARRANTY
1. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Contractor and manufacturer, agreeing
to replace any component of the system / panel board assemblies that do not meet
requirements or that fail within the specified warranty period.
3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component of
the system.

Neom community
1.9 TOOLS AND INSTRUMENTS
A. Provide tools and instruments required for normal routine inspection and maintenance and testing
of circuit breakers and protective devices as appropriate for type of switchgear supplied.
1.10 APPROVED PANEL BUILDERS
A. Subject to compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain Sub-Main and Main
Distribution Boards equipment, from a dedicated and specialized panel board builder
(not electrical contractor) with an up-to-date assembly certification as per IEC 61 439-1& 2
from the original panel board manufacturer. The panel board builder’s license shall be at
least 5 years old and the panel board builder shall have previously executed at least 10
projects that include TTA or panels with Design Verification certificates that the consultant
deems successful.
A. APPROVED SWITCHGEAR & CONTROLGEAR MANUFACTURERS: subject to compliance

with the specifications and drawings, obtain main distribution boards switchgear and control
gear, from one of the following:
1. Schneider Electric (France).
2. Eaton (Germany - USA)
3. Siemens (Germany)
4. Legrand, (France)
B. APPROVED ENCLOSURE AND BUSBAR SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS: subject to

compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain main distribution boards enclosure
and busbar system, from one of the following; subject to TTA licensing conditions set by the
manufacturer with respect to compatibility with switchgear and controlgear brand, type and
make. Panelbuilder shall be a specialized institution, licensed for the submitted brand for
more than 5 years and be established as a Panelbuilder for more than 10 years:
2. Moeller (Germany)
4. Holec (Holland)
5. Logstrup (Ireland)
6. Legrand (France)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS – MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Generally the sub-main and main distribution boards are to be dead- front type, metal enclosed,
multi- cubicle, floor mounted, free standing, 600 V class of service switchboards, with fixed or
drawout Switchgear, manually or manually and electrically operated, as shown on the
Drawings, with matching vertical sections to from a continuous integral and rigid structure.
The requested construction forms as per IEC EN 61439-1 & 2 are «Form 3B» or «Form 2B»
(as shown on drawings or BOQ) without
taking into account that the outer case of a device i.e. an MCCB is an acceptable segregation
means and providing a separate compartment for external conductors.

Neom community
2.2 CONSTRUCTIONS
A. Rigidly framed and bolted, with electro-galvanized sheet steel enclosures, minimum thickness
1.5 mm, phosphatized, primed with rust inhibiting primer and finished with thermal
polymerized polyester epoxy powder coating, color to approval. Switchgear is to be vermin,
dust and rodent proof, unless otherwise indicated in BOQ or drawings IP55 (wet areas) and
IP43 (dry areas) protection to IEC EN 60529 for indoor installations, with adequate lifting
means and base- frames and capable of being moved into position and directly bolted to floor
without additional sills. Shock protection shall be IK10.
B. Panel Builder to submit thermal study to justify the panel’s cooling method. Enclosure to have
suitable temperature control apparatus (anti-condensation heaters, heat sinks, fans, air
conditioning …etc) as required to keep internal temperature below 50°C when ambient
temperature outside the panel is 35°C.
C. Where the panel is outdoor mounted and subject to direct sunlight, the panel ingress of
protection shall be IP65 to IEC EN 60529 and special measures shall be provided to limit the
temperature inside the compartments to 45°C with an ambient outdoor temperature of 50°C.
D. Switchboard(s) are to be of the front accessible wall aligned, with fixed main circuit breaker
sections (type and rating as shown in schedules) and fixed group mounted outgoing MCCB
and ACB distribution section(s), busbars section(s), and feeders’ section.
E. All switchboard(s) compartments shall have glazed doors except for busbars & cable
compartments. If each functional unit is arranged in a separate compartment, a solid door
shall be provided for each compartment where the disconnecting element’s toggle shall be
extended to outside the compartment.
F. Switchboard’s Doors shall not be wider than 60cm. If closet door(s)’ width is larger than 60cm
then 2 doors arrangement shall be provided instead such that no door width exceeds 60cm.
G. FIXED MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER SECTION: is to individually accommodate main circuit

breaker, main cable entry with terminal fitting assembly and metering compartment. Where
required an additional cable pull section is to be provided, depending on actual configuration
shown on the Drawings. Where placed against a wall, accessibility is to be possible from front
and sides or only from front of section.
H. FRONT ACCESSIBLE FIXED, FEEDER MCCB or ACB DISTRIBUTION SECTIONS –

FEEDERS SECTIONS – BUSBARS SECTION: are to rear align with main section(s) and be
of uniform depth, with all devices removable from the front and mounted on a panel board
type base. Construction is to allow all connections and maintenance to be made without rear
access. Cables are to be accommodated in extra wide vertical section(s). Sides, top and rear
are to be covered with removable screw- on plates having formed edges all around. Front
plates are to be sectionalized and removable, covered by times, and secured by self-tapping
screws. If Plexiglas (or any other material) is used for segregation, it has to be fire retardant.
Busbars are to be accommodated in separate horizontal and vertical sections. The electrical
link from the main busbars to each distribution MCCB or ACB could be by rigid or flexible
insulated busbars (the electrical link within the same functional unit have to be done by rigid
busbars, flexible busbars and cables are not allowed) unless the MCCB or ACB’s frame size
is greater than 600 Amperes, in this case, the electrical link shall be rigid busbars. I.
Fastenings between structural members are to be bolted.
J. Extension of structure and busbars is to be possible at either end of switchboard.
K. The functional units and busbars shall be arranged inside the panels in which manner to
permit to the incoming and outgoing busducts and cables to enter enclosure as indicated on
the Drawings and connect at respective terminals without inconvenience to installation or
maintenance.

Neom community
L. Suitable arrangements and equipment are to be provided for extracting, lifting and unloading
functional units from enclosures as appropriate for type of switchgear.
M. SPARE AND SPACE POSITIONS are defined as follows:

1. Spare position: fully equipped enclosure with switchgear.
2. Space position: fully equipped enclosure ready to receive switchgear with all necessary
accessories.
2.3 BUSBARS
A. The Busbars Shall be rigid, fully rated and have the same rating of main circuit breaker frame
size plus 30%, and braced for a symmetrical RMS short- circuit duty equal to or higher than
main circuit breaker interrupting duty, for minimum of one second unless otherwise specified
or shown on the Drawings.
B. Busbars are to be copper of sufficient size to limit temperature rise to allowable insulation or
equipment temperature ratings, and to maximum 30°C above average ambient temperature
of 45°C outside enclosure.
C. Connections and buswork are to be bolted with copper alloy hardware and are to be
accessible for inspection and maintenance. Moreover the connections from busbars to
switchgears are to be rated to carry full continuous current rating of switchgears frames and
are to be insulated.
D. The Neutral Busbar shall have the same rating of phase Busbars and shall be continuous
through all sections. Neutral bus is to be insulated and separate from earth bus and connected
to it with removable links.
E. The Earth Bus is to extend to the full length of the board and shall be firmly fixed to each
section in accordance with the Regulations and standards. The Earth Bus shall be complete
with two main earthing lugs (one at each end), and required number of feeder protective earth
connectors.
2.4 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)
A. MCCBs GENERALLY are to be thermal- magnetic type for ratings below 400 A frame size,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. MCCBs 400 A and larger are to be electronic solid-
state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 4 poles. Where indicated on drawings, the MCCBs
and ACBs shall be with external toroid and adjustable earth leakage relay (adjustable time delay
and sensitivity). When used for source changeover, MCCBs, ACBs, moulded case switch
disconnectors or air switch disconnectors shall be 4 poles.
B. MCCB CONSTRUCTION: totally enclosed, moulded case, constructed from high quality, high
temperature resistant, tropicalized, moulded insulating materials, for normal operation at 70°C
within enclosures, to approved standards, provided with quick-break, trip- free switching
mechanism manually operated by front toggle type handle and automatically tripped under over-
current and short circuits conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have common integral trip bar for
simultaneous operation of all poles. Contacts are to be non-construction. Cables terminals are
to be solderless anti-turn box lug or clamp type with set screws suitable for copper or aluminum
cables.
C. THERMAL MAGNETIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS: are to include, on each pole, a bimetallic inverse
time-delay over-current trip element for small overloads and instantaneous magnetic over-
current trip elements for operation under short- circuit conditions. Circuit breakers 250 A frame
size or where shown on drawings, shall have adjustable short time trips (I m).
D. THERMAL OVERCURRENT TRIPS: are to be compensated to allow for ambient temperature

higher at breaker than at protected circuit or device. Compensation is to be applicable between
25 and 50°C. In case of adjustable thermal settings, range of adjustment is not to exceed
maximum trip rating shown on the Drawings.

Neom community
E. ELECTRONIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS: unless otherwise specified on drawings, electronic

trip circuit breakers are to have solid state trip units with long time delay setting range at least
between 0.4 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, adjustable short time delay (range 2 to 10 times
maximum trip rating) with adjustable clearing time and instantaneous protection adjustable from
2 to 11 times continuous rating (fixed at 11 times continuous rating for circuit breakers 250A
frame and lower). Solid state trip units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature
between -20 and + 55°C. Earth fault protection (where indicated on drawings and/or
specifications) is to be built into trip unit, and is to be adjustable between 0.2 and 0.6 normal
phase current pickup. Maximum adjustable time delay of 0.4 seconds, and is to be suitable for
connection to external current sensor. Push- to- trip button is to be provided on cover for testing
the trip unit. Electronic trip units for frame size 400 Amps are to have current (I1, I2, I3,
IN, Iearth fault, Iearth leakage) measurement and display while electronic trip units for frame sizes
630 Amps and larger are to have power (current measurement, V, kW, kVA, kVAR, Wh, pF,
Vpeak, Apeak) measurement and display.
F. TRIPPED POSITION: when tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating

mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by the
handle between on and off positions.
G. INTERCHANGEABLE TRIPS: Circuit breakers 100 A to 630 A frame sizes are to have
interchangeable thermal and electronic trip units.
H. SEALING: non- interchangeable trip circuit breakers are to have sealed covers. Circuit breakers
with interchangeable trips are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent tampering.
I. CIRCUIT BREAKER RATINGS: are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC 947- 2, sequence II
(rated service short- circuit) breaking capacity, and maximum trip rating as shown on the
Drawings. Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 947- 2 test
sequence I, II and III for circuit breakers of utilization category A for circuit breakers with frame
size 630 A and less.
Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 947-2 test
sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B (with intended short time
withstand capability) for circuit breakers with frame size 800 A and larger including air circuit
breakers (ACB)
J. ACCESSORIES: circuit breaker design is to allow addition of electrical operator, control and
interlocking functions, undervoltage release, shunt- trip coils, alarm and auxiliary switches,
padlocking devices, key-lock devices and the like. Such accessories are to be provided where
2.5 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ACBs)
A. GENERAL:
a. The ACBs shall comply with IEC 947-2.

b. The ACBs are to be electronic solid- state trip type. All circuit breakers are to be 4
poles (protected) unless otherwise shown on drawings.
c. The breaking capacity performance certificates shall be available for category B to
the above mentioned standards. The test shall be carried out with a breaking
performance during operation (Ics) and admissible short time withstand (Icw) equal
to the ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).
d. The ACBs must be able to be supplied both from the top and bottom terminals without
reduction in performance and without jeopardizing their functionality.
e. All ACBs shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as standard.

Neom community
f. The ACBs shall comply with the isolating function requirements of IEC 947-2 section
7.1.2.
g. The ACBs shall have a rated service voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz) and a rated
voltage of 1000V.
h. The ACBs shall have a rated impulse withstand voltage of 12KV.
B. CONSTRUCTION:
a. The air circuit breakers shall be designed to be maintained;

b. They shall be available in fixed or drawout models and in three or four poles versions.
On four poles version, from 800 up to 4000Amps, the neutral pole shall have the
same current rating as the other poles and half of the current rating from 5000 to
6300Amps.
c. The main contacts of the air circuit breakers shall be encased in a reinforced polyester
casing and offer double insulation from the operators on the breaker front face. The
circuit breaker also shall offer total insulation of the control part with respect to the
power part.
d. The operating mechanism shall be of the opening-closing-opening (O.C.O.) stored
energy spring type with a closing time of less than or equal to 80ms.
e. The springs are charged manually by operating the front lever or using a motor
operator. In the case of motor charged spring, the maximum time to charge the
springs shall not exceed four seconds, it shall also be possible to charge the springs
manually.
f. Contacts shall be designed to be maintenance free in normal usage.
g. On the front level, the circuit breakers must indicate the exact position of the main
contacts and the condition of springs (charged/discharged) by means of precise and
reliable signals without measurements or specific tools.
h. Arc chutes shall be common on the whole range and removable on site to allow
inspection of arc chutes and main contacts.
i. Draw-out mechanism:
General:
Three positions of the moving part shall be possible:
o Connected position – all auxiliary and main circuits engaged.
o Test position – all auxiliary circuits engaged, all main circuits
disconnected.
o Isolated position – all circuits disconnected.
Safety requirements:
A door interlock shall be provided so that it shall not be possible to open the door until
the air circuit breaker moving part is in the disconnected position.
Insulated safety shutters shall be provided over the incoming and outgoing main
circuits and over the auxiliary circuits. An interlocking shall be provided to prevent
insertion of a circuit breaker having a rating higher than the current rating of the fixed
part, into that fixed part.
The racking handle shall be stowed on the air circuit breaker in such a manner as to
be accessible without defeating the door interlocking.
The safety perimeter shall be reduced to zero for the drawout version above and to
the sides of the ACB.
C. ELECTRONIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

Neom community
a. General requirements:
The overcurrent relay shall be a solid state type
• It shall be microprocessor based and use digital programming techniques for highest
accuracy and be integrated as part of the circuit breaker;
• The sensors and the wiring shall be integrated within the case;
• The overcurrent relay shall be self powered;
• The current sensors shall be located within the case of the circuit breaker;
The overcurrent relay shall have a wide adjustment range to allow flexibility of setting on
site. The trip unit shall measure the true RMS value of any waveform of current.
The control unit shall be equipped with a push to reset mechanical indicator. For anti-
pumping function the control unit may communicate with other equipment on a
communication BUS.
b. Characteristics:
• Long time protection (LT): o Adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 of the sensor rating (In); o
Time delay adjustable.
• Short time protection (ST): o Adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times the long time
protection setting (Ir); o Time delay adjustable;
o Time inverse characteristic (I2t) may be switched in order to improve

discrimination.
• Instantaneous (INST) o Adjustable from 2 times up to:
o At least 15 times the rated current for sensor ratings up to 2000 Amps; o At
least 10 times the rated current for sensor ratings above 2000 Amps. c. Control
functions:
In order to optimize the operation, maintenance and monitoring of the breaker in

complete safety, the following standard control items shall be supplied as an integral part
of the control unit:
• Local overcurrent LED indication with 2 levels – LED steady or flashing – on the front
face and one volt free output contact shall indicate as a pre trip alarm;
• Two NO and two NC output contacts plus one CO fault trip contact (SDE) shall be
available;
• Thermal memory: The control unit shall optimize the protection of the equipment or
the circuit conductors in the event of repeated overloads or faults by using thermal
integration to memorize temperature rises;
• Safety: internal overheating of the control unit shall be signaled.
d. Power Parameters Measurements: All electronic trip units for ACB or Air switch
disconnectors are have power (I1, I2, I3, IN, Iearth fault, Iearth leakage, V, kW, kVA, kVAR,
Wh, pF, Vpeak, Apeak) measurement and display.
e. Options:
Without increasing the volume it shall be possible to combine the following functions into
the air circuit breaker control unit:
• Load monitoring and control: Two adjustable settings with output contacts shall be
available. These settings to be related to the long time protection setting;

Neom community
• Zone selective interlocking for the short time and earth fault protection;
• Earth fault protection;
• Remote indication of one particular fault as selected by a switch on front face;
• Fault trip indication – indicating the element (long time, short time/instantaneous, earth
fault protection if supplied) that has caused the circuit to trip, indicated locally by a led;
• Communication:
The data or action needed for the control and indication functions shall be available on
a BUS via a specific modular system, ie:
o Circuit breaker state; o Control unit settings; o Cause of circuit breaker trip;
o Circuit breaker operation.
D. CIRCUIT BREAKER RATINGS: are to be non-current limiting, fully rated (100%) with continuous
duty at site conditions, and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC 947- 2, sequence II
(rated service short- circuit) breaking capacity, and maximum trip rating as shown on the
Drawings.
Interrupting capacities at specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 947-2 test
sequence I, II, III and IV for circuit breakers of utilization category B (with intended short time
withstand capability) for air circuit breakers (ACB).
E. ACCESSORIES:
a. Electrical accessories:
All electrical accessories including the motor spring charging mechanism shall be field
adaptable without adjustment or the necessity for any tool (except a screwdriver). They
shall be fitted into a compartment which under normally loaded conditions has metalwork
energized from the main poles exposed with it. Thus any adaptation carried out shall not
increase the breaker volume.
It shall be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the face of the air circuit breaker;
this wiring shall be taken through a set of disconnecting contacts, so that all auxiliary
wiring is automatically disconnected in the isolated position.
b. Mechanical indicators
Mechanical indication on the front of the air circuit breaker shall be provided to
indicate the following:
• Main contacts closed “ON”;

• Mains contacts open “OFF”;
• Springs charged;
• Springs discharged;
• Circuit breaker in “connected” position (drawout only);
• Circuit breaker in “test” position (drawout only); Circuit breaker in “disconnected”
position (drawout only).
All indicators must be clearly visible.

Neom community
2.6 DIGITAL POWER METERING INSTRUMENTS
A. GENERALLY: Power meters shall combine the following functions in a single unit:
1. True RMS measurements up to the 31st harmonic for voltage, current, frequency, power
and power factor.
2. Measurement of power quality, i.e. the level of harmonic distortion (THD) in voltage
and current.
3. Metering of active and reactive energy.
4. Indication and control via two output relays that can be assigned to power or power
factor to trip alarms or initiate load shedding.
5. Transmittal of all the measurements indicated below to the BAS system and a software
suite from the power meter manufacturer (to be supplied); over RS-485 Modbus with
one RS-485 to Ethernet TCP/IP interface to be provided for all power meters in the
project.
B. MEASUREMENTS
1. Phase to neutral voltages (V1N, V2N, V3N): 115 to 500 VAC, 1% accuracy.
2. Phase to phase voltages (U12, U23, U31): 115 to 500 VAV, 1% accuracy.
3. Currents (I1, I2, I3 and IN): 15 to 2500 A, 1% accuracy.
4. Maximum Current.
5. Frequency: 45 to 65 HZ, 0,02% accuracy.
6. Power factor: 1,5% accuracy.
7. Active Power: 1,5 accuracy.
8. Reactive Power: 1,5% accuracy.
9. Apparent Power: 1,5% accuracy.
10. Active energy consumed.
11. Reactive energy consumed.
12. Apparent energy consumed.
13. Reset of meters (including maximeter).
14. Harmonic distortion of currents I1, I2, I3 and IN: 1% accuracy.
15. Harmonic distortion of voltages V1N, V2N, V3N, U12, U23 and U31: 1% accuracy.
16. Assignment of output relays for power (active, reactive, apparent), demand power and
power factor.
17. Measurement shall be available on the front panel of the power meter, by an LCD
screen.
C. Mechanical Characteristics:
1. Degree of protection IP 40.
2. Vibrations FC test: 2 to 13,2 HZ-1 mm and 13,2 to 100 HZ-0,7 g.
3. Operating temperature: -20 to +55 °C.
2.7 WIRING
A. ARRANGEMENT: wiring is to be modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal boards

with suitable numbering strips and appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Terminal
boards shall be WAGO or approved equal.
B. CONNECTIONS: are to be made at front of terminal boards and with no live metal exposed.
C. METAL CASES: of instruments, control switches, relays etc. Are to be connected, by bare
copper conductors’ not less than 2.5 mm 2 section, to nearest earthing bar.
D. CONTROL WIRING: copper. PVC insulated, 85 °C rated, 600 V grade, and PVC sheathed
for multi- core cables running from the control terminal blocks to outside the panel. Finely
stranded copper conductor, silicon rubber insulated cables are to be used inside the panel.

Neom community
E. FERRULES: wires are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
A. SCHEMATIC AND WIRING DIAGRAM: is to be provided suitably located within each cubicle.
PART 3 - MAINS FAILURE AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATS)
A. TYPE: wall or floor mounted, compartmentalized Form 2B (unless otherwise indicated on

drawings) as per IEC EN 61439-1 & 2, galvanized sheet steel cubicle of equal construction
to control cubicle, comprising contactors with manual by-pass switches or withdrawable air
circuit breakers (as specified on drawings) and controls necessary for automatic transfer of
power supply from normal source to standby source, voltage sensing control relay and time
delay relays to signal generators start and stop, auxiliary switches and indicating lights etc.
as necessary for the required operation of the system.
B. For Main Automatic Transfer Switch of the general services or Emergency services; the
change-over components (contractor or circuit breaker pair) with its associated input circuit
breakers, disconnect switches, relays…etc shall be grouped in a separate compartment. In
the case the ATS includes a manual by-pass system; each changeover component of the
manual by-pass (example: interlocked manual transfer switch); shall be in a separate
compartment.
C. For the individual Automatic Transfer Switches of tenants; each ATS and associated
input/output circuit breakers, disconnect switches, relays…etc shall be grouped in a separate
compartment. Terminals for external conductors shall be installed in the separate and
common cable compartment.
D. The busbars shall be rigid and fully sized. The electrical link from the main busbars to each
switchgear or control gear could be by rigid or flexible insulated busbars unless the switchgear
or control gear’s frame size is greater than 600 Amperes. In this case, the electrical link shall
be rigid busbars (the electrical link within the same functional unit have to be done by rigid
busbars, flexible busbars and cables are not allowed).
E. All compartments shall have glazed doors except for busbars & cable compartments. If each
functional unit is arranged in a separate compartment or where the disconnecting element’s
toggle shall be extended to outside the compartment than a solid door shall be provided for
each compartment. If Plexiglas (or any other material) is used for segregation, it has to be fire
retardant.
F. OPERATION: when voltage and/or frequency of any phase drops below an adjustable setting
(85- 100%) of normal supply for an adjustable period of 1- 300 seconds, power failure relay
is to actuate engine starting control, whilst normal mains contactor or breaker is to open. After
an adjustable period of 0- 10 seconds from sensing stabilized rated voltage and frequency of
the generator(s) at the ATS, Voltage pickup adjustable from 85% to 100% nominal;
frequency pickup adjustable from 90% to 100% nominal, the emergency contactor or
breaker is to close. Upon restoration of normal mains supply to above the preset limits,
adjustable between 90% and 100% of rated voltage and/ or frequency the emergency
contactor or breaker is to open and after a presentable pause 0.5 to 30 seconds minimum,
normal mains contactor or breaker is to close; time delay is to be effective in both directions.
G. ENGINE SHUTDOWN: is to be initiated of the load to normal source (Refer to generator set
controls upon shutdown).

Neom community
H. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS: are to prevent contactors/ circuit breakers

from being closed simultaneously at any time. Transfer mechanism is to be powered from the
source to which the load is being transferred.
I. SELECTOR SWITCHES: are to be provided as follows:

1. Operating selector switch is to include the following:
a. Normal: Generator set is set for automatic operation and the generator set starts if
a power outage occurs, as described above.
b. Test: Stimulates a power outage, starts and runs the generating set as Normal
position.
c. Stop: Shuts down the generating set and prevents it from starting. This is used
when servicing the generator.
d. Another selector switch is to be provided for two positions, “With load” and “without
load” for testing or exercising:
 “With load”: the generating set is to carry the load during testing or
exercising periods.
 “Without load”: generating set is to start but not assume the load. J.
PILOT LIGHTS (LEDS): are to indicate which contactor / circuit breaker is
closed.
K. INSTRUMENTS: are to include power meters (as specified).
L. CONTACTORS (in case of air circuit breakers or air switch disconnectors, refer to relevant
sections): are to comply with IEC 947, and UL standard 1008, and be 3- phase, 4- pole, magnetic
type, 600 V rating, capable of interrupting at least ten times rated current inductive or non-
inductive loads under normal service conditions and are to have replaceable main arcing
contacts and arc quenching devices. Contactors are to withstand, without welding or burning of
contacts, an inrush current of 20 times normal rating for 4 seconds upon closing and are to be
capable of closing on the heaviest short- circuit of the system and withstand the short circuit for
period required by upstream short circuit protective device to operate. Three N.O. and three N.C.
Spare contacts are to be provided on each contractor.
M. WIRING: moisture and heat resistant, silicon rubber insulated, stranded copper conductors,
modularly and neatly arranged on master terminal blocks, with suitable numbering strips and
appropriate cartridge type fuses where required. Flexible wiring is to be used on all hinged/ draw-
out components.
N. CONNECTIONS: are to be made at a front terminal block with no live metal exposed. Power
cables are to terminate on fixed insulated copper connectors suitably sized to receive specified
cables. Cables glands and gland plates are to be provided.
O. METAL CASES: of instruments, control switches, relays etc. are to be connected by flexible
protective conductors, of not less than 2.5 mm 2 sections, to nearest earthing bar or terminal.
P. EARTHING: earthing bar is to be provided for connection of protective earthing conductors, using
set- screw or bolted anti-turn pressure terminations.
Q. FERRULES: wire ends are to be fitted with numbered ferrules of approved type at each
termination.

Neom community
4.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive SMDBs & MDBs for compliance with requirements,
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Inspect equipment upon delivery to site and report any damage to the Engineer.
2. Inspect and check switchgear for completeness, component ratings, types, sizes, and
wiring connections. Check phasing of busbars, contacts and clearances.
3. Ensure that concrete bases and foundations provided for installation of equipment are
constructed in accordance with approved shop and equipment manufacturers’
drawings and the holes needed for fixing bolts and provisions for passage of cables
etc… are provided as required.
4. Ensure that trench construction and covers provided for installation of power and
control cables are in accordance with approved shop and construction drawings.
5. Ensure that equipment supports, fixings and the like, and sleeves for passage of
feeders and cables which are to be built into concrete foundations, bases, cable
trenches or building structure are provided as and when required and that they are
properly installed.
4.2 INSTALLATION
A. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Install MDBs and SMDBs according to accepted and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install panel boards on concrete bases etc…, and assemble completely plumb and level,
before grouting in holding- down bolts.
D. Install all incoming and outgoing cable supports, cables ends and termination fittings required
for power and control cables.
E. Electronic trip units and relays shall be set in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and
in accordance with an approved scheme.
F. The damaged painted surfaces shall be cleaned and painted by rust inhibiting prime coat and
two finishing coats of approved enamel upon delivery of equipment to site, or as required by
the Engineer.
4.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to Division
16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."
B. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning.
C. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for MDBs & SMDBs, including
control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal
and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of MDBs & SMDBs.
4.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten MDBs & SMDBs bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Such that system is compliant to IEC EN
61439-1, 2 & 3 for Factory-Built assemblies with certified Design Verification (as indicated on
BOQ and drawings).

Neom community
4.5 TESTS ON SITE
A. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in corresponding
IEC standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Inspect interior and exterior of MDBs and SMDBs. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices
internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. C. Remove and
replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
D. After installation, visual and mechanical inspection, and before hand over, carry out all tests
required by the governing codes and any other tests the Engineer may require to check
compliance of installation with the Specification, including insulation resistance tests and
operational tests.
E. The main and control circuits shall be tested using 1000 V megger (2000 Megohm range),
check insulation resistance between phases, between phases and earth/ enclosure and
between neutral and earth.
F. PRIMARY INJECTION TESTS: provide portable test equipment to test time- delay
characteristics of circuit breakers by simulating an overload or faults condition. Measure and
record all test results and ambient conditions and compare with manufacturer’s data.
G. The breakers’ trip units (instantaneous, long and short overload protection) shall be tested by
high current primary injection, using high- current primary injection test- sets and report all
readings.
H. Routine tests on site are to be carried out on every main and sub-main distribution board in
accordance with the Standard specified (IEC EN 61439) for FBAs (feeder branch assembly)
assembled from standardized components outside the works of the manufacturer. Routine
tests are also to be carried out on every FBA, delivered to site, if requested by the Engineer.
I. THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY: all current carrying components should be subject to a

thermographic survey prior to certification and handling over. Values obtained by the
thermographic survey should be compliant to the applicable standards and manufacturer
recommendations.
4.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate functional units,

and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Include training

relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures. Schedule training with at least
7 days' advance notice.

Neom community
SECTION 16442 – SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION BOARDSGENERAL
B. Where Paragraphs of this Section conflict with similar paragraphs of the General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, requirements of this Section shall prevail.
herein, indicated on the drawings and as necessary for the proper and complete
performance of work and conformance with all applicable code requirements.
B. Section Includes:
1. LDP: Distribution board supplying the lighting circuits.
2. PDP: Distribution board supplying the power circuits.
3. IPS: Distribution board with in built isplating transformer and monitoring devices for
insulation faults for critical areas
4. UDP: Distribution board supplying the circuits fed from UPS system.
5. CP: Power Distribution board for special medical equipment.
A. Unless otherwise mentioned panel boards generally are to comply with the requirements of
IEC EN 61439-1, 2 & 3 for Factory-Built assemblies with certified Design Verification (as
indicated on BOQ and drawings).
B. Miniature circuit breakers are to comply with IEC 898.
C. Molded case circuit breakers are to comply with IEC 947-2.
D. Other components, where not otherwise specified, are to comply with the relevant IEC
standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. EQUIPMENT DATA: submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Manufacturers' catalogues indicating specific equipment selected.
2. Types of panel boards and circuit breaker characteristics including duties and ratings
compensation at and above 50°C ambient conditions and corresponding temperatures
within the enclosures.
3. Dimensions of panels and specific contents of each panel board.
4. Integrated equipment tabulations for coordinated short-circuit series combinations of
circuit breakers (cascading and discrimination).
B. TESTS AND CERTIFICATES: submit complete certified manufacturer's type test and routine
test records in accordance with the Standards.
C. SHOP AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: submit drawings for approval including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

Neom community
2. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.
3. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
4. Cable terminal sizes.
5. Exact composition of each panel board, indicating busbar rating, frame or continuous
rating and trip ratings of circuit breakers.
6. Typical installation details of panel boards, indicating main feeder and branch circuit
conduit connections, terminal provisions, tags, labels, mounting methods and materials
used.
D. All protecting device shall show: the Short circuit current value, the voltage drop, the indirect
protection function in case of a fault with respect to the earthing system.
E. Panel board Schedules: For installation in panel boards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panel boards and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division
01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective
devices.
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent
protective device that allows adjustments.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts,

B. Source Limitations: Obtain similar DBs, EDs & UDBs devices through one source from a
single manufacturer.
C. Comply with IEC EN 60439 & IEC 364 for construction form as indicated on drawings.
Additionally, comply with local regulations.
D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for DBs,
EDs & UDBs, including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and items,
and are based on types and models indicated.
A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panel boards; install temporary
electric heating (250 W per panel board) to prevent condensation.
B. Handle and prepare panel boards for installation according to the relevant IEC standard.
C. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Protect equipment throughout construction from damage, weather, excessive temperature,

and construction operations.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations:
1. Do not deliver or install panel boards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet
work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panel boards is complete,

Neom community
and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction
period.
2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless
otherwise indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 5°C to plus 50°C.
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000 m.
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than five days in advance of proposed
interruption of electric service.
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Construction Manager's
written permission.
1.8 ELECTRICAL CLOSETS
A. Closets are to be checked for clearances, spaces and ventilation, for the installation of proposed
equipment, prior to starting construction. Doors shall not be wider than 60cm. If closet door(s)’
width is larger than 60cm then 2 doors arrangement shall be provided instead such that no
door width exceeds 60cm.
1.9 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement and one year’s
1. One set of fixed and moving contact for every type of replaceable (consumable) contact
set.
2. One operating motor and/ or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker
or contactor.
3. Miniature circuit breakers: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed,
but not less than one unit of each type.
4. Modular Contactors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but
5. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs etc.
1.10 WARRANTY
1. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made
by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
2. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Contractor and manufacturer, agreeing
to replace any component of the system / panelboard assemblies that do not meet
3. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component of
the system.

Neom community
A. APPROVED ENCLOSURE AND BUSBAR SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS: subject to

compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain secondary distribution board
enclosure and busbar system, from one of the following; subject to PTTA licensing conditions
set by the manufacturer with respect to compatibility with switchgear and controlgear brand,
type and make. Panelbuilder shall be a specialized institution, licensed for the submitted
brand for more than 5 years and be established as a Panelbuilder for more than 10 years:
4. Legrand (France
5. Holec (Holland)
6. Logstrup (Denmark)

Neom community
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANEL BOARDS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. RATED INSULATION VOLTAGE is to be in accordance with the respective Standards.
2. PANELBOARDS are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection code IP 42,
IK08 for indoor installations surface mounted, IP 41, IK08 for indoor installations recess
mounted, IP 55, IK10 for indoor installations subject to egress and IP 65, IK10 for
outdoor installations, in accordance with IEC 529, and are to be factory designed and
assembled. The requested construction forms as per IEC EN 61439-1 & 2 is «Form
2B» without taking into account that the outer case of a device i.e. an MCCB is an
acceptable segregation means.
3. EARTHING BAR is to be provided in every panel board.
4. PROTECTION is to be fully rated throughout the systems.
5. SERIES (CASCADE) AND DISCRIMINATION COORDINATED PROTECTION. All
calculation notes shall show the conformity of the protective devices to the « cascading
» and discrimination characteristics and levels.
6. CIRCUIT BREAKERS are to be non-fused type.
7. CIRCUIT BREAKER ARRANGEMENT: panel boards are to have one main incoming
circuit breaker or switch disconnector and the required number of branch circuit
breakers, arranged as shown on the Schedules, including spare circuit breakers and
spaces for future expansion. Three or four-phase panelboards are to be designed for
sequence phase connection of branch circuit devices. The electrical circuits for sockets
up to 32A shall be protected with an earth leakage circuit breaker with 30mA sensitive
trip, same protection shall be applied to the lighting circuit of bathrooms unless class II
and/or extra low voltage (12 volts) lighting fittings are used with Class II isolation
transformers (IEC 603647-701 zone requirements for bathrooms are to be
implemented).
B. PANELBOARD ENCLOSURES
1. TYPE: general purpose type, suitable for relevant ambient conditions, flush or surface
mounted as shown on the Drawings, comprising box, trim, or trim and door to approved
manufacturer's standards and sizes.
2. CONSTRUCTION: box, trim and doors where required, are to be electrogalvanized
sheet steel of gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the Standards.
Welded joints are to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to
the Standards, but are not to be less than 100 mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have
predesigned angles or threaded end studs to support and adjust mounting of interior
panelboard assembly. Enclosures shall have glazed doors.
3. TRIMS are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by
quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of
box is not acceptable). Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush.
Trims for flush mounted panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least
20 mm. Trims for surface mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush
fit to box.
4. DOORS are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder
lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple
point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike. Enclosures shall have glazed
doors.
5. FINISH: inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid
and alkali solvents, grease, ageing and corrosion and of Grey RAL 7032 color unless
specifically agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
6. DIRECTORY under glass, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to be
provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors is

Neom community
specified. Directories are to be typed to identify panelboards and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of load.
7. INDOOR ENCLOSURE: sheet steel, minimum 1.0 mm thick for box/cabinet and
minimum 1.5 mm thick for front shield, trim and door. Fixings for flush trim are to be
adjustable to allow for mis-alignment between box and wall surface. Wiring spaces
(gutters) are to be at least 100 mm wide. Larger gutters are to be provided where tap-
off insulated split connectors are required. Knockouts are to be provided in top or
bottom of enclosures and are to provide a neat and uniform conduit/cable terminal
arrangement.
8. OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5
mm thick, fully weatherproofed (IP 65), without knockouts, but with removable
sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors. Outdoor panel boards shall
include anti-condensation heaters and all panel boards shall be thermally studied.
C. BUSBARS
1. TYPE: one piece, 98% pure electrolytic copper, based on maximum total temperature
rise of 50°C over an ambient of 50°C at full continuous rating. Bolted contact surfaces
are to have maximum current density not exceeding requirements of the approved
standards. Aluminium is not to be used for busbars or panelboard parts.
2. DESIGN: busbars are to be shrouded/insulated and rigidly designed so that branch
circuit devices can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or changed without
additional machining, drilling or tapping. Busbars are to be full size without reduction.
Busbar System and blank plates are to allow installation of future circuit devices, where
indicated on the Drawings.
3. RATING: busbar rating is to be at least equal to main-circuit breaker frame size plus
20%. Where no main circuit breaker is required, busbars are to have main lugs or
disconnect switch, with nominal rating equal to standard circuit breaker frame sizes,
and as shown on the Drawings.
4. SHORT-CIRCUIT DUTY: busbars are to carry maximum short-circuit duty of main
protective device, which is to be at least maximum short-circuit at point of application
for one second, without showing any signs of degradation.
5. TERMINALS AND CONNECTIONS are to be anti-turn, solderless screw-pressure
type. Screws and bolts used for making copper/copper connections are to be hard
copper alloy with lock washers (riveted bus connections are not acceptable).
6. NEUTRAL BAR is to be solid and fully insulated from cabinet or box. One solderless
box type set-screw connector is to be provided for neutral wire of each branch circuit
and one bolted clamp-type connector or anti-turn lug with set-screw for main incoming
neutral wire. Neutral is to be fully sized and rated as for phase busbars.
7. EARTHING BAR is to be copper, brazed to panelboard cabinet, with bolted pressure
connector for main conductor and one set-screw-type tunnel terminal for each outgoing
conductor, to provide secure and reliable contact with all metal parts and enclosure.
2.2 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCBs)

1. TYPE: tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from
high quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalized, molded insulating materials, for
normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application, and
provided with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual operation
of main contacts in addition to automatic operation under overcurrent and short circuits
conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous
operation of all poles. Ampere
rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box lug or clamp type with set screws,
suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
2. CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP UNITS: unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings,
circuit breakers up to and including 400 A frame size, are to be thermal-magnetic type,
having bi-metallic inverse time delay overcurrent element for small overloads and
instantaneous magnetic overcurrent trip element for operation under short-circuit

Neom community
conditions on each pole. Circuit breakers 250 A and larger are to have adjustable
instantaneous trips. Where solid state electronic trip circuit breakers are required these
are indicated in the Schedules suffixed with the designation SSTU.
3. SWITCHING MECHANISM: quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free
operation so that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual
or automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-
quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
4. TRIP CURRENT RATING (AMPS) indicates nominal maximum rating at which overload
element is set to operate.
5. MCCBs FOR SDB: To comply with IEC947-2 test sequences I, II, III, utilization category
A, and are to have rated service short circuit breaking capacities to meet the electrical
requirements at the panel board location.
6. FRAME SIZE is defined as maximum continuous current rating of circuit breaker which
corresponds with its maximum trip range and which is to be related to minimum
acceptable short-circuit interrupting ratings, based on fully rated interrupting duties:
normal duty (N), high break (H), or current limiting (L), as specified.
7. FRAME SIZES are generally to be selected (according to schedules and drawings
indications) with minimum interrupting capacities and discrimination considerations at
specified voltages and rated frequency, in accordance with the calculations showing for
each protective device (the circuit breaker) its minimum rating, frame size and
discrimination level. The shop drawings shall indicate these values and should be
justified by the contractor.
8. TRIPPED POSITION: when tripped automatically by overcurrent condition, operating
mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated by
the handle between on and off positions.
9. INTERCHANGEABLE TRIPS: thermal-magnetic trip circuit breakers 100 A frame size to
600/630 A frame size are to have interchangeable trip units.
10. SEALING: circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
11. COMPENSATION: thermal overcurrent trips are to be ambient temperature
compensated between 25 and 50 deg. C.
12. ELECTRONIC TRIPS UNITS, unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings are
applicable to circuit breakers 400 A frame size and larger, are to be solid state with long
time delay settings between 0.4 and 1.0 times maximum trip rating, short time delay
range of 2 to 10 times maximum trip rating with a maximum clearing time of 0.2 seconds,
and instantaneous protection adjustable from 2 to 11 times continuous rating (fixed at
11 times continuous rating for circuit breakers 250A frame and lower). Solid state trip
units are to be insensitive to changes in ambient temperature between -20 and +55 deg.
C. Earth fault protection is to be built into trip unit where specified and is to be adjustable
between 0.2 and 0.6 normal phase current pick-up. Maximum adjustable time delay shall
be 0.4 seconds, and is to be suitable for connection to external current sensor. Push-
to-trip button is to be provided on cover for testing the trip unit.
13. RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED EARTH LEAKAGE TRIP DEVICES (RCDs) are
provided as add-on or built-in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown
on the Drawings. Protection against earth fault current, in addition to overcurrent and
short-circuit protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip current
sensitivity on breakers for branch circuits is to be 30 mA, and for main breakers ratings
are to be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers are to include current transformer
with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to ensure circuit breaker
cannot be held closed against earth faults.
14. CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS: molded case type without fusible elements.
When operating within current limiting range, the I2t of let-through current is to be less
than 1/2 cycle wave of symmetrical protective short-circuit current as compatible with
breaker construction.
15. CURRENT LIMITING CIRCUIT BREAKERS are to have, on each pole, adjustable
inverse time-delay over-current characteristics for overload protection and
instantaneous trip for short-circuit protection. Operation of main contacts is to be based

Neom community
on electro-magnetic repulsion forces between contacts created by fault current. Ratings

are specified at rated voltage for an rms value of prospective short-circuits current.
B. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCBs)

1. TYPE: thermal magnetic non-adjustable type, tested in accordance with IEC 947.2 & IEC
898. Breaker type and short circuit interrupting ratings are mentioned on design drawings.
2. MINIMUM SHORT-CIRCUIT BREAKING CAPACITIES are to be as shown on drawings.
Contractor to check and confirm those levels (according to final equipment location:
Transformers, MDBs, Panel Boards….)
3. CONSTRUCTION: MCBs are to be tropicalized for operation at ambient temperatures up
to 70°C within panel board enclosure and humidities up to 95%, and are to be constructed
from high quality, high temperature, moulded insulating materials. Guaranteed duties and
characteristics are to be submitted for temperatures above 50°C. MCBs and
combinational devices are to be modular, of unified profile and mounted to a standard DIN
rail.
4. OPERATION: under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of
insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip is to operate at 5-10
times normal rated current (curve C characteristic). Magnetic operation is to be in the
current limiting region and opening time is not to exceed 5 milli-seconds.
5. RATINGS: preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80 and 100
A, calibrated at 50°C, available as 1, 1+N, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers. Derating above
50°C is not to exceed 1% per degree Celsius, and loading is not to exceed 70% of circuit
breaker rating.
6. RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICES for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be
add-on devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
sensitivities of 30 mA, 100 mA, 300 mA and 500 mA are to be available for all ratings of
1+N, 2-pole, 3 poles and 4-pole circuit breakers.
7. AUXILIARIES, where required or shown on the Drawings, are to include alarm switch,
auxiliary switch, shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular
additions to the circuit breakers.
C. MOLDED CASE SWITCH (MCS)

1. MOULDED CASE SWITCH: non-automatic on/off switching device of equal construction to
equivalent circuit breaker, having no overcorrect or fault protective elements, but marked
with maximum current withstand and voltage rating.
D. MODULAR CONTRACTORS FOR SECONDARY PANEL BOARDS

1. Comply with section 16140 of the specification: wiring devices and disconnects.
2.3 PANELBOARDS ARRANGEMENT
A. GENERAL:
1. To comprise set of homogeneous branch circuit breakers with unified profile and base,
one main circuit breaker or switch (as shown on drawings). Circuit breakers or other
devices are to occupy modular spaces. Accommodation of contactors and split-bus
arrangement or other devices is not to change regularity of standard box width.
B. ARRANGEMENT IN CASE OF MCBs FINAL BRANCH CIRCUITS

1. INTERNAL ASSEMBLY: to comprise removable back plate or back pan of rigid
construction, attached to enclosure by four captive screws through keyhole fixings, and
provided with DIN rails in horizontal arrangement for single and three phase panels.
Assembly is to be complete with earthing bar and one piece insulated bolt-on or comb-
type phase busbar. Busbars are to be single phase, single phase and neutral, 3 phase
or 3-phase and neutral with spade connectors for fixing by tightening a single screw on
circuit breaker. Insulation is to be high thermal rating, capable of carrying maximum
short-circuit current for one second without overheating beyond acceptable limits
required by the Standards. Panelboards are to comply with IEC EN 61439-1 & 2
standard. If the busbars rating exceeds 100 Amp (where the frame size of the main
breaker is larger than 100 Amps), comb busbars shall not be used but still clause 2.1.C
of this specification shall apply.

Neom community
2. SINGLE PHASE TYPE PANELBOARDS are to be suitable for 240 V maximum service
voltage, single-phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and main incoming.
3. SINGLE PHASE TYPE PANEL BOARD MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER OR SWITCH
DISCONNECTOR is to be single-pole, without earth leakage device (RCD), or single
pole + neutral with earth leakage device; as shown on the Schedules.
4. SINGLE-POLE, SINGLE-POLE + NEUTRAL (1 + N) AND DOUBLE-POLE (2P) MCBs
for 240 V service, are to have trip ratings between 6 A and 50 A, with Icu (n)/Ics as
required in the Schedules.
5. THREE PHASE TYPE PANELBOARDS are to be suitable for up to 415 VAC maximum
service voltage, 3 phase and neutral, with MCBs on branch circuits and 3 pole switch
disconnect or circuit breaker, main incoming, as shown in the Schedules or on the
Drawings. If the main switch disconnect or circuit breaker includes an RCD, it may be
a 4 poles switchgear.
6. THREE or FOUR-POLE BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS are to have trip ratings
between 6 A and 100 A, with Icu & Ics as required in the Schedules.
7. THREE PHASE TYPE PANELBOARD MAIN SWITCH DISCONNECTOR OR
CIRCUIT BREAKER is to be 3-pole, without earth leakage device (RCD) or 4 pole with
earth leakage device; as shown on the schedules.
8. SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING: Three phase panel boards may only have integrated
equipment (series) short-circuit rating in accordance with calculations.

Neom community
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panel boards according to IEC 364.
B. Examine panel boards before installation. Reject panel boards that are damaged or rusted or
have been subjected to water saturation.
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panel boards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Notify Engineer in writing
of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of work
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. FIXING GENERALLY:
1. Align, level and securely fasten panel boards to structure
2. Fix surface mounted outdoor panel boards at least 25mm from wall ensuring supporting
members do not prevent flow of air.
3. Do not use connecting conduits to support panel boards
4. Close unused openings in panel board cabinets.
B. PANEL BOARD INTERIORS: do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet
have been completed.
C. WIRING INSIDE PANEL BOARDS: to be neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent
tension on circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type, fully
insulated. Wiring shall be arranged on terminals and connection blocks with marking as
indicated in section 16120 of the specifications.
D. TRIM: fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush with
wall surface finish.
E. PROTECTION: treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
water-proof compound prior to installation.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs complying with Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panel board loads;
incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a
computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
C. Panel board Nameplates: Label each panel board with a nameplate complying with
requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panel boards with a
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 16 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."

Neom community
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten SDBs, E-SDBs & SDB-UPS bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Such that system is Partially Type
Tested (PTTA) to IEC EN 61439-1 & 2.
3.5 INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. GENERALLY: carry out sample tests, as required by the Engineer, on panel boards after
installation, to verify short-circuit capability of circuit breakers and busbars. Inspect conditions
within panel boards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by the Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report
ambient temperature inside enclosure.
C. INSULATION CHECK TESTS: carry out insulation tests on all busbars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings, using
500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment on
systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
D. ROUTINE TESTS ON SITE are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all
panelboards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the
works of the manufacturer.
E. THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY: all current carrying components should be subject to a

thermographic survey prior to certification and handling over. Values obtained by the
thermographic survey should be compliant to the applicable standards and manufacturer
recommendations.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate functional units,

and train Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Include

training relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.
2. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.

Neom community
SECTION 16443 – MOTORS CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes motor-control centers or stand-alone motor drives for use on AC circuits
rated 600 V and less.
herein, indicated on the drawings and as necessary for the proper and complete performance
of work and conformance with all applicable code requirements.
B. Section includes:
1. MCCs: Motor Control Centers feeding the equipment specified to operate in the normal
conditions;
2. EMCCs: Emergency Motor Control Centers feeding the equipment specified to operate
in the normal and emergency conditions;
3. Single drive (pre-packaged) solutions
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data
on features and components.
B. Shop Drawings: For each motor-control center specified in this Section. Include dimensioned
plans, elevations, and component lists. Show ratings, including short-time and short-circuit
ratings, and horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.
1. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual motor-
control center units.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting-wiring diagrams pertinent to class and type specified
for motor-control center. Schematic diagram of each type of controller unit indicated.
requirements.
D. Maintenance Data: For products to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division
1.
E. Load-Current and Overload-Relay List: Compile after motors have been installed and arrange
to demonstrate that selection of protections suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.

Neom community
QUALITY ASSURANCE
F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts,

G. Source Limitations: Obtain similar motor-control devices through one source from a single
manufacturer.
H. Comply with IEC EN 61 439, IEC 364 & NF C 15 100. For construction form, refer to drawings.
Comply with IEC 947-4-1, coordination type 2 for all motor drives.
I. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for Motor
Control Centers, including clearances between MCCs and adjacent surfaces and items, and
are based on types and models indicated.
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path as
indicated.
B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor-control centers. Provide temporary

heaters as required to prevent condensation.
C. Handle motor-control centers according to, "Instructions for the Handling, Installation,
Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers." Use factory-installed lifting
provisions.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits
to which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with the ratings and
characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, the required control sequence, and the duty
cycle of the motor and load. The protections shall follow IEC 947-4-1, coordination type 2.
1.7 SPARE PARTS:

Provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency replacement and one year’s
A. One set of fixed and moving contact for every type of replaceable (consumable) contact set.
B. One operating motor and/ or coil for each type of electrically operated circuit breaker or
contactor.
C. Miniature circuit breakers: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but
D. Motor circuit breakers (non-MCCB): Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than one unit of each type.

Neom community
E. Contactors: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than
one unit of each type.
F. Two sets of each type of indicating lights, fuses, LEDs etc.
1.8 WARRANTY
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Sub-contractor
under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, signed by Sub-contractor and manufacturer, agreeing

to replace any component of the system / panel board assemblies that do not meet
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.
1.10 APPROVED PANEL BUILDERS
A. Subject to compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain Motor Control Centers
equipment, from a dedicated and specialized panel board builder (not electrical contractor)
with an up-to-date assembly certification as per IEC 61 439-1& 2 from the original panel
board manufacturer. The panel board builder’s license shall be at least 5 years old and the
panel board builder shall have previously executed at least 10 projects that include TTA or
panels with Design Verification certificates that the consultant deems successful.
A. APPROVED SWITCHGEAR & CONTROLGEAR MANUFACTURERS: subject to compliance

with the specifications and drawings, obtain Motor Control Centers switchgear and control
gear, from one of the following:
2. Eaton (Germany - USA)
4. Legrand (France).
5. Danfoss (Denmark); for
prepackaged solutions
B. APPROVED ENCLOSURE AND BUSBAR SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS: subject to

compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain Motor Control Centers enclosure and
busbar system, from one of the following; subject to TTA licensing conditions set by the
manufacturer with respect to compatibility with switchgear and controlgear brand, type and
make. Panelbuilder shall be a specialized institution, licensed for the submitted brand for more
than 5 years and be established as a Panelbuilder for more than 10 years:

Neom community

4. Legrand (France).
5. Holec (Holland)
6. Logstrup (Ireland)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Enclosures: Free standing cabinets as indicated, for multiple drives; wall mounted or free
standing (depending on the rating) for single drive (pre-packaged) enclosures. Unless
otherwise indicated to meet environmental conditions at installed location. Motor control
centers are to comply as a minimum with IEC EN 61439-1 & 2 factory-built with certified
Design Verification by the original manufacturer. The requested construction form is «Form
2B» as per IEC EN 61439-1 & 2 for the MCCs and EMCCs.
1. Ingress Protection (indoor areas): IP43 for the dry areas and IP55 for the wet areas
(provide anti-condensation heaters and submit thermal study to justify the panel’s
cooling method). Enclosure to have suitable temperature control apparatus (heat sinks,
fans, air conditioning, etc…) as required keeping internal temperature below 50°C when
ambient temperature outside the panel is 50°C. Special attention shall be given to soft-
starters and variable frequency drives in that effect.
2. Ingress Protection (outdoor areas): IP65 (provide anti-condensation heaters and
submit thermal study to justify the panel’s cooling method). Enclosure to have suitable
temperature control apparatus (heat sinks, fans, air conditioning, etc…) as required
keeping internal temperature below 50°C when ambient temperature outside the panel
is 50°C. Special attention shall be given to soft-starters and variable frequency drives
in that effect.
3. Compartments: Modular construction; doors have concealed hinges and quickcaptive
screw fasteners.
4. Wiring Spaces: Each vertical section of structure with horizontal and vertical wiring has
spaces for wiring to each unit compartment in each section, with supports holding wiring
in place. Hence, cable compartments are to be separate from other compartments.
Terminals for external conductors are to share a common cable compartment.
5. As much as technically feasible, the MCCs and EMCCs shall be provided in Grey RAL
7032 unless specifically agreed otherwise by the Engineer.
B. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: 30 % greater than indicated available fault
current in symmetrical amperes at motor-control center location for 1 second minimum.
2.1 BUSES
A. Material: Plated copper.
B. Ampacity Ratings: As indicated for horizontal and vertical main buses.
C. Neutral Buses: Full size, insulated and isolated from cabinet.
D. Equipment Ground Bus: Non-insulated, horizontal copper bu. The Earth Bus is to extend to
the full length of the board and shall be firmly fixed to each section in accordance with the
Regulations and standards. The Earth Bus shall be complete with two main earthing lugs (one
at each end), and required number of feeder protective earth connectors.

Neom community
E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Main phase, neutral and ground buses extended with same
capacity the entire length of motor-control center, with provision for future extension at both
ends by bolt holes and captive bus splice sections or approved equivalent.
F. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section for 1 second
minimum.
2.2 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES
A. Description: Modular arrangement of motor controllers, control devices, over-current

protective devices, transformers, panel boards, instruments, indicating panels, blank panels,
and other items mounted in compartments of motor-control center as indicated.
B. Motor-Controller Units: Combination controller units of types and with features, ratings, and
circuit assignments indicated.
1. Units have short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short-circuit current rating
of motor-control center section.
C. Over-current Protective Devices: Types of devices with features, ratings, and circuit
assignments indicated.
D. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Connected to motor-control center bus.
E. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped, ready for insertion of
units.
F. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings as indicated, and installed in compartments indicated
"spare."
2.3 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: full voltage, non-reversing, across the line, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Control Circuit: 230 V; obtained from integral control isolation power transformer, unless
otherwise indicated. Include a control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate
connected pilot, indicating and control devices, plus 100 percent spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch

with over-current protection.
1. Molded case non-fusible Disconnect: heavy-duty, non-fusible switch.
2. Molded case circuit-Breaker Disconnect: motor-circuit protector (magnetic trip only)
with field-adjustable short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
D. Overload Relay: Ambient-compensated type with inverse-time-current characteristic.

Provide with heaters or sensors in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of
specific motor to which they connect, and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle.
E. Star-Delta Controller: closed transition with adjustable time delay and overload protection.
F. Part-Winding Controller: closed transition with separate overload relays for starting and
running sequences.

Neom community
G. Contactor: To IEC standards 947-4-1, AC-3 or AC-4 rated as required by the application, in
coordination type 2 with motor circuit breaker, thermal relay and motor nameplate data.
2.4 SOFT STARTER MOTOR SET
A. Description:
1. 3-phase controlled progressive electronic starters - 6 thyristor type.

2. The starter assures the starting and stopping of 3-phase asynchronous squirrel cage
IEC or Nema type motors. The possible stopping modes shall be:
a. Freewheel
b. Braked
c. Decelerated. B. Quality of product and of supplier:
1. The electronic starter will have to be developed and qualified in conformity with
international standards and, in particular, with the product standard EN/IEC 60947-42
for starters.
2. The starter will have to be CE marked in accordance with the harmonized standard
EN/IEC 60947-4-2.
3. Electromagnetic compatibility: the starter will have to conform to the class A level for
radiated and conducted emissions as detailed in the product standard EN/IEC 60947-
4-2, and this applies to all available standard functions within the starter. Class B shall
be required for starters with a nominal current not exceeding 170 A.
4. The starter will have to be UL 508 and CSA certified “Industrial Control Equipment”.
5. The manufacturing plant of the electronic starters and associated design activities will
have to be ISO 9001 version 2000 and ISO 14001 certified.
6. 18 months warranty will be offered from the date of delivery
C. Product description:
1. The operating principle of the starter will not have to rely simply on motor current
limitation during the transitory phases or on a voltage ramp, but on motor torque control.
The starter will have to provide a torque ramp throughout the accelerating phase.
Therefore, it will be able to control the torque throughout the entire starting phase and,
if necessary, provide a constant motor torque throughout the accelerating phase.
2. For pumping applications, the deceleration will have to be made on a torque ramp.
3. All starter ratings will have to have the same control card. This control card will have to
be identical for all applications and also, the same starter will be able to be used on a
crusher, a pump or a conveyor while taking into account the dimensioning.
4. All the starters will have to incorporate means whereby the actual current is measured
in order to ensure protection of the motor.

Neom community
5. The incoming power supply terminals will have to be positioned at the top of the starter
and the terminals for connecting the motor will be at the bottom (through wiring).
6. All ratings of starter will have to have connection terminals for the starter bypass
contactor. The current measurements will have to be maintained when the starter is
bypassed by the contactor.
7. The starter will have to have a separate control supply.
8. The control terminal block for logic and analogue commands will have to be removable.
D. Environment:
1. The starter will have to be capable of operating, without derating, at an ambient

temperature range between –10 and +50°C and between 40 and 60°C with a derating
factor of 2% per degree ºC above 50°C.
2. The starter shall operate perfectly with a relative humidity up to 95%, without
condensation or dripping water, conforming to the standard IEC 60947-4-2.
3. The starter shall operate perfectly and without derating for up to 1000 meters altitude.
For higher altitudes, a 2.2% derating per 100 meter altitude increase shall be applied.
4. The noise level of the starter shall not exceed 65 dBA.
5. When the starters incorporate cooling fans, measures shall be taken to avoid their
continuous operation. They will have to be switched automatically in relation to the
temperature of the heatsink.
6. The starter will have to be capable of operating, without derating, up to an ambient

degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60664-1 (or IEC 60947-4-2).
7. The supplier will have to provide the wiring diagrams of the starters.
8. The supplier will have to make available motor starter combination tables comprising
circuit-breakers, fuses, contactors and starters in order to assure type 2 coordination.
E. Electrical characteristics of the starter:
1. The utilization category of the starters will be AC 53a conforming to the product
standard EN/IEC 60947-4-2.
2. The supplier will have to be capable of offering starters in one or several ranges to
cover supply lines of 208 to 690 V (208 –15% to 690 V +10%).
3. The current range of the starters will be comprised between 17 and 1200 A.
4. The starter will have to automatically adapt to 50 or 60 Hz, with a tolerance of +/5%. By
configuration, it will have to be capable of operating at a supply line frequency that can
vary by +/-20%.

Neom community
5. Logic inputs; the starter will have to include a minimum of 4 x 24 V isolated logic inputs.
6. Outputs; the starter will have to include a minimum of 3 relays with a N/O contact.
Maximum switching capacity on inductive load: 1.8 A at 230 V a.c. and 30 V d.c.
Minimum switching capacity: 10 mA for 6 V d.c.
7. Outputs; the starter will have to include a minimum of 2 x 24 V logic outputs.
8. Analogue outputs; the starter will include 1 analogue output with either a 0 - 20 mA or
4 - 20 mA signal. This signal will be able to be scaled.
9. The starter will have to include its own 24 V power supply for the logic inputs/outputs.
10. The supplier will have to offer a starter selection table for 2 types of dimensioning:
a. Dimensioning 1:
1) From cold state (motor duty S1): 1 start at 3 In for 46 seconds.
2) Cycle comprising starting (motor duty S4), with a load factor of 50% and
10 starts per hour, or an equivalent thermal cycle: 1 start at 3 In for 23
seconds.
b. -Dimensioning 2:
1) From cold state (motor duty S1): 1 start at 4 In for 48 seconds.
2) Cycle comprising starting (motor duty S4), with a load factor of 50% and
5 starts per hour, or an equivalent thermal cycle: 1 start at 4 In for 25
seconds.
F. Protective functions:
1. The starter will have to incorporate PTC probe processing.
2. The starter will have to continuously calculate the heating of the motor from the actual
current measured (the current having to be measured and not estimated). Several
classes of thermal protection will have to be offered conforming to the standard
EN/IEC60947-4-2: classes 10A, 10, 20, 30 as well as the intermediary classes; one
inferior to class 10A, one between classes 10 and 20 and one between classes 20 and
30. The calculation of the thermal protection must be performed even when the starter
is not being supplied.
3. The starter will have to be protected against thermal overloads.
4. The starter will have to detect an underload from the motor torque information. The
detection threshold as well as the allowed duration of the underload will have to be
adjustable. This protection will be able to lead to either a fault on the starter or simple
indication in the form of an alarm via a logic output.
5. The starter will have to detect an overload from the motor current information. The
detection threshold as well as the allowed duration of the overload will have to be
adjustable. The duration of the overload will be able to be adjusted from 0.1 seconds.
This protection will be able to lead to either a fault on the starter or simple indication in
the form of an alarm via a logic output.

Neom community
6. The starter will have to have protection against supply line phase inversion and also
against phase failure of the supply or motor.
7. The starter will take into account management of an external fault. When the contact is
open, the starter goes to fault mode.
8. The protective functions will have to be maintained even when the starter is bypassed
by a contactor.
G. Communication:
1. The starter will have to include a multidrop serial link for its direct connection on
Modbus.
2. The starter will have to be able to be optionally connected to Ethernet and other
networks, with connection to communication bus.
3. The communication will have to provide access to the control, the adjustment and the
supervision of the starter.
H. Main functions:
1. The starter will be able to start and decelerate several motors in cascade (if this scheme
is shown on drawings). In that case, a second set of motor parameters will be able to
be switched to by a logic input.
2. In order to protect the motor against condensation when stopped for long periods, the
starter will have to have a pre-heating function that does not involve rotation of the
motor. The pre-heating current will have to be adjustable.
3. The starter will have to pilot the starter bypass contactor: control closing of the bypass
contactor on completion of start-up and opening on receipt of the stop instruction. This
function will have to be compatible with the stop modes: freewheel, braked and
decelerated.
4. The starter will be able to control the line contactor. The contactor will have to close
following the start instruction and open when the motor has come to a stop.
5. Access to the settings will be able to be code locked. The monitoring parameters will
have to remain visible.
I. Supervision:
1. The standard starter will have to have a dialogue screen and programming keys.
Optionally or when indicated on drawings, a remote programming terminal kit will
provided.
2. The following information will have to be accessible on the dialogue screen:

Neom community
a. Motor current
b. Motor torque
c. Thermal state of motor

d. Cosine
e. Active power
f. Current status (accelerating, decelerating, etc.)
g. Elapsed operating time of starter
h. Last fault detected
3. The following information will have to be accessible on the analogue output:
a. Motor current
b. Motor torque
c. Thermal state of motor
d. Cosine
e. Active power
4. The starter will include optional dialogue solutions, such as:
a. software suite for PC to prepare, store, download and print the settings,
b. Terminal with display, clearly showing all parameters.
c. For the items directly above, a minimum of 2 languages shall be available:

English, French.
2.5 VARIABLE-SPEED DRIVES (fractional horse-power to and including 15 kW)
1. Scope: requirements for pulse-width modulated (PWM) Adjustable Frequency Drives,
herein referred to as AC Drives, for use with NEMA design AC motors, or standard IEC
motors.
2. The AC Drive is a system for controlling the rotational speed of an AC motor and
providing on demand the right torque to the pump & fan application.
3. The same drive must be able to manage both asynchronous and synchronous mo-
tor.
4. The fitting of the drive to the motor is the key factor to ensure an optimized motor control
energy efficiency wise. Consequently the AC Drive must have the capability to measure
automatically the parameters of the motor to fine tune the control.
5. Shortening the downtime increases the operational performance of any facility and
reduces the operating expenditures. Maintenance and monitoring tools such as fault
history, parameters upload/download, scope and keypad emulation are built-in in the

Neom community
drive and used for trouble shooting. Moreover an additional user-friendly PC software
must encompass the configuration management and commissioning functionalities
without additional investment.
B. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
1. The VSD is qualified to address all the major economic area standards.
2. The AC Drives shall be :
a. CE marked, conforming to European Low Voltage (2006/95/EC modified from
73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC and EMC (2004/108/EC modified from 89/336/EEC)
Directives, and Machinery directive N0 98/37/EC modified by 98/79/EC.
b. UL marked according to UL 508C,
3. Moreover it shall comply with National and International standards and the
recommendations for electrical industrial control devices (IEC, EN, UL, NFC, VDE)
listed below:
Standard Title
IEC 60068-2-3 Environmental testing; Part 2-3: Tests - Test Ca: Damp heat, steady state
IEC 60068-2-6 Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal)
IEC 60068-2-27 Part 2-27: Tests - Test Ea and guidance: Shock
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 61800-3 Adjustable speed Electrical Power Drive Systems; Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test methods
IEC 61800-5-1 Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
C. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1. PROTECTION
a. The following function shall be available to prevent the risks of equipment

destruction from component’s failures.
b. The AC Drive shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases
and to ground.
c. The AC Drive shall have under-voltage power-loss ride through performance.
d. The AC Drive shall integrate a protection against IGBT chips over temperature
in addition to the heat sink overheat protection.
e. The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when the motor is
overloaded.
f. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC Drive shall be
programmable to display a fault.
g. Three skip frequency ranges that can be programmed to a bandwidth of 30Hz.

Neom community
2. COMMISSIONING
a. A keypad display interface shall offer the modification of AC Drive adjustments

through a touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration parameters, I/O
assignments, faults, local control, and adjustment storage, and diagnostics shall
be accessible.
b. The built-in graphic keypad display interface must have the Run/Stop command
buttons for quick local running feature. For security reasons the keypad must not
be removable from the drive.
c. The optional remote display is mandatory and must have the three following
press keys:
i. Local / Remote to switch the drive command locally or remotely
ii. RUN to run the drive
iii. STOP to stop the drive.
d. A red LED will lit on the front panel to indicate the energizing status of the drive
DC bus.
e. The hereafter parameters; Speed reference, Motor current, Drive rated current,
Drive thermal state, Output power must be displayed on the graphic terminal.
f. The motor should be able to operate after the wiring without any parameter
settings. Thus allows short lead-time for connection checking to speed up the
commissioning.
3. HARMONICS MANAGEMENT
a. The DC power link capacitor technology must be compliant to a life expectancy

of 14 years as minimum duration.
b. To mitigate the oversizing of the transformer and power cables the rectifier
bridge technology must guarantee a VSD THDI (Total Harmonic Current
Distortion IEC/EN 61000-3-12 standard) below 35% without additional parts
such as fixed or swinging DC chokes, line inductances, harmonic filters.
c. Displacement Power Factor (cosφ): cosφ ~ 1 almost no reactive current on the

power supply.
d. True Power Factor: The true power factor is defined as the ratio between the
fundamental current, I1 (the current at 50Hz), and the RMS current, I RMS
(current including all harmonics). A high true power factor (close to one) shall be
an indication of good harmonic suppression
4. CONTROL CONNECTIONS
a. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24Vdc. The input
logic type (positive logic) or sink (negative logic) is configured by a hardware
switch.

Neom community
b. The internal power supply shall incorporate automatic current fold-back that
protects the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The
transistor logic outputs will be current limited and will not be damaged if shorted.
c. Removable terminal strips shall be used on all logic and analog signal
connections in the power converter
d. Two voltage-free relay output contacts will be provided. One of the contacts will
indicate AC Drive fault status. The other contact shall indicate a drive run status.
These relays shall be configurable for other status indicators.
5. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
a. The AC drive shall have an integrated RJ45 port for Modbus. It shall be possible
to simultaneously connect use the Modbus interface to connect the drive to the
BAS and to a Human Machine Interface (HMI) panel.
b. The following HVAC building protocols; LonWorks, BACnet shall be provided

where the drive it indicated to be interfaced with the BAS or automation and
control system. plug-in board.
D. OPERATION
1. RATINGS
a. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate at the input line voltage and power
rating range indicated in the table below:
Voltage Phases Power rating
400V -15% to 480V +10% three-phase 0.75 kW to 75 kW
b. The AC Drive shall operate from an input frequency range of 50Hz - 5% to 60Hz
+ 5%.
c. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed, 100% load, and 35% THDI shall
not be less than 97%.
d. The requested AC Drive over-torque capacity is 120% of the nominal torque for
one minute.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
Operating ambient Temperature -10°C up to 50 °C without derating in side by

side mounting.
-up to 60 °C with derating

Neom community
Maximum operating altitude 1000 m without derating

1000…3000m: current derating of 1% per
additional 100 m.
Max. Relative Humidity (IEC 5…95 %, without condensation and dripping
600682-3) water
a. The AC drive must operate with a switching frequency of 10 kHz to die down the
motor noise at 50°C without derating.
b. The AC Drive shall be able to give a 100 % output current continuously in the
above specified conditions. The derating factor must not have an impact on the
lifetime of the AC Drive, the unit’s performance, overload capability included,
and the reliability of the AC Drive.
c. The EMC Plate must be included in the standard drive in order to conform with
EMC best practices.
d. A built-it Class B EMC (EN55011) filter shall be provided for all drives
irrespective of the IP rating. That corresponds to IEC 61800-3 Cat C1.
e. The top of the standard drive must comply to IP21 or IP41 to prevent from any
objects dropping in the drive and damaging it.
f. The product shall be available in two versions, IP20 and IP54. When using IP54
class B EMC filter must embedded in the enclosure.
g. An accessory shall be available to achieve UL type 1 compliancy. The Type 1

products shall additionally be recognized as plenum rated and comply with the
applicable requirements for installation in a compartment handling conditioned
air.
E. MAINTENANCE
1. BUILT-IN FUNCTIONALITY
a. Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of
memory, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, DC-to-DC power
supply, control power and pre-charge circuit.
b. An user-friendly PC software workshop is used as a commissioning,

configuration set-up and troubleshooting tool.
2. MANUFACTURER
a. The AC Drive Manufacturer must have a minimum of 30 years experience in

world-class drive design and manufacturing. The installed base product quantity
must be large enough to be credible in its capability to be an edge company
continuously enhancing its product management process.
3. LOCAL SUPPORT

Neom community
a. The Supplier shall have a permanent representative office with a trained and
skilled support staff, in the country where the goods are delivered. The support
team must be able to attend to site problems on site within 24 to 48 hours with
fair notice from customer.
b. The most critical spare parts like fuses, IGBTs, cooling fans as well as main
control- and I/O-boards shall be available on site or within 8-12 hours after the
positive identification was made of the spare part that is required to repair the
drive.
c. The more rarely used spare parts should be available in maximum 10 days on
site.
4. WARRANTY and AFTER-SALES
a. A factory test report shall be delivered by the AC Drive Manufacturer on request.
b. A 24-month parts warranty shall be provided on materials and workmanship from

the date of purchase.
c. Services are provided (spare part and repairing) for 10 years after the end of
commercialization.
F. SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
1. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be a qualified ISO 14001 facility.
2. The materials used in the AC Drive shall be recyclable, non-toxic and flame retardant.
The AC Drive shall comply with the European directive RoHS (Restriction Of
Hazardous Substances) 2002/95/EC.
3. The Product Environmental Profile (PEP) analysis must be performed in conformity
with standard ISO 14040 “Environmental management: life cycle assessment, principle
and framework”.
2.6 VARIABLE-SPEED DRIVES (ratings greater than 15 kW)
1. Pulse-width modulated (PWM) Adjustable Frequency Drives, herein referred to as AC

Drives, for use with NEMA design AC motors, or standard IEC motors.
2. The AC Drive is a system for controlling the rotational speed of an AC motor and
providing on demand the right torque to the pump & fan application.
3. The motor could be an asynchronous or a permanent magnet motors.
4. The fitting of the drive to the motor is the key factor to ensure an optimized motor control
energy efficiency wise. Consequently the AC Drive must have the capability to measure
automatically the parameters of the motor to fine tune the control.
5. The system architecture must be flexible enough to have an additional embedded
programmable card and added optional I/O’s as well to cope with future application

Neom community
process enhancement. The end user has the ability to value his know-how asset
programming his own application and extending his application range.
6. Shortening the downtime increases the operational performance of any facility and
reduces the operating expenditures. Maintenance functions such as fault monitoring
and diagnostic are built-in in the drive and used for trouble shooting. Moreover an
additional user-friendly PC software must encompass the configuration management,
commissioning and remote maintenance functionalities.
B. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
1. The VSD is qualified to address all the major economic area standards.
2. The AC Drives shall be :
a. CE marked, conforming to European Low Voltage (2006/95/EC modified from
73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC and EMC (2004/108/EC modified from 89/336/EEC)
Directives, and Machinery directive 98/37/EC modified by 98/79/EC.
b. UL recognised
c. CSA recognised
d. ATEX Certified according to 94/9/EC directive
e. It shall have Marine Type approval certificates: DNV, ABS, BV, LR, RMSos and
KR
3. It shall comply with the specific standards listed in the table below:
Standard Title
IEC 60068-2-3 Environmental testing; Part 2-3: Tests - Test Ca: Damp heat, steady state
IEC 60068-2-6 Part 2-6: Vibration Resistance (sinusoidal)
IEC 60068-2-27 Part 2-27: Shock Resistance
IEC 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General
requirements
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60721-3-3 Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3-3: Classification of
groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Stationary use
at weather protected locations
IEC 61508-1 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic
safety-related systems - Part 1: General requirements
IEC 61800-3 Adjustable speed Electrical Power Drive Systems; Part 3: EMC
requirements and specific test methods
IEC 61800-5-1 Part 5-1: Safety requirements - Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 13849-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems - Part 1:
general principles for design.
UL508C Power Conversion Equipment
CSA C22.2 No. Industrial Control Equipment
1405
SEMI F47 Semiconductor industry standard for voltage sag immunity

Neom community
C. SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS
1. PROTECTION
a. The following functions shall be available to minimize the risk of equipment damage as a
result of component’s failures.
b. The AC Drive shall be protected against short circuits, between output phases and to
ground.
c. The AC Drive shall have under-voltage power-loss ride through performance per the SEMI
F-47 voltage ride through standard and certified by a third party.
d. The AC Drive shall integrate a protection against over temperature in addition to the heat
sink overheat protection.
e. The output frequency shall be software enabled to fold back when the motor is overloaded.
f. Upon loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC Drive shall be
programmable to display a fault.
g. Three skip frequency ranges that can be programmed to a bandwidth of

10 Hz
2. KEYPAD DISPLAY INTERFACE
a. A keypad display interface shall offer the modification of AC Drive adjustments through a
touch keypad. All electrical values, configuration parameters, I/O assignments, application
and activity function access, faults, local control, and adjustment storage, and diagnostics
shall be accessible.
b. The Plain text display is used as usual. But in case of failure or theft of this device, the
user must always have access to the parameter menu with an integrated seven segment
display terminal.
c. The protection of the Remote keypad must be IP65.
d. The AC Drive model number, torque type, software revision number, horsepower, output
current, motor frequency and motor voltage shall be listed on the drive identification portion
of the LCD display.
e. A worldwide class standardized wireless link is mandatory for non-accessible

environment.
3. HARMONICS MANAGEMENT
a. The DC power link capacitor technology must be compliant to a life expectancy of 14 years
as minimum duration.

Neom community
b. To mitigate the oversizing of the transformer and power cables the rectifier bridge
technology must guarantee a VSD THDI (Total Harmonic Current Distortion IEC/EN
61000-3-12 standard) below 35% without additional parts such as fixed or swinging DC
chokes, line inductances, harmonic filters.
c. Displacement Power Factor (cosφ): cosφ ~ 1 almost no reactive current on the power
supply.
d. True Power Factor: The true power factor is defined as the ratio between the fundamental
current, I1 (the current at 50Hz), and the RMS current, I RMS (current including all
harmonics). A high true power factor (close to one) shall be an indication of good harmonic
suppression
4. CONTROL CONNECTIONS
a. The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24Vdc.
b. The internal power supply shall incorporate automatic current fold-back that
protects the internal power supply if incorrectly connected or shorted. The
transistor logic outputs will be current limited and will not be damaged if shorted.
c. Removable terminal strips shall be used on all logic and analog signal
connections in the power converter
d. Two voltage-free relay output contacts will be provided. One of the contacts will
indicate AC Drive fault status. The other contact shall indicate a drive run status.
These relays shall be configurable for other status indicators.
e. As interoperability with the whole system is critical One relay must have NO or
NC contacts. The logic inputs must be able to cope with positive or sink source
logic as well.
f. The AC drive shall have a safety logic input to de-energize the drive . The drive
shall not allow the motor to operate until this input is closed. If this input is
opened while the connected motor is running, the AC drive shall stop applying
power to the motor. This power removal function shall be certified by an
independent agency.
g. The control section of AC drive shall be supplied separately if necessary with

24V DC, to keep the network communication always available even if the power
supply is OFF. Thus the remote failure diagnosis is still available in case of mains
power shutdown.
h. When the equipment is connected to an IT system network, the built-in RFI filter
shall be disconnected removing jumpers.
5. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
a. The AC drive shall have integrated RJ45 port, selectable for Modbus &
CanOpen.
b. The following protocols shall be the minimum available :

Neom community
For connection to the BAS or Automation & For direct connection to the BAS
Control system via gateway or Automation & Control system
field bus
Modbus TCP DeviceNet LonWorks
Ethernet/IP InterBus BACnet
FIPIO CC-Link
MOdbus PLus Modbus/ Uni-Telway
Profibus DP CanOpen
6. PROGRAMMING APPLICATION EXTENT
a. The AC Drive shall have built-in basic functions for pump and fans application
such as PID set-up, Flow limitation, No flow detection, Sleep/Wake up,
No load law for energy saving, Damper management, Multi motors configuration
management.
b. The AC drive shall be able to manage an optional snap-on controller board that
must fit inside the drive enclosure. This board carries out flexible application
control extent such as multi-pump facility management. More functions such as
night and day algorithm, pressure boost mode, pipe file algorithm, staging and
de-staging algorithm, cavitation protection, over pressure protection, low water
level protection, pipe burst and pipe blockage protection, cycling protection, data
fault time stamping are delivered within the drive. The dedicated application
menu is displayed automatically at drive’s power up on the graphic keypad
display.
c. The programming tool must comply to IEC 61131-3 standard.
D. OPERATION
1. RATINGS
a. The AC Drive shall be designed to operate at the input line voltage and power
rating range indicated in the table below:
Voltage Phases Power rating
400V -15% to 480V +10% three-phase 0.75 kW to 630 kW
b. The AC Drive shall operate from an input frequency range of 50Hz - 5% to 60Hz
+ 5%.

Neom community
c. The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be less than
97%.
d. The variable torque rated AC Drive overcurrent capacity shall not be less than
110% of the nominal current for one minute.
2. ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS
a. The AC Drive shall be able to give a 100 % output current continuously in the
above specified conditions. The derating factor must not have an impact on the
lifetime of the AC Drive, the unit’s performance, overload capability included,
and the reliability of the AC Drive.
b. A built-it Class B EMC (EN55011) filter shall be provided for all drives
irrespective of the IP rating. That corresponds to IEC 61800-3 Category C1.
Operating surrounding air Temperature -10°C up to 50 °C

Maximum operating temperature range with 60°C
derating
Maximum operating altitude 1000 m without derating
1000…3000m: current derating of 1% per
additional 100 m.
Max. Relative Humidity (IEC 60068-2-3) 5…95 %, without condensation and dripping
water
E. MAINTENANCE
1. BUILT-IN FUNCTIONALITY
a. Upon power-up, the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of
memory, loss of analog reference input, loss of communication, DC-to-DC power
supply, control power and pre-charge circuit.
b. The VSD shall be able to restart automatically if the fault disappears and the
operating conditions permit the restart.
c. An user-friendly PC software workshop is used as a commissioning,

configuration set-up and troubleshooting tool.
2. MANUFACTURER
a. The AC Drive Manufacturer must have a minimum of 30 years experience in

world-class drive design and manufacturing. The installed base product quantity
must be large enough to be credible in its capability to be an edge company
continuously enhancing its product management process.
3. LOCAL SUPPORT

Neom community
a. The Supplier shall have a permanent representative office with a trained and
skilled support staff, in the country where the goods are delivered. The support
team must be able to attend to site problems on site within 24 to 48 hours with
fair notice from customer.
b. The most common spare parts ( Critical ) like fuses, IGBTs, cooling fans as well
as main control- and I/O-boards shall be available on site or within 8-12 hours
after the positive identification was made of the sparepart that is required to
repair the drive.
c. The more rarely used spare parts should be available in maximum 10 days on
site.
4. WARRANTY and AFTER-SALES
a. A factory test report shall be delivered by the AC Drive Manufacturer on request.
b. A 24-month parts warranty shall be provided on materials and workmanship from

the date of purchase.
c.
Services (spare part and repairing) are provided (spare part and repairing) for
10 years after the end of commercialization.
F. SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT
1. The manufacturer of the AC Drive shall be qualified as a ISO 14001 facility.

2. The materials used in the AC Drive shall be recyclable, non-toxic and flame retardant.
The AC Drive shall comply with the European directive RoHS (Restriction Of
Hazardous Substances) 2002/95/EC.
3. The Product Environmental Profile (PEP) analysis must be performed in conformity
with standard ISO 14040 “Environmental management: life cycle assessment, principle
and framework”.
2.7 FEEDER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: MCCB, handle lockable as mentioned and specified in main
distribution board.
2.8 MCC CIRCUIT BREAKERS: MCCB below 800 Amperes and Air Circuit Breaker above
800 Amperes, both with utilization category “B” and electronic trip unit as indicated in section
16440 (Main Distribution Boards).
2.9 ACCESSORIES
A. Devices are factory installed in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights (LED), and Selector Switches: heavy-duty type, as per
MCC IP & IK rating.
C. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break push-button station with a factory-
applied hasp arranged so a padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position
with control circuit open.

Neom community
D. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
E. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.
F. Meters (electrical parameters measurement): Power meter as indicated in section 16440

(main Distribution Boards).
G. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output
contacts for hard-wired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.
H. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output

contacts for hard-wired connection; arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal,
current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage. Provide adjustable
response delay.
I. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: IEC 60364, IEC 61643-11, IEC 664-1 and IEC 1643-
1, selected to meet requirements for a high-exposure category. J. Impulse sparkover voltage
coordinated with system circuit voltage.
K. Factory mounted with a Recognized Testing Laboratory listed and labeled mounting device.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and configuration
of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions. B. Select horsepower rating of
controllers to suit motor controlled.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for lowvoltage
protection.
D. Hand-Off-Automatic Selector Switches: In covers of manual and magnetic controllers of

motors started and stopped by automatic controls or interlocks with other equipment.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor-control centers according to accepted and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Anchor each motor-control center assembly to steel-channel sills arranged and sized
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach by tack welding or bolting. Level and
grout sills flush with motor-control center mounting surface. C. Install motor-control centers
on concrete housekeeping bases.

Neom community
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to Division
16 Section "Identification of Electrical Systems."
B. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning.
C. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for motor-control centers,

including control sequences, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood
or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of motor-control
centers.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor-control devices according to Division 16 Section "Wires and
Cables."
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices according to an

indicated wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved, where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only the manual and automatic control devices
that have no safety functions when switch is in the hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic
positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-
temperature cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor-control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Such that system is type tested (TTA) to
IEC EN 61439-1 & 2.
A. Testing: After installing motor-control center and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated
in corresponding IEC standards. Certify compliance with test parameters.
2. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units, and retest.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor-control centers. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices
internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.

Neom community
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Training: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate solid-state and

variable-speed controllers and motor-control centers, and train Owner's maintenance
personnel.
1. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Include training

relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Schedule training with at
least 7 days' advance notice.

Neom community
SECTION 16481 - MOTORS & STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply and install the motors and the starters under other sections when so
mentioned, as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.
Motor starting method and corresponding furnished starter shall be concordant.
PART 2 - RATING OF MOTORS
Motors shall be suitable for operation on 220/230 volt single phase or 380/400 volt 3phase,
3-wire, 60 Hz system and shall be drip-proof fan cooled to IEC 34-6 induction motor type
unless otherwise indicated or specified. All motors shall have a service factor of 1.15, and a
power factor of 0.85 as a minimum.
Motors of ratings smaller than 1 HP shall be single phase and those of ratings 1 HP and larger shall
be three phase, unless otherwise indicated or approved.
Motors of rating larger than 5 horsepower shall have a soft starter drive, unless otherwise specified.
Motors of rating less than 5 horsepower shall be direct on line starting type.
Every motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment under all load and operating
conditions without exceeding its rated name-plate current or power or its specified
temperature limit. The horsepower ratings for motors shown on the Drawings must be
considered as an indication only. For the use of motors other than that specified, the
Contractor shall assume the cost of, and responsibility for satisfactory accomplishing all
changes (including engineering costs of redesign by the Engineer) in the work as indicated
and specified. All derating resulting from site conditions shall be allowed for in the design.
2.1 Motor performances shall comply with the requirements of IEC 34-1.
PART 3 - TYPES OF MOTORS
All motors shall be of a type approved for starting characteristics and ruggedness as may be required
under the actual conditions of operation.
All motors shall have class F insulation as a minimum requirement.
The motors shall be designed so that the maximum temperature rise at continuous run under full load
and operation conditions shall be in accordance with IEC Standards for Motors and
Generators and based on the local ambient temperature.

Neom community
PART 4 - GENERAL DESIGN OF MOTORS

Motor windings shall be braced to withstand successfully the stresses resulting from the method of
starting. The windings shall be treated thoroughly with approved insulating compound suitable
for protection against moisture and slightly acid or alkaline conditions.
Bearings shall be of the self-lubricating type, designed to ensure proper alignment of rotor and shaft,
and to prevent leakage of lubricant.
Bearings for open motors shall be of the sleeve or ball type, as specified under respective items of
mechanical equipment.
Indoor motors located in relatively clean surrounding, free from any abrasive or conducting dust or
chemical fumes, shall be enclosed ventilated drip-proof type. Otherwise motors shall be totally
enclosed fan cooled type.
Vertical motors if any shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all thrusts to which they can
be subjected in operation.
Vertical motors of open type shall be provided with drip hoods of approved shape and construction.
When the drip hood is too heavy to be easily removed, provision shall be made for access for
testing.
PART 5 - MOTOR TERMINAL BOXES AND LEADS
Motors shall be furnished with oversized conduit terminal boxes to provide for making and housing the
connections and with flexible leads of sufficient length to extend for a distance of not less than
10 cm beyond the face of the box. The size of cable terminals and conduit terminal box holes
shall be as approved by the Engineer. An approved type of solderless lug shall be supplied.
Totally enclosed motors shall have cast iron terminal boxes.
PART 6 - MOTOR SHOP TESTS
Motor shop tests shall be made in accordance with IEC Test Code or approved equal. Complete tests
of each motor supplied shall be made and certified shop test data sheets shall be submitted,
unless witness shop tests are required by the Detail Specifications pertaining to the
equipment. Each motor shall be tested for efficiency and power factor at 50, 75 and 100
percent of its rated horsepower, for temperature rise, torque, starting current and dielectric
strength; and for compliance with all specified performance requirements.

Neom community
PART 7 - MOTOR STARTERS (refer also to section Motor Control Centers, 16443)
Motor Starters shall be built and sized in accordance with IEC Standard 158-1 and IEC 947-4-1
coordination type 2, BS 775 and IEC 292-1&2, or approved equal. Starters shall be non-
reversing, magnetic type unless otherwise indicated or specified.
All starters shall be provided with thermal devices in each phase calibrated for close protection of the
motors against overloads. These devices shall trip the starters in case of overload and shall
not allow it to be reset except manually. The thermal overload relays shall be adjustable from
90 to 110 percent of nominal rating. A single calibration adjusts all three legs. The overload
relay shall be ambient compensated.
The starter shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for the connection of signaling, interlocking and
other circuits as required for the controls.
Unless otherwise indicated, all starters shall be provided with START-STOP pushbuttons, and RED
and GREEN LED pilot lights, all located on the starter front cover. An overload reset button
shall be provided inside the cover, Pushbuttons shall be momentary contact or maintained
type as applicable to the function of control.
Starters shall have horsepower ratings at least equal to ratings of motors they serve following IEC 947-
4-1 coordination type 2.
Voltage of control circuit shall not exceed 240 volts for starters in motor control centers or panels.
Individually mounted starters or combination starters may have their control voltage on 400
volts provided local regulations or local inspectors do not forbid the use of same. The
Contractor when utilizing such voltage for control shall provide the use of same. The
contractor when utilizing such voltage for control shall provide a clear warning of existence of
such voltage within the station. If 230 volts are required by the local regulations or local
inspectors, a neutral conductor shall be brought within the feeder of the starter of approved
cross section, at no extra charge.
Starters shall be electrically held in, providing inherent under voltage release.
Starters when not part of a motor control center and are located indoors shall be encased in
an IP 42 dust-proof enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
“Star-delta” starters, if any, shall have additional “Star” and “Delta” contractors which shall be
electrically and mechanically interlocked to close the motor in “Delta” connection with the
supply after the “Star” contractor has opened. A timing device shall be fitted to provide and
adjust time in “Star” before changing over to the Delta connection.
The protective and control device for motor protection, have to be type-2 co-ordinated to IEC 947-4.1.
“Star-Delta” Starters shall provide closed transition.
Schematic wiring diagram of all starters shall be provided on the interior of starter front over.
PART 8 - SOFT STARTERS & VARIABLE-SPEED DRIVES
Refer to section 16443 “Motor Control Centers”.

University of Balamand
Medical Center Specifications
SECTION 16501 - GENERAL LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ELECTRICAL WORK GENERALLY is to be in accordance with the requirements of Sections

16010 of the Specification.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: complete indoor and outdoor lighting installations including fixtures,
control gear, mounting provisions, accessories and connection to circuit wiring and to
corresponding lighting control equipment.
1.3 FIXTURE DESIGN AND STANDARDS: the Specification and the Drawings is a guide to the
selection of lighting characteristics and lighting fixtures, giving general features of
construction, materials, method of installation and conditions of operation. Unless otherwise
specified, fixtures are to be manufacturer’s standard series, designed and manufactured for
the purpose and application required, generally in accordance with the Schedule of Lighting
Fixtures and complying with IEC 598 and CISPR 15.
1.4 DESIGN LAYOUT: fixture layout has been determined from photometric data of specified fixtures
to achieve desired level and uniformity of illumination. Reflected ceiling plans are to be
checked to ensure exact positions of fixtures with respect to structural members, ducts pipes,
other installations and ceiling panels/tiles, where required. Certain fixtures are shown in
provisional positions, pending preparation of final equipment layout drawings. Such fixtures
are to be located in coordination with final equipment layout so that illumination is as
intended by the design.
1.5 EQUIPMENT DATA: submit data for approval including, but not limited to, the followings:
A. Detailed literature on each fixture, lamp and control gear including manufacturer’s name,
catalogue number, rating, material specification, overall dimensions, operating
characteristics and principals.
B. Details of changes to standard fixtures for adaptation to condition of installation and to the
Specification.
C. Photometric data for lighting calculations including polar light distribution curves, coefficient
of utilization, glare classification, efficiency, depreciation factors etc…
to, the followings:
A. Exact position of each fixture on reflected ceiling plans, with indication of ceiling features,
structural members, ducts, pipes and other fittings, as applicable and pertinent to the
installation.
B. Installation details including suspension and mounting provisions.
C. Purpose made fixtures or lighting assemblies with full details.
D. Wiring details, circuit and panel board references, special lighting control arrangements
etc…
1.7 SAMPLES: submit fully equipped sample of each fixture type, modified if required, together
with color and texture samples of each fixture.

Neom community
1.8 SPARE PARTS: provide manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for emergency
replacement and one year’s maintenance including, but not limited to, the followings
(Emergency lighting fixtures spare parts are listed in section “Central Battery System”).
A. LED Lamps: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than
six unit of each type.
B. Incandescent or Halogen Lamps: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than six unit of each type.
C. High Intensity Discharge Lamps: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than three unit of each type.
D. Cold Cathode Lamps: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than 1 unit of each type or segment length used.
E. Lighting Control Gear (any type): Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type
installed, but not less than 2 unit of each type.
F. Lighting Fixture used in areas accessible by the residents (non-technical) except parking
space: Quantity equal to 1 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than 1 unit
of each type.
1.9 WARRANTY
shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor
replace any component that do not meet requirements or that fail within the specified
warranty period.
C. Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.

A. Approved lamps and control gear manufacturers (for lighting fixtures refer to schedule of lighting
fixtures): subject to compliance with the specifications and drawings, obtain lamps and lamp
control-gear / driver from one of the following:
1. Osram (Germany).
2. Philips (Holland)
3. Zumtobel (Austria)
4. Tridonic (Germany)
5. CREE (LED lamps) (USA)

Neom community
2.1. COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES
2.1.1. LIGHTING FIXTURE CONSTRUCTION-GENERAL
A. GENERALLY: construction and wiring of fixtures are to comply with the Regulations and
Standards. Fixtures are to be fabricated, assembled and wired entirely at factory.
Manufacturer’s name, factory inspection stamp and official quality label are to be fixed to each
fixture supplied.
B. LIGHTING FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES): to be manufacturer’s standard, as given in Lighting
Fixture Schedules shown on the Drawings, or equal.
C. SHEET STEEL HOUSINGS: to be not less than 0.6 mm thick, and thicker when required by
the Specification or the Standards. Galvanic protection shall be provided. D. SHEET STEEL
REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.5 mm thick.
E. ALUMINUM REFLECTORS: to be not less than 0.7 mm thick, 99.9% purity, specular, non-
irridiscent unless otherwise approved.
F. FABRICATION: metalwork is to be mitered, welded and ground smooth without tool marks or
burrs. Flat metal parts are to be stiffened by forming grooves and edges during fabrication.
Metal parts are to have finish free from irregularities.
G. RUST-PROOF FERROUS BASE: ferrous metal parts are to be bonderized (treated with
corrosion resistant phosphate solution) and given an approved rust-inhibiting prime coat
before application of final finish.
H. FINISH FOR NON-REFLECTING METAL SURFACES: approved baked enamel paint. Paint
color on fixture frames and trims is to be as specified or as selected by the Engineer.
I. FINISH FOR LIGHT REFLECTING SURFACES: white baked enamel paint having reflection
factor not less than 85%. Mirror reflectors, where specified, are to be highly polished,
anodized aluminum with reflection factors not less than 97%.
J. MECHANICAL RESISTANCE OF FINISH: after finish has been applied on steel surfaces and
cured, it is to withstand a 6 mm radius bend without showing signs of cracking, peeling or
loosening from base metal.
K. RESISTANCE OF FINISH TO ULTRA-VIOLET: finish is to withstand 72 hours exposure to a
ultra-violet RS lamp placed 100 mm from surface without discoloring, hardening or warping,
and is to retain the same reflection factor after exposure.
L. HEAT RESISTANCE: finishes, wire and components inside fixtures are to be certified
materials to resist the temperatures or other conditions encountered in the fixtures.
M. WIRING INSIDE FIXTURES: to be not less than 1.5 mm 2, and insulated for 240 V application.
Insulation is to have acceptable characteristics to resist maximum temperatures inside
fixtures. Wiring is to be terminated on screw type and fixed. Emergency lighting fixtures shall
comply with local codes and BS5266.
N. HINGES: fixtures with visible frames and hinged diffusers are to have concealed hinges and
catches, and stainless steel retaining clips. Other alternative equally durable products may
be submitted for approval.

Neom community
O. SUSPENSION ALIGNERS: to be provided for pendent fixtures for axial, vertical and
horizontal alignment. Vertical adjustment is to be minimum 25 mm.
P. RECESSED FIXTURE: to be constructed to fit into suspended ceilings without distorting
fixture or ceiling. Plaster rings are to be provided for plaster or concrete ceilings.
Q. OUTDOOR FIXTURES: to be non-ferrous metal or specially molded material for outdoor use.
R. REMOVAL OF PARTS for maintenance is to be possible without removing fixture housing.
2.1.2. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. LAMP HOLDERS GENERALLY: to IEC 400, heavy duty, molded white plastic with non-
corroding spring contacts.
B. LAMP HOLDERS FOR INDUSTRIAL FITTINGS: spring loaded turret type, heavy duty, dust
protected.
C. BALLASTS GENERALLY: to IEC 82. Only single (36 W) or two-lamp (18 W) ballasts are to
be used in any one fixture. Ballasts generally are to be electronic type with lamp preheat.
Equipment is to be enclosed in sheet steel casing with corrosion resistant finish.
D. BALLAST THERMOSETTING COMPOUND is not to soften, liquify or support combustion
under any operating condition or upon ballast failure, and is to fill ballast enclosure and
dampen vibrations. Temperature rise, under normal operating conditions, is not to exceed
55 deg. C above maximum ambient temperature of 50°C.
E. BALLAST PROTECTION: Each ballast is to have one-time external fuse and fuse holder
rated in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Electronic ballasts are to have built-
in overload and short circuit protection.
F. BALLAST TYPE (except for cold cathode): electronic or electronic high frequency dimmable
type, as stated in fixture description and as shown on the drawings, power factor corrected
to above 0.9, having manufacturer’s lowest case temperature. Sound rating is not to exceed
level given in the Standards. Harmonics to IEC EN 60929, radio interference suppression
to IEC EN 55015 and immunity to IEC EN 61547. The ballast shall operate at a frequency
not less than 30 kHz.
G. BALLAST RATING: ballast is to be manufactured and certified for the specific lamp it
controls and for operation from nominal power supply, with voltage and frequency equal to
nominal voltage and frequency of distribution network.
H. CAPACITORS: to IEC 566, having snap-type connectors and fastening, bolt type
M8, for fixing to fixture.
I. STARTERS, if required, are to comply with IEC 155, and are to be selected in conjunction
with respective ballast and lamp.
2.1.3. INCANDESCENT LAMP FIXTURES
A. INCANDESCENT LAMP SOCKETS: to IEC 61 and IEC 238, high grade porcelain; E27 (ES)
screw sockets for lamps not exceeding 200 W and E40 (GES) screw sockets for lamps 300
W and over.
2.1.4. HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE LAMP FIXTURES

Neom community
A. TYPE: fixture are to be complete units including integral ballasts (and igniters for HPS lamps
where indicated) and lamps of required number and type, and are to have lighting distribution
characteristics equivalent to model and manufacturer indicated in the fixture description.
B. ACCESSORIES: fixture are to have mounting accessories, such as suspension rods or

chains, rails or brackets, and protective glass covers with gaskets for protection against dust
and humidity or type of corrosive atmosphere predominant in the location.
C. BALLASTS AND IGNITION DEVICES are to be power factor compensated to at least 0.9
lagging, and type specially selected for lamp type and size used. Lamp is to be able to start
with at least +/-10% variation from nominal line voltage and continue in normal operation
with dips attaining 20% for four seconds. Compensation is to ensure there is no great
increase in operating current during starting and that gear losses do not exceed 10% of
normal wattage. RF suppression circuit is to be provided.
2.1.5. HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE LAMP BALLASTS
B. General: Comply with relevant IEC standards. Unless otherwise indicated, features include
the following:
1. Type: Regulating high-power-factor type, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Operating Voltage: 200 to 250 single phase.
3. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20°C for single lamp ballasts.
4. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 50°C.
5. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.
6. Auxiliary, Instant-on, Quartz System: Automatically switches quartz lamp on when
fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. Automatically
turns quartz lamp off when high-intensity-discharge lamp reaches approximately 60
percent light outputs.
C. Encapsulation: Manufacturer's standard epoxy-encapsulated model designed to minimize

audible fixture noise.
D. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Equip with a solid-state igniter/starter having an average life
in pulsing mode of 25,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90°C.
1. Instant Restrike Device (where specified): Solid-state, potted module, mounted inside high-
pressure sodium fixture and compatible with highpressure sodium lamps, ballasts, and
sockets up to 150 W. a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V AC.
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac RMS.
2.1.6. LED LAMP FIXTURES
A. They shall be used of high intensity power light emitting diodes (lifetime up to 50.000 hours).
B. The housing shall be rugged extruded aluminum with black or white finish with a beam angle
of 22°.
C. They shall be designed for washing large facade areas with far-reaching, rich, saturated
colors and color changing effects (option).

Neom community
D. The streamlined, four-foot housing should provide a powerful solution for large-area
scenery and wash lighting facade.
E. The housing shall be equipped with locking knobs on the mounting brackets to allow a 360°
rotation, locking and adjustment without the use of special tools.
F. Each fixture shall have 8 individual circuit board assemblies with 18 height-intensity LEDs
per board.
G. For protection from extreme temperature, the fixture shall be designed with a temperature
monitoring feature.
H. If operating temperatures rise to an unsafe level, a compensation circuit is triggered and the
fixture is interrupted causing the lights to turn dull red. After 30 minutes the lights will auto-
cycle and return to full intensity.
2.2. LAMPS
A. Lamps are not limited to the following; special lamps shall be subject to lighting fixture
manufacturer recommendations and supervising consultant approval.
B. RATED VOLTAGE of incandescent and PL lamps is to be equal to nominal voltage of

distribution network. Lamps with different rated voltages are not acceptable.
C. INCANDESCENT LAMPS FOR GENERAL LIGHTING SERVICE (GLS): to have screw base
type ES for lamps 200 W and below and type GES for lamps 300 W and above. Inside frosted
(IF) lamps are to be used unless otherwise specified. Guaranteed rated life is to be above
800 hours and luminous output above the followings:
1. 950 lumens for 75 W lamps.
2. 1350 lumens for 100 W lamps.
D. TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN LAMPS: tubular, quartz, resistant to high temperatures. Guaranteed

rated life is to be above 2000 hours and luminous output above the following:
1. 9500 lumens for 500 W lamps
E. STRAIGHT TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (T8 lamps): to IEC 81 (SSA 138 and 139)
and, unless otherwise specified, are to be switch start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the
fixture description and with improved fluorescent internal coating. Color of light is to be superb
quality white equal to Philips Nb 84 unless otherwise specified. Lamps are to be low energy
type with tube diameter 26 mm. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 8000 hours and luminous
output above the followings:
1. 1350 lumens for 18 W lamps (600 mm long); 1B color rendering index.

Neom community
F. STRAIGHT TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS (T5 lamps): unless otherwise specified, are
to be electronic start type, bi-pin, rated as indicated in the fixture description and with
improved fluorescent internal coating. Color of light is to be superb quality with Ra ≥ 90.
Unless otherwise mentioned, color to be warm whiteLamps are to be low energy type with
tube diameter 16 mm. Guaranteed rated life is to be up to 24000hours and above 16000
hours while lumen maintenance is >90 % throughout the life of the lamp and luminous output
above the followings:
Lumen Watts Lumen

Tube Watts High Efficiency Output High Output
Length Output Notes
Diameter (HE)
(HO)
1200 Lumens 1400 to 1750 fits within a
T5 – 16mm 563 mm 14 W 24 W Lumens 600 mm
modular unit
1900 Lumens 3100 Lumens fits within a
T5 – 16mm 863 mm 21 W 39 W 900 mm
modular unit
2600 Lumens 3800 to 4450 fits within a
1,163
T5 – 16mm 28 W 54 W Lumens 1200 mm
mm
modular unit
3320 6150 Lumens fits within a
1,463
T5 – 16mm 35 W, 49 W Lumens, 80 W 1500 mm
mm 4310 Lumens modular unit
G. PL-C COMPACT LAMPS: single ended, compact-miniature lamp, consisting of four (or two)
narrow fluorescent tubes welded together, with integral instant starter and capacitor and with
special two-pin plug-in base and socket. Guaranteed rated life is to be above 5000 hours and
luminous output above the following:
1. 600 lumens for 10 W lamps (80 mm long)
2. 900 lumens for 13 W lamps (90 mm long)
3. 1200 lumens for 18 W lamps (100 mm long) 4. 1800 lumens for 26 W lamps (115
mm long).
Lamps are to be with warm color impression.
H. METAL HALIDE LAMPS: comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear tubular hard-
glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with iodide additives
indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity in three spectral
bands; blue green and yellow-red with high color rendering. Lamps are to be to IEC 188 with
E40 base. Guaranteed average life is not to be less than 10000 hours and luminous outputs,
after 100 hours burning, are to be above the following:
1. 3300 lumens for 35~39 W lamps
3. 14000 lumens for 150W lamps

Neom community
8. Permissible base temperature is to be not greater than 250°C, and maximum bulb
temperature not greater than 550°C. Lamp burning position for 2000 W, 230 V lamps
is to be possible up to 75 degrees.
I. HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMPS: comprising quartz discharge tube enclosed in clear
tubular hard-glass outer bulb, operating on same principle as all gas discharge tubes with
iodide additives indium, thallium and sodium in the mercury discharge, to increase intensity
in three spectral bands; blue green and yellow-red with high color rendering. Guaranteed
average life is not to be less than 20000 hours and luminous outputs, after 100 hours burning,
are to be above the following:
Lamp Lamp Input Lm LM/

PFC
Power output W
description Current
Capaci
With tor @
Control
50Hz,
Gear μF
70W 0.98 83 12 5600 80

elliptical
100W 1.2 115 12 9500 95

elliptical
150W 1.8 176 20 17000 109

elliptical
250W 3 285 32 32000 123

elliptical
400W 4.4 450 45 54000 132

elliptical
1 83 12 6500 93
70W
tubular
100W 1.2 115 12 10000 100

tubular
150W 1.8 176 20 17500 113

tubular
250W 3 285 32 33000 127

tubular
400W 4.4 450 45 55500 135

tubular

Neom community
600W 6.2 645 65 90000 150

tubular
J. LOW VOLTAGE COLD CATHODE TUBES Similar To Oldham, UK or Antrox, Italy
1. Description: Warm white.
2. Application’s purpose: Architectural lighting.
3. Important areas with pictorial or various color mixing where are requested a good level
of light but quiet warm and a very good color perception.
5. Tube’s properties: Powdered clear Italian crystal.
6. inside the tube: Discharge in low pressure Hg vapour blended with Ar/Ne
gases. The percentage of the Ar/Ne gases depends from the standard
environment working condition (i.e. for external installation the lowest
temperature reachable in the night; for inside installation: the dimension of
the cove and how is the tube close to others, if any).
7. Color reference of light output: White 2800K 8. Life expectancy in
standard condition: 50.000 hours.
9. Power consumption: 30 Watts / meter.
10. Average Data with 50mA supply:

a) Colour temperature (K): 2800
b) CIE 1931 Coordinates: X = 0,488
Y = 0,400
c) Colour Rendering Index (CRI): 86
d) Tubes diameters (mm): 25

Neom community
LIGHT EMITTING DIODES - LED
Light Emitting Diodes - LEDs shall have the following specifications:

4. Luminous Flux and Lumens per Watt: Should be indicated for a PN junction
temperature of 85°C at 350mA driver current.
5. Binning: Variation of color temperature of white LEDs is standardized in ANSI
C78.337A standard. For the color temperature specified for each LED luminaire; the
Standard Deviation of Color Matching (SDCM) shall be 2 to 4 steps (barely visible) on
the scale of scale of Mac Adam ellipse. Binning testing shall be at PN junction
temperature of 85°C.
6. White LEDs or white light from LEDs shall be using phosphor white LEDs in lieu of RGB
LEDs
7. Color rendering Ra shall be >= 90% for color temperatures in the 3500°K range; color
rendering Ra shall be >= 70% for color temperatures in the 7000°K range
8. To preserve quality of white light, and avoid Large variation in correlated color
temperature (CCT); only conformal phosphor coating process shall be used.
9. Minimum White LED (1W) typical performance table
Cool White Neutral White Warm white
Color temperature
4500 – 10 000 K 4500 - 3500 K 2670 - 3500 K
(CCT)
70 70 +
90
Color rendering index (CRI)
Flux @ 350mA [lm] >105 >105 >75
Efficacy [lm/W] > 100 >100 >70
10. LED Useful Lamp Life

a) Conventional light sources have their rated average life expressed in the amount
of hours where the mortality of the lamps is 50%
b) An LED light source Useful Life is not expressed in terms of mortality of lamps
but instead as “the length of time a light source delivers a minimum acceptable
level of light in a given application”. That should be 70% of initial flux level (L70)
for general lighting applications. The L70 value is tested and measured as per
IES method listed in IES LM-80-08 publication.
c) White-light LEDs shall have a useful life L70 of minimum 50,000 hours.
11. The LED luminaire and its associated driver shall be from the same manufacturer. The
life time of the driver shall be indicated.
12. The luminous output of LED luminaires shall be given not only for the LED but for the
total system composed of the driver, driver current, LED (and associated PCB, thermal
management), optics and housing.
13. All performance values for LEDs, shall be verified by a recognized North American or
Western European third party testing agency.

Neom community
3.1. INSTALLATION
A. GENERALLY: install fixture level, aligned and parallel or square to building lines and at
uniform heights as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Make final height
adjustment after installations.
B. FIXTURE SUPPORT: provide fixture and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers, brackets and
flanged bolted fittings, as necessary, to support weight of fixture. Submit details of hangers
etc. and method of fastening for approval. Rigidly secure fixture mounted on outlet boxes to
fixture studs. Install hooks or extension pieces, when required, for proper installation. Provide
one point of support in addition to the outlet box fixture stud for individually mounted fixtures
longer than 600 mm.
C. STEM HANGERS: provide two stem hangers for individually mounted pendant fixtures. Stems
are to have suspension aligners and are to be suitable length for suspending fixtures at
required height.
D. SUSPENDED CEILINGS: if ceiling construction is unable to support weight of fixtures without

strain or deformation, suspend fixtures directly from building structure.
E. SOLD CEILINGS: coordinate dimensions of recesses in ceilings with exact fixture dimensions
and structural elements.
F. CONTINUOUS ROWS: arrange fixture so that individual fixtures can be removed without
dismantling remaining fixtures. Provide minimum spacing between fixtures.
G. COVER PLATES: install cover plates over fixture outlet box or opening in ceiling or structure
when left unused.
H. FLUSH RECESSED FIXTURES: install to completely eliminate light leakage within fixture and
between fixture and adjacent finished surface.
I. VENTILATION: keep ventilation channels free after fixture is installed, if required by the
design of the fixture.
J. EARTH metal frames of fixtures as described in Section 219 of the Specification.
K. TIGHTNESS: ensure that enclosed fixtures are reasonably insect/ dust tight when installed,
and completely weather-proof for installations subject to weather conditions.
L. LAMPS FOR PERMANENT INSTALLATION: place new lamps in fixtures immediately prior
to hand-over and when instructed by the Engineer. Lamps used for temporary service are not
to be used for final lamping of fixtures.
3.2. INSPECTION AND TESTS ON SITE
A. VISUAL INSPECTION: check neatness of installation, uniformity of equipment and

nameplates etc.

Neom community
B. ILLUMINATION MEASUREMENTS: to be taken at selected locations, to determine level and

uniformity.
C. OPERATION: check lighting installations for operation including control and regulation
equipment.

Neom community
SECTION 16715 - STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This document is issued as a request for quote for the supply and installation of a structured
telecommunications cabling system.
B. The structured cabling system will support voice, data, and imaging applications within the
facility.
C. This document describes the system requirements to be met in the proposals of the
telecommunications cabling vendors to secure under contract all materials, design,
engineering, installation, supervision and training services for the structured cabling system.
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This document defines the cabling system and subsystem components to include cable,
termination hardware, supporting hardware, and miscellany that the contractor will furnish to
install a complete telecommunications system supporting voice and data. The intent of this
document is to provide all pertinent information to allow the vendor to bid the labor,
supervision, tooling, and miscellaneous mounting hardware and consumables to install a
complete system. However, it is the responsibility of the vendor to propose any and all items
required for a complete system if not identified in the specifications.
1.3 TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF BIDS
A. This is an invitation to submit a bid based on the materials, systems and equipment described
in this document.
B. All bids must be submitted in accordance with the specifications and information contained
herein, as well as with any addenda, if required, issued by the purchaser.
C. The bid package shall be accompanied by a presale warranty commitment binding the awarded
contractor and manufacturer to the customer selected, extended warranty package not less
than 20 years in length.
D. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete workable

telecommunication cabling system ready for the Owner’s use. Any item not specifically shown
on the Drawings or called for in the Specification, but normally required for a complete system,
are to be considered a part of the contract.
E. Consideration other than cost alone will be used in making the determination of the successful
contractor. These factors will include financial stability, availability, design support, project
management and field supervision.
F. The Manufacturers and Products specified in the document are to be used. No substitutions of
components specifically referenced will be allowed, without prior written customer consent after
submittal review.

Neom community
1.4 INDUSTRY REQUIREMENTS
A. The following installation, documentation, component and system industry specifications shall
be met or exceeded:
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-942 and addenda
”Telecommunication Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers”
2. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and addenda ”Generic Telecommunications cabling for Customer
Premises”
3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 and addenda ”Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard”
4. ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and addenda ”Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications
Cabling & Component Standard”
5. ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 and addenda ”Fiber Optic Cabling Components Standard”
6. ANSI/TIA-569-B and addenda ”Commercial Building
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces”
7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A and addenda
”Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”
8. ANSI-J-STD-607-A and addenda
”Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for
Telecommunications”
9. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7
”Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable
Plant”
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A
”Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant”
11. IEC/TR3 61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0 and amendments
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Part 5: Installation and mitigation guidelines - Section
2: Earthing and cabling”
12. ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Ed2.0 and amendments
” Information technology - Generic cabling for customer premises”
13. CENELEC EN 50173:2000 and amendments
”Information Technology - Generic cabling systems”
14. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) – NFPA 70
“National Electrical Code (NEC) – 2008”
15. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) – IEC 364
“Electrical Installations of Buildings”
B. If a conflict exists between applicable documents, then the order in the list above shall dictate
the order of precedence in resolving conflicts. This order of precedence shall be maintained
unless a lesser order document has been adopted as code by a local, state or federal entity,
and is therefore enforceable as law by a local, state or federal inspection agency.
C. If this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent
requirement shall apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of
the documents; the vendor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release
when developing the proposal for installation.

Neom community
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work of this Section with PSTN, Owner's telephone switch (IP and conventional),
telephone instruments, workstations, servers, telecom equipment, LAN, MAN and WAN
equipment suppliers including required surge arrestors. Coordinate service entrance
arrangement with local exchange carriers, dedicated links providers and campus backbone.
1. Meet jointly with representatives of above organizations and Owner's representatives
to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and
installation interfaces.
2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to other participants.
3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross
connects in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize
arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include data on features, ratings, and performance for each component
specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts, dimensioned plan and elevation views of components. Show
access and workspace requirements.
1. System labeling schedules, including electronic copy of labeling schedules, as specified in
Part 5, in software and format selected by Owner.
C. Samples: For workstation outlet connectors, jacks, jack assemblies, and faceplates for color
selection and evaluation of technical features.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment

certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Provide
evidence of applicable registration or certification.
F. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
G. Maintenance Data: For products to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
1.7 SPARE PARTS
1. Cable: 300m copper of each size and type used for Project. Furnish on reels.
2. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type for every 20 installed, but not less than one.
3. Connecting Blocks: One of each type for every 25 installed, but not less than one.
4. Outlet Assemblies: One of each type for every 25 installed, but not less than one.

Neom community
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the requirements and specifications, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the structured cabling system include, but are
not limited to, the following (Structured cabling manufacturers listed below may also provide
cabinets and PDUs subject to compliance with the specifications):
1. Leviton (USA).
2. Siemon (USA).
3. AMP / Tyco (USA). 4. Molex (USA)
5. 3M (USA).
6. Krone (Germany).
7. Nexans (France).
8. Commscope (USA).
9. APW (USA) – Cabinets & PDUs
10. APW (Italy) – Cabinets
11. Cannon (UK) – Cabinets
12. Rittal (Germany) – Cabinets & PDUs
13. APC (Germany) – Cabinets & PDUs
14. Liebert (USA) – PDUs
15. NTI - Network Technologies Inc (USA) – Enterprise Server Environment Monitoring
System
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Either a basic link or channel model configuration may be applied to the horizontal and/or
backbone sub-systems of the structured cabling system. Applications assurance is only
applied to a channel model configuration. All channels are to be qualified for linear
transmission performance up to 500 MHz to ensure that highfrequency voltage phase and
magnitude contributions do not prove cumulative or adversely affect channel performance.
B. SYSTEM WARRANTY
1. A twenty (20) year warranty for the 500 MHz category 6A structured cabling system shall
be provided for an end-to-end channel model installation which covers applications
assurance, cable, connecting hardware and the labor cost for the repair or replacement
thereof.
C. Additional features of the warranty shall include:

1. 10G CAT6A channel specifications on all parameters across the entire frequency range of
1-500 MHz as noted below:
Minimum Performance Guarantees for 10G 6A F/UTP Channels

PARAMETER 100 MHZ 200 MHz 250 MHz 500 MHz
Insertion Loss 20.8 dB 30.0dB 33.8 dB 49.3 dB
NEXT Loss 39.9 dB 34.8 dB 33.1 dB 27.9 dB
PS NEXT 37.1 dB 31.9 dB 30.2 dB 24.8 dB
ACR 19.2 dB 4.8dB -0.7 dB -21.4 dB
PS ACR 16.3 dB 1.9 dB -3.6 dB -24.5 dB

Neom community
ACR-F (ELFEXT) 23.3 dB 17.2 dB 15.3 dB 9.3 dB

PS ACR-F(PS ELFEXT) 20.3 dB 14.2 dB 12.3 dB 6.3 dB
Return Loss 12.0 dB 9.0 dB 8.0 dB 6.0 dB
PS ANEXT 65.0 dB 65.0 dB 64.0 dB 59.5 dB
PS ANEXT Average 65.0 dB 65.0 dB 65.0 dB 61.8 dB
PS AACR-F (PS AELFEXT) 37.0 dB 31.0 dB 29.0 dB 23.0 dB
PS AACR-F Average 51.0 dB 45.0 dB 43.0 dB 37.0 dB
Prop Delay 528 ns 527 ns 526 ns 526 ns
Performance claims shall be based on worst case testing and channel configurations
D. PRODUCT WARRANTY
1. The manufacturer of passive telecommunications equipment used in a manner not
associated with the Systems Warranty must have a minimum five (5) year Component
Warranty on its entire product. The Products Warranty covers the components against
defects in material or workmanship under normal and proper use.
E. APPLICATIONS SUPPORTED
1. Existing and future applications supported for a channel model warranty include those
approved by the Institute of Electronic and Electrical Engineers (IEEE), the
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Forum, the American National Standards Institute
(ANSI) or the International Organization of Standards (ISO) that specify compatibility
with the cabling referenced herein.
A. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
1. The Contractor shall at a minimum possess the following qualifications:
2. Be in business a minimum of five (10) years.
3. Contractor shall demonstrate satisfaction of sound financial condition and can be
adequately bonded and insured if the project deems necessary.
4. Possess those licenses/permits required to perform telecommunications installations
in the specified jurisdiction.
5. Personnel knowledgeable in local, state, province and national codes and regulations.
All work shall comply with the latest revision of the codes or regulations. When conflict
exists between local or national codes or regulations, the most stringent codes or
regulations shall be followed.
6. Must possess current liability insurance certificates.
7. Must have personnel fluent in the use of Computer Aided Design and possess and
operate CAD software using .DWG or .DXF format.
B. REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING

1. The Contractor shall be fully conversant and capable in the cabling of low voltage
applications such as, but not limited to data, voice and imaging network systems. The
Contractor shall at a minimum possess the following qualifications:
2. Personnel trained and certified in the design of structured cabling systems.
3. Personnel trained and certified to install structured cabling systems.
4. The Designer and Installer shall show proof of current certification of the structured
cabling system brand that is proposed, via an updated certificate given after attending
the required training courses.
5. Provide references of the type of installation provided in this specification.

Neom community
6. Personnel trained and certified in fiber optic cabling, splicing, termination and testing
techniques. Personnel must have experience using an optical light source and power
meter in addition to an OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer).
7. Personnel trained in the installation of pathways and support for housing horizontal
and backbone cabling.
C. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
1. Contractor shall be obligated to exercise the highest standard of care in performing its
obligations as defined in those specifications.
2. Contractor acknowledges that the client will rely on contractor’s expertise, ability and
knowledge of the system being proposed and shall be obligated to exercise the highest
of standard care in performing its obligation as defined in the following Scope of Work.
D. MANUFACTURER QUALITY & PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
1. All telecommunications connecting hardware and cable must be made by an ISO 9001
Certified Manufacturer.
2. All products must meet the technical requirements listed in this specification section.
Any products not meetings these requirements will not be considered.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENRAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match
components and interconnections for optimum future performance.
B. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare fibers and conductor pairs
in cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in
backbone cable trays and wire ways to accommodate 30 percent future increase in active
workstations and terminal points.
C. Utilize cables that are LSOH plenum rated when passing unconcealed in air plenums.
2.2 BALANCED TWISTED-PAIR PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. In addition to meeting the 500 MHz category 6A specifications outlined in ANSI/TIA/EIA568-

B.2-10, the requirements in this section must also be met for all applicable balanced twisted-
pair products as listed below.
B. OUTLETS:
All 500 MHz shielded category 6A information outlets designed for termination of 4pair
balanced twisted-pair category 6A copper cable must possess the following characteristics at
the minimum:
1. Exceed category 6A component compliance through the frequency range of 1 to
500MHz.
2. Be available in multiple colors
3. Have available a gravity feed (45 degree angled) design to help control patch cord bend
radius as well as flush mount design
4. Have insulation displacement connectors with quadrant pair isolation that separates
paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.
5. Allow termination with a single conductor 110 style impact tool
6. Have available termination aid for stabilization of module to facilitate lacing and impact
during termination
7. Be backwards compatible to allow lower performing categories of cables or connecting
hardware to operate to their full capacity
8. Have rear protective strain relief caps with side or rear entry, which can be installed
onto cable before or after termination
9. Support industry standards for T568A or T568B wiring options on each
individual outlet
10. Allow installation from the front or rear of the faceplate, and allow for the jack to pass
through the faceplate without re-termination
11. Have an available spring door allowing one handed operation
12. Provide color-coded, slide-in icons available for circuit identification
13. Allow for a minimum of 20 terminations without signal degradation below standards
compliance limits
14. Be constructed of high impact, flame-retardant thermoplastic
15. Have, as an option, an outlet, which can be mounted into an IEC 60603-7 compliant
opening (keystone)

Neom community
16. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2
Canadian Telecommunications Standards
C. PATCH CORDS:
All 10G CAT6A modular equipment cords shall conform to the following minimum
performance standards:
1. Be augmented category 6 component compliant out to 500MHz
2. Be factory assembled and 100% transmission tested with laboratory grade network
analyzers for proper performance up to 500MHz
3. Utilize Category 6A F/UTP stranded screened cable for optimal transmission
4. Be backwards compatible with lower performing categories
5. Be equipped with identical modular 8-position plugs on both ends, wired straight through
with standards compliant wiring
6. Incorporate internal stranded cordage isolator within a round, dual flameretardant jacket
to provide extended alien crosstalk performance, flex life and maintain ideal pair geometry
7. Use bend relief compliant boots (with optional color-coded icons) to ensure proper
augmented category 6 performance
8. Use modular plugs, which exceed FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7
specifications, and have 50 micro-inches minimum of gold plating over nickel contacts
9. Have an optional color-coded boot with a latch guard to protect against snagging
10. Be available in standard lengths of 3, 5, 7, 10, 15 and 20 ft. with custom lengths available
upon request
11. Offer multiple cable colors (with color matching boots) in standard colors of black, white,
red, gray, yellow, blue and green for proper circuit identification
12. Be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2
Canadian Telecommunications Standards
D. PATCH PANELS:
All 10G CAT6A termination panels shall facilitate cross-connection and interconnection using
modular patch cords and shall conform to EIA standard, 19-inch relay rack mounting
requirements.
1. Allow the use of the same modular outlets used in the work area
2. Be made of lightweight, high strength brushed aluminum in 24, and 48-port configurations
3. Allow the use of other multimedia outlets including optical fiber and coaxial
4. Have openings, which allow terminated jacks to pass through panel for easy
rearrangement
5. Provide port spacing optimized to ensure alien crosstalk compliance
6. Have port identification numbers on both the front and rear of the panel
7. Accommodate at least 24 ports for (1) one rack mount spaces and 48 ports for (2) two
rack mount spaces (1RMS = 44.5 mm [1.75 in.])
8. Be with an integrated rear wire management bar for proper bend radius control and ease
of cable routing
9. Be provided with self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels
E. CAT6A CONNECTING BLOCKS:

The connecting block shall facilitate cross-connection and/or inter-connection using patch cords.
The CAT6A blocks shall posses the following characteristics:
1. Be made of flame-retardant thermoplastic, with the base consisting of horizontal index
strips for terminating up to 16-pairs of conductors.
2. Be available in 64, 128, and 192 pair sized field termination kits.
3. Have detachable stand-off legs on the 64-pair base, while non-detachable stand-off
legs are available for the 128 and 192 pair bases.

Neom community
4. Contain access openings between each row of connecting blocks allowing cables to
be routed directly to the point of termination.
5. The wire entry system on bases and connecting blocks shall be such to facilitate lacing
of pairs and minimize geometric disturbance of pairs to the point of termination.
6. Have termination strips on the base marked at 4-pair increments.
7. Have clear label holders with the appropriate colored inserts available for the wiring
blocks. The insert labels provided with the product shall contain vertical lines spaced
on 4-pair circuit size and shall not interfere with running, tracing or removing patch
cords. Label holders must be capable of mounting between each row of connecting
blocks.
8. Have bases available in 19-inch panels and high-density frame configurations for rack
or wall mounting with cable management hardware.
9. Have connecting blocks used for either the termination of cross-connect (jumper) wire
or patch cords. The connecting blocks shall only be available in 4-pair size with
internal cross-talk barriers to provide 360 of pair isolation and staggered pair spacing.
All connecting blocks shall have color-coded pair identification on face of blocks with
tip and ring designation markers and be of single piece construction.
10. Have connecting blocks with a minimum of 200 re-terminations without signal
degradation below standards compliance limit.
11. Support wire sizes: Solid 22-26 AWG (0.64 mm - 0.40 mm), and 7-strand wires.
12. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2
Canadian Telecommunications Standards.
13. Meet the following performance specifications:
Margin over category 6 @ 250MHz

Parameters Worst Typical
Case
Insertion Loss (dB) 0.12 0.15
NEXT* (dB) 12.7 13.9
FEXT* (dB) 22.1 22.6
Return Loss (dB) 5.3 5.9
* Tested in both Differential and Common modes
F. COPPER TRUNK CABLES:

The pre-terminated 10G CAT6A copper trunk cables shall be assembled using 500MHz
Category 6A information outlets and cable and must possess the following characteristics at
the minimum:
1. Be factory assembled and 100% transmission tested with laboratory grade network
analyzers for proper performance up to 500MHz
2. Be backwards compatible with lower performing categories
3. Utilize high quality 10G CAT6A F/UTP cable available in CMR, CMP and LSOH jacket
materials.
4. Be factory terminated and tested with 10G 6A shielded information outlets.
5. Have each leg labeled for proper outlet orientation
6. Have a “straight cut” pattern to the trunk cable ends to create optimal cable orientation
and to limit cable crossing.
7. Be available in standard lengths of 3m (9ft) to 90m (295ft) with custom lengths
available upon request

Neom community
8. Have each cable assembly coded with a unique identification number for
administrative purposes.
G. CABLE:
All 10G CAT6A F/UTP cables shall conform to the following minimum performance standards:
1. Have a round cable jacket available in LSOH, PVC and plenum options with a nominal
cable O.D. of less than or equal to 7.4mm
2. Have a construction comprised of 4-pairs of 0.57mm (0.02 in) (24AWG) solid bare
copper conductors utilizing a center isolation member to maintain pair geometry for
optimal NEXT performance
3. Have a Foil tape surrounding the cable pairs with a drain wire with an aluminum foil
tape surrounding the drain wire
4. Have a rip cord installed under the jacket for jacket removal
5. Be available in different jacket colors for PVC, LSOH and plenum versions
6. Provide the following 100m, 4-connector topology performance:
* Values above 500MHz are informational only
7. Meet the following electrical specifications:
Max DC Resistance (@ 20°C) <17.0Ω /100m

Neom community
Characteristic Impedance (no 1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ±

impedance averaging allowed) 15% 100 - 750MHz: 100 ohms ±
22%
Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) LSOH & PVC – 72% Plenum – 68%
2.3 OPTICAL FIBER PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. In addition to meeting the specifications outlined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ISO/IEC

11801:2000 Ed2.0, the requirements in this section must also be met for all applicable optical fiber
products as listed below.
B. OUTLETS & ADAPTERS:

All optical fiber outlets/adapters shall meet the following characteristics:
1. Be flush mounted, gravity feed (45 degree angled) design.
2. Accommodate SC, ST, MT-RJ or LC adapters.
3. Universally accept both multimode and singlemode connectors.
4. Be equipped with dust covers for all ports.
5. Have color-coded, snap-in icons available for circuit identification.
6. Be made of high impact flame-retardant thermoplastic.
C. CONNECTORS
All optical fiber connectors shall meet the following characteristics:
1. Multimode LC Connectors:
a. Meet the Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications
of TIA/EIA-604-10.
b. Be available in simplex and duplex versions.
c. Terminate both 50/125µm optical fiber.
d. Have a quick field termination process, which does not require power.
e. Have a termination process, which incorporates use of a reliable anaerobic
adhesive, which has a high resistance to environmental extremes.
f. Utilize a precision Zirconia ceramic ferrule.
g. Have jacketed and buffered versions.
h. Meet the following electrical specifications:
Performance
Parameter
(dB)
Insertion Loss (typ) 0.1
Insertion Loss (max) < 0.2
Durability (500 cycles) < 0.1
Return Loss (min) 20

Neom community
2. Singlemode LC Connectors
a. Meet the Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications
of TIA/EIA-604-10A.
b. Be available in simplex and duplex versions.
c. Have a quick field termination process, which does not require power.
d. Have a termination process, which incorporates use of a reliable anaerobic
adhesive, which has a high resistance to environmental extremes.
e. Utilize a precision Zirconia ceramic ferrule.
f. Have jacketed and buffered versions.
g. An outer housing color-coded (blue) in accordance with TIA and ISO cabling
standards.
h. Meet the following performance specifications:
Performance
Parameter
(dB)
Insertion Loss (typ) 0.1
Insertion Loss (max) < 0.2
Durability (500 cycles) < 0.1
Return Loss (min) 55
D. PATCH CORDS & PIGTAILS

1. LC to LC multimode Fiber equipment cords shall possess the following characteristics:
a. Be available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3 and 5 meters with custom lengths
b. Utilize 50/125µm duplex multimode fiber cable that is OFNR riser grade and meets
the requirements of NEC/NFPA 70 Section 770-51(B)
c. Feature premium fiber that meets IEEE 802.3ae 10 Gigabit Ethernet requirements
as well as IEC 60793-2-10 and TIA 492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth
Differential Modal Delay (DMD) specifications
d. Have one sensor pin for each duplex connector to connect to an intelligent patching
system.
e. Sensor pins to feature 30 micro-inches of gold over nickel for long term
reliability
f. Have access to the sensor pin at the rear of the sensor clip for test and mapping
purposes.
g. Offer a superior connector polish that meets Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications
for end-face geometry (including radius of curvature, apex offset, and spherical
undercut)
h. Use cable and connectors that are complaint with color coding specifications as
listed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B
i. Utilize precision zirconia ceramic ferrules on connectors
j. Have LC-SC hybrid versions available
k. Include dust caps on all assemblies
l. Be 100% optically tested to meet the following performance specifications:

Neom community
50/125 m
Parameter
850nm 1300nm 850nm*
Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km) 1500 500 2000
Max. Insertion Loss (dB) 0.50 (0.10 Typical)
Min. Return Loss (dB) 30 (35 Typical)
* Laser bandwidth
2. LC to LC singlemode Fiber equipment cords shall possess the following characteristics:

a. Be available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3 and 5 meters with custom lengths
b. Utilize duplex singlemode fiber cable that is OFNR riser grade and meets the
requirements of NEC/NFPA 70 Section 770-51(B)
c. Offer a superior connector polish that meets Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications
for end-face geometry (including radius of curvature, apex offset, and spherical
undercut)
d. Have one sensor pin for each duplex connector to connect to an intelligent patching
system.
e. Sensor pins to feature 30 micro-inches of gold over nickel for long term
reliability
f. Have access to the sensor pin at the rear of the sensor clip for test and mapping
purposes.
g. Use cable and connectors that are complaint with color coding specifications as
listed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B
h. Utilize precision zirconia ceramic ferrules on connectors
i. Have SC-LC hybrid versions available
j. Include dust caps on all assemblies
k. Be 100% optically tested to meet the following performance specifications:
Parameter Singlemode
Max. Insertion Loss (dB) 0.40 (0.1 Typical)
Min. Return Loss (dB) 55 (60 Typical)
E. FIBER TRUNK CABLES

Multimode Fiber Trunk assemblies shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Be available in custom lengths measured in both meters and feet.
2. Utilize 50/125µm multimode fiber cable that is available in OFNR, OFNP, LSOH and
Armored jackets
3. Use cable and connectors that are complaint with color coding specifications as listed in
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B
4. Be available with a variety of connector styles including, MTRJ, LC, SC and ST. Unless
Otherwise noted, LC connectors shall be provided.
5. Include dust caps on all assemblies
6. Each leg to be to be designated for proper connector orientation.
7. Each cable to be coded with a unique identification number for administrative purposes.
8. Have trunk assembled with option “pulling-eye” for ease of installation and to protect
terminated ends.
9. Be available in strand counts of 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 144.

Neom community
10. Be 100% optically tested to meet the following performance specifications in the tables
below
11. Singlemode Fiber Trunk assemblies shall meet the following minimum requirements:
12. Be available in custom lengths measured in both meters and feet.
13. Utilize Singlemode fiber cable that is available in OFNR, OFNP, LSOH and Plenum
Interlocking Armored jackets
14. Use cable and connectors that are complaint with color coding specifications as listed in
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B
15. Be available with a variety of connector styles including LC and SC. Unless Otherwise
noted, LC connectors shall be provided.
16. Include dust caps on all assemblies
17. Each leg to be to be designated for proper connector orientation.
18. Each cable to be coded with a unique identification number for administrative purposes.
19. Have trunk assembled with option “pulling-eye” for ease of installation and to protect
terminated ends.
20. Be available in strand counts of 6, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 144.
21. Be 100% optically tested to meet the following performance specifications in the tables
below:
Multimode Singlemode
Cable Type 50/125µm 9/125µm
(850/1300 nm) (1310/1550 nm)
Fiber Cable Attenuation, Max
3.5/1.0 0.5/0.5
(dB/km)
OFL Bandwidth, min (MHz x 1500/500 N/A
km)
Effective Modal Bandwidth, min
2000/NA N/A
(MHz x km)
Blue, Orange, Green, Brown,
Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate,
Break-Out Colors: Single Fiber Slate, White, Red, Black, Yellow,
White, Red, Black, Yellow, Violet,
Strands Violet, Rose, Aqua (Per TIA-
Rose, Aqua (Per TIA-598-C)
598C)
Blue, Orange, Green, Brown,
Blue, Orange, Green, Brown, Slate,
Sub-Unit Colors and/or Slate, White, Red, Black, Yellow,
White, Red, Black, Yellow, Violet,
Markings Violet, Rose, Aqua (Per TIA-
Rose, Aqua (Per TIA-598-C)
598C)
CONNECTORS — Optical Specificati ons
Fiber Type Max Insertion Loss (dB) Min Return Loss (dB)
50/125µm Multimode 0.50 (0.10 Typical) 30 (35 Typical)
Singlemode 0.40 (0.25 Typical) 55 (57 Typical)

Neom community
CONNECTORS — Physical
Specifi cations
TIA Intermateabilty
Connector Type IEC Intermateabilty Compliance Compliance
SC (only where
specifically indicated, IEC 60874-14 TIA/EIA-604-3
otherwise LC connector)
LC IEC 61754-20 TIA/EIA-604-10
F. FIBER ENCLOSURES
All interconnect centers, panels and trays (units) shall provide cross-connect, interconnect,
splicing capabilities and contain cable management for supporting and routing the fiber
cables/jumpers.
1. For Floor Telecom Racks or vertical mounting in server cabinets:
a. Not be bigger than one rack mount space and accommodate up to 36 ports for SC,
MT-RJ, LC or ST adapter plates or 18 ports for FC.
b. Have preloaded adapter plates with ST and SC fiber adapters in 6 and 8 port
version, as well as a 12 port version for the SC, MT-RJ and LC adapters.
c. Have blank adapter plates for future growth of the fiber infrastructure.
d. Have six and eight port fiber adapter plates, which allow for color coding connectors.
e. Have fiber adapter plates with snap-in installation and one-finger removal.
f. Accommodate hybrid adapter plates for ST-to-SC or SC-to-ST connections.
g. Be modular in design with internal fiber managers that provide slack storage to
comply with fiber bend radius and the recommended slack storage length.
h. Have a snap-on front shield to be used as a labeling surface and to protect jumpers.
This shield can also relocate to another position during termination to maintain circuit
identification.
i. Accommodates a splice tray for mechanical or fusion splices.
j. Have a drawer mechanism, which allows the panel to slide forward or to the rear,
and has defeatable latches to allow removal from the rack or cabinet.
k. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and
C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards.
2. For Datacenter’s network and Main Telecom Racks:

a. Be available in black and constructed of 0.08 thickness aluminum alloy with 18-gauge steel
cover.
b. Feature compact 2, 3 or 4 U RMS design depending on capacity
c. Use single-finger accessible fiber adapter plates incorporating FC, LC, MT-RJ, SC, SC/ST
and ST fiber adapters with blank plates available for support of future growth.
d. Support the following fiber capacities and interfaces using fiber adapter plates in several
connector types options:
Adapter Types Capacity (# Capacity Capacity Capacity

(connectors of simplex (# of (# of (# of
types ports) for 2 simplex simplex simplex
combinations U Fiber ports) for ports) for ports) for
possible and Enclosure 2 U High 3 U Fiber 4 U Fiber
respective port Density Enclosure Enclosure
count) Fiber

Neom community
Enclosure
FC, SC, SC/ST, 24 36 48 72

ST
FC, SC, SC/ST, 32 48 64 96
ST
LC, MT-RJ, SC, 48 72 96 144
ST
LC, MT-RJ 64 96 128 192
LC, MT-RJ 96 144 192 288
e. Incorporate dual-level fiber managers to effectively store fiber cable slack in both the front
and rear of the enclosure.
f. Have integrated key-lockable front and rear transparent doors with singlefinger latches and
spring release hinges for removal.
g. Accommodate up to four (for 2U, 3U capacities) or six (for 4 U capacity) 24-port fusion or
12-port mechanical stackable splice trays.
h. Have a sliding tray that can slide out the front and rear of the enclosure and be secured at
multiple working positions as well as be fully removable for increased access.
i. Have cable access points for fiber jumpers entering and exiting the unit with rotating
grommets to facilitate cable loading and to minimize micro bending stress.
j. Have anchor points for securing fiber cable(s) entering the unit.
k. Have labeling that can be viewed with doors open or closed and meets or exceeds
ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A requirements and also be laser printable.
l. Be able to mount both 19-inch and 23-inch rack/cabinets.
m. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to UL 1863 United States Standards and
C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards.
3. For Wall Mounted Compact Fiber Enclosures :

a. Have a low profile, compact design, able to accommodate up to 24 or 96ports.
b. Accommodate SC, ST, MT-RJ, and LC adapters and allow for colorcoding.
c. Accommodate hybrid adapter plates for ST-to-SC or SC-to-ST connections.
d. Be modular in design with management clips that provide two independent levels of slack
storage to comply with fiber bend radius and the recommended slack storage length.
e. Have an administrative labeling system available on a hinged door capable of latching or
locking for protection.
f. Have fiber adapter plates with snap-in installation and one-finger removal.
g. Have an integrated jumper guard that has a hinged and lockable door separate from the
main cable management section.
h. Have anchor points, and a strain relief thumbscrew for the fiber cable entry to the unit.
i. Accommodate stackable splice trays, which manage up to a total of 48 splices.
j. Be constructed of 18 gauge steel.
k. Must be certified by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2
Canadian Telecommunications Standards.

Neom community
G. FIBER OPTIC CABLE

In addition to meeting the applicable performance specifications, all optical fiber cable shall be
appropriate for the environment in which it is installed.
1. Multimode optical fiber cable:
a. All horizontal multimode optical fiber cable must be a minimum of two strands of
50/125µm multimode.
b. Have an Aqua colored round lead free cable jacket available in OFNR, OFNP and
LSOH constructions.
c. Shall contain a Rip Cord applied longitudinally under the cable jacket for easy cable
jacket removal
d. Shall contain a lightweight Central Strength member located in the middle of the
fiber bundles.
e. Shall contain both color-coded buffered fibers as well as color-coded buffer tubes.
f. Cables shall have length markings in 2 ft. increments
g. Fiber optic cables shall be available with aramide non-metallic armor that shall be
rodent proof.
h. Multimode Fiber Optic Cables will be available in strand counts of 4, 6, 12, 24, 48,
72 and 96.
i. Shall meet these minimum performance parameters:
Minimum Performance Parameters for Qualified Cables

Maximum
Minimum Bandwidth (MHz- Group Index of
Attenuation
km) Refraction
(dB/km)
850 nm 1300 nm 850 1300 850 1300
nm nm nm nm
Laser - 2000
OFL - 500 3.5 1.0 1.483 1.479
OFL - 1500
j. Ethernet Applications Supported:
Application Distance (m)

10GBASE-SX (850 nm) 300
10GBASE-LX4 (1300 nm) 300
1000BASE-SX (850 nm) 900
1000BASE-LX (1300 nm) 600
Fiber Channel 266 (1300 nm) 1,500
ATM 622 (1300 nm) 500
ATM 155 (1300 nm) 2,000
ATM 52 (1300 nm) 3,000
FDDI (Original 1300 nm) 2,000
100BASE-FX (1300 nm) 2,000

Neom community
k. Physical Characteristics 50/125µm:
Core Cladding Coating Buffer Core Cladding

Size Size Concentricity
Size Size (Microns) (Microns) (Microns)
(Microns) (Microns)
50 ± 3 125 ± 2 245 ± 10 900 ± 50 ≤3.0
2. Singlemode optical fiber cable:

a. Singlemode optical fiber cable shall be used for 1st and 2nd Level Backbone
applications only.
b. Have a Yellow colored round lead free cable jacket available in OFNR, OFNP
and LSOH constructions.
c. Shall contain a Rip Cord applied longitudinally under the cable jacket for easy
cable jacket removal
d. Shall contain a lightweight Central Strength member located in the middle of the
fiber bundles.
e. Shall contain both color-coded buffered fibers as well as color-coded buffer
tubes.
f. Cables shall have length markings in 2 ft. increments
g. Single Mode Fiber optic cables will be available in strand counts of 4, 6, 12, 24,
48, 72, and 96.
h. Be available with aramide or glass armored non-metallic armor that shall be
rodent proof.
i. Shall meet these minimum performance parameters:
Minimum Performance Parameters for Qualified Cables

Maximum
Attenuation Zero dispersion Index of Refraction
Fiber Cable Type (dB/km)
1310 nm 1550 nm Wavelength (nm) Slope (nm²-km) 1310 nm 1550 nm
Singlemode Indoor 0.50 0.50 1300-1324 <0.093 1.467 1.468
j. Ethernet Applications Supported:
Application Distance (m)

10GBASE-L (1310 nm) 8,000
10GBASE-E (1550 nm) 30,000
10G Fiber Channel (Serial-1310 nm) 10,000
10G Fiber Channel (WDM-1310 nm) 10,000
1000BASE-LX (1300 nm) 5,000
Fiber Channel 266/1062 (1300 nm) 10,000
ATM 52/155/622 (1300 nm) 15,000

Neom community
2.4 TELECOMMUNICATION RACKS AND SERVER CABINETS
For rack-mounted installations in telecommunications rooms the installer shall use 19 inch
equipment racks as outlined below:
A. Have ample vertical cable channels as side rails up to the rack height.
B. Include vertical cable managers mounted on the front of the channels with hinged covers that
can handle large quantities of cables and patch cords. Cable managers must retain cables
even when covers are removed. Covers are modular in design, which eliminates the need to
remove full-length covers for each patch cord change.
C. Have additional vertical cable manager segments for mounting to the back of the Rack to
provide additional cable management.
D. Have channels capable of utilizing and re-locating ten high capacity, reusable hook and loop
cable managers.
E. Have cable access holes on side rails, which allow cables to be routed between adjacent racks.
F. Have standard 19-inch ANSI/EIA-310-C mounting holes having the full height of the rack on
front and back of rails.
G. Have ladder channel, which acts as a top bracket to easily nest a ladder tray. The channel
must have carriage bolt holes for attaching to the ladder system.
H. Have available an optional rack top cable tray which manages cable bundles routed above the
rack, and eliminates the need for installing a ladder rack for routing cables. The tray is mounted
without the need of tools or hardware and includes up to three (3) separate cable paths
featuring removable quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers.
I. Be available in two versions, either aluminum or steel with a black finish and utilize black
grommets for unused cable openings. Unless otherwise noted, cabinets shall be steel.
J. Have an additional vertical cable management channel up to the rack height which that is to
be located between adjacent racks. The channel shall include cable retainers, which can be
hinged left or right and be located in any position along the channel. K. Have floor mounting
holes and a ground lug for 0-6 gauge ground cable provided.
L. Have metered and monitored with remote management capabilities, 8-outlet power strips for
mounting onto the rack.
2.5 FACEPLATES
A. All faceplates installed, as part of this specification shall have these minimum features listed
below:
1. Be applicable to both fiber and copper applications.
2. Be available in 2 and 4-port single-gang configurations or 6 and 8-port doublegang
configurations.
3. Have write on designation labels for circuit identification together with a clear plastic
cover.

Neom community
4. Feature easily removable designation label covers which can be removed without use
of tools.
5. Be available in single-gang and double-gang configurations.
6. Have Designer style faceplates and mounting frames available
7. Have surface mount boxes and standoff rings available for both single and double gang
faceplates.
8. Unless faceplates are stainless-steel, they are to be manufactured using UV resistant,
high impact thermoplastic to prevent color fading and provide additional durability.
9. Faceplates are to be provided in several types depending on the mounting location:
10. General Use: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, white color (as
approved by the architect). Default IP of the selected manufacturer (non decorated
area).
11. Technical Spaces and areas subject to ingress: Heavy gauge, break resistant, color as
approved by the architect, pressure molded plastic, IP56
12. Outdoor locations: Heavy gauge, break resistant, pressure molded plastic, color as
approved by the architect, IP66
13. Decorated Spaces: Heavy gauge, break resistant, metallic, brushed stainless steel (or
other finish subject to Architect and Engineer approval).
14. Faceplates are to be from the same brand and finish of those selected for other wiring
devices and specified in section 16140 “WIRING DEVICES AND DISCONNECTS”
2.6 METERED & MONITORED RACK-MOUNTED PDU, 1U, 16 AMPS (only if metered
PDUs are required in drawings and specifications)
A. Electrical Characteristics:
1. Input Voltage: 208V, 230V
2. Input Connections: IEC-320 C20
3. Input Frequency: 50/60 Hz 4. Derated Input Current: 16 Amps.
5. Output Voltage: 208V, 230V
6. Output Connections: 8 x IEC 320 C13
B. Environmental:
1. Operating Environment: -5 - 45 °C
2. Operating Relative Humidity: 5 - 95%
3. Operating Elevation: 0-3000 meters
C. Main Features:
1. Horizontal mounting capability
2. Remote Management Capabilities: Full-featured network management interfaces that
provide standards-based management via Web, SNMP, and Telnet. Allows users to
access, configure, and manage PDUs from remote locations. Ability to upgrade the
firmware via network download to installed PDUs for product enhancements.
3. Local Current Monitoring Display: The aggregate current drawn per power distribution
unit is displayed on the unit via a digital display. The local digital display shall avoid
overloaded circuits by providing a visible warning when the current drawn is close to
the maximum amperage allowed on the strip.
4. Alarm Thresholds: Freely defined alarm thresholds in order to avoid overloaded
circuits. Network and visual alarms inform the user of possible problems.
5. Load indicator LED: Indicates overload and warning conditions based on the user-
defined alarm thresholds. Alerts users of potential overloaded circuits.

Neom community
6. Each unit shall be provided with cord retention bracket(s), rack mounting brackets and
product documentation.
D. Conformance:
1. Regulatory Approvals: cUL Listed, CE, CSA, FCC Part 15 Class A, ICES003,UL
60950,UL Listed, VDE
E. Warranty: 2 years
2.7 Enterprise Server Environment Monitoring System:
A. Server Environment Monitoring System that monitors critical environmental conditions, such
as temperature, humidity, liquid water presence, motion, intrusion, and vibration. When a
sensor goes out of range of a configurable threshold, the system will notify the administrator
via email, LEDs, alarm beacon, web page, network management (SNMP), SMS messages and
voice calls.
B. The system shall include three internal sensors for temperature, humidity and power. It shall
also support 16 external configurable sensors and eight digital input sensors. Available sensors
include temperature, humidity, smoke, water, glass break, motion, vibration, 4-20mA converter,
voltage detector…etc.
C. The system shall include dual AC power supplies (230 VAC-50Hz), rack mounting kit and
Server Environment Monitoring System Management Software for 10 units.
D. The Enterprise Server Environment Monitoring System shall be composed of NTI (Network
Technologies Inc) part # ENVIROMUX-SEMS-16DP units and ENVIROMUX-MS-SEMS0010
software.
E. Temperature sensors installed in IT racks shall have the following specifications:

1. Temperature measurement range from 0°C to 50°C
2. Accuracy ±0.5°C
3. High resistance to external influences on the cable due to digital output signal.
4. Un-required re-calibration after initial set-up.
5. RJ45 connector that supports CAT5/5e/6 cable for up to 300m
6. Fully compatible with the Environment Monitoring System described above
7. Regulatory approvals: CE, RoHS
8. The temperature sensors shall be NTI (Network Technologies Inc) part #
ENVIROMUX-STS
F. Humidity Sensor sensors installed in IT racks shall have the following specifications:
1. Applications from 0°C to 50°C and 20% to 80% relative humidity.
2. Accurate to within ±5% relative humidity.
3. High resistance to external influences on the cable due to digital output signal.
4. Re-calibration is not necessary after initial set-up.
5. RJ45 connector supports CAT5/5e/6 cable up to 300m
6. Fully compatible with the Environment Monitoring System described above
7. Regulatory approvals: CE, RoHS
8. The temperature sensors shall be NTI (Network Technologies Inc) part #
ENVIROMUX-SHS
G.Warranty: 2 years
PART 3 - EXECUTION

Neom community
3.1 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS
1. Refer to section 16118 “RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS” for related products
and field installation works.
2. Product selection and installation shall take into account the extra-large bending radius
of telecom cables, especially for CAT6A F/UTP cables serving embedded wall mounted
telecom outlets and fiber optic cables.
B. SUPPORTING SYSTEMS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES
1. Refer to section 16120 “WIRES, CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS AND
RELATED ACCESSORIES” for related products and field installation works.
C. HORIZONTAL CABLING
1. The Horizontal Subsystem is the portion of the telecommunications cabling system that
extends from the work area telecommunications outlet/connector to the horizontal
cross-connect in the telecommunications room. It consists of the telecommunications
outlet/connector, the horizontal cables, optional consolidation point, and that portion of
the cross-connect in the telecommunications room serving the horizontal cable.
D. BACKBONE CABLING
1. Cables allowed for use in the backbone include: multi-pair 100Ω balanced twisted-
pair copper CAT6A F/UTP, 50/125µm multimode Laser optimized optical fiber OM3
or better, and singlemode optical fiber cables. The cable shall support voice, data
and imaging applications. The bending radius and pulling strength requirements of all
backbone cables shall be observed during handling and installation
2. INTRABUILDING CABLING
a. The cable route within a building, connecting closet to closet or closet to the
equipment room is referred to as the Intrabuilding Backbone Subsystem. It links
the Main Cross-connect in the equipment room to Intermediate Cross-connects
and Horizontal Cross-connects in the Telecommunications Rooms. It consists of
the backbone transmission media between these locations and the associated
connecting hardware terminating this media. Those links shall be executed with
armored cables unless fully contained in egress resistant raceways or enclosures.
3. INTERBUILDING CABLING
a. When a distribution system encompasses more than one building, the components
that provide the link between buildings constitute the Interbuilding Backbone
Subsystem. This subsystem includes the backbone transmission media,
associated connecting hardware terminating this media, and electrical protection
devices to mitigate harmful voltages when the media is exposed to lightning
and/or high voltage power surges that pass through the building cable. It is
normally a first-level backbone cable beginning at the main cross-connect in the
equipment room of the hub building and extending to the intermediate cross-
connect in the equipment room of a satellite building. Those links shall be
executed with armored cables.
E. TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM
1. The Telecommunications Room is generally considered to be a floor(s) serving facility.
The Horizontal Cross-connect links the Horizontal Subsystem and the Backbone
Subsystem together.
2. The Horizontal Cross-connect shall consist of racks or panels for termination of copper
cables or racks or wall mount interconnect centers or fiber management panels/trays
for the termination of optical fibers.

Neom community
3. Cross-connect spaces include the labeling of hardware for providing circuit

identification and patch cords or cross-connect wire used for creating circuit
connections at the cross-connect.
4. The telecommunications room shall be equipped to
contain
telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, and associated crossconnects.
5. Separation from sources of EMI shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA569-B and
local codes.
6. Communication grounding / earthing and bonding shall be in accordance with
applicable codes and regulations. It is recommended that the requirements of IEC/TR3
61000-5-2 - Ed. 1.0, ANSI-J-STD-607-A, or both be observed throughout the entire
cabling system.
7. The telecommunications room shall be dedicated to the telecommunications function.
Access to telecommunications rooms shall be restricted to authorized service
personnel and shall not be shared with building services that may interfere with the
telecommunications systems or be used for building maintenance services.
F. EQUIPMENT ROOM
1. The Equipment Subsystem consists of shared (common) electronic communications
equipment in the equipment room or telecommunications room and the transmission
media required to terminate this equipment on distribution hardware.
2. The equipment room shall be equipped to contain telecommunications equipment,
cable terminations, and associated cross-connects.
3. Separation from sources of EMI shall be as
specified in the
Telecommunication Room section of this specification.
cabling system.
5. The equipment room shall not be shared with building services that may interfere with
the telecommunications systems or be used for custodial services.
G. ENTRANCE FACILITY
1. The entrance facility shall be equipped to contain telecommunications equipment, cable
terminations, and associated cross-connects.
2. Separation from sources of EMI shall be as specified ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B.
cabling system.
4. The entrance facility shall not be shared with building services that may interfere with
the telecommunications systems or be used for custodial services.
5. The entrance facility shall be located in a dry area not subject to flooding.

Neom community
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. SITE SURVEY
1. Prior to placing any cable pathways or cable, the contractor shall survey the site to
determine job conditions will not impose any obstructions that would interfere with the
safe and satisfactory placement of the cables. The arrangements to remove any
obstructions with the Project Manager need to be determined at that time.
B. CABLE PATHWAYS
1. Pathways shall be designed and installed to meet applicable local and national
building and electrical codes or regulations.
2. Grounding / Earthing and bonding of pathways shall comply with applicable codes
and regulations.
3. Pathways shall not have exposed sharp edges that may come into contact with
telecommunications cables.
4. The number of cables placed in a pathway shall not exceed manufacture
specifications, nor, will the geometric shape of a cable be affected.
C. INTRABUILDING CABLE ROUTING

1. The backbone subsystem shall include cable installed in a vertical manner between
floor telecommunications rooms and the main or intermediate crossconnect in a multi-
story building and cable installed horizontally between telecommunications rooms
and the main or intermediate cross-connect in a long single story building like a hotel,
school or factory.
2. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, all fiber cables will be run in
innerduct or cable trays.
3. Fibers will be terminated in the telecommunications rooms using LC connectors in
wall mounted interconnect centers or rack mounted panels equipped with sufficient
ports, slack storage space and splice trays if required to terminate and secure all
fibers.
4. Adequate riser sleeve/slot space shall be available with the ability to ingress the area
at a later date in all telecommunications rooms, such that no drilling of additional
sleeves/slots is necessary.
5. The backbone cables shall be installed in a star topology, emanating from the main
cross-connect to each telecommunications room. An intermediate cross-connect
may be present between the main cross-connect and the horizontal cross-connect.
This is known as a hierarchical star topology.
6. At least one 4-pair balanced twisted-pair; hybrid/bundled or multi-pair cable should
be run for each Intrabuilding backbone segment.
7. Optical fiber should be run for any backbone segment greater than 90 m (295 ft.). If
the Intrabuilding backbone segment is less than 90 m (295 ft), and fiber is not routed,
the balanced twisted-pair cable shall be category 6A or higher.
8. Backbone pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius
of backbone cables is kept within manufacturer specifications both during and after
installation.

Neom community
D. INTERBUILDING CABLE ROUTING

1. The backbone subsystem shall include cable installed between buildings via
underground, tunnel, direct -buried, aerial or any combination of these from the main
cross-connect to an intermediate cross-connect in a multi-building campus.
2. Unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, all fiber cables will be run in
innerduct or cable trays.
3. Fibers will be terminated in the telecommunications rooms using LC connectors in wall

mounted interconnect centers or rack mounted panels equipped with sufficient ports,
slack storage space and splice trays if required to terminate and secure all fibers.
4. In an underground system, adequate underground conduit space shall be available and
accessible at each building. The conduits shall not exceed a fill factor of 40%.
5. All underground systems shall be designed to prevent water runoff from entering the
building.
6. The backbone cables shall be installed in a star topology, emanating from the main
cross-connect to each satellite building telecommunications room. All Interbuilding
cables shall be installed to the applicable codes and regulations.
7. Optical fiber shall be run for all Interbuilding backbone segments, and as a
recommendation, at least one balanced twisted-pair cable should be run for each
Interbuilding backbone segment.
8. Backbone pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius
and pulling tension of backbone cables is kept within cable manufacturer specifications
both during and after installation.
9. Those links shall be executed with armored cables.
E. HORIZONTAL CABLE ROUTING

1. All horizontal cables, regardless of media type, shall not exceed 90 m (295 ft) from the
telecommunications outlets in the work area to the horizontal cross connect.
2. The combined length of jumpers, or patch cords and equipment cables in the
telecommunications room and the work area should not exceed 10 m (33 ft) unless
used in conjunction with a multi-user telecommunications outlet.
3. Unless specifically required, two horizontal cables shall be routed to each work area.
At least one horizontal cable connected to an information outlet shall be 4-pair, 100Ω
balanced twisted-pair.
4. It is recommended that a minimum horizontal cable distance of 15 m (49 ft.) shall be
maintained between the telecommunications room and the work area.
5. For installations with consolidation points, a minimum horizontal cable distance of 15
m (49 ft) shall be maintained between the telecommunications room and consolidation
point, and 5 m (16 ft) between the consolidation point and the work area.
6. Horizontal pathways shall be installed or selected such that the minimum bend radius
of horizontal cables is kept within manufacturer specifications both during and after
installation.
7. In open ceiling cabling, cable supports shall be provided by means that is structurally
independent of the suspended ceiling, its framework, or supports. These supports shall
be spaced no more than 1.5 m (5 ft) apart. NOTE: Cable tie-downs should maintain a
minimum distance of 0.6 m (2 ft) apart when within 5 m (16 ft) of the termination point.
8. F/UTP (ScTP): Telecommunications pathways, spaces and metallic cables, which run
parallel with electric power or lighting, which is less than 3kVA, shall be installed with a
minimum clearance of 0 m (0 ft).
parallel with electric power or lighting, which is more than 3kVA but less than 6kVA,
shall be installed with a minimum clearance of 0.6 m (2 ft).

Neom community
parallel with electric power or lighting, which is more than 6kVA, shall be installed with
a minimum clearance of 1 m (3 ft).
11. No telecommunications cross-connects shall be physically located within 6 m (20 ft) of
electrical distribution panels, step down devices, or transformers, which carry voltages
in excess of 480 Vrms.
12. For voice or data applications, 4-pair balanced twisted-pair or fiber optic cables shall
be run using a star topology from the telecommunications room serving that floor to
every individual information outlet. The customer prior to installation of the cabling shall
approve all cable routes.
13. The Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of
the 4 pair balanced twisted-pair and fiber optic cable during handling and installation.
14. Each run of balanced twisted-pair cable between horizontal portion of the cross-
connect in the telecommunication closet and the information outlet shall not contain
splices.
15. In a false ceiling environment, a minimum of 75 mm (3 in) shall be observed between
the cable supports and the false ceiling.
16. Continuous conduit runs installed by the contractor should not exceed 30.5 m (100 ft)
or contain more than two (2) 90 degree bends without utilizing appropriately sized pull
boxes.
17. All horizontal pathways shall be designed, installed and grounded to meet applicable
local and national building and electrical codes.
18. The number of horizontal cables placed in a cable support or pathway shall be limited
to a number of cables that will not cause distortion to the geometric shape of the cables.
Under no circumstances should cables in the horizontal pathway be bundled. This is to
minimize “alien” cross talk.
19. Maximum conduit pathway capacity shall not exceed a 40% fill. However, perimeter
and furniture fill is limited to 60% fill for move and changes.
20. Horizontal distribution cables shall not be exposed in the work area or other locations
with public access.
F. WORK AREA TERMINATION

1. All balanced twisted-pair cables wired to the telecommunications outlet/connector, shall
have 4-pairs terminated in eight-position modular outlets in the work area. All pairs
shall be terminated.
2. The telecommunications outlet/connector shall be securely mounted at planned
locations.
3. The height of the telecommunications faceplates shall be to applicable codes and
regulations.
G. MISCELLANEOUS ISSUES
1. PULLING TENSION
a. The maximum cable pulling tensions shall not exceed 25lbf (max).
2. BEND RADIUS
a. The maximum cable bend radii shall not exceed manufacturer’s specifications.
b. In spaces with balanced twisted-pair cable terminations, the maximum bend radius
for the 4 pair cable shall not be less than four times the outside diameter of the cable
unless this violates manufacturer specifications.
c. During the actual installation, bend radius on 4 pair cable shall not be less than eight
times the outside diameter of the cable unless this violates manufacturer
specifications.

Neom community
3. SLACK
a. In the work area, a minimum of 300 mm (12 in) should be left for balanced twisted-
pair cables, while 1 m (3 ft) be left for fiber cables.
b. In telecommunications rooms a minimum of 3 m (10 ft) of slack should be left for all
cable types. This slack must be neatly managed on trays or other support types.
4. CABLE TIE WRAPS

a. Tie wraps shall be used at appropriate intervals to secure cable and to provide
strain relief at termination points. These wraps shall not be over tightened to the
point of deforming or crimping the cable sheath. NOTE: Tie wraps shall not be
used on patch-cords/equipment cords.
b. Hook and loop cable managers should be used in the closet where reconfiguration
of cables and terminations may be frequent.
5. GROUNDING
a. All grounding / earthing and bonding shall be done to applicable codes and
regulations.
6. FIRE PROTECTION
a. Properly installed firestop systems shall be installed to prevent or retard the
spread of fire, smoke, water, and gases through the building. This requirement
applies to openings designed for telecommunications use that may or may not be
penetrated by cables, wires, or raceways.
b. Fire stops shall be done to applicable codes.
7. WORKMANSHIP
a. All work shall be done in a workman like fashion of the highest standards in the
telecommunications industry.
b. All equipment and materials are to be installed in a neat and secure manner, while
cables are to be properly dressed.
c. Workers must clean any debris and trash at the close of each workday.
3.3 TESTING
Testing of all newly installed cable channels shall be performed prior to system cutover.
A. COPPER TESTING
1. All 500 MHz category 6A field-testing shall be performed with an approved level 111e
balanced twisted-pair field test device.
2. All installed 500 MHz category 6A channels shall perform equal to or better than the
minimum requirements as specified by the table below:
Parameter 100 MHz 250 MHz 500 MHz

Insertion Loss 20.0 dB 32.6 dB 54.1 dB

Neom community
NEXT Loss 46.4 dB 39.6 dB 26.2 dB

PS NEXT 45.1 dB 38.2 dB 23.1 dB
ACR 26.4 dB 7.0 dB -37.4 dB
PS ACR 22.6 dB 4.5 dB -40.5 dB
ACR-F 30.3 dB 22.3 dB 7.3 dB
PS ACR-F 29.3 dB 21.3 dB 4.3 dB
Return Loss 16.0 dB 12.0 dB 8.0 dB
Prop Delay 528 ns 526 ns 526 ns
Delay Skew 40 ns 40 ns 40 ns
Warranty performance claims are based on worst case testing and channel configurations.
Typical channel performance may be significantly higher.
3. Category 3, balanced twisted-pair horizontal and backbone cables, whose length
does not exceed 90 m (295 ft.) for the permanent link, and 100 m (328 ft.) for the
channel shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIA568-B.1. Test
parameters include wire map plus F/UTP (ScTP) shield continuity (when present),
insertion loss, length and NEXT loss (pair-to-pair). NEXT testing shall be done in both
directions.
4. All balanced twisted-pair backbone cables exceeding 90 m (295 ft.) or 100 m (328 ft.)
shall be 100% tested for continuity if applications assurance is not required.
5. 500 MHz Category 6A balanced twisted-pair horizontal and backbone cables, whose
length does not exceed 90 m (295 ft.) for the permanent link, and 100 m (328 ft.) for
the channel shall be 100 percent tested according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Test
parameters include wire map plus F/UTP (ScTP) shield continuity (when present),
length, NEXT loss (pair-to-pair), NEXT loss (power sum), ELFEXT loss (pair-to-pair),
ELFEXT loss (power sum), return loss, insertion loss, propagation delay, and delay
skew.
6. TEST EQUIPMENT CRITERIA

a. All balanced twisted-pair field testers shall be factory calibrated each calendar
year by the field test equipment manufacturer as stipulated by the manuals
provided with the field test unit. The calibration certificate shall be provided for
review prior to the start of testing.
b. Autotest settings provided in the field tester for testing the installed cabling shall
be set to the default parameters
c. Test settings selected from options provided in the field testers shall be
compatible with the installed cable under test.
B. FIBER TESTING
1. HORIZONTAL FIBER TESTING
a. Fiber horizontal cables shall be 100% tested for insertion loss and length.
b. Insertion loss shall be tested at 850 nm or 1300 nm for 50/125µm multimode
cabling in at least one direction using the Method B (1-jumper) test procedure as
specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A.
c. Length shall be tested using an OTDR, optical length test measurement device or
sequential cable measurement markings.
2. BACKBONE FIBER TESTING

a. Fiber backbone cables shall be 100% tested for insertion loss and length.
b. Insertion loss shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm for 50/125µm multimode
cabling in at least one direction using the Method B (1-jumper) test procedure as
specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A.

Neom community
c. Insertion loss shall be tested at 1310 and 1550 for singlemode cabling in at least
one direction using the Method A.1 (1-jumper) test procedure as specified in
ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7.
d. Length shall be recorded using an OTDR, optical length test measurement device
or sequential cable measurement markings.
3.4 SYSTEM DOCMENTATION
The following section describes the installation, administration, testing, and as-built
documentation required to be produced and/or maintained by the Contractor during the
course of the installation.
A. CABLING SYSTEM LABELING

1. The Contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling scheme for the cable
installation. Customer will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the
successful Contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all
components of the system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall
designate the cable origin and destination and a unique identifier for each cable within
the system. Racks and patch panels shall be labeled to identify the location within the
cabling system infrastructure. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built
drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme.
2. LABELING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS:

a. The labeling shall be machine-generated and affixed to the cable, faceplate, patch
panel, rack or other hardware.
b. Labeling Software:
1) Labeling software shall be easily useable and run on Microsoft Windows®
XP, Vista and Windows 7 operating systems.
2) Labeling software shall be compliant with TIA/EIA-606-A and shall be able
to produce complex unique identifiers of up to 12 independent segments.
Labeling software shall be capable of inserting symbols as well as use any
standard True Type Font as well as capable of saving individual build
information and of fine tuning print adjustments.
c. Faceplate Labeling:
1) Labeling for plastic faceplates at each telecommunication outlet shall be
white pre-cut self-adhesive polyester compatible with laser printers.
2) Labeling for decorative metallic faceplates at each work station or
telecommunication outlet, shall be engraved pictogram or text to the
satisfaction of the landlord representative.
d. Patch Panel, Cross-Connect Labels:
1) Patch Panel labels shall be white pre-cut self-adhesive polyester compatible
with laser printers.
e. Cable Labels:
1) Cable labels shall be self-adhesive, self-laminating, pre-cut and laser-printer
compatible. Labels shall be used with 4-pair horizontal cables, fiber optic
cables and multipair backbone cables, be 0.984” x 1.496” (4-Pair), 0.984” x
1.496” (fiber up to 24 cores) and 0.984” x 2.480” (25, 50 and 100 Pairs and
fiber larger than 24 cores) in size.
f. Icons:

Neom community
1) Icons shall be used to indicate the function of each port on a work area outlet.
Icons shall be provided with each faceplate kit and be colored to match the
faceplate. Icons shall be silk screen engraved on decorative metallic
faceplates to the satisfaction of the Landlord representative.
B. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
1. The installation Contractor will be provided with 2 sets of drawings at the start of the
project. One set will be designated as the central location to document all as-built
information as it occurs throughout the project. The central set will be maintained by
the Contractor’s foreman on a daily basis, and will be available to the technical
representative upon request during the course of the project. Anticipated variations
from the build-to drawings may include such things as cable routing and actual outlet
placement. No variations will be allowed to the planned termination positions of
horizontal and backbone cables or grounding conductors unless approved in writing
by the Owner.
2. The Contractor shall provide the central drawing set to the Owner at the conclusion
of the project. The marked up drawing set will accurately depict the as-built status of
the system including termination locations, cable routing, and all administration
labeling for the cabling system. In addition, a narrative will be provided that describes
any areas of difficulty encountered during the installation that could potentially cause
problems to the telecommunications system.
C. TEST DOCUMENTATION
1. Test documentation shall be provided in a three-ring binder(s) within three weeks after
the completion of the project. The binder(s) shall be clearly marked on the outside
front cover and spine with the words “Test Results”, the project name, and the date
of completion (month and year). The binder shall be divided by major heading tabs:
Horizontal and Backbone. Each major heading shall be further sectioned by test type.
Within the horizontal and backbone sections, scanner test results 10G Category 6A,
fiber optic attenuation test results, OTDR traces (if any), and green light test results
shall be segregated by tab. Test data within each section shall be presented in the
sequence listed in the administration records. The test equipment name,
manufacturer, model number and last calibration date will also be provided at the end
of the document. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific
settings of the equipment during the test and all other required details as described
above in article “TESTING”.
2. Scanner tests shall be printed on A4 paper. Hand written test results (attenuation
results and green light results) shall be documented on an attached test form. OTDR
test results shall be printed or attached and copied on A4 paper for inclusion in the
test documentation binder.
3. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem and corrective action taken
shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be collocated in the
binder.
4.2 CLIENT TRAINING

A. The contractor shall provide training to the client IT staff. The training shall be provided by
certified trainers. Based on the training sessions, the attendees from the client IT staff shall
be given a certificate for the proper operation and maintenance of the system from the
manufacturer of the structured cabling system and associated racks, PDUs and
environmental monitoring units.

Neom community
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel

as specified below:
2. Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance
manuals and as-built drawings as a training aid.
notice.
4.3 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

A. Obtain an undertaking by the equipment manufacturer and his authorized local representative to
provide an annual maintenance contract, available after substantial completion of the work, covering
routine service and emergency service by trained employees, and to ensure supply of necessary
standard spare parts. B. Maintenance Contract Terms:
1. Maintenance Contract shall be for 2 years from date of handing over.

2. Equipment shall be supplied with 5 years warranty. The warranty shall include
replacement of any damaged spare parts (including labor)
3. Contractor shall perform all Maintenance work and Preventive maintenance tasks in
frequencies, in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and the best-
established practices, procedures and standards recognized by the related industry.
There shall be no less than 12 visits 12 year.
4. The supplier should respond to an emergency call within 4 hours and should replace
any defective part within 24 hours. An emergency is defined as that which involves
total or partial loss of a system that may lead to a total loss of the service provided.
5. Other than emergency calls, service calls shall have a response time of next working
day as a maximum. The maintenance contractor shall work continuously until the
problem is resolved and the system is back to normal operation.
6. The maintenance contract shall include the cost (material and labor) of replacement of
consumables not included in the general warranty conditions through scheduled
preventive maintenance visits performed by the supplier according to manufacturer’s
recommendation.
7. The maintenance contractor shall provide the needed stamps on the Neom community
health center plus’s copy of the contract.

Neom community
SECTION 16761 — NURSE CALL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 1.1 SECTION SUMMARY
A. Work covered by this document includes design, engineering, labor, material, products,
guaranty, training and services for, and incidental to, the complete installation of a new and
fully operating Critical Service Nurse-Call and Life Safety Code Blue communication system
as detailed herein.
B. Work shall be complete, tested, labeled, certified and ready for operation.
1.2 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16010, Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Section 16120, Wires & Cables
C. Section 16121, Control / Signal Transmission Media
D. Section 19651, Lightning Protection
E. Section 16060, Earthing System
F. Section 16715, Structured Cabling System
G. Section 16140 – Wiring Devices And Disconnects, Dry Type Tranformers
H. Section 16118, Raceways, Boxes & Fitting
I. Section 10 25 13, Patient Bed Service Walls
1.3 WORK INCLUDED
A. The Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a Nurse Call System as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. The installation shall comply fully with all governing authorities, laws and ordinances, regulations,
codes and standards, including, but not limited to:. B. DIN VDE 0834 Part 1 and Part 2: 2000-04.
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. 65 Standard for Wired Cabinets.
2. 468 Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
3. 1449 Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
4. 1069 Hospital Signaling and Nurse Call Equipment.
5. 60950-1/2 Information Technology Equipment – Safety.
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

Neom community
1. SO/TR 21730: 2007 Use of mobile wireless communication and computing technology
in healthcare facilities - Recommendations for electromagnetic compatibility
(management of unintentional electromagnetic interference) with medical devices.
2. 0739-5175/08/25: 2008 IEEE Medical Grade – Mission Critical – Wireless
Networks.
3. C62.41 Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture nurse call system and
ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 15 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialist subcontractor with at least 5 years of successful installation

experience with projects utilizing telephone systems and equipment similar to that required
for this project. Subcontractor shall be subject to approval of Engineer.
C. Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.
1.6 MANUFACTURERS

following or approved equal:
1. Ackerman (Germany), part of Honeywell.
2. Rauland-Borg Corp (USA).
B. Within the framework of the features required by the specifications, the product offered shall
be the latest model and generation of the selected supplier.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS (AS BUILTS)
A. Throughout progress of the work, maintain an accurate record of changes in Contract

Documents. Upon completion of Work, transfer recorded changes to a set of Project Record
Documents.
B. The floor plans shall be marked in pen to include the following:

1. All device locations with labels.
2. Conduit locations.
3. Head-end equipment and specific location.
4. Wiring diagram.
5. Labeling and administration documentation.
6. Warranty certificate.
7. System test result
1.8 WARRANTIES AND WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant the installation to be free from defect in material and workmanship
for a period of 2 years from the date of acceptance of the project by the owner. The Contractor
shall agree to remedy covered defects within 8 hours of notification of major failures or within
twenty-four (24) hours of notification for individual station related problems.

Neom community
1.9 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the work, remove all debris, rubbish, waste
material, tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from the project site
and thoroughly clean your work area.
B. Before the project closeout date, the Contractor shall submit:

1. Warranty certificate.
2. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities such as the Low
Voltage Certificate of Inspection.
3. Project record documents.
4. Instruction manuals and software that is a part of the system.
C. Contractor shall submit written notice that:

1. Contract Documents have been reviewed.
2. Project has been inspected for compliance with contract.
3. Work has been completed in accordance with the contract
1.10 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
A. Deliver nurse call system equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or

wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage.
B. Store equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a wellventilated space
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.
C. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of
finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 System Description
A. The nurse call system shall be a system with integrated speech communication (optional except
for main nurse call station). It shall comply with article 1.4. The system shall be applied in
institutions, which intend to improve the efficiency of their nursing system through speech
communication. The System shall be appropriate for hospitals, nursing homes, rehabilitation
clinics or sanatoria.
2.2 Function
A. It shall be an optical and acoustical nurse call system with integrated speech communication
(speech communication only where indicated) that enables direct callback to the patient or
the nursing staff depending on who has actuated the call. Thus, time shall be efficiently used
and further assistance shall be asked for if required. In addition, the nursing staff shall receive
information such as other nurse calls, emergency calls and doctor calls via corridor lamps,
Wi-Fi pagers, SMS or DECT compatible devices and optionally via room terminals, corridor
information displays and display modules if applicable.
B. The system could also be extended (if required) by means of direct speech facilities at each
bed to allow hands-free or discreet communication in addition to the speech facility in each
room. For this purpose, microphones and loudspeakers shall be provided at the room
terminals, bedside electronics and patient handsets.
2.3 System Layout
A. The system layout shall be based on a 3-level hierarchy. The zone level (ward level) shall consist
of the zone data bus, which through its fail-safe loop structure shall offer maximum safety and
shall present the communication platform for the zone controllers. Calls shall be transmitted
between zones and wards within the whole system. The next level shall include the corridor
data bus and enables communication within the ward. The components connected to the
corridor data bus shall be required to link the call devices in each room via the bed data bus.
2.4 Zone Data Bus (over IP)
A. In the primary level, the zone data bus of the nurse call system shall be IP based over the
structured cabling system. A separate VLAN shall be provided for IP zone controllers.
2.5 Zone Controllers
A. The zone controller shall be the central control unit which monitors and synchronizes the complete
bus system and at the same time shall represent a higher-level connection to further zone
controllers. It shall control display messages, the flashing phases of the corridor and zone
indicator lamps and the acoustic call signaling. Thus, call classifications such as alarm call,
emergency call, and normal call shall be distinguished. There shall be special signals for calls
on hold and telephone calls. Each zone controller shall support 6 sub-zones / organizational
units and has several configurable:
1. Inputs and outputs for status registration as well as linking to other third party systems.
2. One speech channel shall be available for each zone controller. A minimum of one
master zone controller, which shall be designed for setting up communication with the
nurse call server responsible for the configuration and programming of the system,
shall be required in the system. Zone controllers shall be suitable for decentralized
installation.

Neom community
3. Each zone controller shall have an Ethernet TCP/IP RJ45 port to allow communication
with the central unit and other IP zone controllers.
2.6 Corridor Data Bus
A. All display and control units in the patient rooms, duty rooms (nurse call stations) as well as in
other monitored rooms and corridors shall be connected to the corridor data bus. Depending
on the type of application, the room control unit shall either serve as an electronic module for
rooms without speech facility or as a room terminal for rooms with speech facility. It shall be
the connection point for all call devices within the room. Optional information displays could
also be operated on the corridor data bus. As a whole, a maximum of 127 electronic modules
or room terminals with a maximum of 255 addressable modules such as room terminals,
electronic modules, display modules and call modules shall be operated on the corridor data
bus. Each bus device shall be allocated its own address allowing individual identification.
2.7 Electronic Module (Room Controller)
A. The room controller or electronic module for rooms without speech facility takes over total control
of the call functions within the room. This shall include not only call identification as well as
call logging, but also the presence function with call transfer for the nursing staff. The room
electronics shall also contain all the terminal points for the room wiring. This includes
operating components at the bed, in the bathroom, as well as a corridor lamp connected to
the room terminal or the electronic module, the corridor lamp shall be already integrated. For
controlling organizational procedures, the duty room or the nurse station shall be provided
with a 2 lines LCD display nurse call station, or master station with or without voice capability
(as indicated on drawings) which shall be connected to the system network.
Optionally, for an efficient care service, a room terminal shall allow speech communication
with patients or residents, as well as between the nursing staff. Answered calls shall be
acknowledged via the function buttons, whereby normal calls, as opposed to emergency or
alarm calls, shall be remotely terminated.
2.8 Bed Data Bus
A. A maximum of 8 room components such as bedside electronics including patient handset, call
modules, and display modules shall be connected to the bed data bus. Individual calls
actuated directly from the bed shall be identified via the address of each call module. The
room terminals as well as electronic modules without bed data bus shall only allow call
modules to be connected as closed-circuit monitored call push-buttons, cancel push-buttons
as well as call/cancel push-buttons.
2.9 Room Equipment
A. Various devices shall be installed in the rooms, for example, call modules, call pushbuttons,
pear push-buttons and pull cords for releasing calls, as well as cancel pushbuttons for
cancelling calls. For rooms where discreet communication is required, bed modules in
connection with patient handsets shall be installed at the patient’s bed. The patient handsets
shall enable patients to switch the light on/off as well as to optionally control radio and TV
channels if applicable.
B. An auto-release plug mounted on the pear or multiple push-button, as well as on the patient
handset, prevents damage of the cord. The information stored in the nurse call system shall
be shown on display modules (nurse call station) and room terminals if applicable. Existing
calls shall be indicated according to their urgency in plain text. If there are no calls in the
system, nurses’ presence shall be indicated.

Neom community
2.10 System Interfaces
A. Wireless paging or DECT-systems shall be connected to the nurse call system via paging or
DECT interface units.
B. Existing calls on the nurse call system shall be transferred to the staff Wi-Fi pocket pagers or
DECT phone devices, indicating type of call, room number and bed identification if available.
C. Consequently the nurse call system shall be interfaced with the IP PABX system that includes
the DECT base stations and the Wi-Fi infrastructure to which the pocket pagers are
connected.
D. Technical and emergency signals, such as messages from fire alarm or BMS, shall be
connected via interface units (IP, field bus or dry contacts). A cause to effect matrix shall be
implemented to generate action in the nurse call system upon the arrival of those messages.
2.11 MAIN CONTROL UNIT
A. An IP zone controller shall be used for controlling one organization such as a ward or a corridor.
A maximum of 127 rooms shall be operated in up to six subzones per zone controller. The
zone controller shall monitor and synchronize the entire data traffic within the zone, provide
for data exchange between zone controllers, and set up the connection to the server.
1. Main control unit shall have following characteristics:

a. Computer controlled and incorporating a logic data circuit to enable room data
and time information capable of handling the number of room stations as shown
on drawings.
b. Flexible to adapt the allocation of room numbers according to individual needs.
c. Includes built-in speech option that allows communication from room to room or
between duty room and the patient.
d. Features shall include but not limited to Monitoring and control of entire data
traffic as well as speech communication within the zone:
1) Data exchange with other zone controllers and nurse call server via
Ethernet TCP/IP.
2) Service functions: software download, remote maintenance (in
conjunction with connected nurse call server).
3) Up to 64 zone controllers within the complete system.
4) Up to 6 subzones per zone controller.
5) Decentralized installation.
6) Optional digital audio bus for speech within the ward as well as inter-zone.
e. In corridors calls are visually indicated by corridor lamps and optionally via
information displays.
f. Optionally the system could have LED dot information display with builtin
speaker in the corridor to display all calls information.
g. Without any recognized modifications, the system should be able to upgrade the
master station at the nurse station with a special communication unit for speech
and the normal nurse PC connected the hospital network and linked to the nurse
call server.
h. Paging facilities with dynamic re-assignment of patient/bed to nurse/staff pager
and mobile telephone
i. Networking to central PC for centralized logging and reporting of alarms/calls
and system errors
j. The following type of calls shall be indicated:
1) Type of call Visual signals
a) Patient calls:
Normal call permanent light – red
Bathroom/WC call permanent red and white light

Neom community
Policy call flashing light – red
Staff calls:
Emergency call flashing light – red –
permanent light – green –
Doctor call quickly flashing light – red –,

permanent light – green –
and/or – yellow –
Bathroom/WC flashing light – red –

Emergency call (optional: and flashing light -
white -), permanent light -
green – and/or – yellow –
Further calls:
Diagnostic call flashing light – red –
Remind call flashing light – green –
Telephone call permanent light telephone
lamp – white –
Fault permanent light - red -
k. Safety features:
1) Data retention for 1 hour in case of power failure
2) 1x relay contact for collective messaging of fault reports within a zone.
3) Socket for configuration via a configuration module.
4) LED status display as well as LCD with 2 x 8 characters.
2.12 GENERAL EQUIPMENT:
A. The system should be fully computerized and should include at least but not only the following
main equipment which can be upgraded at any time without any major changes:
1. Main control unit.

2. Nurse Call Server (operating computer) that should be linked with the hospital network.
3. System cabling.
4. Power supply (24 V - DC).
5. Electrical safety components.
B. Scope of work:
1. The main control unit should support the following:

a. All types of patient and staff call including: normal call, bathroom/WC call, priority
call, enhanced bathroom call, emergency call, doctor call and bathroom
emergency call.
b. Different optical signals for each type of call
c. Different audio signals for all types of calls
d. Speech between patient rooms and nurse stations (two way conversation)
(optional).
2. Optionally: general or specific announcement via a Public Addressing System

Neom community
a. The system cabling should be of 2 types. One, inside room connection cable, is
4 twisted pairs telephone cable in addition to one shielded twisted pair for
microphone if two way voice communications is applicable. The other should be
a special 6- core system cable for power supply, time multiplex and
communication transmission following the manufacturer recommendations.
3. The power supply of the system should be redundant 24V self-regulated.
4. Safety features like emergency mode and short circuit protection has to be inbuilt in
the system.
2.13 WARD EQUIPMENT:
A. Master nurse call station “MNCS”

1. The master station shall serve as a display and answering unit in the ward or duty room
for interconnecting zones or wards as well as an operating unit for message
broadcasting. The graphics display with touch-sensitive surface shall offer a clear view
of all actions as well as easy operation through its clearly arranged menu structure.
The associated bus connection unit shall provide for the connection to the nurse call
system.
2. The master station shall be as centralized answering and display unit at the nurse
station (duty room) with telephone, including all components for address coded time
multiplex transmission, the required logic for selection and data transfer, speech
amplifier with volume control and power amplifier, handset for private two-way
conversation telephone calls, short circuit protected.
3. The master station shall be desktop housing including handset and connection cable.
It should be white color made from molding ABS material
4. The master station at the nurse station shall include a communication unit for speech
and the normal nurse PC shall be connected the hospital LAN and linked to the nurse
call server.
5. Functions:
a. Call and status identification 16-character alphanumeric display for each
message with following indications:
1) zone, patient room, bed, normal call (nurse call), bathroom/WC call,
emergency call, bathroom/WC-emergency call, priority call, enhanced
bathroom/WC call, diagnostic call, doctor call, answered call in remind
function, presence, fault (failure), following calls, conversation.
b. Call activation.
c. Doctor call activation.
d. Call reminder position and call cancellation.
e. Free selection of zone linking (programmable).
f. Patient room or individual bed answering.
g. Call to room or individual bed.
h. Nurse to nurse communication.
i. Private conversation staff/patient.
j. Control of call handling through prioritization
k. Discreet or hands-free speech with nursing staff / patient
l. Speech broadcasting in definable areas
m. Call acknowledgement for answered calls, either as call on hold or
cancelled call
n. Simultaneous display of several calls and presences.
o. General address (announcement) call to all rooms and presences.
p. General address (announcement) call to presences.
q. Activating functions (e.g. start/end of conversation, call cancellation, room or
bed answering, etc.) only by touching the display screen.
r. Menu index and free allocation of function push-buttons (e.g. general address,
night transfer, etc.).
s. Entering and activation function push-button by touching the monitor.
t. Telephone without mute push-button.

Neom community
6. The master station (at nurse station-047) should be equipped with:

a. 1 handset (receiver) with loudspeaker, microphone and microphone “OFF“
push-button (for more privacy when required).
b. 1 loudspeaker.
c. 1 microphone.
d. 1 nurse call push-button – red – with LED reassurance lamp.
e. 1 doctor call push-button – blue – with LED reassurance lamp.
f. 2 presence push-buttons – green and yellow – with LED reassurance lamps.
g. 1 push-button “answer/remind“ – white – with conversation display lamp.
h. 1 cancel push-button – brown.
i. 1 noise level sensor for call transfer.
j. 1 telephone signal lamp.
k. 1 telephone keypad with telephone activation push-button, digit block, redial
push-button and mute push-button.
l. 1 illuminated color graphic LCD display (5.7”) with touch sensitive screen.
m. 1 headset socket
B. Ward nurse call station “NCS”: (1 ward station in each nurse station):
1. The ward NCS shall serve as a display and answering unit in the ward or duty room for
interconnecting zones or wards as well as an operating unit for message broadcasting.
The graphics display with touch-sensitive surface shall offer a clear view of all actions
as well as easy operation through its clearly arranged menu structure. The associated
bus connection unit shall provide for the connection to the nurse call system.
2. The ward NCS shall be as centralized answering and display unit at the nurse station
(duty room) with the required logic for selection and data transfer..
3. The ward NCS shall be desktop housing including handset and connection cable. It
should be white color made from molding ABS material
4. Functions:
a. Call and status identification 16-character alphanumeric display for each
message with following indications:
1) zone, patient room, bed, normal call (nurse call), bathroom/WC call,
emergency call, bathroom/WC-emergency call, priority call, enhanced
bathroom/WC call, diagnostic call, doctor call, answered call in remind
function, presence, fault (failure), following calls, conversation.
b. Call activation.
c. Doctor call activation.
d. Call reminder position and call cancellation.
e. Free selection of zone linking (programmable).
f. Patient room or individual bed answering.
g. Call to room or individual bed.
h. Control of call handling through prioritization
i. Simultaneous display of several calls and presences.
j. General address (announcement) call to all rooms and presences.
k. General address (announcement) call to presences.
l. Activating functions (e.g. call cancellation, room or bed answering, etc.) only by
touching the display screen.
m. Menu index and free allocation of function push-buttons (e.g. general address,
night transfer, etc.).
n. Entering and activation function push-button by touching the monitor.
5. The ward NCS should be equipped with:

a. 1 nurse call push-button – red – with LED reassurance lamp.
b. 1 doctor call push-button – blue – with LED reassurance lamp.
c. 2 presence push-buttons – green and yellow – with LED reassurance lamps.
d. 1 push-button “answer/remind“ – white – with conversation display lamp.

Neom community
e. 1 cancel push-button – brown.

f. 1 illuminated color graphic LCD display (5.7”) with touch sensitive screen.
C. Ward nurse call station (NCS)

1. The nurse station shall be with 8-character, red LEDs for luminescent, alphanumeric
display, with clear text legible from a greater distance (reading angle 110 degrees) and
integrated buzzer.
2. Range of functions:
a. Call indication according to configuration.
b. Indication of call type: doctor call, diagnostic call, emergency call, bathroom/WC
emergency call,
c. Enhanced call, bathroom/WC call, normal call (nurse call).
d. Indication of the time in combination with clock module or PC.
e. Audible call transfer and message broadcasting via loudspeaker
(configurable).
3. The calls shall be displayed according to their priority (in the order: alarm call,
emergency call, and normal call).
4. If more than one call of a particular type exists, these should be displayed in rotation,
the display changing every 5 seconds. The display and selection/deselection of
services (interconnections) will be acquired via function keys. If no calls are in the
system, the time shall be displayed.
5. Mechanical details:
a. Surface mounted aluminum housing, white color
2.14 ROOM EQUIPMENT:
A. Optional Room terminal Unit:

1. This unit must includes address coded time division multiplex transmission, bypass
logic for preservation of the function “nurse call“ in the case of a central control failure,
communication amplifier with speech balance and power amplifier, short-circuit proofed
outputs, communication to room or individual bed.
2. The room terminal shall serve as an interface between the higher-ranking corridor data
bus and the corresponding bed data bus. As the central unit, it shall be responsible for
controlling all functions within a room. The control elements shall be marked by colors
and symbols. System messages shall displayed in plain text on an illuminated and
segmented graphical display with 2 x 8 character lines. Two-way speech shall take
place via the integrated loudspeaker and microphone, and messages shall be received.
The terminal shall consist of a terminal housing with integrated electronics, which shall
be clipped onto the corresponding connection board. For security reasons, the
configuration data for a room shall be stored in parallel, both in the service computer
and in the fixed memory of the terminal.
3. Bus interfaces shall include:
a. Corridor data bus for digital data and audio transmission
b. Bed data bus for controlling up to 8 bedside bed combinations or call modules
c. Analog audio line for bedside communication
d. Configuration socket for selectable de-centralised configuration in conjunction
with the configuration module
e. Service socket for connecting analysis tools
4. Structure: The patient room terminal shall consist of a connection board and a terminal
housing containing the electronic components. The terminal is simply installed by
plugging the housing into the connection board by means of the multipoint connector.
a. Connection board shall be suitable for using the room terminal as a distribution
point, with plugin terminals for power supply connection, bus lines as well as
passive call cancellation units and corridor lamp. The connection board shall
contain over-voltage protection elements for outgoing room cabling. The supply

Neom community
terminals shall be pluggable screw terminals, all remaining connections use

plug-in terminals.
b. Type of connection board: This board must be surface, flush or cavity wall
mounting board as it will be agreed later on with the architect.
5. Functions of the unit:

a. Inputs:
The unit should be able to handle up to 8 beds per room with speech (8 x bed calls)
1) 1 x diagnostic call.
2) 1 x room call.
3) 1 x bathroom/WC call.
4) 1 x doctor call.
5) 2 presence circuits.
6) 1 input for separate cancel unit bathroom/WC.
b. Outputs:
1) 1 call lamp room.
2) 4 reassurance lamps at beds modules and handsets.
3) 1 WC lamp.
4) 1 doctor call lamp.
5) 1 presence 1 lamp.
6) 1 presence 2 lamp.
7) 1 buzzer.
8) 1 lamp for conversation.
9) 1 service LED.
10) Lamp outputs with filament breakage and short circuit recognition:
call lamp, call lamp - bathroom, Presence I, Presence II
c. Information display: Display with 2x8 -digit, alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent
display for patient room and zone identification, presence, malfunction, further
calls and conversations.
d. Communication inclusive nurse to nurse communication via:
1) 1 microphone. 2) 1 loudspeaker.
e. Service function: The existing service function shall enable the maintenance
staff to identify and locate fault messages.
f. Lamps activation, short circuit proofed: The room terminal is provided with short
circuit lamp outputs. The microprocessor recognizes the short circuit and signals
this to the central processor. The fault is immediately logged and the remaining
system functions retained. A service code appears on both the room terminal
and the display unit. In the case of room terminal without display a fault is
signaled by intermittent flashing of the service LED.
g. Emergency mode: In the event that no data is obtainable on the data line, the
service LED flashes, and the fault is indicated on the display (failure of the nurse
call central unit). After activating a call push-button, the call lamp is switched on
and the call is transmitted to all patient rooms with set presence. The set call
transfer enables identification in emergency operation too.
h. Features shall include, but not limited to short-circuit resilient inputs /

outputs:
1) 3 call circuits for doctor call, bathroom call, call.
2) 1 call circuit for diagnostic call – it can also be configured as an
additional output.
3) 2 presence call circuits.
4) 1 cancel button – bathroom.
5) 1 signal line for acoustic call forwarding (buzzer).
6) Lamp outputs with filament breakage and short circuit recognition:
call lamp, call lamp - bathroom, Presence I, Presence II.
6. Unit shall be equipped with:

Neom community
1) 1 buzzer.
2) 1 loudspeaker.
3) 1 microphone.
4) 1 doctor call push-button – blue with reassurance lamp.
5) 1 call push-button – red – with reassurance lamp.
6) 1 presence push-button – green – with reassurance lamp.
7) 1 presence push-button – yellow – with reassurance lamp.
8) 2x8 character alphanumerical vacuum fluorescent display for
following indications: zone, patient room, bed and remind as well as
doctor, diagnostic, priority, bathroom/WC, emergency and normal
call, presence 1, presence 2, fault, following calls,
conversation.
7. It should be possible to communicate with other rooms in case of emergency or

wherever Presence I or Presence II is present.
8. The Emergency calls should be displayed on the Room terminals wherever a nurse is
present and Doctor’s call (CODE BLUE) to be displayed on the room terminals.
B. Room controller (RC) or Electronic Module:
1. The electronic module shall serve as a central unit for controlling all functions within a
room. It shall be available with and without bed data bus.
2. A maximum of 8 room components such as bedside electronics including patient
handset, call modules (room or bathroom calls), and over door lamp indication shall be
connected to the bed data bus. Individual calls actuated directly from the bed shall be
identified via the address of each call module.
C. Patient Bed Electronics:

1. With the bed module, all required call and cancel functions shall be available directly
at bedside: patient handset, pear push-button or multiple push-button (connection via
auto-release plug).
2. Optionally, each bed shall be provided with a speech facility integrated in the patient
handset to allow communication (discreet / hands-free) with the nursing staff.
3. A maximum of 8 bed modules shall be connected to the room terminal via the bed data
bus. In conjunction with a control output and an actuator unit, several control functions
such as light control shall be set up.
4. This unit shall be placed beside the bed or in the bed head unit to use and connect the
patient handset. It shall be made from insulating materials in a white color. It shall also
be either for surface or flush mounting without coaxial socket or for installation into bed
head trunking units.
5. Functions:
a. Nurse call actuation.
b. Control functions such as light control via a separate control output in
conjunction with the actuator unit.
c. Optional transmission of conversations, data, telephone conversations and TV
channels to and from patient handset/room terminal.
d. Optional Selection of radio and TV channels.
6. Unit shall be equipped with:
a. 1 call push-button with LED reassurance lamp – red.

b. 1 x 7-pole socket for connection of a pear push-button or multiple pushbutton.
c. 1 x 6-pole socket for connection of diagnostic equipment.
d. 1 auto-release plug system for auto-release plug.
e. Cancel push-button green.
f. Optional loudspeaker and microphone for hands-free two-way communication.
D. Patient Handset:

Neom community
1. The patient handset shall be user-friendly, suitable for actuating calls, switching the
light on/off as well as for discreet communication with the nursing staff.
2. Optionally the handset shall be able to select radio and TV channels. In that case, it
shall have an LCD display indicating the selected radio channel, TV function as well as
the time. It shall be also provided with loudspeakers as well as a headphone jack
(3.5mm jack bush).
3. The patient handset shall be equipped with a clearly structured button panel and
orientation / reassurance lamp at the call push-button.
4. The patient handset shall be protected against splashing water (IP54) and can be easily
cleaned.
5. A hook (to be provided) on the wall or at the bedside table shall serve as a handset
retainer.
6. The handset is shall be connected to the bedside electronics via an autorelease plug.
7. The handset shall have the following additional specifications:
a. Total weight including connection cable and plug should be less than 270 grams.
b. The handset should be of white color, made from ABS material with IP 54 (IP 43
with plugged jack plug) to enable cleaning safety with suitable disinfections
solution.
c. Functions:
1) Call push-button - red - with LED reassurance / orientation lamp
2) Function control buttons
3) Nurse call: Call release and private conversation between patient /
staff (Normal / Emergency levels)
4) Optional Radio and TV controls:
a) ON/selection push-button for 4 radio channels.
b) ON/selection push-button for TV-channels.
c) Display of the selected channel via LCD display.
d) Volume control.
5) Digital bi-directional data transmission
6) Auto-release plug system depending on the strain on the cable.
7) Automatic normal call when plug ejected from the auto-release plug
system.
8) Switch ON / OFF reading and room lights through a relay for each
light control provided by the bed head unit supplier.
d. Unit shall be equipped with:
1) 1 LED reassurance lights – red.
2) 2 light control push-buttons.
3) At least 2.5 m connection cable – with auto-release plug (socket to be
provided and incorporated in bed-head unit). 4) 1 call push-button
with orientation light.
e. Optionally the unit could be equipped with:
1) 1 loudspeaker.
2) 1 microphone.
3) 1 radio selection push-button for 4 channels.
4) 1 TV ON/OFF push-button.
5) 1 TV selection push-button.
6) 2 volume controls (+ and –).
7) 1 socket for connection of a headphone.
E. Pull Cord (in the bathrooms): Splash proof (IP 55) with at least 2 m long red cord having a big
red nurse sign at its end to enable the easy identification.
F. Individual Cancel Button: To cancel the bathroom calls independent from the main
cancel/presence button in the room.

Neom community
G. Over Door (corridor) Light: The over door light has a light gray plastic base, with white lamp
cover having 4 sections with different colored LED based lights (white, red, green and yellow)
to identify the type of call / presence in the room.
1. The type of the calls are identified as follow:
a. Bathroom call lamp (white),
b. Room call lamp (red).
c. Nurse presence lamp (green),
d. Aid nurse presence lamp (Yellow – not used in normal patient rooms). Used as
indication for low differential pressure in isolation rooms, via an addressable
module (to be provided) and connected to the BMS system.
H. Addressable modules:
1. Addressable module will be used to connect any peripheral information to the nurse
call system as an alarm contact.
I. Call / cancel push-button
1. Used for setting Presences/ Assistant/ Emergency or canceling of calls. It shall be
equipped with:
a. 1 button for cancel function.
b. 1 button for call function.
c. 1 LED reminder lamp – green.
d. 1 LED orientation / reassurance lamp -red-.
e. 1 sound generator for call forwarding.
J. Optional patient rooms with hands-free speech and without TV controls:

1. Bed combination unit with sockets
The bed combination unit shall offer hands-free two-way communication bedside as
well as call release. It shall serve as an interfacing unit for movable call units such as
pear push-buttons or multiple push-buttons. A maximum of 8 bed combination units
shall be connected to the room terminal. For call forwarding, a freely configurable 8-
character alphanumeric code shall be displayed during calls. The socket configuration
shall be set up for monitoring the functionality of the system from each portable call
unit connection up to the switching contact for call circuit monitoring.
2. The Bed combination unit shall be equipped with:

a. 1 call button with LED reassurance / orientation lamp - red -
b. 1 auxiliary socket for connecting a pear pushbutton or a multiple pushbutton -7-
pole -
c. 1 auxiliary socket for connecting a diagnostic device - 6-pole -
d. 1 loudspeaker unit
e. 1 microphone unit
f. Inputs / outputs via plug-in terminals for:
g. 1 external call with reassurance / orientation lamp
h. 2 external light buttons
3. Pear / Multiple push-button multi-pole plug, with or without light button. Multiple push-
buttons with multi-pin plug, connection cable (at least 2 m) and slot for cable insertion
to enable variable looping and pull relief shall be provided.
The Pear
a. call push-button - red - with nursing staff symbol, suitable for call circuit
monitoring
b. 1 LED orientation / reassurance lamp - red -
c. 2 light push-button – yellow (optional)
K. Optional Corridor Information Display:

1. Information display, single sided or double sided, with red LED dot matrix for
luminescent, alphanumeric plain text display (8-character display for calls as well as
call type symbol). It shall be equipped with built-in loudspeakers for message
broadcasting and built-in sound generator for acoustic call forwarding.
2. Functional range shall include, but not limited to:

Neom community
a. Call display with alphanumeric room and bed identification.

b. Call type display.
c. Special Code Blue Sequence
d. Time display (configurable, e.g., when no calls are in the system).
e. Acoustic call forwarding * Announcements via loudspeaker.
f. Display order:
1) Calls are displayed according to their priority (display order: alarm call,
emergency call, normal call).
2) If there is more than one call of a particular call type, those calls shall be
displayed in rotation.
g. Options for wall / ceiling mount / single or double sided
L. Power supply:
1. Suitable redundant power supply shall be provided for a constant DC supply to nurse
call systems (as shown on drawings).
2. The power supply shall be compact design modern primary-clocked circuit technology
according to EN 61000-3-2; shall be suitable for top-hat rail assembly in the sub-
distribution or outside the sub-distribution by means of a mounting kit. The supply units
shall be idling, overload and short-circuit proof.
M. Staff emergency station; Patient Station – “Staff Emergency Call”:

1. When a staff member has registered into a patient room using a staff register, calls
placed from that patient station shall automatically be classified as staff emergency and
shall cause the following to occur:
a. The “Call Assurance” indicator on the patient station shall illuminate.
b. The corridor dome light shall flash white.
c. An “Emergency” alert tone shall sound and the “Emergency” indicator shall
illuminate on all duty stations.
d. An “Emergency” alert tone shall sound and the patient’s room number, bed
designation and “Staff Emergency” call priority will be displayed on the Nurse
Console(s) incoming call screen, automatically moving ahead of all lower priority
calls.
2. “Staff Emergency” calls shall be answered in the same manner as Priority calls. Patient
“Priority” and “Staff Emergency” calls must be canceled at the Patient Station.
N. Code Blue & Code Pink:

1. Code Blue call button sub-station shall be water resistant (IP 54) and have the ability
to place a network wide code blue annunciation at designated consoles, and/or
centralized PBX nurse console. Pocket page code team activation shall be automatic.
In addition to power and data supervision, this unit shall have the ability to directly
supervise the associated code blue corridor lamp for open, shorts, and missing bulbs.
If information displays are implemented the call blue sub-station shall interface with
them for count up timer feature.
2. Code Pink call button sub-station shall similar to the Code Blue sub-station but applied
in the pediatric wards.
O. Optional patient room accessories:
1. Pneumatic call push button:

Pneumatic call push button with reassurance lamp, at least 4m plastic tube and rubber
ball and flush mount supporting plate and expanding / retaining clamps for flush mount
back-boxes shall be installed wherever necessary.
2. Sensor push-button as call push-button or cancel push button:
The sensor push-button shall work as a call or cancel push-button with LED orientation
/ reassurance lamp - red - and with a polished chrome platted brass cover
3. Noise level sensor:
Noise level sensor with adjustable noise threshold / call actuation time, microphone,
call push-button (red) and push-button to block calls for noise threshold testing, 2 LED control lights, at

Neom community
least 2m connection cable with multipin diode plug shall be installed wherever necessary. It shall be
provided with, but not limited to:
a. 1 microphone
b. 1 call push-button
c. 1 push-button to block calls for noise threshold testing
d. 2 LED control lights
e. 2m connection cable with 7-pole plug
4. Pneumatic breath call unit multi-pole plug:
Pneumatic breath call unit shall be provided with multi-pole connection plug. It shall be
suitable for patients who cannot move. The call shall be actuated pneumatically via
strong breath into the unit. The unit shall be connected to the nurse call system via a
multi-pole auxiliary plug contact.
5. Radio call set with handheld transmitter:
Radio call set with handheld transmitter for mobile call release in resident’s rooms shall
be used wherever necessary. After call actuation, the call shall be transmitted to the
radio receiver, which shall be connected to the nurse call system via a multi-pole plug.
The transmitter shall be equipped with:
a. 1 single channel handheld transmitter with confirmation control (red LED)
b. 1 radio receiver with multi-pole plug for call unit and 0.5m connection cable
6. Radio call set with bracelet transmitter:

Radio call set with bracelet transmitter for mobile call release in resident’s rooms shall
be used wherever necessary. After call actuation, the call shall be transmitted to the
radio receiver, which shall be connected to the nurse call system via a multi-pole plug.
The transmitter shall be equipped with:
a. 1 single channel bracelet transmitter with confirmation control (red LED)
b. 1 radio receiver with multi-pole plug for call unit and at least 0.5m connection
cable
2.15 Nurse Call System Operating Computer:
A. Nurse call system operating computer for configuration, display, operation and call logging in
the system. The system shall also as an interface to third-party systems such as paging
systems and similar.
B. The operating computer shall be equipped with a special application software for the following
functions:
1. Configuration tool for the Nurse Call System
2. Allocation of room configuration
3. Definition of call system functions and parameters
4. Setup of call types, call type groups, call type upgrading
5. Configuration of actuators for controlling external systems (like room automation where
applicable)
6. Setup of radio and TV programs (where applicable)
7. Service functions
8. Database management system for data storage
9. System management tools for system analysis
10. Network functions for system access
11. Freely configurable services (zone networking)
12. Allocation of temporally defined services
13. Selection of call type groups for services
14. Definition of targeted message forwarding between call system
15. Freely configurable announcement functions (collective announcements)
16. Selection of recipients for collective announcements
17. Fault monitoring and reporting (according to article 1.4 in Part I)
18. Graphic and tabular display of messages according to priority, call type and
time to call

Neom community
19. Presence reports

20. Call reports (normal, public wash room, priority call, etc.)
21. Fault reports (according to DIN DVE 0834 application area II)
22. Call answering (e.g. in combination with a master station)
23. Call cancelling (e.g. in combination with a master station)
24. Selection of rooms (e.g. in combination with a master station)
25. Collective announcement into room or selected recipients (e.g. in combination with a
master station)
26. Input and management of patient data incl. management of bed allocation (manual)
27. Access control via user ID (if required)
28. Data output through a connected printer
C. Communication Functions:
1. Message transmission to a wireless messaging system (e.g. paging system or DECT

telecommunications system)
2. Freely configurable recipient addresses for messages from call system zones
3. Definition of display format of messages to be transmitted
4. Setup of different services (e.g. day, night service)
5. Allocation of repetition times, acoustic call tones, etc.
D. The systems shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required
are desktop PCs (DELL, IBM or HEWLET PACKARD) compatible with the following minimum
specifications:
1. Second Generation Quad core Core i7 Sandy Bridge processor, 3.4 GHz speed, 8MB
Intel Smart cache, 8 processing threads
2. Intel motherboard, triple channel DDR3 1066/1333/1600 MHz bus, 12 USB 2.0 ports
and two e-SATA ports, 1 PCI slot, 2 PCI Express (x16 data), 1 PCI Express (x4 data),
2 PCI Express (x1 data)
3. 8 GB RAM DDR3 1066/1333 MHz, 2 channels, 21 GB/s
4. 1 TB storage min capacity, 7200 RPM (SATA II) HDDs in RAID 1 configuration.
5. Graphics: Video graphic adapter, minimum 2560 x 1600 pixels, 1GB GDDR3 video
memory, 1 DVI-D or HDMI output (ATI or N-Vidia). Each DVI-D output shall be provided
with DVI-D to HDMI interface.
6. Microsoft keyboard.
7. Microsoft optical mouse with rotating wheel.
8. 1.44 MB floppy disk drive.
9. DVD+/-R/W (5x) dual layer drive.
10. Operating System for fire alarm graphics terminal: Microsoft Windows 7 Professional
Edition.
11. Software Suite for Nurse Call System.
12. Back-up software similar to Acronis solutions with system image (snap-shots) creation
capability and facilities to re-deploy images to identical or different hardware on either
physical or virtual machines.
13. Gigabit Ethernet network interface card.
14. RS232 Interface.
15. ISDN terminal Adapter.
16. 23 inches LCD color monitor. 1920x1080p resolution, horizontal scanning frequency
24~82, 5 msec response time, contrast ratio 50,000:1 and viewing angle (hor & vert)
170°, DVI-D, HDMI and VGA inputs in addition to built-in speakers.
N.B: The above mentioned computer system hardware specifications are adequate for 8
months from the specifications date. The contractor shall submit an equivalent timeupgraded
specifications at the actual system commissioning time. Only branded computers shall be
accepted (Dell, IBM, HP).

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT MANAGEMENT
A. Assign a single project manager to this project who will serve as the point of contact for the
Owner, the General Contractor, and the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall be proactive in scheduling work at the hospital, specifically the
Contractor will initiate and maintain discussion with the General Contractor regarding the
schedule for ceiling cover up and install cables to meet that schedule.
3.2 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. Coordinate with the Cabling Contractor for the location of the faceplate and the faceplate
opening for the nurse call system back-boxes.
B. Coordinate with the Cabling Contractor the location of nurse call equipment in the
Telecommunications Closets.
C. Before beginning work, verify the location, quantity, size and access for the following:
1. Isolated ground AC power circuits provided for systems.
2. Primary, emergency and extra auxiliary AC power generator requirements.
3. Junction boxes, wall boxes, wire troughs, conduit stubs and other related infrastructure
for the systems.
4. System components installed by others.
5. Overhead supports and rigging hardware installed by others.
D. Immediately notify the Owner, General Contractor and Consultant in writing of any
discrepancies.
3.3 NEEDS ASSESSMENT
A. Provide a one-on-one meeting with the particular nursing manager of each unit affected by the
installation of the new nurse call/code blue system. Review the floor plan drawing, educate
the nursing manager with the functions of the equipment that is being provided and gather
details specific to the individual units; coverage and priorities of calls; staffing patterns; and
other pertinent details that will affect system programming and training.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Execute work in accordance with international codes, regulations and ordinances.
2. Install work neatly, plumb and square and in a manner consistent with standard industry
practice. Carefully protect work from dust, paint and moisture as dictated by site
conditions. The Contractor will be fully responsible for protection of his work during the
construction phase up until final acceptance by the Owner.
3. Install equipment according to manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide any
hardware, adaptors, brackets, rack mount kits or other accessories recommended by
the manufacturer for correct assembly and installation.
4. Secure equipment firmly in place, including receptacles, speakers, equipment racks,
system cables, etc:
a. All supports, mounts, fasteners, attachments and attachment points shall support
their loads with a safety factor of at least 5:1.
b. Do not impose the weight of equipment or fixtures on supports provided for other
trades or systems.

Neom community
c. Any suspended equipment or associated hardware must be certified by the

manufacturer for overhead suspension.
d. The Contractor is responsible for means and methods in the design, fabrication,
installation and certification of any supports, mounts, fasteners and attachments.
5. Finishes for any exposed work such as plates, racks, panels, speakers, etc. shall be
approved by the Architect and Owner.
6. Coordinate cover plates with field conditions. Size and install cover plates as necessary
to hide joints between back boxes and surrounding wall. Where cover plates are not fitted
with connectors, provide grommeted holes in size and quantity required. Do not allow
cable to leave or enter boxes without cover plates installed.
B. Equipment Racks:
1. Fill unused equipment mounting spaces with blank panels or vent panels. Match color to
equipment racks.
2. Provide security covers for all devices not requiring routine operator control.
3. Provide vent panels and cooling fans as required for the operation of equipment within the
manufacturer's specified temperature limits. Provide adequate ventilation space between
equipment for cooling. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding ventilation
space between amplifiers.
4. Provide insulated connections of the electrical raceway to equipment racks.
5. Provide continuous raceway/conduit with no more than 40 percent fill between wire
troughs and equipment racks for all non-plenum-rated cable. Ensure each system is
mechanically separated from each other in the wireway.
C. Wiring Practice - in addition to the mandatory infrastructure requirements outlined in other

sections of division 16, the following additional practices shall be adhered to:
1. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 16, Section 16118,
Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
2. Execute all wiring in strict adherence to IEC 364, applicable local building codes and
standard industry practices.
3. Where raceway is to be in conduits, wiring of differing classifications shall be run in
separate conduit. Where raceway is to be an enclosure (rack, tray, wire trough, utility box)
wiring of differing classifications which share the same enclosure shall be mechanically
partitioned and separated by at least 4 inches. Where Wiring of differing classifications
must cross, they shall cross perpendicular to one another.
4. Do not splice wiring anywhere along the entire length of the run. Make sure cables are
fully insulated and shielded from each other and from the raceway for the entire length of
the run.
5. Do not pull wire through any enclosure where a change of raceway alignment or direction
occurs. Do not bend wires to less than radius recommended by manufacturer.
6. Replace the entire length of the run of any wire or cable that is damaged or abraded during
installation. There are no acceptable methods of repairing damaged or abraded wiring.
7. Use wire pulling lubricants and pulling tensions as recommended by the manufacturer.
8. Use grommets around cut-outs and knock-outs where conduit or chase nipples are not
installed.
9. Do not use tape-based or glue-based cable anchors.
10. Field wiring entering equipment racks shall be terminated as follows:
a. Provide ample service loops at harness break-outs and at plates, panels and
equipment. Loops should be sufficient to allow plates, panels and equipment to be
removed for service and inspection.
b. If specified terminal blocks are not designed for rack mounting, utilize 3/4” plywood
or 1/8” thick aluminum plates and blank panels as a mounting surface. Do not mount
on the bottom of the rack.
c. Employ permanent strain relief for any cable with an outside diameter of 1” or
greater.
D. Cable Installation: In addition to the mandatory infrastructure requirements outlined in other

sections of division 16, the following additional practices shall be adhered to:

Neom community
1. Acceptable means of cable support are cable tray, metal trunking and conduit system. On
cable trays and in trunking, Velcro wrap cable bundles loosely to the means of support
with plenum rated Velcro straps. Plastic tie wraps are not acceptable as a means to bundle
cables.
2. Run cables parallel to walls.
3. Do not lay cables on top of light fixtures, ceiling tiles, mechanical equipment, or ductwork.
Maintain at least 60cm clearance from all shielded electrical apparatus.
4. All cables shall be tested after the total installation is fully complete. All test results are to
be documented. All cables shall pass acceptable test requirements and levels. Contractor
shall remedy any cabling problems or defects in order to pass or comply with testing. This
includes the re-pull of new cable as required at no additional cost to the Owner.
5. Ends of cables shall be properly terminated on both ends per industry and manufacturer’s
recommendations.
6. Provide proper temporary protection of cable after pulling is complete before final dressing
and terminations are complete. Do not leave cable lying on floor. Bundle and tie wrap up
off of the floor until you are ready to terminate.
7. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain un-terminated elements. Make terminations
only at outlets and terminals.
8. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Arrange on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull,
outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures. Cables may not be spliced.
9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's
limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.
10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps
shall not be used.
11. Cable shall not be run through structural members or be in contact with pipes, ducts, or
other potentially damaging items.
E. Labeling:
1. Clearly, consistently, logically and permanently mark switches, connectors, jacks, relays,
receptacles and electronic and other equipment.
2. Engrave and paint fill all receptacle panels using 4mm minimum high lettering and
contrasting paint.
3. For rack-mounted equipment, use engraved Lamacoid labels with white 4mm (minimum)
high lettering on black background. Label the front and back of all rack-mounted
equipment.
4. Where multiple pieces of equipment reside in the same rack group, clearly and logically
label each indicating to which room, channel, receptacle location, etc. they correspond.
5. Permanently label cables at each end, including intra-rack connections. Labels shall be
covered by the same, transparent heat-shrink tubing covering the end of the overall jacket.
Alternatively, computer generated labels of the type which include a clear protective wrap
may be used.
6. Contractor’s name shall appear no more than once on each continuous set of racks. The
Contractor’s name shall not appear on wall plates or portable equipment.
7. Provide printed labels at both ends of the cable.
8. Ensure each manufacturer’s supplied equipment has appropriate UL Labels and Marks
(of equivalent listing approved by the engineer) for the service the equipment is performed
permanently attached/marked. Equipment installed not bearing these marks and listing
will not be allowed to be part of the system. The Contractor shall bear all costs required to
provide replacement equipment with approved listed equipment.
3.5 PROTECTION OF NETWORK DEVICES
A. Contractor shall protect network devices during unpacking and installation by wearing
manufacturer approved electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist straps tied to chassis ground. The
wrist strap shall meet OSHA requirements for prevention of electrical shock, should technician
come in contact with high voltage.

Neom community
3.6 CLEANING AND PATCHING
A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep their work area clear of debris and clean
area daily at completion of work.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to patch and paint any wall or surface that has
been disturbed by the execution of this work.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing any additional cutting, drilling, fitting or
patching required that is not indicated as provided by others to complete the work or to make
its parts fit together properly.
D. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the work or fully or partially
completed construction of the Owner or separate Contractors by cutting, patching or
otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or
otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate Contractor except with written
consent of the Owner and of such separate Contractor; such consent shall not be
unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a
separate Contractor, the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the work.
E. Where coring of existing (previously installed) concrete is specified or required, including

coring indicated under unit prices, the location of such coring shall be clearly identified in the
field and the location shall be approved by the Project Manager prior to commencement of
coring work.
3.7 FIREPROOFING
A. Where nurse call system cables penetrate fire rated walls, floors and ceilings, fireproof the
opening.
B. Provide conduit sleeves (if not already provided by Electrical Contractor) for cables that
penetrate fire rated walls. After the cabling installation is complete, install fire proofing material
in and around all conduit sleeves and openings. Install fire proofing material thoroughly and
neatly. Seal all floor and ceiling penetrations.
C. Use only materials and methods that preserve the integrity of the fire stopping system and its
rating.
3.8 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops,
common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. B. Signal Ground Terminal:
Locate at main equipment cabinet.
PART 4 - TESTING, GUARANTY AND TRAINING
4.1 SYSTEM CLASSIFICATION
A. The Nurse Call System is listed as an “Emergency and Public Safety” Communications system.
Where Code Blue signals are transmitted, that listing is elevated to “Life Support.” Therefore,
the following testing and guaranty provisions are the minimum to be performed and provided
by the Contractor and manufacturer.

Neom community
4.2 PROOF OF PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Intermediate Testing:
1. After completion of 25 – 30 percent the installation of a head end cabinet(s) and
equipment, one microphone console, local and remote enunciation stations, 2 zones,
2 sub zones prior to any further work, this portion of the system must be pre-tested,
inspected, and certified. Each item of installed equipment shall be checked to ensure
appropriate UL certification or approved equivalent listing, labels are affixed and Life
Safety guidelines are followed, and proper installation practices are followed. The
intermediate test shall include a full operational test.
2. The inspection and test will be conducted by a factory-certified representative and
witnessed by a Government Representative (if required by local authorities). The
results of the inspection will be officially recorded by the Government Representative
and maintained on file by the Resident Engineer (RE), until completion of the entire
project. The results will be compared to the Acceptance Test results. An identical
inspection may be conducted between the 65 - 75 percent of the system construction
phase, at the direction of the Resident Engineer.
B. Pretesting:
1. Upon completing installation of the Nurse Call System, the Contractor shall align,
balance, and completely pretest the entire system under full operating conditions.
2. Pretesting Procedure:
a. During the system pretest the Contractor shall verify (utilizing approved test
equipment) that the system is fully operational and meets all the system
performance requirements of this standard.
b. The Contractor shall pretest and verify that all system functions and specification
requirements are met and operational, no unwanted aural effects, such as signal
distortion, noise pulses, glitches, audio hum, poling noise, etc., are present. At
a minimum, each of the following locations shall be fully pre-tested:
1) Central Control Cabinets.
2) Nurse Control Stations.
3) Patient Stations.
4) Staff Stations.
5) Local and Remote Enunciation Panels.
6) All Networked locations.
7) System interface locations (i.e. DECT, Wi-Fi …etc.).
8) System trouble reporting.
9) System electrical supervision. 10) UPS operation.
3. The Contractor shall provide four copies of the recorded system pretest measurements and
the written certification that the system is ready for the formal acceptance test shall be
submitted to the Resident Engineer.
C. Acceptance Test:
1. After the system has been pre-tested and the Contractor has submitted the pretest results
and certification to the Resident Engineer, then the Contractor shall schedule an
acceptance test date and give the Resident Engineer 30 days written notice prior to the
date the acceptance test is expected to begin. The system shall be tested in the presence
of a Government Representative (if required by local authorities) and the manufacturer’s
certified representative. The system shall be tested utilizing the approved test equipment
to certify proof of performance and Emergency and Public Safety compliance. The test
shall verify that the total system meets all the requirements of this specification. The
notification of the acceptance test shall include the expected length (in time) of the test.
2. The acceptance test shall be performed on a "go-no-go" basis. Only those operator
adjustments required to show proof of performance shall be allowed. The test shall
demonstrate and verify that the installed system does comply with all requirements of this
specification under operating conditions. The system shall be rated as either acceptable
or unacceptable at the conclusion of the test. Failure of any part of the system that
precludes completion of system testing, and which cannot be repaired in 4 hours, shall be
cause for terminating the acceptance test of the system. Repeated failures that result in a
cumulative time of 8 hours to affect repairs shall cause the entire system to be declared

Neom community
unacceptable. Retesting of the entire system shall be rescheduled at the convenience of

the client representative.
D. Acceptance Test Procedure:

1. Physical and Mechanical Inspection:
a. The Government Representative (if required by local codes), the Resident Engineer
and the Client Representative will tour all major areas where the system is and all
sub-systems are completely and properly installed to insure they are operationally
ready for proof of performance testing. A system inventory including available spare
parts will be taken at this time. Each item of installed equipment shall be checked
to ensure appropriate UL certification or equivalent approved listing labels are
affixed.
b. The system diagrams, record drawings, equipment manuals, Auto CAD Disks,
intermediate, and pretest results shall be formally inventoried and reviewed.
c. Failure of the system to meet the installation requirements of this specification shall
be grounds for terminating all testing.
2. Operational Test:
a. After the Physical and Mechanical Inspection, the central terminating and nurse call
master control equipment shall be checked to verify that it meets all performance
requirements outlined herein.
b. Following the central equipment test, a pillow speaker (or on board speaker) shall
be connected to the central terminating and nurse call master control equipment’s
output tap to ensure there are no signal distortions such as intermodulation, data
noise, popping sounds, erratic system functions, on any function.
c. The distribution system shall be checked at each interface, junction, and distribution
point, first, middle, and last intersectional, room, and bed dome light in each leg to
verify that the nurse call distribution system meets all system performance
standards.
d. Once these tests have been completed, each installed sub-system function shall
be tested as a unified, functioning and fully operating system. The typical functions
are: “all call,” three sub-zoned, minimum of 10 minutes of UPS operation, electrical
supervision, trouble panel, corridor speakers and audio paging.
e. Individual Item Test: The Government Representative will select individual items of
equipment for detailed proof of performance testing until 100 percent of the system
has been tested and found to meet the contents of this specification. Each item
shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of this document.
3. Test Conclusion:
a. At the conclusion of the Acceptance Test, using the generated discrepancy list
the VA and the Contractor shall jointly agree to the results of the test, and
reschedule testing on deficiencies and shortages with the RE. Any retesting to
comply with these specifications will be done at the Contractor's expense.
b. If the system is declared unacceptable without conditions, all rescheduled
testing expenses will be borne by the Contractor.
4.3 SYSTEM GUARANTEE PERIOD OF SERVICE
A. Contractor’s Responsibility:
1. The Contractor shall guarantee that all provided material and equipment will be free
from defects, workmanship and will remain so for a period of one year from date of final
acceptance of the system by the VA. The Contractor shall provide the manufacturer’s
equipment warranty documents, to the Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting
Officer if the Facility has taken procession of the building), that certifies each item of
equipment installed conforms to OEM published specifications.
2. The Contractor's maintenance personnel shall have the ability to contact the Contractor
and manufacturer for emergency maintenance and logistic assistance, remote
diagnostic testing, and assistance in resolving technical problems at any time. This
contact capability shall be provided by the Contractor and manufacturer at no additional
cost to the VA.

Neom community
3. All Contractor maintenance and supervisor personnel shall be fully qualified by the
manufacturer and must provide 2 copies of current and qualified manufacturer training
certificates and manufacturer certification upon request.
4. Additionally, the Contractor shall accomplish the following minimum requirements
during the two year guarantee period:
a. Response Time during the Two Year Guarantee Period:
1) The Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer if the system has
been turned over to the Facility) is the Contractor’s only official reporting
and contact official for NCS system trouble calls, during the guarantee
period.
2) A standard work week is considered 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. or as
designated by the Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer),
Monday through Friday exclusive of Official Holidays.
3) The Contractor shall respond and correct on-site trouble calls, during the
standard work week to:
a) A routine trouble call within 1 working day of its report. A routine
trouble is considered a trouble which causes a cordset, 1 master
IC control station, room station or emergency station to be
inoperable.
b) Routine trouble calls in critical emergency health care facilities (i.e.,
cardiac arrest, intensive care units, etc.) shall also be deemed as
an emergency trouble call. The Resident Engineer (or Facility
Contracting Officer) shall notify the Contractor of this type of trouble
call.
c) An emergency trouble call shall be answered within 4 hours of its

report. An emergency trouble is considered a trouble which causes
a sub-system (ward), distribution point, terminal cabinet, or all call
system to be inoperable at anytime.
4) If a nurse call and/or code one (blue) component failure cannot be corrected within 4 hours
(exclusive of the standard work time limits), the Contractor shall be responsible for
providing alternate nurse call equipment. The alternate equipment/system shall be
operational within a maximum of 20 hours after the 4 hour trouble shooting time and
restore the effected location operation to meet the system performance standards. If any
sub-system or major system trouble cannot be corrected within one working day, the
Contractor shall furnish and install compatible substitute equipment returning the system
or sub-system to full operational capability, as described herein, until repairs are complete.
b. Required On-Site Visits during the Two Year Guaranty Period:
1) The Contractor shall visit, on-site, as necessary, during the guarantee period, to perform
system preventive maintenance, equipment cleaning, and operational adjustments to
maintain the system according the descriptions identified in this document.
2) The Contractor shall arrange all Facility visits with the Resident Engineer (or Facility
Contracting Officer) prior to performing the required maintenance visits.
3) Preventive maintenance shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommended practice and service intervals during non-busy time agreed
to by the Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer) and Contractor.
4) The preventive maintenance schedule, functions and reports shall be provided to and
approved by the Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer).
5) The Contractor shall provide the Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer) a type
written report itemizing each deficiency found and the corrective action performed during
each required visit or official reported trouble call. The Contractor shall provide the
Resident Engineer with sample copies of these reports for review and approval at the
beginning of the Acceptance Test. The following reports are the minimum required:
a) The Contractor shall provide a monthly summary all equipment and sub-systems
serviced during this guarantee period to Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting
Officer) by the fifth (5th) working day after the end of each month. The report shall
clearly and concisely describe the services rendered, parts replaced and repairs

Neom community
performed. The report shall prescribe anticipated future needs of the equipment and
systems for preventive and predictive maintenance.
b) The Contractor shall maintain a separate log entry for each item of equipment and
each sub-system of the system. The log shall list dates and times of all scheduled,
routine, and emergency calls. Each emergency call shall be described with details
of the nature and causes of emergency steps taken to rectify the situation and
specific recommendations to avoid such conditions in the future.
6) The Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer) shall convey to the
Facility Engineering Officer, 2 copies of actual reports for evaluation.
a) The Resident Engineer (or Facility Contracting Officer) shall ensure
a copy of these reports is entered into the system’s official
acquisition documents.
b) The Facility Chief Engineer shall ensure a copy of these reports is
entered into the system’s official technical record documents.
4.4 TRAINING
A. Provide thorough training of all nursing staff assigned to those nursing units receiving new
networked nurse/patient communications equipment. This training shall be developed and
implemented to address two different types of staff. Nurses and staff shall receive training
from their perspective, and likewise, unit secretaries (or any person whose specific
responsibilities include answering patient calls and dispatching staff) shall receive operational
training from their perspective. A separate training room will be set up that allows this type of
individualized training utilizing in-service training unit, prior to cut over of the new system.
B. Provide the following minimum training times and durations:

1. 48 hours prior to opening for nursing staff (in 8-hour increments) – split evenly over 3
weeks and day and night shifts. Coordinate schedule with Owner.
2. 32 hours during the opening week for nursing staff – both day and night shifts.
3. 24 hours for supervisors and system administrators.

Neom community
SECTION 16780 — IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Electrical Work generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of other sections of the
specifications.
B. Video signals are to comply with CCIR (or FCC) recommendations and standards. Central
control unit interfaces and related equipment are to comply with CCITT (or EIA)
recommendations and standards for data signal characteristics, formats and communication
protocols.
C. Integrated IP CCTV system with IP cameras, lenses, mounts, IP network video recorders,
disk array, display, system controllers, associated accessories. The system shall include also
workstations, software, licenses and interfaces as described thereafter.
D. Power supply up to the LAN switches that supply PoE to the IP cameras and telecom racks
where the network video recorders are installed, is provided by others. (Refer to electrical
trade documents).
E. Structured cabling system and active LAN equipment is provided by others.

A. Works are to include complete IP closed circuit television system including the following:
1. IP CCTV cameras of fixed mounting type with lenses, housings, mounting brackets, IR
illuminators and terminal boxes.
2. Central control equipment with power supply units, interfacing equipment, racks and
cabinets and related ancillaries.
3. Central monitoring consoles with CCTV monitors, control keyboard and network video
recording units.
4. IP Video Monitoring and Management Software 5. Seamless integration with
the access control system.
6. Readiness for the integration of the IP CCTV with the BMS through Ethernet LAN interface.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit full technical information for approval including manufacturer’s catalogues for all
system equipment and components, indicating the following:
1. Multiplexing, recording and switching technique of video and control signals.
2. System expandability.
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat dissipation, power
requirements etc.
4. Recommended coaxial cable specifications and characteristics.
B. Equipment is to be tested for quality and operation at factory, and test certificates and reports,
certified by an official testing authority, are to be submitted to the Engineer before dispatch to
site.
C. Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed system schematic diagrams.
2. Exact camera locations, layouts and mounting details.
3. Configuration and construction details of central control cabinet and operating
consoles.
4. Attenuation, connector losses and signal levels.
5. Calculation notes for selected lenses and area covered to be submitted by contractor.

Neom community
1.4 SPARE PARTS

1. Power supply: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
less than one unit of each type.
2. Network video recorders: should be available from the supplier within 1 week notice.
3. Disk array: should be available from the supplier within 1 week notice.
4. Camera Lens: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
5. Camera Housing: should be available from the supplier within 1 week notice.
6. Camera: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than
one unit of each type.
7. One unit of any single point of failure device that could inhibit the usage of the whole
system.
1.5 APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the IP CCTV System include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Avigilon (Canada)
2. Honeywell building solution (USA).
3. American dynamics (USA).
4. Bosch (Germany).
5. Comerson (Italy).
6. Axis (USA) 7. Avigilon (Canada)
8. Hitachi (Japan).
9. Panasonic (Japan).
10. Pelco (USA).
11. Philips (Holland).
12. GE interlogix (USA).
13. Sony (Japan).
14. Sanyo (Japan).
15. Toshiba (Japan).
16. Vicon (USA).
17. Siemens (Germany).
18. Samsung (S. Korea).
19. Substitution: or approved equal.
1.6 WARRANTY
replace any component of the CCTV system that do not meet requirements or that fail within
the specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion for any component of the
system.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer approved by the manufacturer for both installation
and maintenance of equipment required for this Section.

Neom community
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in European
EN, UL and IEEE Standards by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with relevant IEC and IEEE standards.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN AND OPERATION

A. CCTV is to provide camera surveillance for the selected building areas from the “Control &
Monitoring room. The selected areas are to be monitored selectively using 46” and 26” HD
LCD monitors with the facility of digitally recording or playing back signals from IP network
video recorders. The system shall allow the live monitoring of all cameras or archive playback,
even during recording, from any computer system connected to the building’s network and
provided with the proper software and access rights.
B. CCTV system is to allow multi-camera display on a single monitor with various configurations
(full screen, quad, 16…etc) and with the facility of twice zoomed diameter.
C. The control system will also allow sequencing of cameras in full screens, freezing frames and
full on-screen camera identification with date and time encoded with each picture.
D. The system shall be integrated in the access control system software via network connection
(LAN and WAN via proper routing) such that any event in the access control shall
automatically trigger the nearest camera (on the spot monitor) and where cameras and their
associated video streams are shown on the access control system computerized layouts.
E. System is to include:
1. IP network video recorders (NVRs), fully programmable for display, record and
playback single or multi-image video signals. Cameras & NVRs shall be suitable for
integration in the access control system software.
2. IP cameras with various configurations (megapixel, 4CIF, dome and standard types, IP
rated…etc), PoE (to IEEE 802.3af-2003 or IEEE 802.3-2008) power supply or fiber
interface, H.264/MPEG-4 AVC encoding/streaming with simultaneous JPEG-2000
encoding/streaming.
3. Optional IP Keyboards (with Ethernet RJ45 ports) for programming and control of all
operations, automatic and manual switching of cameras, associated with appropriate
encoding and interfacing units.
4. On screen text equipment with programmable manual keying facilities 5. Time and
date generation equipment for recorder and spot monitor inputs.
6. 26” full HD (1920x1200) and 46” full HD (1920x1080) monitors
7. Video and Control transmission over IP network (refer to section 16715
Telecommunication System).
8. Equipment above (except central monitoring consoles and monitors) is to be housed in
telecommunication racks as specified in section 16715 (Telecommunication System)
and indicated on security drawings.
2.2 CENTRAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. The system shall allow selectable full screen, sequencing full screen, picture-inpicture, ‘quad’
multiscreen, and 16-way multiscreen displays while full frame recording is taking place. The
system shall also provide a digital freeze frame and x2 electronic zoom in full screen live and
playback modes, including the ability to move around a zoomed image.
B. Operational mode shall be either manual or automatic for the full features of camera
selections, display modes and interfaces with alarms and output devices.
C. On screen help is to be provided for all programming functions. The use of the keyboard will
be through dedicated keys for camera and display mode selection to ensure simple and easily
understood operation. Text is programmed using the standard keyboard.
D. System is to decide and transmit to the camera all instructions originating from central
monitoring consoles via LAN network, directly to the cameras and NVRs.

Neom community
2.3 CAMERA AND ANCILLARIES

A. Cameras are to be IP color CCD cameras, PoE (to IEEE 802.3af-2003 or IEEE 802.32008)
supply (except for those with fiber interface) with day/night automatic switch mode for night
vision (where specified), with resolution as indicated below, suitable for operation under harsh
climatic conditions outdoor (extreme heat, sand storms, high humidity).
B. Brackets are to be cast aluminium alloy wall/ceiling type, adjustable 360 degrees horizontally
and -75/+15 degrees vertically and suitable for mounting arrangements of fixed cameras.
Brackets for controllable cameras are to be rigid non-adjustable. All brackets are to be flanged
at wall/ceiling, with minimum four fixing bolts (expansion type for concrete structures).Night
vision cameras (where specified), include day/night automatic switch and adopt DSP
technology. It includes a red remote filter to provide a colorful image at day and high sensitivity
black and white image at night.
C. Camera Types are:
Day / Night 2 MP IP Fixed Standard Mount Camera (with IP65 environmental housing &
Infrared Illuminator where specified on drawings)
TV System PAL
Image Sensor ½.5 inch progressive scan CCD
Effective Pixels 1920 (H) × 1080 (V)
Scanning Mode Progressive Scan
Scanning Area 4.86 mm (H) x 3.65 mm (V)
Minimum
Color: 1.5 lux at F1.3 B/W: 0.9 lux at F1.3
Illumination
AWC (2,000 ~ 10,000 °K), ATW1 (2,700 ~ 6,000 °K), ATW2
White Balance
(2,000 ~ 6,000 °K)
Outdoor: Automatic integration of shutter control (up to 1/10,000
Light Control sec.) Indoor: Automatic integration of shutter control (up to 1/100
sec.)
Back Light
ON (Auto) / OFF (with 8 x 6 mask area)
Compensation
AGC ON (LOW, MID, HIGH) / OFF
Camera Adaptive Black
ON / OFF
Stretch
Electronic OFF / AUTO (Max. 2x (2/30 s), 4x (4/30 s), 6x (6/30 s), 10x
Sensitivity (10/30 s), 16x (16/30 s))
Black and
OFF / AUTO (No IR filter moving)
White Mode
Digital Zoom 1x, 2x, 4x, Controlled by browser GUI
Video Motion
4 areas, Sensitivity: 15 steps, Detection size: 10 steps
Detection
Privacy Zone Up to 8 zones
Other Image
R-gain, B-gain, Chroma gain, Pedestal, Aperture (Sharpness)
Controls
Camera Title
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters (3 selectable character sizes)
(OSD)
Back Focus
Manual with Focus Assist
Adjustment
Lens Mount CS

Neom community
Synchronizatio
Internal
n
Focal Length 2.8 mm ~ 6 mm, varifocal
Maximum
1 : 1.4 (WIDE) 1 : 7 (TELE)
Lens Aperture Ratio
Focusing
2 m ~ infinity
Range
Camera Brightness, AUX ON/OFF, Zoom (1x, 2x, 4x)
Control
Spot, Quad: Image from 16 cameras can be displayed in 4
Display Mode
different Quad screens or 16 split screen (JPEG only).
Digital Zoom 1x, 2x, 4x Controlled by browser GUI
Camera Title Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
ON/OFF, Time: 12H/24H, Date: 5 formats on the browser,
Clock Display
Summer time
Alarm Control Reset
One Shot
A still picture is displayed on a newly opened window.
Capture
Browser Audio Mic Input: ON/OFF, Audio Output: ON/OFF
GUI GUI / Setup
Menu English, French, Italian, Spanish, German, Russian
Language
System Log Up to 100 (Internal), Up to 4,000 (SD memory) error logs
Windows 7 Professional, Microsoft Windows Vista Business,
Supported OS
Windows XP Professional SP2
Supported Windows Internet Explorer 8.0, Windows Internet Explorer 7.0,
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP2
10Base-T / 100 / 1000Base-TX, RJ45 connector, IEEE 802.3af.
Network PoE compatible; 100 / 1000Base-FX fiber interface where
indicated on drawings
Image
1920 x 1080
Resolution
MPEG-4 H.264: Image quality: 3 steps, Transmission type:
Image UNICAST/MULTICAST JPEG: Image quality: 10 steps,
Compression Transmission type: PULL/PUSH MPEG-4 and JPEG dual
streaming, JPEG multi-resolution support.
0.1 / 0.2 / 0.33 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 5 / 6 / 10 / 15 / 30 IPS (Reduced
Network Image Refresh
frame acceptable rate when displaying JPEG and MPEG-4
Rate
simultaneously)
Audio
G.726 (ADPCM) 32 kbps / 16 kbps
Compression
OFF / Mic input / Audio output / Interactive (Half duplex) /
Audio Mode
Interactive (full duplex)
Total Bit Rate 64 / 128 / 256 / 512 / 1,024 / 2,048 / 4,096 kbps / Unlimited
Max Bit Constant bit rate mode: 64 / 128 / 256 / 512 / 1,024 / 1,536 /
Rate/Client 2,048 / 3,072 / 4,096 kbps Frame rate priority mode: 4,096 kbps /
(MPEG-4) unlimited

Neom community
IPv4: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, RTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS,

Supported
DDNS, NTP, SNMP IPv6: TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, RTP, FTP,
Protocol
SMTP, DNS, NTP, SNMP
Alarm image transfer, FTP Periodic transfer, Active/Passive
FTP Client selectable (When the FTP periodic transmission is failed, backup
on SD memory card)
No. of
Simultaneous 16
Users
Manual REC/Alarm REC/Backup upon network failure.
SD Memory
Compatible SD card: 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2
Card
GB model.
Alarm E-mail Up to 4 e-mail addresses
Alarm, Video activity detection, Access permission can be
Schedule
enabled/disabled by time schedule
User
Up to 20 users
Registration
User/Host
3 Levels: Administrator, Camera control, Live only
Level
Security User authentication (username: 1 ~ 32 digit, password: 4 ~ 32
Measures digit), Host authentication (IP address)
Alarm Source Video Activity Detection, Command alarm, Terminal input
Alarm SD memory recording, E-mail notification, Alarm terminal output,
Alarm Actions
Indication on browser, FTP image transfer
Monitor Output 1.0 V [p-p] / 75 Ω/ PAL composite signal / RCA jack
Microphone Φ3.5 mm mini-jack (applicable microphone: plug-in-power type)
Input / Input Supply voltage: 2.5 V +-0.5 V, Input impedance: 3 kΩ +-10 %
Output Audio Output Φ3.5 mm mini-jack (line-level, monaural output)
External I/O
1x Alarm input, 1x Alarm output, 1x AUX output
Terminals
UL (6500 Edition2), FCC (Part15 ClassA), C-UL (E60065), DOC
Safety/EMC (ICES003 ClassA) , CE (EN55022, EN55024, ClassB), GOST (R
Standard 51558)
Power Source 24 V AC, 60 Hz / 12 V DC / PoE (IEEE802.3af)
Power
Not exceeding 10 W (PoE Class 0)
Consumption
Ambient
Operating -10C to +50°C
Temperature
IP65 rated water and dust resistance to IEC60529 by the
addition of an environmental housing with sunshield, cooling fan,
Water , Dust,
dust filter & Infrared Illuminator where specified and indicated on
Heat
Resistance & drawings. Outdoor pole mounted cameras shall include an
image optical & electronic image stabilization system to cater for pole
stabilization swing due to wind and similar atmospheric conditions.
General Ambient
Operating 90 % or less (without condensation)
Humidity

Neom community
TV System PAL
Image Sensor 1/3 inch progressive scan CCD
Camera Effective Pixels 1,280 (H) x 720 (V)
Scanning Area 4.86 mm (H) x 3.65 mm (V)
Minimum
Color: 1.5 lux at F1.3 B/W: 0.9 lux at F1.3
Illumination
AWC (2,000 ~ 10,000 °K), ATW1 (2,700 ~ 6,000 °K), ATW2
White Balance
(2,000 ~ 6,000 °K)
Light Control sec.) Indoor: Automatic integration of shutter control (up to 1/100
sec.)
Back Light
Compensation
Adaptive Black
ON / OFF
Stretch
Electronic OFF / AUTO (Max. 2x (2/30 s), 4x (4/30 s), 6x (6/30 s), 10x
Sensitivity (10/30 s), 16x (16/30 s))
Black and
White Mode
Video Motion
Detection
Other Image
Controls
Camera Title
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters (3 selectable character sizes)
(OSD)
Back Focus
Adjustment
Lens Mount CS
Synchronizatio
Internal
n
Focal Length 2.8 mm ~ 6 mm, varifocal
Maximum
1 : 1.4 (WIDE) 1 : 7 (TELE)
Lens Aperture Ratio
Focusing
2 m ~ infinity
Range
Camera Brightness, AUX ON/OFF, Zoom (1x, 2x, 4x)
Control
Browser Spot, Quad: Image from 16 cameras can be displayed in 4
Display Mode
GUI different Quad screens or 16 split screen (JPEG only).

Neom community

Clock Display
Summer time
Alarm Control Reset
One Shot
Capture
Audio Mic Input: ON/OFF, Audio Output: ON/OFF
GUI / Setup
Menu English, French, Italian, Spanish, German, Russian
Language
Supported OS
10Base-T / 100Base-TX, RJ45 connector, IEEE 802.3af. PoE
Network IF
compatible
Image 1,280 x 720 (JPEG-2000 or MJPEG-2000) / VGA (640 x 480) /
Resolution QVGA (320 x 240)
0.1 / 0.2 / 0.33 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 5 / 6 / 10 / 15 / 30 IPS (Reduced
Image Refresh
Rate
simultaneously)
Audio
Compression
OFF / Mic input / Audio output / Interactive (Half duplex) /
Audio Mode
Interactive (full duplex)
Rate/Client 2,048 / 3,072 / 4,096 kbps Frame rate priority mode: 4,096 kbps /
(MPEG-4) unlimited
Supported
Protocol
FTP Client selectable (When the FTP periodic transmission is failed, backup
on SD memory card)
Network No. of
Simultaneous 16
Users
SD Memory
Compatible SD card: 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB, 2
Card
GB model.

Neom community

Schedule
User
Up to 20 users
Registration
User/Host
3 Levels: Administrator, Camera control, Live only
Level
Alarm SD memory recording, E-mail notification, Alarm terminal output,
Alarm Actions
Indication on browser, FTP image transfer
Microphone Φ3.5 mm mini-jack (applicable microphone: plug-in-power type)
Input / Input Supply voltage: 2.5 V +-0.5 V, Input impedance: 3 kΩ +-10 %
Output Audio Output Φ3.5 mm mini-jack (line-level, monaural output)
External I/O
Terminals
UL (6500 Edition2), FCC (Part15 ClassA), C-UL (E60065), DOC
Safety/EMC (ICES003 ClassA) , CE (EN55022, EN55024, ClassB), GOST (R
Standard 51558)
Power
Consumption
Ambient
Operating -10 C to +50°C
Temperature
IP65 rated water and dust resistance to IEC60529 by the
Water , Dust & addition of an environmental housing. For outdoor locations a
Heat sunshield, cooling fan, dust filter & Infrared Illuminator are to be
Resistance added where specified and indicated on drawings
General Ambient
Humidity
Day / Night 1 MP IP Fixed Dome Camera

TV System PAL
Image Sensor 1/3 inch progressive scan CCD
Effective Pixels 1,280 (H) x 720 (V)
Camera Scanning Area 4.86 mm (H) x 3.65 mm (V)
Minimum Color: 1.5 lux at F1.3 (Wide, clear dome) B/W: 0.9 lux at F1.3
Illumination (Wide, clear dome)
AWC (2,000 ~ 10,000 °K), ATW1 (2,700 ~ 6,000 °K), ATW2
White Balance
(2,000 ~ 6,000 °K)

Neom community

Light Control sec.) Indoor: Automatic integration of shutter control (up to
1/100 sec.)
Back Light
Compensation
Adaptive Black
ON / OFF
Stretch
Electronic OFF / AUTO 2x (2/30 s), 4x (4/30 s), 6x (6/30 s), 10x (10/30 s),
Sensitivity 16x (16/30 s)
Black and White
Mode
Video Motion
Detection
Other Image
Controls
Camera Title Up to 16 alphanumeric characters (3 selectable character
(OSD) sizes)
Back Focus
Adjustment
Lens Mount Built-in
Synchronization Internal
Focal Length 2.8 mm ~ 10 mm, 3.6x varifocal
Angular Field of H : 27.7 (TELE) ~ 100.3 °(WIDE) V : 20.8 °(TELE) ~
View 73.5 °(WIDE)
Lens
Maximum
1 : 1.3 (WIDE) 1 : 3.1 (TELE)
Aperture Ratio
Focusing Range 1.2 m ~ infinity
Adjusting Horizontal 180 (clockwise), 160 (counterclockwise)
Angle Vertical +-75 °, Image tilt adjustment range: +-100 °
Camera Control Brightness, AUX ON/OFF, Zoom (1x, 2x, 4x)
Spot, Quad: Image from 16 cameras can be displayed in 4
Display Mode
different Quad screens or 16 split screen (JPEG only).
Clock Display
Browser Summer time
GUI Alarm Control Reset
One Shot
Capture
Audio Mic Input: ON/OFF, Audio Output: ON/OFF
GUI / Setup
English, French, Italian, Spanish, German, Russian
Menu Language

Neom community

Supported OS
10Base-T / 100Base-TX, RJ45 connector, IEEE 802.3af. PoE
Network IF
compatible
Image 1,280 x 720 (JPEG-2000 or MJPEG-2000) / VGA (640 x 480) /
Resolution QVGA (320 x 240)
0.1 / 0.2 / 0.33 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 3 / 5 / 6 / 10 / 15 / 30 IPS (Reduced
Image Refresh
Rate
Network simultaneously)
Audio
Compression
Audio Mode OFF / Mic input / Audio output / Half duplex / Full duplex
Rate/Client 2,048 / 3,072 / 4,096 kbps Frame rate priority mode: 4,096
(MPEG-4) kbps / unlimited
Supported
Protocol
FTP Client selectable (When the FTP periodic transmission is failed,
backup on SD memory card)
No. of
Simultaneous 16
Users
SD Memory
Compatible SD card: 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1 GB,
Card
2 GB model.
Schedule
User
Up to 20 users
Registration
User/Host Level 3 Levels: Administrator, Camera control, Live only
Alarm SD memory recording, E-mail notification, Alarm terminal
Alarm Actions
output, Indication on browser, FTP image transfer
Φ3.5 mm mini-jack (applicable microphone: plug-in-power
Microphone
Input / type) Supply voltage: 2.5 V +-0.5 V, Input impedance: 3 kΩ
Input
Output +10 %

Neom community
Audio Output Φ3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (line-level, monaural output)

External I/O
Terminals
UL (6500 Edition2), FCC (Part15 ClassA), C-UL (E60065),
Safety/EMC DOC (ICES003 ClassA) , CE (EN55022, EN55024, ClassB),
Standard GOST (R 51558)
Power
Consumption
Mounting Surface mounted or recessed (as indicated on drawings)
General Ambient
Operating -10 C ~ +50°C
Temperature
Ambient
Humidity
2.4 IP NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS (NVR)

A. The network video recorders shall be provided with suitable storage capacity to accommodate
the number of cameras indicated on drawings with the following assumptions:
1. Recording archive for 30 days
2. 20 hours per day operation (assuming that very low activity shall be present during the
4 remaining hours)
3. 10 events per hour, per camera
4. Each event shall be recorded with 10 seconds pre-event in addition to 10 seconds post-
event
5. Non-megapixel cameras shall record with full resolution, best picture quality, JPEG or
MPEG-4 (H-264), 18 IPS or better
6. Megapixel cameras shall record with full resolution, best quality, MPEG-4 (H8264), 18
IPS or better
7. At least 20% additional storage capacity to account for future cameras or exceptional
circumstances
8. Extra HDDs for RAID5 configuration
B. IP Network Video Recorders shall offer the following features and benefits:
IP NETWORK VIDEO RECORDERS (NVR)

TV System PAL
IP cameras with MPEG-4 H.264, M-JPEG and JPEG
Supported Cameras
encoding
Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness, Preset Position,
Telemetry (over IP)
Auto mode
Supported Image
Supported MPEG-4, JPEG, M-JPEG
Format
Cameras
Supported Image 1920 x 1080, 1280 x 720, 960 x 720, 640 x 480, 320 x
Resolution 240 (depending on the camera)
Supported Audio
G.726 (ADPCM) 32 kbps or approved equal
Format
Maximum Number of
16 or 32 (2 models; as indicated on drawings)
Cameras

Neom community
Manual, Schedule including Event (Pre/Post),

Recording Mode
Emergency
Pre-Event Recording
Up to 15 minutes for pre-event.
Recording
Scheduled 8 programs, 6 time zones or schedules/day,
Recording Mode Independent setup for each day of the week
Frame Rate/Camera Up to 30 IPS (depending on the Camera)
Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness, Preset position call
Camera Control
and program (up to 256), Auto mode
REC, PLAY, Rev PLAY, Pause, Stop, FF, REW, Prev
REC/Playback
Record, Next Record, Prev Image, Next image, Goto
Control
Date, Goto Last (5 sec. ~ 5 min.), Area select
Filtered search: Time date, Event type, Camera
Search Mode number, video activity detection search: one detection
areas per search
Spot/Quad (16 patterns) / Spot Sequence / Quad
Display Mode
Sequence (Sequence: Live only)
Camera Grouping 8 groups each with 16 characters title
Browser GUI Recorded data of selected camera and time range can
Image Download be downloaded to a PC. Viewer software provided for
free.
SD Memory Data Images recorded in the SD card slots of the cameras
Download can be transferred to the recorder automatically.
Recorded data of selected cameras and time date
Copy
range can be copied to a HDD dedicated partition.
Camera Title On the browser, up to 20 Characters
On the browser. Time: 12 H/24 H, Date: 3 formats
Clock Display
(YY.MM.DD, MMM.DD.YY, DD.MMM.YY)
Alarm Control Reset, Suspend
Digital Zoom 2x, 4x
Operator access (100), Network error (1,000), Error
System Log
(100), Event (750)
Setup page in English, French, Italian, Spanish,
System Setup
German, Russian, Chinese, Japanese
English, French, Italian, Spanish, German, Russian,
GUI Language
Chinese, Japanese
Windows 7 Professional, Microsoft Windows Vista
Supported OS
Business, Windows XP Professional SP2
Windows Internet Explorer 8.0, Windows Internet
Supported Browser
Explorer 7.0, Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 SP2
32x Terminal inputs, 64x Camera alarms, Panasonic
Alarm Source
Alarm Protocol
Event Mode Alarm / Activity / OFF
Alarm recording, e-mail notification, Alarm message,
Alarm/ Event
Alarm Action Camera positioning, FTP image transfer, Terminal
output, Panasonic alarm protocol output, Buzzer, LED
Alarm Control Reset, Suspend
Event log 750 or better

Neom community
Camera port: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX / 1000Base-T

(RJ-45) Client port: 10Base-T / 100Base-TX /
Network Interface
1000Base-T (RJ-45) Maintenance port: 10Base-T
(RJ45)
Maximum Band
Total 200 Mbps or better
Width
Bandwidth Control 32 K / 64 k / 128 k / 256 k / 512 k / 1,024 k / 2 M / 5 M /
(Client Port) 10 M (bps) and unlimited
TCP/IP, UDP/IP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, DHCP, DNS,
Supported Protocol
DDNS, NTP, SNMP, RTP
E-mail Upon Alarm or Warning
Network
FTP Client Upon alarm or Periodic transfer
No. of Simultaneous
16
Users
User Registration Up to 32 users or better
User level 4 Levels (Programmable)
Partitioning User - Camera (View only, View & Control, No Access)
User authentication (ID and password), Host
authentication (IP address), Alteration detection, HTTP
Security Method Port No. (1 ~ 65,535 except for reserved numbers),
FTP Port No. (1 ~ 65,535 except for reserved numbers)
32 general alarm inputs
2 alarm outputs, 1 alarm reset input, 1 alarm suspend
input
Alarm & Control
Input / Outputs Emergency recording input, Power outage detection
input, External recording mode switching, Power
External outage recovery completion output, Time adjustment
Interface input/output
Network error output, Available disk space warning
Error/ Warning output, HDD error output, Camera error output, Error
output
High-speed serial interface 1.5 Gbps for external HDD
EXT Storage
extension unit
Time
Terminal (Master or Slave), NTP (Server/Client)
Synchronization
Other
Summer Time User definable
Functions
Multi NVR / Multi
Using a video management software
Site Integration
Up to 9 x 3.5” SATA HDDs (size up to 1TB minimum
Type per drive) can be installed. Hot plug-in of extra drives
shall be allowed.
54 TB with up to 5 HDD extension Units each carrying
HDD Maximum Capacity up to 9 x 3.5” SATA HDDs (size up to 1TB minimum
per drive)
RAID RAID 5/6 support (RAID 5 to be configured)
Partitioning Normal / Event / Pre-Event / Copy
Viewer Play, Rev Play, Pause, FF, REW, Previous Record,
Playback Control
Software Next Record, Previous Image, Next image

Neom community
Alteration detection, Save as JPEG, Two times zoom,

Additional Functions
Print
Supported OS,
Same as browser GUI, English software language
Language
UL (UL60065), FCC (Part15 ClassA), C-UL
Safety/EMC
(CAN/CSAC22.2 No.60065), DOC (ICES003 ClassA),
Standard
CE (EN60065, EN55022 ClassB, EN55024), C-Tick
Power Source 220 / 240 AC, 60 Hz
General
Power Consumption Not exceeding 200W
Specification
s Ambient Operating
+5 °C to +45 °C
Temperature
Ambient Operating
5 % ~ 90 % (no condensation)
Humidity
Mounting Rack mounted in standard 19" cabinets
2.5 OPTIONAL IP CCTV SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (shown as “KEYBOARD” on

drawings)
A. Connectivity:
1. The keyboard shall control the IP cameras and network video recorders. It shall include
an RJ45 Ethernet port to be connected to the LAN in addition to an RS 485 and RS-
232 buses for daisy-chaining of system controllers and configuration sharing.
B. Camera Control
1. Joystick controls Pan/Tilt and Zoom, allowing seamless tracking.
2. Numeric keypad provides direct access to cameras.
C. Recorder Control
1. Jog dial and shuttle ring for fine recorder control
2. Dedicated Record, Play, and Search buttons
D. Switcher Control
1. Image switching and sequencing buttons.
E. System Management Capability
1. User level management
2. User assignable buttons (not less than 6)
3. Setup data can be transferred to another unit
2.6 LCD MONITOR
A. 1920x1080 pixels 46” LCD MONITORS

1. The full HD LCD Monitors shall have a durable design suitable for a control room
environment. They shall use a combination of high and low reflection layers that
perform perfectly in any lighting condition.
2. The monitor shall have a Dynamic Contrast Ratio of up to 50,000:1. The enhanced
Digital Dynamic Contrast shall reduce the duty ratio, minimize the black level and create
deeper black colors. Faster dimming of the LCD backlight shall deliver deeper contrast
of each video source, such that dark colors take on extra depth and light colors become
brighter and clearer.
3. The monitor shall deliver smooth moving images and exceptional sharpness of detail.
4. 100Hz technology shall intelligently extrapolate the action, and then consequently
insert an extra frame between frames to create a comfortable, crisp and fluid viewing
experience. Through the insertion of this bridge frame, images shall be seamless,

Neom community
motion judder and image blurring shall be eliminated. 5. The 46” monitor shall have the
following technical specifications:
Feature Description
Screen Size 46 inches diagonal
Resolution 1920x1080pixels
Dynamic Contrast 50,000:1

VIDEO
Viewing Angle 178°/178° (H/V)
Response Time 4ms
100Hz feature Provided
Sound Output (RMS) 10W x 2

AUDIO
Sound Effect System SRS
HDMI 4
Component Video 2
S-VHS 2
INPUT /
OUTPUT Composite Video 2
CONNECTIONS
USB 2.0 JPEG
1
compatible
Headphones 1
PC Input (D-Sub) 1
Input Voltage 110 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz
ELECTRICAL Electrical Load on

≤1W
POWER Standby
Electrical Load ~250W
Bracket with adjustable vertical and horizontal

Mounting Wall mounting bracket
orientation shall be included
B. 1920x1200 pixels 26” LCD MONITORS
1. The full HD LCD Monitor shall have a durable design suitable for a control room
environment. It shall use a combination of high and low reflection layers that perform
perfectly in any lighting condition.
2. The monitor shall have a Dynamic Contrast Ratio of up to 4,000:1
3. The monitor shall deliver smooth moving images and exceptional sharpness of detail.
4. The 26” monitor shall have the following technical specifications:

Neom community
Feature Description
Panel Size (in.) 26
Display Area (Landscape H x
V) (in.) 20x11.2
Pixel Pitch (mm) 0.286
Contrast Ratio 1000:1 Static / 50,000:1 Dynamic
Video Response (ms) 5 (black-white-black); 3 (grey-to-grey)
Color Saturation 110% NTSC color saturation
Viewing Angle (H/V) 160°/160°
Optimum Resolution 1920x1200
Light Source Lifetime (hours) 40,000
Brightness (cd/m2) 400
Panel Surface Anti-glare
Input Interface non-interlaced Analog/Digital (DVI-D HDCP)
Input Frequency Fh: 24~92kHz, Fv: 50~85Hz
Wall Mount Option Yes
Power Supply Integrated
Input Voltage 110 - 240V AC, 50/60Hz
Electrical Load on Stand-by ≤1W
Electrical Load ~100W
Ergonomic Adjustments Height, swivel, tilt
Emission Standard TCO'03
2.7 IP CCTV WORKSTATIONS

A. The project includes CCTV & access control workstations in addition to a CCTV
management server (the server shall be rack mounted in the datacenter).
B. The systems shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required
specifications:
memory, 3 DVI-D and one VGA outputs with independent multi-monitor resolution and
refresh rate selection (ATI or N-Vidia). Each DVI-D output shall be provided with DVI-
D to HDMI interface.
6. Active desktop speakers (Creative or approved equal); only for workstations.

Neom community

11. Operating System for CCTV & Access Control Workstations: Microsoft Windows 7
Professional Edition, 64 bit version or later.
12. Operating System for CCTV Server: Microsoft Windows Server 2008R2, 64 bit version
or later.
2.8 IP CCTV MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

A. The IP CCTV management software shall be fully integrated with the access control software
suite to provide a unique user interface. The management software shall integrate with the
access control system via network connection such that any event in the access control shall
automatically trigger the nearest camera (on the corresponding spot monitor) and where
cameras and their associated video streams are shown on the access control system
computerized layouts.
B. IP CCTV management software shall provide the following functions:
1. The system shall be able to manage up to 50 recorders, 32 encoders (in case analogue
cameras are added) and 128 directly connected IP cameras can be registered. Hence,
the maximum system capacity shall be 1,600 cameras registered in the recorders
(based on 32 cameras per NVR) and 128 cameras registered in the encoders.
2. Each of the IP CCTV workstations specified above shall be fully licensed for the IP
CCTV management software.
3. The system shall be able to directly receive live images from the cameras or encoders
or recorders.
4. A multi-monitor capability shall enable the simultaneous use of operation display in 1 /
4 / 9 / 16 split, live display in 1 / 4 / 9 / 16 split and map/architectural (up to 100 maps)
view display each on a dedicated monitor.
5. Single or two monitor operation shall be provided. The system shall be able to display
a total of 20 screens by the simultaneous use of the operation display and the live
display at a time.
6. The system shall be able to display up to 30 IPS per camera in 16 split-screen in MPEG-
4 H.264 for up to 2 Mbps per camera displayed.
7. The system shall allow up to 400 camera groups such that cameras and multiscreen
mode for the operation display can be programmed and called up by manual or
sequence operation.
8. The image resolution shall dynamically change depending on the screen mode: VGA
for Quad screen, QVGA for 16 split screen to enable optimum network usage.
9. The system shall include Telemetry camera control: Pan/Tilt, Zoom, Focus, Brightness,
Preset position call and program (up to 256 programs), Auto mode, centering and wheel
zoom.
10. The system shall include the functionality that a camera, a group or a sequence; be
called up on the operation display by their ID. The camera displayed in the active
window can be controlled by the IP CCTV system controller. The network video

Neom community
recorders playback operation also be possible by the IP CCTV system controller with
jog/shuttle controls.
11. Alarm notification: A pop-up alarm message shall be displayed.
12. Individual alarm reset and all alarm reset shall be allowed. The operation display, live
display, map display, and wall monitor shall react correspondingly with the alarm. The
system shall display the present alarm log in red.
13. When an alarm occurs, the monitor changes into the map automatically showing where
the alarm happened and the system shall display the alarmed monitor in red.
14. The system shall have illustrated icons for cameras, alarms and recorders. The system
shall allow up to 64 camera icons that can be freely positioned on a map (architectural
layout) with their alarm status indicated by the color of the icons.
15. The recorded images of up to 64 cameras can be downloaded by a single operation.
The downloaded images can be viewed by the freely provided viewer software.
16. The system shall provide sophisticated user management: User authentication with
time limited password, 5 user levels, User-Camera view/control partitioning in
conjunction with the respective recorder’s user management function, up to 32 user
registrations.
17. The system’s logs can be saved in CSV or other approved database format. The
operation logs can be automatically erased (over-written) when a user programmable
specified time has elapsed (31 / 92 / 184 / 366 days).
18. The audio from a camera can be heard and the operator voice can be transmitted to
the camera’s audio output through the network (single channel at a time, full/half duplex
as per camera specifications). The recorded audio can be played back (single channel
at a time) as well.
19. The system shall allow that video activity based search, be operated.
20. The IP CCTV management software shall be supported on the following operating
systems: Windows 7 Professional, Microsoft Windows Vista Business and Windows XP
Professional SP2
2.9 RACKS, CABINETS AND CONSOLE

A. CCTV cabinets to comprise free standing 19-inch racks inside enclosed cabinets Standards
holes are to be provided for panel mounting of control equipment and cable distribution
terminal boards, which are to be easily accessible for maintenance. Cabinets are to
galvanized sheet steel box construction with joints welded on inside. Multi-formed mounting
channels are to be standard gauge cold rolled steel, with secondary chassis providing infinite
front-to-back adjustment. Base section is to be minimum 1.5 mm thick cold rolled steel. Blower
panels are to be installed in base section of each cabinet to through bottom and back of racks.
Approved manufacturers for 19 racks are: APW, Cannon, Infraplus, Rittal. Network Video
Recorders are mounted in the SSN telecom cabinets specified in section 27 10 00 “Structured
Cabling System”.
B. Central console design and components are to be modular design and contemporary styling
subject to Architect approval, solid welded steel construction with concealed mounting
screws, having laminated desk top and monitor/graphics panel turret housing, and containing
the following:
1. CCTV Workstations
2. System Controllers (CCTV Keyboards)
3. Telephone set 4. Auxiliary equipment.
C. Console is to have louvered side panels and interface styling throughout. Sections are to
include one pair (per section) of support arms 550 mm deep. Supervisor cabinets are to
include locking sliding drawer. Surface top and three sides are to be finished in grey linen
1/16-inch thick texolite laminate. Cabinet is to include down point cabinet sections to house
closed circuit monitors. Units are to be divided and are to provide good picture quality. Design
and finish subject to architect approval.

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and to the approval of the Engineer.
Mount equipment in alignment with other fixtures and fix firmly in place with all supports and
fastenings secured.
B. Equipment is to be installed to prevent electro-static or other outside interference impairing
system performance.
C. Equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.
Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no changes are to be made without
prior approval.
D. Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint provided
by equipment manufacturer, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Routing of video signal cables (structured cabling), power and control cables is to be in
separate raceways.
F. Equipment manufacturer is to provide an Engineer and Technician qualified in the operation
of the system and equipment performance and the requirements of the specification, to assist
the Engineer to test and verify the system performance.
G. Provide diagnostic equipment required performing system tests and measurements including
function generator, Impedance Bridge, oscilloscope, frequency spectrum analyzer, chart
recorder, digital voltmeter, dB meter and waveform monitor.
3.2 CABLING AND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A. The infrastructure of the IP CCTV system shall be the structured cabling system specified in
section 16715 “Telecommunication System”.
3.3 RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to section 16118 “RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS” for related products and field
installation works.
B. Product selection and installation shall take into account the large bending radius of telecom
cables, especially for CAT6 UTP cables serving embedded wall mounted telecom outlets and
fiber optic cables.
3.4 SUPPORTING SYSTEMS AND RELATED ACCESSORIES

A. Refer to section 16120 “WIRES, CABLES AND RELATED ACCESSORIES” for related products
3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The installation Contractor will be provided with 2 sets of drawings at the start of the project.
One set will be designated as the central location to document all as-built information as it
occurs throughout the project. The central set will be maintained by the Contractor’s foreman
on a daily basis, and will be available to the technical representative upon request during the
course of the project. Anticipated variations from the build-to drawings may include such
things as cable routing and actual outlet placement. No variations will be allowed to the
planned termination positions of horizontal and backbone cables or grounding conductors
unless approved in writing by the Owner.

Neom community
B. The Contractor shall provide the central drawing set to the Owner at the conclusion of the
project. The marked up drawing set will accurately depict the as-built status of the system
including termination locations, cable routing, and all administration labeling for the cabling
system. In addition, a narrative will be provided that describes any areas of difficulty
encountered during the installation that could potentially cause problems to the IP CCTV
system.
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions
to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops,
common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment racks or cabinets. Isolate from power
system and equipment grounding.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect

field-assembled components and connections and to supervise pre-testing, testing, and
adjustment of the system. Report results in writing.
B. Pre-testing: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete
pre-testing. Determine, through pre-testing, the compliance of the system with requirements
of Drawings and Specifications. Correct deficiencies observed in pre-testing. Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance
and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test
results.
C. Report of Pre-testing: After pre-testing is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation
is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.
Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready
for final acceptance testing.
3.8 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
3.9 DEMONSTRATION

specified below:
as a training aid.
notice.

Neom community
SECTION 16850 — SMATV SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
Conditions and Division 1 & 16 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. This Section includes an SMATV (Satellite and Master Antenna TV) system including local
and satellite channels distribution in analogue and digital formats, with stereo sound and
teletext. The system shall include RF distribution using a single channel amplification system
for 12 digital terrestrial channels, 12 digital free-to-air satellite channels & 12 digital encrypted
satellite channels (to be selected by the Neom community health center plus representatives).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer installed and
of operation of each device.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating
installation of all items.
D. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the Headend.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products

F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

requirements.
requirements.
H. Maintenance Data: For SMATV system to include in maintenance manuals specified in

Division 1.
I. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to
authorities having jurisdiction. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to
depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or
revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having jurisdiction,
submit them to Architect for review.
J. Certificate of Completion: Comply with the requirements.

Neom community
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

SMATV system manufacturer, ISO 9002 certified for both installation and maintenance of
units required for this Project. The installer shall have at least successfully completed 5
projects with more than 500 SMATV outlet points with an equivalent number of channels.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain SMATV system components through one source from a single
manufacturer (except for cables).
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 MANUFACTURERS

following for the SMATV system:
1. Fracaro
2. Wisi
3. Televes
4. Hirschman
5. Spaun
1.5 FUNCTIONNAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible for the system design verification, procurement,
delivery, installation, testing and commissioning of a complete and fully operational SMATV
system.
B. The SMATV contractor shall provide the necessary equipment for the distribution of TV
channels including but not limited to the following:
1. Satellite Digital channels from EUTELSAT HOT BIRD.
2. Satellite Free and Encrypted Digital channels from ARABSAT 2A.
3. Satellite Free and Encrypted Digital channels from NILESAT 101.
4. Local terrestrial Network via free to air digital terrestrial from CableVision or Econet.
C. The RF channels shall be distributed in several TV standards:

1. PAL (Phase Alternative Line)
2. SECAM (Sequential Color and Memory).
3. NTSC (National Television Systems Committee).
D. The SMATV system shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Satellite dishes including necessary accessories for reception (LNB's, feedhorns) and
fixing (mounting base).
2. Professional Receivers/Modulators (in the Headend) for analogue & digital channels
with accessories (power supply, racks & connectors).
3. Professional Modulators (in the Headend) for digital channels with accessories (power
supply, racks & connectors).
4. Professional single channel amplifiers (one per modulated channel, in the Headend)
with accessories (power supply, racks & connectors).

Neom community
5. Inside Cable plant, including all necessary SMATV amplifiers, Drop cable, Taps and
Splitters for the Distribution Network.
1.6 RECEPTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Satellite programming shall be received from satellite dishes of different sizes. The SMATV
contractor shall be responsible to select final exact allocation of main TVRO with the approval
of the architect. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible of submitting new plans indicating
the new layout of the TVRO and coaxial cables routing if necessary.
B. The SMATV contractor shall provide equipment complying with the following requirements:
1. The TVRO shall be fitted to a mast mounted on the ground.
2. All materials used in the fabrication of the TVRO and their mountings shall be protected
against corrosion by heavy anodic coating, hot dipped galvanizing or corrosion
resistant compound, due to the high grade of humidity in the area, with possible high
sand concentration in the air.
3. TVRO shall be constructed of light aluminum alloy with positive locking of all elements
in position. Square boom construction is preferred.
4. Nuts, bolts, locking washers, etc. shall be of such material or so treated that no galvanic
action can take place.
5. The design of the TVRO shall be such as to minimize wind hum or flutter.
6. All TVRO shall be supplied with a completely weatherproof cased transformer to
provide the standard impedance of the system (75 ohms) and weatherproof glands with
strain relieving properties shall be provided for the coaxial outlet cable.
7. The SMATV contractor shall take into account the likelihood of adjacent channel
interference
8. If the TVRO masts are of the sectionalized tubing type, the brackets shall ensure at
least the same mechanical strength as that an equivalent continuous length of the
same tubing.
9. All the TVRO masts shall be securely fixed to the roof so as to ensure resistance to the
heaviest winds encountered in the Area. (180 Km./h.).
10. The TVRO mountings shall be such that tilting of the aerial assembly in the vertical
plane is possible. The spacing between 2 fixing points, shall be 0.8 meters minimum.
11. Footholds and clamping brackets shall be supplied and fitted to the mast as required
to permit easy servicing of aerials and accessories.
12. Each TVRO shall have its own integral spark gap & surge arrester and together with
its coaxial down-lead and the mast be bonded to a copper down-lead of at least 70
mm2 cross section, terminating in a main earth and the whole being in accordance with
BS6651 normative.
13. Down-leads shall be of the coaxial type run inside the mast and securely clamped
against vibration and whipping. Where run-through roof or sidewalls the appropriate
tubing with U-shaped ending shall be used to prevent ingress of moisture and sealing
shall be ensured at the outer extremity only by use of appropriate sealing compound.
Care shall be exercised to ensure sufficient radius to avoid cable damage.
MAIN HEADEND SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
C. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible of the configuration and programming of the
Headend system and to select final the exact allocation of the Main Headend System to get
the best necessary environmental conditions for the installation and working-state of the
Main Headend System. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible to submit new plans
indicating final design (shop drawings) for Main SMATV Headend system in the SMATV

Neom community
room, including the necessary coaxial cables routing between TVRO'S - Main Headend
System and Distribution Network – Interactive TV System.
D. The SMATV contractor shall provide equipment complying the following requirements:
1. The basic function of this equipment is to accept the input signal from the various
TVRO'S and ITV system, amplify them, diplex them and feed them to the main drop-in
cables. The equipment shall contain its own operated power supplies.
2. The equipment shall be double shielded and be in conformity with VDE or similar
standards.
3. If interference is experienced or expected from transmitters on adjacent channels to
those for which the equipment is initially installed, pass and/or stop filters shall be
installed as part of the Main Headend System.
4. The system shall be capable to operate with adjacent channel (Vestigial Sideband)
“VSB” modulation.
5. Amplifiers and/or converters shall be used for each channel (Single Channel Amplifier).
6. The Main diplexer shall accept and combine all TVRO'S if necessary with the addition
of sub-diplexers.
7. Through-loss on any channel shall not exceed 1.5 dBmV.
8. Return loss on any channel shall not be less than 20 dB.
9. Equalizers shall be installed if necessary to achieve the specified performance criteria,
differences in attenuation of TVRO'S to Main Headend System equipment cables, the
characteristics and length of the riser cables as well as changes in cable characteristics
due to higher increases of temperature in the Area shall be considered.
10. Power supplies units shall be electronically stabilized so that its output voltage shall
not vary by more than 2%.
11. Main Headend System shall work in a temperature range between 0 to 50 degrees
Centigrade.
1.7 DISTRIBUTION NETWORK SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible of submitting new plans indicating final design
(shop drawing) for the Distribution Network System including all the coaxial cables routing to
the whole Distribution Network.
B. The SMATV contractor shall provide equipment complying with the following requirements:
1. The Distribution Network system shall cover all TV outlet locations shown on attached
drawings and shall consist of cables, cable equalizers and boasting distribution
accessories, splitters, taps and RF TV outlets.
2. Coaxial cables shall be as specified on drawings and riser diagram.
3. The screening factor for the main riser cable shall not be less than 85 dB.
4. All cables inside the horizontal-vertical constructions shall be run in PVC or steel
conduits or light current cable trays (as indicated on drawings).
5. Joints and cable terminations shall be adequately sealed against ingress of moisture
and migration along with the cable.
6. All cables shall be shielded and screened when running at distance closer than
0.3meters from low voltage cables shaft (if any).
7. A determinate number of SMATV Distribution amplifiers shall be required to assure that
proper distribution, receive levels and slope equalization are achieved.
8. Cabinets shall be provided to house the SMTAV Distribution amplifiers, Splitters and
Tap-offs.
9. TV signals shall be received on RF outlets flush mounted and properly terminated.
10. Safety isolation rating between TV outlets shall be 200 V. AC.
11. Splitters and Taps-offs shall be of the directional type and the return loss shall be such
that the removal of television set connectors has a minimal effect on the whole system.

Neom community
12. Shielding factor shall be 75 dB minimum for Splitters and Taps-offs.

13. Passive power-passing splitters shall be required to divide the signals into the
appropriate segments. Power-passing splitters may be used with the trunk system,
while non-power passing splitters will be used with the building distribution system.
14. Idem for Directional Couplers (tap-offs).
15. Main riser cables shall be securely clamped at each SMATV Distribution amplifier,
splitter and tap-off position via F-type connectors or other type suitable for cable type
indicated on riser diagram.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each device indicated or to be used.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, riser, power supply, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other Work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that Installer complies with

requirements.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
Standards EN by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use. C. Comply with IEC-364 or NF C 15-100.
D. Confirm the statement of compliance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Coordinate components and features to form an integrated system. Match components and
interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions.
B. Install all SMATV headend equipment in 19” cabinets with the following specifications:
1. 42U, 800x800mm, 19 inch cabinets with removable sides, lockable altuglass front door &
grilled back door, fan unit (for ventilation), complete labeling, horizontal and vertical
cable and cord management, power supply earthing and all necessary accessories.
Provide 19” rack mounted power distribution units PDUs each consisting of 8 sockets
(German standard), 2P+E, 16 Amps.

Neom community
C. Expansion Capability: Adequate for increased number of stations in the future by 20 percent
above those indicated without adding internal components or main trunk cable conductors.
D. Equipment: Modular type using solid-state components, fully rated for continuous duty, Select
for normal operation on input power usually supplied at 220 to 230 V, 60 Hz.
E. Utilize cables that are LSOH plenum rated when passing unconcealed in air plenums.
F. Faceplates are to be from the same brand and finish of those selected for other wiring devices
and specified in section 16140 “WIRING DEVICES AND DISCONNECTS”
G. Refer to section 16118 “RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS” for related products and field
installation works.
H. Refer to section 16120 “WIRES, CABLES SUPPORTING SYSTEMS AND RELATED

ACCESSORIES” for related products and field installation works.
2.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The SMATV contractor’s Scope of Work shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. Installation of an SMATV Heeded with RF Distribution Network compatible with number
of outlets and channels as specified on riser diagram.
2. Installation and erection of TVRO'S systems/subsystem.
3. Integration of a fully functional SMATV system with system performance analysis.
4. Provide test equipment and Spare parts.
5. Testing, commissioning and optimization.
2.3 INSTALLATION OF THE SMATV DISTRIBUTION NETWORK
A. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible to submit final drawings (shop drawings)
indicating the final layout of coaxial cables routing and type.
B. Shielded pipe should be used in trunk lines due to the proximity of Main Power lines close
than 2 meters as specified in Functional Specification for the SMATV system.
For maximum reliability against rodents, steel tape armor with over-jacketing or rigidconduit
such as gray electrical PVC will be installed.
C. Conduits should be at least twice the section of the enclosed cables. Precautions should be
taken to avoid dripping solvent or cement onto cable insulation.
D. The SMATV contractor shall supervise the layout of coaxial cables type 1 & 2 as indicated on
drawings and riser diagram in the whole distribution. The cables are composed of two
concentric conductors separated by an insulating material (dielectric). This whole assembly
is sheathed in a non-concentric jacket for protection against elements. Using this
configuration greatly reduces radiate losses at high frequencies as the number of channels
to be broadcasted (or for future system expansion) implies the use of Hyperband frequencies
in the Network.
E. Specific cable type shall be used; having a large diameter inner conductor shall be required
to transmit frequencies between 1-2 Ghz from TVRO's to Main Headend System.

Neom community
F. The cables shall be 100% shielded due to the conditions in the Area with high levels of ingress
interference from local communicators, whose signals have frequencies similar to those
relayed from the LNBs to the satellite receivers.
G. As attenuation is greater at higher signal frequencies, errors made when installing cables and
connectors can cause more deterioration in performance when higher frequencies signals
and great number of channels are used. The type of cable to use shall have a lower DC
resistance (less than 7 ohms per 1000 meters). The characteristic impedance shall be 75
Ohms +/-2.
H. Connectors shall have 75 ohms impedance and ensure that the center pin or conductor is not
broken off and that is extended far enough out from that connector to make secure electrical
contact but not too far to short out to a chassis and damage circuitry.
I. Tap-offs shall be installed in main trunk lines to pull signals off a main feeder line since the
throughput losses are much lower than splitters.
J. Splitters shall be used for distribution on local cable branches.
K. SMATV distribution amplifiers shall be necessary in different points over the main trunk lines.
SMATV distribution amplifiers shall have adjustable gain & slope control to keep the
difference of levels between VHF and UHF, due to the losses in the distribution Network.
L. Variable equalizers before each line SMATV amplifier shall be provided to ensure a minimum
of 70 dBuV at each TV point without gap between VHF and UHF channels. The equalizing of
signal levels shall reduce the possibility of adjacent channels intermodulation distortion.
2.4 INSTALLATION OF TVRO'S SYSTEM/SUBSYSTEM
A. The SMATV contractor shall be responsible of submitting new plans indicating the final layout
(shop drawings) of TVROs and coaxial cables routing.
B. A variety of construction methods can be used to secure a pole to a ground-mounted site

including pole supports, pads pier foundations or any combination of these types.
Most require the use of concrete or another strong binding material that will withstand the test
of time.
C. For the SMATV system, The SMATV contractor shall provide a solid pole support. It should
be with vertical orientation so all the remaining system adjustments can be done smoothly.
The basic rule to apply for the installation of a TVRO, especially a KUBand system is stability.
Even the minor instabilities in the support structure can degrade performance.
D. Once the cable runs have been mapped, a few meters of the raceway should be prepared in
provision starting at the base of the mount. This shall allow the metal or PVC conduit leading
into the supporting pole to be installed at the same time as other concrete work, such as the
pad construction.
E. It is recommended that the dishes are installed on a concrete pad.
F. Small dishes, generally less than 1 meter in diameter, can be supported from walls, eaves or
mounted on roofs.
G. As an alternative for small dishes, support could be a dish on a long pole or a tower. When
installing large dishes on long poles, for every 10 cm addition to a typical 1.5 meter ground-

Neom community
mounted pole length, an extra 50 cm shall be added to the normal 1 meter below ground
segment.
2.5 TVRO'S SYSTEM
A. The SMATV contractor shall provide appropriate aerials for the reception of several satellite
channels in KU Band.
B. Dishes, feeds and other components designed for KU-Band reception shall be subject to
rigorous performance criteria.
C. The dishes to be used for the SMATV system shall provide the best performance for signal
reception in the SMATV network.
D. Dish efficiency is three times more sensitive to surface imperfections or roughness in the KU
Band than in the C-Band. That means, that a signal loss of 2 dB (about 58%), shall occur if
ripples of 25mm are present across the surface of a KU Band reflector.
E. The type of dishes to use have the best performance in concentrating signals coming from
any chosen satellite and reject cosmic noise and signals from any adjacent satellite. The
beam width or acceptance angle of the antennas (dishes) shall be as narrow as possible.
Larger antennas (dishes) perform better and have better bandwidth characteristics than
smaller ones.
F. The SMATV contractor shall install center focus antennas (1.8 meter for EUTELSAT
HOTBIRD and 1.2 Meter for ARABSAT 2A and NILESAT 101. Sizes to be confirmed by the
contractor).
G. LNB's shall be provided to down convert signals in a particular frequency range. Different
LNB's shall be used with different types of Local Oscillators as Low KU band, Medium KU
Band and High KU Band are used in EUTELSAT HOTBIRD, ARABSAT 2A and NILESAT 101
Channels.
2.6 SMATV HEADENDS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO UNIVERSAL STEREO MODULATORS
AND QPSK-PAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS.
A. The main Headend system shall be installed in 19" professional racks, complying with
procedures and regulations regarding security and quality, as per the statement of
compliance and ISO 9002.
B. Adjacent channel combining by Vestigial Sideband Modulators (VSB):

1. The vestigial side band modulators shall combine adjacent channels using a "z" system
output loop-through.
2. The frequency spectrum of the output carriers for the VSB modulators shall not be
attenuated. The modulator unit shall have a band pass filter that does not reject any
frequency corresponding to the output-working band of the modulator.
3. The modulator output channel shall be adjustable (within the modulator output
frequency working band) by means of a set of DIP switches or by a special
programming unit.

Neom community
4. A single channel processor shall be connected at the output of each modulator. The
demodulator output shall be then distributed as a TV channel on the SMATV network.
5. The modulators shall incorporate an output-tracking filter controlled by the output
frequency of the channel that cleans the spectrum and then filters only the selected
channel eliminating the undesired side band. The output of the modulators shall then
be amplified in a broadband configuration without any interference.
6. Extra care shall be taken to avoid that LSBs (lower sidebands) due to the combining of
channel processors’ outputs in a loop through configuration; bleed into the previous
channel bandwidth, between both video and sound carriers. Therefore, the rejection to
the interfered video carrier shall achieve a greater than 50 dB. Hence, an adjacent
channel headend shall comply with the following conditions:
a. Output level of all its channels shall be adjusted to the same value (balanced
outputs).
b. Every single channel amplifier shall work within the linear zone of its gain
response.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway. Conceal cable and raceway except in unfinished
spaces.
C. Wiring and cabling within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Use lacing bars in cabinets.
D. Cabling and Wiring: Install number and size of conductors as recommended by system
manufacturer for functions indicated or required.

Neom community
E. Separation of Wires and cables: Install in separate raceways or, where in same enclosure,
separate conductors at least 300 mm from adjacent parallel power wiring. Separate other
intercommunication equipment conductors as recommended by equipment manufacturer.
F. Splitters, Taps, and Terminations: Splitters outputs, taps, and terminations shall be
numbered by terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and
equipment enclosures.
G. Match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching
networks where required.
H. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code and numbered conductors and apply
wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables to identify media in coordination
with system wiring diagrams.
I. Cut and patch existing walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes for installation. Repair,
restore, and refinish surfaces to original appearance.
PART 4 - HEADEND AND SYSTEM TESTING
4.1 SUMMARY
A. This procedure shall be followed for testing and commissioning the SMATV system. The
procedure shall not be restrictive i.e. more test could be imposed on the contractor during
commissioning. The procedure targets Headends mainly consisting of stereo modulators,
QPSK-PAL digital receiver-Modulators and single channel processors.
B. The alignment procedure shall be based on a Field Strength Meter provided by the contractor.
C. The single channel system specified must provide an outband spurious rejection around 60
dBc.
D. The SMATV distribution amplification is an essential parameter that determines the

performance of the whole SMATV distribution network.

Neom community
4.2 TESTING CHANNEL PROCESSING, AMPLIFICATION AND DISTRUBUTION SYSTEMS
A. CHANNEL SELECTION:
1. The output channels selected for the satellite receiver/modulator units shall be different
from and compatible with the local TV terrestrial ones.
2. RF output channel from the modulators of satellite units shall be different from the
terrestrial ones.
3. As the VSB modules have as output end a loop-through system to amplify and combine
all their output channels (their inputs ends can have either a two connectors loop-
through or a single input connector); Therefore, and because of the output loop-through
system, a spacing scheme between channels (in the same rack) must be followed to
allows combining the channels without interference.
a. 1 channel spacing for VHF
b. 2 channels spacing for UHF
4. According to the selected channels and in coordination with the local terrestrial
channels, the adequate satellite receiver/modulator units and channel processors must
be selected.
B. CHANNEL ARRANGEMENT
1. The satellite receiver/modulator units and their power supply units shall be installed in
the SMATV Headend. The output channels shall be then selected consecutively in
frequency, from lower to higher channel frequency.
2. In the same way, the channel processors shall be installed in the SMATV rack but in
reverse order, from higher to lower channel frequency.
C. MODULATOR OUTPUT LEVELS

1. The output channel tuned in each receiver/modulator unit shall be verified such that its
output level is higher than 75 dBuV.
2. The output level shall be verified by the Field Strength Meter provided by the SMATV
contractor.
3. The RF links for the output loop-through shall also be verified as indicated below. The
losses due to each RF link 0.5 dB approximately shall be taken into
account.
75 ohms adapter load
R
C
1.
V
R
M
O
F.S.M.
PSU D
RF OUTPUT
5 IMPORTANT
The RF output taken from the unit
supplies also 12 Vdc.
75 ohms adapter load
Use a DC blocked to protect the
F.S.M.
R R 2.
C C
V V
R R
M M
PSU O O RF F.S.M.
D D
OUTPUT
5 7

Neom community
75 ohms adapter 3.
l d
R R R
C C C
V V V
STAR R R R
PSU M
RF
M M
O O O OUTPUT
D D D F.S.M.
5 7 21
D. DISHES & LNBs

1. The signal coming from each LNB shall be verified. The SMATV contractor, shall
provide a Field Strength Meter capable to convert and measure SAT IF signals.
2. Using a satellite receiver/modulator that was previously tested as working correctly;
connect the input of the receiver/modulator to the LNB under test and then connect a
TV set to the output of receiver/modulator unit and check the picture quality.
3. If the picture’s quality is not satisfactory, the following shall be verified:
a. The focal distance for that particular dish (measured from the bottom of the dish
to the center of the feedhorn) is correct.
b.
F CONNECTOR
LNB
18 Vdc
R
C
V
R
/
M
O
D
U
N
Focal distance I
T
b. The F connector of the LNB shall be checked and the 18 VDC supply
from the receiver/modulator Unit to the LNB shall be verified.

c. The LNB’s working condition shall be verified by testing its consumption.
d. Verify that the adequate polarization of the satellite signal is coming from the
LNB (adjust polarity discrimination).
e. Verify the alignment of the dish.
E. CHANNEL PROCESSORS OUTPUT LEVELS

1. Interconnect the racks as indicated below.

Neom community
a. The output of the RACK A shall be connected from the unit tuned for the highest
output channel.
b. The input of the RACK B shall be connected to the amplifier tuned for the lowest
channel.
2. Patch all the RF link connections and terminate all non-used ports with a 75 ohms
adapter load.
3. Tune the input satellite channels as well as the audio subscribers.
4. Check the output of the amplifiers one by one by connecting the FSM as indicated
below
5. All the RF links of a single processor shall be then be verified by this procedure.
a. Testing channel 31 output level
b. Test channel 29 output level. Channel 31 should be 0.5 dB lower because of the
RF link loss.
c. Testing channel 27 output level. Channel 36 measurements will be 1 dB below
from first measure and 33 will be 0.5 dB below, because of the RF links loss.
d. Testing of channel 24 output level shall be as explained above.
F. FINAL EQUALIZATION
1. Once all the amplifiers have been interconnected, the final response of the headend
shall be equalized for the level required at the outlet, deducting system losses. If the
estimated losses from the output of the headend to the wall outlet socket are 25 dB
(losses due to splitters, taps, multi-switches, coaxial cables,....), the output level of the
amplifiers shall be adjusted to the following value:
(LEVEL AT THE OUTLET) + LOSSES = 65 dB V + 25 dB = 90 dB V
G. PICTURE QUALITY
1. The picture’s quality shall be verified by connecting a TV set to the output of the
Headend and observing the picture of each channel checking that there is no
interference.
2. Should any adjacent channel interference be noticed (by watching the typical frame on
the screen), the output of the Headend shall be re-equalized thus reducing its output
level.
3. If the re-equalization does not cancel the interference or if the reduction of the
headend’s output adversely affects the TV outlets’ signal, a different channel
combination for the satellite receivers and amplifiers shall be selected. Selecting a
different channels combination requires that the channels amplifiers which are tuned
for a fixed channel be re-tuned for the new channels configuration by manufacturer
specific special equipment.
H. TV OUTLETS VERIFICATION
1. The output levels for each TV outlet shall be verified.
2. The output levels at each TV outlets shall be within the following levels:
a. from 47 MHz to 68 MHz: Min 65 dB (µV)
Max 74 dB (µV)
b. from 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz: Min 55 dB (µV)

Max 66 dB (µV)
c. from 118.75 MHz to 862 MHz: Min 65 dB (µV)

Max 74 dB (µV)

Neom community
3. The signals shall be equalized and non-intermodulating. The signal to noise ratio shall
be > 45.
PART 5 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, DEMONSTRATION AND

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE.

field-assembled components and equipment installations, including connections. Report
results in writing.
B. Retain option in first paragraph below if separate paging speakers are indicated.
C. Operational Test: As a minimum, like indicated above.
D. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Prepare written record of tests.
E. Report test results in writing.
5.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain SMATV equipment.

Neom community
5.3 STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE
A. The SMATV system, contractor and product manufacturer(s) shall certify that all the equipment
that shall be used in the SMATV system complies with the most stringent E.N. regulations
including but not limited to the following:
• DIN V VDE 0855, part 10: Cabled Distribution system, equipment for
receiving and/or distribution from sound and
television signals.
• DIN V VDE 0855, part 12: Cabled Distribution system, equipment for
receiving and/or distribution from sound and
television signals.
• EN 55014: Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance

characteristics of household electrical appliances, portable tools and similar
electrical apparatus.
• EN 60065: Safety requirements for mains operated

electronic and related apparatus for
household and similar general use.
• EN 60335: Safety for household and similar electrical appliances.
• EN 60555-2: Disturbances in supply systems caused by

household appliances and similar electrical
equipment "Harmonics".
Disturbances in supply systems caused by
household appliances and similar electrical
equipment "Voltage fluctuations".
Generic emission standard Part 1. Residual,
commercial and light industry.
Generic immunity standard Part1: Residual,

commercial and light industry.
Generic emission standard Part 2: Industrial

environment.
Generic immunity standard Part2: Industrial

environment.
Safety for information technology equipment

including electrical business equipment.
Storage, transportation of measurement and

operating environment for Telecommunication
Equipment.
Protection of Structures against lighting
Electrostatic discharge requirements "ESD"

(IEC'801-2).

Neom community
Radiated, radio frequency electromagnetic

field (IEC'801-2).
Electrical fast transient requirements

(IEC'801-5).

Neom community
SECTION 16910 – FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM, ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE INTELLIGENT

INTERACTIVE SYSTEM WITH VOICE EVACUATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes intelligent, interactive, analogue, addressable fire alarm systems with
manual stations, detectors, signal equipment, controls, voice evacuation (VE), emergency
voice/alarm communication systems and related devices.
B. The fire alarm system shall be interfaced with the BMS with input/output points or BACNet IP
(controls form the BMS to the Fire Alarm system are prohibited. Only monitoring and viewing
facilities are to be provided).
C. Definitions in NFPA 72 and BS 5839 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
D. All Fire protection and audio drawings, Bill of Quantity, Design criteria and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary.
E. Power supply up to the fire alarm panels and voice evacuation amplifiers’ racks is provided
by others. (Refer to electrical drawings)
A. General: Non-coded, Interactive / Intelligent, addressable-analog system with manual and

automatic alarm initiation; automatic sensitivity control of detectors; and multiplexed signal
transmission dedicated to fire alarm service, voice evacuation (VE), emergency voice/alarm
communication systems and extinguishing agent release. The system shall also include
interfaces with the security systems and the BMS.
1.3 RELATED WORKS
A. Provide in accordance with Division 13 “Fire Suppression”.
B. Provide in accordance with Division 15 “Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC).
C. Provide in accordance with section 15950 “Building Management System”.
D. Provide in accordance with Division 16 “Electrical”.
E. Provide in accordance with sections 16715 “Telecommunication System”.
F. Provide in accordance with sections 16920 “Access Control”.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Neom community
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturerinstalled and
3. Sections and elevations of installation details, equipment and raceways.
4. Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
of operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for
manually and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's
standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
6. Monitored input/output points schedule & sequence of operation in addition to cause to
effect matrix.
7. Details of graphics display panel
8. All documents required by Civil Defense and other authorities having jurisdiction in the
format required by these parties.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, sections, and elevations drawn to scale and coordinating
installation of smoke detectors in ducts and access to them. Show the following near each
duct smoke provision of detector installation:
1. Size and location of ducts, including lining.
2. Size and location of piping.
3. Size and arrangement of structural elements.
4. Size and location of duct smoke detector, including air-sampling elements.
5. Size and location of speakers and voice evacuation equipment.
D. Operating Instructions: For mounting at the FACP and voice evacuation units.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products

F. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with

requirements.
requirements. Comply with NFPA 72 or BS 5839.
H. Maintenance Data: For fire alarm systems to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1. Comply with NFPA 72 or BS 5839 and EN 54.
I. Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for

Submittals specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals," make an identical submission to
authorities having jurisdiction (Civil Defense). Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings
as needed to depict component locations to facilitate review. Resubmit if required to make
clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On receipt of comments from authorities having
jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
J. Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72 or BS 5839 and all applicable local codes
(Municipality and Civil Defense regulations)
1.5 SPARE PARTS
1. Lamps for Remote Indicating Lamp Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount
installed, but not less than one unit.

Neom community
2. Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but not less
than one unit.
3. Optical Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors, combined optical smoke and rate of rise
detector (with or without built-in sounder) and Flame Detectors: Quantity equal to 3
percent of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
4. Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed (including
bases with built-in sounder), but not less than one unit of each type.
5. Speakers and horns: Quantity equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but
6. Voice Evacuation Amplifiers & Fire Fighters Telephones: Quantity equal to 3 percent
of amount of each type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
7. Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamper proofed components.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain the fire detection and alarm
system with integrated voice evacuation from one of the following manufacturers:
manufacturers:
1. Edwards (CANADA); Part of UTC Fire & Security (USA).
2. SimplexGrinnell (USA); part of Tyco (USA)
3. Gent (UK); Part of Honeywell building solutions (USA).
4. Seimens Builing Technologies (Germany). 5. Esser (Germany)
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor

replace any component of the system that do not meet requirements or that fail within the
specified warranty period.
system.
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the

FACP manufacturer, ISO 9002 certified for both installation and maintenance of units required
for this Project.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing systems similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. UL listing for
NFPA compliant products or LPS 1014 acknowledgment by the LPCB for BS 5839 / EN 54;
is a requirement.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single
manufacturer. Equipment must either be UL listed to NFPA requirements or be certified
compliant to BS 5839 / EN 54. Mixing UL listed equipment and BS / EN certified products
shall not be allowed.
D. Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local
ordinances and regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Neom community
E. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation requirements and NFPA 72 & UL or BS 5839 / EN 54
for equipment.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
A. General: The fire detection with integrated voice evacuation and emergency voice/alarm
communication systems shall comprise of main fire alarm control panels, optical smoke/heat sensor,
heat sensor, optical smoke/heat sensor with integral sounder units, manual call points, electronic
sounders, repeat panels, interface units, fire fighters phones, amplifiers, audio control units and
short circuit isolators. Please refer the relevant fire detection and voice alarm drawings and
schematics. The repeat panels, master panel and the graphics terminal shall be sited as shown on
the drawings. All loop cabling and any other components and accessories deemed necessary for a
safe, reliable and satisfactory system shall conform to the relevant and applicable requirements and
recommendations of NFPA 72, corresponding UL standards (or BS 3839 and EN 54) and the
equipment manufacturer. B. Control of System: By the FACP.
C. System Supervision: Automatically detect and report open circuits, shorts, and grounds of
wiring for initiating device, signaling line, and notification-appliance circuits.
D. Priority of Signals: Automatic alarm response functions resulting from an alarm signal from
one zone or device are not altered by subsequent alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals. An
alarm signal is the highest priority. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third-
level priority. Higher-priority signals take precedence over signals of lower priority, even when
the lower-priority condition occurs first. Annunciate and display all alarm, supervisory, and
trouble signals regardless of priority or order received.
E. Noninterference: A signal on one zone shall not prevent the receipt of signals from other
zones.
F. System Reset: All zones are manually reset-able from the FACP after initiating devices are
restored to normal.
G. Flexibility: The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice
communication zones as indicated on the drawings and schematics. The system shall be
configured to allow on site modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC based
software and built-in features to facilitate future changes or alterations to the buildings.
H. Transmission to Remote Alarm Receiving Stations: Automatically route alarm, supervisory,

and trouble signals to a remote alarm station by means of a digital alarm communicator
transmitter.
I. System Alarm Capability during Circuit Fault Conditions: System wiring and circuit
arrangement prevent alarm capability reduction when an open circuit, ground or wireto-wire
short occurs, or an open circuit and a ground occur at the same time in an initiating device
circuit, signal line circuit, or notification-appliance circuit.
J. Loss of primary power at the FACP initiates a trouble signal at the FACP and the remote
announciators. An emergency power light is illuminated at both locations when the system is
operating on the secondary power supply.
K. The system shall be of soft addressable type i.e. all the devices on the loops of the FACP
shall be:
1. Allocated addresses automatically from the panel at the time of system power up on a
numerically lowest unused value basis (algorithms)
2. Given an address during commissioning, the value of which shall be stored in non-volatile
memory, within the electronics module of the outstation. This value shall be read during
loop allocation and provided it is valid shall be used to setup the outstations primary
address.

Neom community
3. If the devices are inserted or removed all the existing devices shall keep the same
address.
L. The panel shall allocate the address in strict sequential order when the loop is powered up to
speed up commissioning and ensure that it is impossible for two devices to have the same
address.
M. All devices shall be assigned up to 32 character alphanumeric label. In case of fire, fault or
warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear on visual display unit of the panel.
N. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated by the authority having
jurisdiction, project’s fire department or local regulations, operation of an automatic alarm
operation of one smoke detector:
1. Notification-appliance operation shall function as follows:
2. Identification at the FACP and graphics monitor of the zone originating the alarm. With a
graphical display of the zone.
3. Identification at the FACP and graphics monitor of the device originating the alarm.
4. Recording of the event in the system memory.
5. Recording of the event by the computer of the graphics monitor which shall also print the
event log (provide serial or Ethernet interface with software).
6. The sequence of operation shall a positive alarm sequence as indicated in NFPA 2007
article 6.8.1.3 (the alarm has to be acknowledged within 15 seconds, then 180 seconds
are allocated to investigation after which either the alarm is cleared or notification is
initiated and staged evacuation or relocation starts).
7. The notification shall conform to NFPA 72, Annex A, chapter 7, article 7.4.3.2 regarding
private mode signaling in all patient areas while audible and visual signaling shall be
eliminated from operating rooms and critical care patient areas.
8. If the alarm originates within a patient room or operating rooms and critical care patient
areas and is still under investigation, the transmission of alarms to mechanical equipment,
access controlled doors, magnetically held doors,…etc shall be refrained.
9. Delayed transmission of an audible (sounders, speakers) & visual (strobes) alarm in that
zone if the alarm has not been acknowledged as cleared at the fire alarm panel, within
a programmable time delay in accordance with local codes.
O. Basic Alarm Performance Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated by the project’s

security department or local regulations, operation of one manual station, automatic alarm
operation of two smoke detectors or a single heat detector, un-cleared or unacknowledged
alarm of one smoke detector, or operation of a manual agent release station initiates the
following:
1. Notification-appliance operation as a positive alarm sequence as indicated in NFPA 2007
article 6.8.1.3:
2. Identification at the FACP and graphics monitor (of the separate computer) of the zone
originating the alarm with a graphical display of the zone.
3. Identification at the FACP and graphics monitor of the device originating the alarm.
4. Transmission of an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving stations.
5. Unlocking of electric door locks (Delayed-Egress Locks and Access-Controlled Egress
Doors as indicated in NFPA 7.2.1.6.1 and 7.2.1.6.2 respectively), unless the initiating
device is a manual station and the alarm is still being investigated.
6. The notification shall conform to NFPA 72, Annex A, chapter 7, article 7.4.3.2 regarding
private mode signaling in all patient areas while audible and visual signaling shall be
eliminated from operating rooms and critical care patient areas.
7. If the alarm originates within a patient room or operating rooms and critical care patient
areas and is still under investigation, the transmission of alarms to mechanical equipment,
access controlled doors, magnetically held doors…etc shall be refrained.
8. Release of fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders unless the initiating
9. Transmission of an audible (sounders, speakers) & visual (strobes) alarm in all zones
(except as indicated in articles 6 and 7 directly above).

Neom community
10. Actuating the operating status of fans and other air-handling equipment serving the zone
where the alarm was initiated (refer to emergency sequence of operation), unless the
initiating device is a manual station and the alarm is still being investigated.
11. Actuating the position of smoke dampers in air ducts of system serving the zone where
the alarm was initiated (refer to emergency sequence of operation), unless the initiating
12. Recording of the event in the system memory.
13. Recording of the event by a separate computer which shall print the event log. (provide
Ethernet interface with required software suite and licenses).
14. Activate the integrated auto dialer to notify fire brigade with a presignal feature as indicated
in NFPA 6.8.1.2
P. Alarm Silencing, System Reset and Indication: Controlled by switches in the FACP and the
remote annunciator.
1. Silencing-switch operation halts alarm operation of notification appliances and activates
an "alarm silence" light. Display of identity of the alarm zone or device is retained.
2. Subsequent alarm signals from other devices or zones reactivate notification appliances
until silencing switch is operated again.
3. When alarm-initiating devices return to normal and system reset switch is operated,
notification appliances operate again until alarm silence switch is reset.
Q. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the
selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current
status, reading and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. Same
controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of
specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivityadjustment schedule changes are
recorded in system memory and are printed out by the system printer.
R. Removal of an alarm-initiating device or a notification appliance initiates the following:

1. A "trouble" signal indication at the FACP and the annunciator for the device or zone
involved.
2. Recording of the event by the system printer.
3. Transmission of trouble signal to remote alarm receiving stations.
S. Printout of Events: On receipt of the signal, print alarm, supervisory, and trouble events.
Identify zone, device, and function. Include type of signal (alarm, supervisory, or trouble),
and date and time of occurrence. Differentiate alarm signals from all other printed indications.
Also print system reset event, including the same information for device, location, date, and
time. Commands initiate the printout of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions in the system and a historical log of events.
T. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Plain-English-language descriptions of alarm, supervisory, and

trouble events; and addresses and locations of alarm-initiating or supervisory devices
originating the report. Display monitoring actions, system and component status, system
commands, programming information, and data from the system's historical memory.
U. Topology: All system components and devices shall be connected to two-wire loop circuits
(as shown in the typical schematics) with fault isolator every 20 devices and at the boundary
of each fire zone which-ever is greater. Removal or disconnection of any component from the
loop shall not affect the functioning and performance of other components and the system.
V. Voice Evacuation System (VE):

1. There shall be a seamless software interface between the fire alarm interface between the
fire detection and voice alarm system.
2. The amplifier units (AUs) shall be rated and the speaker circuits shall be wired as shown
in the schematics. AUs shall house the power supply, battery backup and full monitoring
facilities. The amplifiers and audio units shall be modular in construction allowing for a

Neom community
high degree of flexibility so that the performance can be closely matched to the
requirements of the NFPA (or BS 5839 and EN54) standards of the Voice Alarms.
3. The Audio Control Unit (ACU) shall be designed to complement the fire alarm control
panel, providing manual access to the voice alarm section of the system. Controls on the
ACU shall be available for up to 64 broadcast zones of the voice alarm. Standard
configurations shall allow for recorded Alert and Evacuate messages as well as an
emergency microphone to be operated in each area. In addition up to four other recorded
messages shall be stored in the ACU.
4. The site shall be provided with a dedicated voice alarm system. The amplifier units shall
be networked and reported back to the central stations at the Control/Security Room.
5. The VE system shall be properly integrated with the fire alarm system for the whole site.
6. The integrated VE system shall cover all normally accessible areas with the exception of
areas where a high level of background noise is present or areas where general public is
restricted. In these areas sounders connected to the fire alarm system shall be used.
7. The amplifiers units (cabinets, enclosure…etc) shall include amplifiers for local areas. The
AUs shall be capable of complete standalone operation for the areas it is assigned should
the network/interface connections fail.
8. In the event of a catastrophic failure occurring on any individual component within the AUs,
pre-recorded emergency alarm message shall still be available at the ACU.
9. Initiation of voice alarm shall take immediate priority and shall cancel all other PA
operations. Monitored output points shall be provided to disable PA amplifiers.
10. The voice alarm system shall be capable of broadcasting pre-recorded emergency alarm
messages and live speech in the event of fire detection system activating.
11. The systems shall be capable of broadcasting up to 4 different pre-recorded messages to

different zones or group of zones simultaneously.
12. Evacuate signal relates to a general evacuation message and alert message corresponds
to standby instructions.
13. In addition a FIRE DRILL and an ALL CLEAR message shall be incorporated into the
operation.
14. A fire alarm broadcast signal shall cancel any public address operation (if any) and shall
override it.
15. Fireman’s microphones shall be fitted to the Audio Control Units. These shall allow direct
voice instructions to be transmitted to a single zone, selected zones or all zones. At least
two microphone units shall be provided, at the front desk and the security room.
16. When a fireman’s microphone is operated, this shall override any automatic voice alarm
signal being transmitted to the zone selected. The Alert and Evacuate pre-recorded
messages will be maintained in other zones while live voice fire announcements are being
broadcast to selected loudspeaker zones.
17. Automatic gain control shall be provided for areas likely to have high background noise
levels.
W. Fire Fighters’ Telephone System

Neom community
1. The Fire Alarm / Life Safety System Shall provide a fully integrated Fire Fighters’
Emergency Telephone and Communications System. A Master Telephone handset
shall be provided which will provide a totally independent 2way communication
between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and any of the Fire Fighters’ Telephone Stations
or Portable Telephone jacks located as indicated on the plans for the building.
X. The system shall include interface input/output points to the BMS system which shall be
coordinated with the manufacturer/supplier of that system.
2.2 MANUAL PULL STATIONS (Break glass) WITH TAMPER-PROOF SHIELD
A. Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raisSECOetter
operating instructions of contrasting color.
1. Manufactured as per BS 5839 Pt.2, Pt.3 and Pt.4. or NFPA requirements, UL listed.
2. Double-action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull after
breaking the glass, to initiate an alarm.
3. Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the
voltage and current at which it operates.
4. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, trouble) to the FACP.
5. Built-in isolator.
6. Tamper-proof shield designed to prevent false fire alarms without restricting legitimate
alarms. It consists of a tamper-proof, clear Lexan polycarbonate shield and frame that
fits easily over manual pull stations. When lifted to gain access to the actual alarm, it
sounds a piercing warning horn. Immediate attention is drawn to the pull station and
pranksters will be deterred. Legitimate alarms can still be pulled.
2.3 COMBINED (MULTI-CRITERIA) OPTICAL SMOKE AND RATE OF RISE DETECTORS

(SENSORS)
A. General (for all detector types). Detectors shall include the following features:
1. Manufactured as per BS 5445 Pt.7, Pt.5 and Pt.8, BS5839 Pt.4. or NFPA requirements,
UL listed.
2. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
3. Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in
a module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-locking
plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
4. Addressing is preferably automatic
5. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type. Indicates detector has operated.
6. Sensitivity: Can be tested and adjusted in-place after installation from control panel.
7. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
8. Remote Controllability: detectors are intelligent and interactive analogaddressable
type, individually monitored at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, analogue reading
and alarm condition, and individually adjustable for sensitivity from the FACP.
9. Automatic drift compensation and control.
10. In base isolator.
11. EMI Protection 50V/m.
12. Response time less than 7 seconds.
13. In all areas except back of the house, the detectors shall be color matched to the ceiling
finish/color indicated in the architectural layouts. An exception to this clause is where
the detectors (or its installation guidelines) carry the specific annotation “Do Not Paint”.
In any case, no degradation of performance or detectors certification, approvals and
Listings should occur. Its highly preferable unless specifically indicated by the
manufacturer’s installation instructions that the detectors should be semi recessed or

Neom community
decorative offering the Architect the flexibility to integrate them properly on the surfaces
where they are specified. Samples should be submitted for approval.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver (or approved
better technology).
2. Detector Sensitivity: 0.006 grams of combustion product per cubic foot of air.
3. EMI Protection 50V/m.
4. In base addressable electronic sounders (where indicated) providing 85 dBA at 1
meter.
2.4 OTHER DETECTORS (SENSORS)
A. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 57 deg C or rate
of rise of temperature that exceeds 8.3 deg C per minute, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (detector
reading, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed

temperature of 88 deg C.
1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
2. Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases.
3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal,
alarm, or trouble) to the FACP.
C. Infra-Red Flame Detector.

1. The infra-red flame detectors shall be capable of detecting infra-red radiation produced
by flaming fire involving carbonaceous materials.
2. The infra-red flame detectors shall be approved by loss Prevention council Board
(LPCB) or UL listed.
3. The infra-red flame detectors shall be able to detect a fuel fire of 0.1 square meter area
from a distance of 30 meters for the following fuels: a. Petrol (gasoline).
b. N-heptane.
c. Kerosene.
d. Diesel oil.
e. Alcohol (I.M.S).
D. Beam Detectors (Sensors)

1. The beam Sensors shall be addressable, loop powered; loop signaled with built-in short
circuit isolator and shall detect fire by obscuration of an optical beam by smoke. It shall
utilize a transmitter and receiver unit and be suitable for ranges of up to 100 meters. It
shall be used in areas as indicated in the drawings. The traditional false alarm problems
associated with the use of beam detection, such as birds, workmen and sunlight shall
be overcome by the use of analogue detection.
2. A method of automatic gain control shall be employed to minimize the effects to a built
up of duct and dirt on the lens.
3. LEDs shall be provided integral with the transmitter/receiver units to assist in the
alignment set-up.
The Beam sensors shall be LPCB approved and to BS 5839 Part 5. It should be IP40
rated or NFPA requirements, UL listed.
E. Duct Detectors (Sensors)

Neom community
1. Duct Sensors shall be addressable, loop powered, loop signaled with a built-in short
circuit isolator. They shall comprise a sampling unit with probes extending into a
straight section of the mechanical ventilation ductwork. The duct sensor shall comprise
optical Smoke & Heat sensing devices.
2.5 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A. Description: Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw terminals for system
connections.
1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-
mounting assembly.
2. The notification appliances shall be LPCB approved and to BS 5839 or as per NFPA
requirements, UL listed.
B. Mechanical Bells: Electric-vibrating, 24-V dc, under-dome type; with provision for housing the
operating mechanism behind the bell. When operating, bells provide a sound-pressure level
of 95 dB minimum, measured at 1 meter, from the bell. 8 inch size, unless otherwise indicated.
Bells are weatherproof where indicated.
C. The addressable Alarm Electronic Sounders and strobes shall be loop wired (if external power
supply is needed, it shall be via a fully monitored power supply source and wiring) and loop
signaled and provided with built-in short circuit isolation and shall be sited in areas as shown
in the schematics and the floor layout drawings. The sounders shall be configured via
software to operate individually or in sectored groups, totally independent of the way they
have been connected to the loops. The sounders and strobes shall have the synchronization
feature to ensure that all the sounders give alert and evacuate tones that are totally in phase.
Conventional Sounders that "free-run" and therefore be out of phase with each other will not
be accepted. The sounders shall have an output of 100dBA at 1 meter with frequencies of
970 Hz and 910 Hz. Variety of sounds shall be available.
D. Visible Alarm Devices: UL listed strobe lights with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens.
Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 25 mm high
letters on the lens. Strobes shall be UL listed.
1. Rated Light Output: 15, 30, 34, 60, 75, 94, 110 and 177 candelas.
2. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
3. Strobe lights are to be integrated in voice evacuation speakers where indicated on
drawings.
4. Strobes shall be compliant with UL1971 and 1638.
2.6 MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Description: Units are equipped for wall or floor mounting as indicated and are complete with
matching door plate.
1. Electromagnet: Requires no more than 3 W to develop 111 N holding force. Selection
of door holders shall be closely matching size, type and weight of door.
2. Wall-Mounted Units: Flush mounted, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Rating: 24-V dc.
B. Material and Finish: Match door hardware.
C. CENTRAL FACP
D. Cabinet: Lockable steel enclosure. Arrange interior components so operations required for
testing or for normal maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure.
If more than one unit is required to form a complete control panel, fabricate with matching
modular unit enclosure to accommodate components and to allow ample gutter space for field
wiring and interconnecting panels.

Neom community
1. Identify each enclosure with an engraved, red, laminated, phenol-resin nameplate with
lettering not less than 25 mm high. Identify individual components and modules within
cabinets with permanent labels.
2. Mounting: Surface.
E. Alarm and Supervisory Systems: Separate and independent in the FACP. Alarminitiating
zone boards consist of plug-in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module
replacement is unacceptable.
F. Control Modules: Include types and capacities required to perform all functions of fire alarm
systems.
G. Indications: Local, visible, and audible signals announce alarm, supervisory, and trouble
conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a different sound.
H. Indicating Lights and System Controls: Individual LED devices identify zones transmitting
signals. Zone lights distinguish between alarm and trouble signals, and indicate the type of
device originating the signal. Manual switches and push-to-test buttons do not require a key
to operate. Controls include the following:
1. Alarm acknowledge switch.
2. Alarm silence switch.
3. System reset switch.
4. LED test switch.
I. Manual override buttons: for smoke dampers and smoke management

procedures as indicated on riser diagram and schedule of points
J. Resetting Controls: Prevent the resetting of alarm, supervisory, or trouble signals while the alarm
or trouble condition still exists.
K. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at
the FACP and addressable system components, including annunciation, supervision, and
control.
1. Visual display unit capable of displaying at least 4 lines each 40 characters backlit display.
2. Built-in 40 character thermal printer operating when the access door is open.
There shall also be an option to enable the printer when the door is closed.
3. Built-in keyboard.
L. Simple menu driven function keys with password protection shall allow users to an extensive
range of software based features such as:
1. Last 100 fire events.
2. Last 255 system events.
3. Current fault and warning logs.
4. Analysis of analogue sensor information.
5. Interrogation of sensor cleanliness.
6. Loop map connections.
7. Enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unit channels.
8. Fire plan configuration menus.
9. Outstation label changes.
10. Address allocation.
11. Status of outstation.
12. Status of all cards.
13. Printer on, off, line feed and test facilities.
14. Address allocation including soft addressing.

Neom community
M. Graphics display capability by connection to a computer system by a serial or Ethernet

connection (provide software and programming).
N. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a plastic or glass cover in a
stainless-steel or aluminum frame. Include interpretation and describe appropriate response for
displays and signals. Briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm,
and trouble conditions.
O. VOLTAGE AND POWER SUPPLY: Main FACP is to provide 24 V D.C. to all zone alarm initiating
and alarm signaling devices and is to be designed to operate from 220/230 V A.C., 60 Hz 2-wire,
earthed power supply. Power supply is to be an integral part of the main fire alarm panel, switch
mode solid state design, with built in transient protection (up to 6 kV), including UL recognized
EMI filter, spark gaps and varistors. Additional power supply units are to be provided for the
amplifiers. The power supply is to provide diagnostic LEDs to notify operator upon AC power
and/or the control unit CPU failure.
P. Monitored output relays for emergency MDBs and panels, HVAC, fire fighting panels, BMS,
secondary fire alarm panels, fire doors, motorized dampers, motorized fuel valves, fuel pumps
…etc as required by the standard (BS 5839 or NFPA requirements) and to the satisfaction of the
project’s fire department and local regulations. Outputs shall allow for segregated selective
control per floor and/or area application.
Q. Monitored input relays from fire pumps, fire fighting panels, secondary fire alarm panels,
emergency MDBs and panels, synchronizing panel, smoke pressurization & extraction fans, fire
dampers, BMS etc.
R. Interface to voice evacuation system. Hardwired schemes shall not be accepted, only a
communication bus providing full integration of the voice system providing multiple addressing
zones and staged evacuation shall be accepted. The operation of the alarm sounders and the
voice evacuation speakers shall be coordinated such that voice messages are not blurred by
alarm tones emanating from sounders. S. RS 232/ RS 485 and Ethernet LAN TCP/IP computer
communication.
T. Inputs to BMS (which are monitored by the fire alarm also) shall include but not limited to:
1. Failure or disconnection of power supply.
2. Failure of protective device.
3. Valve tamper at fire pumps (refer to IN/OUT points schedule of fire alarm system).
4. Flow switches at fire pumps (refer to IN/OUT points schedule of fire alarm system).
5. Fire pumps power loss or phase reversal.
6. Emergency Generator start failure.
7. Emergency Generator low fuel.
8. Emergency Generator low oil pressure.
9. Each smoke removal fan that is running or high speed (refer to IN/OUT points schedule
of fire alarm system).
U. In addition to the above, all other necessary controls, elements and accessories shall be
included to provide a complete and efficient panel conforming to the requirements of BS 5839:
part 4: 1988 and EN 54 or NFPA standards.
2.7 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
A. General: Components include stand-by sealed lead-acid battery, charger, and an automatic
transfer switch.
1. Battery Nominal Life Expectancy: 10 years, minimum.
B. Battery Capacity: 24 hours: including supply of sounders, electronic bells, warning signs,
strobe lights, control signals, full alarm load for 30 minutes.

Neom community
1. Magnetic door holders are not served by emergency power. Magnetic door holders
are released when normal power fails.
C. Battery Charger: Solid-state, fully automatic, variable-charging-rate type. Provide capacity

for 150 percent of the connected system load while maintaining batteries at full charge. If
batteries are fully discharged, the charger recharges them completely within four hours.
Charger output is supervised as part of system power supply supervision.
D. Integral Automatic Transfer Switch: Transfers the load to the battery without loss of signals
or status indications when normal power fails.
E. Addressable fire alarm sounder / strobe controllers shall be remote, self contained power
supply units that include charger, batteries (same autonomy as for main panel) and
synchronizing signal for strobes compliant with UL1971 and 1638. Each unit shall include one
permanent supply line for addressable sounders and sounders-strobe combination in addition
to one switchable for strobes and conventional sounders. Both outputs shall be monitored.
2.8 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A. Description: Microelectronic monitor module listed for use in providing a multiplex system
address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.
B. Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to a circuit-breaker shunt trip for power
shutdown or similar function.
2.9 REPEAT PANELS
A. The Repeat Panel with built-in short circuit isolation shall be sited at the indicated locations. It
shall provide system repeat facilities to repeat all of the liquid crystal display messages as
well as the common indications. It shall have essential alarm controls, menu facilities and an
optional printer allowing it to take the role of the main system indicator for the day to day
running of the system. The Repeat Panel shall be loop driven and provided with an inbuilt
isolator. The Repeat Panel shall be complete with built-in battery and charger to comply with
BS 5839 or NFPA standards and shall require 220/230 V AC supply. The Repeat Panel shall
be located as shown in the schematics.
2.10 GRAPHICS TERMINAL
A. The graphic visual display shall pictorially represent Fire, Fault and Emergency events on a
visual display unit (VDU). The purpose of this facility shall be to provide the operator with the
additional visual information over and above the text provided. All system events ie fire, fault
and warning shall be automatically printed onto the graphics printer. Operation of the graphics
terminal shall normally be by selection of the appropriate pages guided by a navigation
system. However, it shall automatically track to the relevant initiating device for the first
occurrence of each type of the event.
B. The graphics terminal shall provide the following:

1. Events display/status bar giving a clear and concise view of the current events on the
fire alarm system.
2. Ability to control and change the following:
• Disable actions.
• Labels.
• Auxiliary text.
3. User Action buttons.

4. Historic data of all the system events.

Neom community
5. Access levels/passwords to target specific levels of access to specific users.

6. Graphical representation of the site allowing the exact location of the fire alarm events,
e.g. fires, faults etc.
7. Panel remote buzzer cancellation.
8. Event acknowledgement.
9. Clock synchronization with panels with local adjustment facility.
10. Touch screen support.
C. The terminal shall assign a number of different graphic pages to each fire event – from a site
overview of building layout, through a floor layout, breaking the site down into increasing
levels of detail. Number of graphic pages required shall be finally determined by the
client/consultant. For tender assume 20 pages per floor, based on the drawings produced on
AutoCAD by the Contractor.
D. The systems shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required
specifications:
memory, 1 DVI-D or HDMI output (ATI or N-Vidia). Each DVI-D output shall be provided
with DVI-D to HDMI interface.
10. Operating System for fire alarm graphics terminal: Microsoft Windows 7
Professional Edition, 64 bit version or later.
14. 26 inches LCD color monitor. 1920x1080p resolution, horizontal scanning frequency
24~82, 5 msec response time, contrast ratio 50,000:1 and viewing angle (hor & vert)
170°, DVI-D, HDMI and VGA inputs in addition to built-in speakers.
15. Ink Jet Printer: (Hewlett Packard, Canon or equivalent): A3, 1200 DPI, color, 8 ppm in
black & white and 4 ppm in color minimum. It shall include two automatic sheet feeders
for A4 & A3 paper sizes. The combined text and graphics package shall be provided
on the same supervisor.

Neom community
2.11 NETWORK INTERFACE
A. The network interface provides for connection of a control panel to the panel’s network. It includes
an integral battery-backed power supply.
2.12 T-BREAKER UNIT
A. The T-breaker may be placed anywhere in a loop to provide connection for a spur or sub-loop.
The T-breaker uses a single address of its own.
2.13 Fire Fighters’ Telephone System
A. The Fire Fighters’ Telephone System shall include a backlit LCD screen to show the operator
the identity and location of up to 20 waiting calls. The LCD will display call-in information in
full language, without the need for individual LEDs and switches per telephone station. The
user shall connect a call by pressing a “connect” switch.
B. The LCD shall display up to 5 connected calls simultaneously. Up to 5 telephones may be

connected on a conference type call.
C. To terminate a call, the operator shall scroll the display cursor over the connected callers’ ID
message, and press a “disconnect” switch.
D. Telephone Devices
1. All telephone devices shall be UL Listed for Fire Protective Service.
2. All telephone devices shall be of the same manufacturer as the Fire Alarm Control
Panel specified to assure absolute compatibility between the telephone devices and
the control panels, and to assure that the application of the appliances is done in
accordance with the single manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Any telephone devices that do not meet the above requirements, and are submitted for
use must show written proof of their compatibility for the purposes intended. Such
proof shall be in the form of documentation from all manufacturers that clearly states
that their equipment (as submitted) is 100% compatible with each other for the
purposes intended.
4. The telephone devices shall be red telephone hand sets housed within a locked
recessed (flush mounted in decorated areas) or surface mounted enclosure (in parking
spaces and technical areas). The housing enclosure shall have a stainless steel body
and finish in decorated areas and steel body with red powdercoat finish in parking and
technical spaces. Enclosures shall have a locking door, concealed hinges and Break
glass insert.
5. Clearly mark the housing with "FIRE FIGHTERS TELEPHONE" in large letters for easy
identification. The housing shall be available in either indoor or outdoor weather-proof
& vandal proof versions, as indicated on drawings.
6. Four state Portable Telephone Handset Receptacle 1-gang with stainless-steel
faceplate shall be provided for outlets of portable fire telephones.
2.14 AUDIO CONTROL UNIT (ACU)
A. The Audio Control Unit (ACU) shall be a mains and battery backed unit and shall be installed
next to (or into) the Fire Alarm Control Panel (please refer the schematic for the locations).
These units shall be connected to the loops of the FACPs and the voice system audio loop.
These units shall initiate the broadcast of live speech in the designated public areas using
manual controls. The use of these units shall be primarily for broadcast of fire messages and
other optional auxiliary messages which are site and application specific.

Neom community
B. The Audio Control Units shall be to BS5839 Part 1 and BS7443 or NFPA standards & UL
listed.
C. There shall be an audible indication by an integral buzzer to announce a local ACU fault.
D. The user controls on the unit shall be key switch enabled to allow authorized use of system
controls.
E. The Audio loop shall connect the ACUs to all the amplifiers units (DAs) as shown on the
schematics. The audio loop shall carry the messages and data from the master ACU to the
distributed amplifier units in the system. The messages it carries shall be from the microphone
or from the auxiliary message stores.
F. The integral microphone with Press to talk button shall be located behind the enable controls
door. It shall be possible to loop connect 10 external all call microphones for fire
announcements.
G. The ACUs shall be capable of storing 4 auxiliary messages (as mentioned below) that can be
initiated at the ACU for broadcast on the secure fire alarm network with each message of 45
second duration.
2.15 DISTRIBUTED AMPLIFIERS UNITS (DA)
A. The Distributed Amplifier unit shall be mains powered and battery backed unit and shall be
normally installed near its loudspeaker circuit area. They shall amplify audio signal for
broadcast to its zones of loudspeakers. The audio signal shall be either live or pre-recorded
messages. The live speech shall be from the microphone and the prerecorded messages
from the digital stores, which shall be local on the Alert and Evacuate Store Modules in the
DA.
B. Each DA zone shall consist of up to 8 loudspeaker circuits with each channel powered from
separate amplifier module, to secure the broadcast of messages.
C. The amplification of audio shall be by means of amplifier modules installed in the DAs. There
shall be a number of modules available with various power ratings to meet the loudspeaker
requirements. Their frequency bandwidth shall be in the range of 150Hz to 20Khz.
D. The DA shall meet the requirements of BS5839 Part 1, 4 and 8 or relevant NFPA standards
and be UL listed. Each of the DAs shall be given a label by the Fire Alarm Control Panel to
identify its location in the system. The label shall be automatically displayed along with the
DA events.
E. The DA shall facilitate optional local live speech. The global speech shall be broadcasted
from the ACU microphones via the Audio loop to all the DA and its loudspeaker circuits in the
system. F. The DA shall be IP 40 rated.
2.16 SPEAKERS
A. General: In all areas except back of the house, the voice evacuation speakers shall be
matched to the ceiling/wall color finish as indicated in architectural layouts, to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. No degradation of the speaker performance should occur. Strobes (as
specified in this document) may be integrated to voice evacuation speakers where indicated
on drawings.
B. Ceiling / Wall Cone Mounted Speakers:

Neom community
1. The speakers shall be either suitable for flush mounting to a false ceiling of any
configuration or for ceiling/wall surface mounting if there is no false ceiling provided. It
shall be equipped with a multiple tapping matching transformer to provide easy control of
speaker sound volume. Supporting brackets to mount the speaker onto false ceilings of
different configurations shall be provided and attachments to backbox when embedded.
2. The loudspeaker shall be rated 6 watts @ 70V line and has 10cm dynamic cone type for
speakers tapped at 1W or 1.5W (as indicated on drawings).
3. The loudspeaker shall be rated 6 watts @ 70V line and has 20cm dynamic cone type for
speakers tapped at 2W, 2.5W, 4W or 6W (as indicated on drawings).
4. An impedance matching transformer with the following taps shall be provided with each
speaker: 6W / 4W / 2.5W /1,5W / 1W for 70V line.
5. Where indicated on drawings, ceiling mounted speakers are to have integrated strobe
lights (refer to strobe lights specifications in this document).
6. The speaker shall have the following agency listings: UL 1480, ULC S526, ULC S541, FM,
CSFM and MEA (in addition to UL 1971 and UL 1638 when provided with integrated strobe
light).
7. The loudspeaker shall meet the following criteria:

• Frequency response: 100 Hz - 8 kHz +/- 5dB.
• Sound Pressure Levels: 90dB (1W/1m), 98dB @ rated input.
• Dispersion Angle: 150° Conical.
• The body shall be manufactured from steel finished with an attractive and durable,
high quality, baked epoxy polyester powder-coat.
• The speakers shall be complete with fire dome and thermal fusible link when recessed
in false ceilings and with backbox when embedded.
• DC block capacitors for audio circuit supervision
C. Wall Mounted Indoor Re-entrant Speakers:

1. The horn speaker shall be designed for indoor use and provide voice evacuation
announcements.
2. The horn shall employ a constant directivity 100mm Mylar cone with sealed back
construction for controlled sound directivity.
3. The speaker shall have a rugged plastic body meeting or exceeding 94V-0 UL flammability
ratings.
4. The indoor re-entrant speakers shall be provided with a surface mounting backbox or a
flush-mounting backbox as indicated on drawings.
5. The weatherproof re-entrant speakers shall meet the following criteria:
• 6 Watts rated @ 70V line.
• Transformer taps: 2.5W / 1.5W / 1W for 70V line.
• Sound Pressure levels: 90dB (2W/3.05 m).
• Frequency response: 250 Hz - 13 kHz +/- 5dB
6. Where indicated on drawings, re-entrant speakers are to have integrated strobe lights
(refer to strobe lights specifications in this document).
7. The speaker shall have the following agency listings: UL 1480, ULC S526, ULC S541,
MEA, CSFM, FM, CE and ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28 Pt. 36 Final Rule
(in addition to UL 1971 and UL 1638 when provided with integrated strobe light).
D. Weatherproof Indoor/Outdoor Wall Mounted Re-entrant Speakers:

1. The horn speaker shall be designed for outdoor-use when surface mounted and
indoor use when flush mounted and provide voice evacuation announcements.
2. The horn shall employ a sealed construction compression driver for controlled sound
directivity.
3. It shall be also designed to stand up to weather conditions when installed outdoors
using a housing made from durable and fire retardant, high impact plastic meeting or
exceeding 94V-0 UL flammability ratings.

Neom community
4. The speakers shall comply with IP65 standard for dust proof and waterproof
capabilities.
5. The weatherproof re-entrant speakers shall be provided with a surface mounting
backbox rated for outdoor use or a flush-mounting backbox rated for indoor use.
6. The weatherproof re-entrant speakers shall meet the following criteria: 15
Watts rated @ 70V line.
• Transformer taps: 15W / 8W / 4W / 5W / 2.5W for 70V line. Sound
Pressure levels: 93dB (4W/3.05 m).
• Frequency response: 100 Hz - 8 kHz +/- 5dB
7. Where indicated on drawings, re-entrant speakers are to have integrated strobe lights (refer to
strobe lights specifications in this document).
8. The speaker shall have the following agency listings: UL 1480, ULC S526, ULC S541, MEA,
CSFM, FM, CE and ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapter 28
Pt. 36 Final Rule (in addition to UL 1971 and UL 1638 when provided with

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Connect the FACP with a disconnect switch with lockable handle or cover.
B. Manual Pull Stations: Mount semi flush in recessed back boxes.
C. Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 10 cm and not more than 5 meters from a
side wall to the near edge. For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the
bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install not more than 10 meters apart in any direction.
D. Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 10 cm, but not more than 30 cm, below the ceiling.
E. Smoke Detectors near Air Registers: Install no closer than 150 cm.
F. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 25 cm below the ceiling (or false
ceiling). Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the deviceoperating
mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible alarms at the same
location into a single unit.
G. Visible Warning signs: Install above exit doors at least 15 cm above top of door frame.
H. FACP: Surface mounted with tops of cabinets not more than 1830 mm above the finished
floor.
A. Wires and cables for SOUNDERS, SPEAKERS, BELLS, and CONTROL SIGNALS (including
detectors and addressable devices) shall be:
1. Certified to have passed IEC 331 and 332 flame resistance and fire retardant tests or BS
7629: 1993 and BS 6387 or NEC 760 and UL 2464. The wiring is to be true class “A”.
Conductors are to be copper of minimum size 1.5 mm² and/or larger such that voltage drop
at full load is below 5%. The wiring is to be true class “A”.
A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in rigid PVC heavy gauge conduits except for fire resistant
cables when unconcealed. Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
Embedded conduits are approved strictly where allowed explicitly by structural engineer.
B. Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as

recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure
associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the
system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs,
pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D. Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction
boxes and covers red.

Neom community
E. Risers: Install vertical cable risers to serve the fire alarm system (sounders, bells, voice
evacuation, power supply and control devices) as indicated on riser diagram.
A. Generally, refer to section 16118 “RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS” for related products
B. Flame retardant schedule 40 rigid PVC heavy gauge concrete embedded (embedded
conduits strictly where allowed explicitly by structural engineer) or steel conduits for surface
mounted installations. All connection blocks shall be fire resistant pressure terminals or
special MICC connectors, installed in red metallic boxes.
A. Refer to section 16120 “WIRES, CABLES AND RELATED ACCESSORIES” for related
supporting systems products and field installation works.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
B. Paint power-supply disconnect switch red and label "FIRE ALARM."
C. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions
D. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power

results.
is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary
tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready
E. Minimum System Tests: Test the system according to procedures outlined in NFPA
72. Minimum required tests are as follows:
1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
2. Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.

Neom community
3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on record
drawings.
4. Verify that the control units are in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
5. Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open circuit
conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10 percent of
initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission according to class
of wiring used.
6. Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response at
the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
7. Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance items at
each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring initiations and using
all communications options. For each item, observe related performance at all devices
required to be affected by the item under all system sequences. Observe indicating
lights, displays, graphics (on separate computer), signal tones, and annunciator
indications.
8. Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner specified.
F. Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by
such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and
complies with applicable standards.
G. Report of Tests and Inspections: Provide a written record of inspections, tests, and detailed
test results in the form of a test log. Submit log on the satisfactory completion of tests.
H. Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION

specified below:
as a training aid.
notice.
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide
on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied
conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to Project site for this purpose.

Neom community
SECTION 16920– IP ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Electrical Work generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of other sections of the
specifications.
B. Integrated access control system with contactless proximity cards, readers, associated
accessories and IP based & interconnected controllers. The system shall include also system
server, workstation, software, licenses and interfaces as described thereafter.
C. Power supply up to the door controllers, servers’ racks and workstations is provided by others.
(Refer to electrical documents).
D. Structured cabling system and active LAN equipment is provided by others.
A. Works are to include a complete access control system including the following:
1. Central Host Server (CHS), satellite workstations, system software and peripherals or,
when indicated, a Programming keypad (PK).
2. Access Control Door Controllers (DCs) with IP interfaces.
3. Proximity card Readers.
4. Proximity Cards.
5. Door Hardware Accessories (contacts, locks,…etc).
6. Parking barriers and related interfaces via dry contacts.
7. Readiness for integrating parking ticketing machines (those machines are not part of
actual scope).
8. Interfacing with the fire alarm and parking management (if any) systems by dry
contacts.
9. The access control system software shall integrate the CCTV system via LAN Ethernet
connection such that any event in the access control shall automatically trigger the
nearest camera (on the corresponding spot monitor) and where cameras and their
associated video streams are shown on the access control system computerized
layouts.
10. System should be readily accessible and configurable from the remote Network
Operation Center (NOC) via TCP/IP.
11. Readiness for the integration of the access control with the BMS through Ethernet LAN
interface.
12. Back-up power by chargers, inverters (if equipment does not operate on DC supply)
and batteries.
B. The central panel shall be UL listed for access control. It shall be addressable and shall
manage dry contacts from various detectors as well as access control modules and alarm
outputs.
C. It shall be software programmable, and allow for the edition of entry reports if ever required.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit full technical information for approval including manufacturer’s catalogues for all
system equipment and components, indicating the following:
1. System operation, equipment specification, software features, listings and
certifications.

Neom community
2. System expandability
3. Operating parameters and limitations, ambient conditions, heat dissipation, power
requirements etc.
4. Manufacturer recommended cabling and wiring specifications and
characteristics.
B. Equipment is to be tested for quality and operation at factory, and test certificates and reports,
certified by an official testing authority, are to be submitted to the Engineer before dispatch to
site.
C. Submit drawings for approval including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Detailed system schematic diagrams
2. Exact devices & controllers locations, layouts and mounting details
Configuration and construction details of access control cabinet, operating
consoles…etc.
1.4 SPARE PARTS
1. Power supply: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed, but not
2. Door Lock: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed but not less
than one unit of each type.
3. Proximity card reader: not less than one unit of each type.
4. Door controller: not less than one unit of each type.
5. Door Contact: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type installed but not less
than one unit of each type.
6. Input/Output relay interface: Quantity equal to 3 percent of amount of each type
installed but not less than one unit of each type.
7. Proximity access control cards (for proximity readers used): Quantity equal to 10
percent of amount used, of each type.
8. One unit of any single point of failure device that could inhibit the usage of the whole
system.
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that

may be incorporated into the public address System include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Honeywell building solution (USA).
2. GE security (USA).
3. Lenel (USA)
4. Kantech (USA)
5. Northern computers(Canada). 6. Bosch (Germany)
7. Napco(USA).
8. Johnson controls (USA).
9. DSC - Tyco (USA).
10. HID (USA).
11. Siemens (Germany).

Neom community
1.6 WARRANTY

replace any component of the access control system that do not meet requirements or that
fail within the specified warranty period.
system.
EN, UL and IEEE Standards by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and marked for intended use.
C. Comply with relevant IEC and IEEE standards.

Neom community
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MATERIAL
A. GENERAL: The purpose of the access control systems is to monitor and control access to
the selected areas of the project 24 hours a day 7 days a week depending on the cardholder
credentials.
B. Access through any such points is controlled through an electronic touch-less card reader (for
proximity cards). The access control field devices shall be connected to a control panel
housing the access control system controllers (security panels or door controllers as indicated
on drawings).
C. Access control systems controllers :

1. Single Point “ON-LINE/OFF-LINE” Controllers that can handle up to four readers in an
ON-LINE and OFF-LINE mode in addition to input-output cards.
2. Modular multi-Point “ON-LINE/OFF-LINE” Controllers that can handle up to 32 readers
or input-output cards in an ON-LINE and OFF-LINE mode.
A. A CHS (CHS) working as a server and workstation for multiple satellites; 1 workstation in the
entrance lobby connected to the access control system controllers via the Local Area Network
(LAN) of the project. Those 4 workstations are also used for the IP CCTV system such that
any event in the access control shall automatically trigger the nearest camera (on the live
monitor) and where cameras and their associated video streams are shown on the access
control system computerized layouts.
B. The CHS shall be used to program each of the DCs (access system controllers), monitor the
operation of each DC, log the activity data for future consultation and if necessary override
the DCs to manually actuate the status of the inputs/outputs. The access to the different
functions of the CHS shall be protected by different levels of passwords for different kinds of
authorizations. The CHS shall also be used to program the following:
1. zonal alarm interlock or cause to effect matrix (inputs at different controllers affect
outputs on other controllers - such as freeing specific access points in case of fire or
assault, ...)
2. zonal anti-passback (where applicable) (cards read at the entrance of a zone covered
by different controllers should be restrained from accessing the zone again before
exiting from this zone first - to prevent using the same card by many persons at the
same time).
C. The DCs shall be able to have similar functions for different areas covered by the system, or
have different functions depending on the way they are used and programmed. For instance,
the security information shall be monitored by the security officer in the control room, while
the attendance of the employees who shall be using the system to enter the premises, shall
be used by the personnel manager in the personnel department, etc.
D. At times where real time monitoring is not required, the system shall be able to work in an
OFF-LINE mode where communication between the DCs and the CHS is restricted to the
upload of the DCs’ buffers into the system.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. When a cardholder badges his card, card data is transmitted to the access reader’s controller
(DC) which shall interpret the data and activate the release of the respective door magnetic

Neom community
or electric strike lock in less than 200 msec if the access is authorized. In case the access is
un-authorized, the DC shall activate an alarm relay, and transmit the information to the CHS.
B. The system shall allow the selective unlocking of the doors controlled by the access control
system during emergencies, via inputs from the fire alarm system or operator (using a valid
password).
C. Selected doors (refer to security drawings) have been monitored by balanced magnetic door
contacts (without electronic locks). Those shall be programmed to raise an alarm when
activated (door opened) except during fire conditions or the alarm being selectively disabled
by the operator (due to maintenance operations for example). In all situations, the event shall
be logged in the system.
D. The equipment center room shall be provided with 2 workstation PCs and one proximity card
encoder capable of generating proximity access cards. Proximity cards shall be of
predetermined time validity and the operator should be able to disable or modify their access
privileges them at any time.
2.4 EMERGENCY SECURITY STRATEGY
A. An emergency situation triggered by the fire alarm system or by the actuation of any of the
“Manual Release Devices” or “Malfunction Break Glass” units located on means of egress,
shall un-lock the electric door locks as per NFPA 101 standard (DelayedEgress Locks and
Access-Controlled Egress Doors as indicated in NFPA 7.2.1.6.1 and 7.2.1.6.2 respectively).
2.5 SYSTEM RELIABILITY
A. The system shall be based on an “ON-LINE/OFF-LINE” stand-alone controllers and shall have
a relatively small MTBF (mean time between failure) such that:
1. The faults remain local. If a controller fails, the failure shall not prevent the rest of the
system from being fully operational.
2. A LAN communication failure shall only stop data transfer to and from the CHS but
never prevent the controllers from being fully operational. The LAN communication
failure shall be promptly detected by the CHS. Zonal interlocks are temporarily lost in
this case.
3. Any fault at the controller’s level shall not liberate the access unless it was agreed that
the system or the point should be Fail-Safe and not Fail-Secure so as to liberate the
access such as in fire situations as indicated in the Emergency Security Strategy
above, ...
4. A relatively short power failure doesn’t stop the controller’s operation, (battery backup
should be available at the controllers level and the CHS)
2.6 SATELLITE WORKSTATION
A. Satellite Workstations computer systems are also used for CCTV; both security systems (CCTV
and access control) being integrated. Refer to section 16780 “VIDEO SURVEILLANCE” for
their technical specifications.
2.7 CENTRAL HOST SERVERS
A. The server shall be a self contained, multi-tasking, high speed server, which shall be
connected to a local (or wide area Network via appropriate routing) which would enable
remote operators to access the same databases for programming the controllers and/or
consulting the activities of these controllers. It shall also serve as a workstation.

Neom community
B. The project includes 2 shared CCTV & access control workstations, a CCTV management
system server rack mounted in the data center and an access control system server also rack
mounted in the data center with required software for the perfect operation of the access
control (and CCTV) management system including database systems.
C. Refer to section 16780 “VIDEO SURVEILLANCE” for the technical specifications of the
shared access control & CCTV workstations.
2.8 CHS CAPACITY
A. The CHS in its smallest configuration should be capable of:

1. Controlling and monitoring up to 150 readers through Ethernet LAN, 2.
Managing a database with a capacity of 2,000 card holders.
3. Managing input and output points following a predetermined cause to effect matrix.
B. It shall be possible to expand the system further by upgrading the CHS.
2.9 CENTRAL HOST SERVER (CHS) HARDWARE

A. The systems shall operate on the Windows environment. The platform specification required is a
rack mounted server installed in the data center (DELL, IBM or HEWLET PACKARD)
compatible with the following minimum specifications:
4. 1 TB storage min capacity, 7200 RPM (SATA II) HDDs in RAID 1 configuration. 5.
Graphics: Integrated Intel HD 3000 graphics
10. Operating System for Access Control Server: Microsoft Windows Server
2008R2, 64 bit version or later.
2.10 CHS PERIPHERALS
A. Laser printer, A4 size, 10ppm, grayscale.
B. Proximity card encoder (located in the “BMS room”).
2.11 CHS SYSTEM CAPABILITY
A. The CHS shall provide the following functions as a minimum:

Neom community
1. Validate/invalidate cards in groups or one by one.

2. Enable/disable readers (any type).
3. Release or inhibit access points
4. Allocate individual status; minimum of 25 groups with individual time programs.
5. Obtain various listings
6. Enable the printer to log exceptions only.
7. Allow for a minimum of 8 password control levels.
8. Pre-assign cards with clearly established and dated status level and validity period.
2.12 ACCESS DOOR CONTROLLER (DC, modular or standard unit)
A. Access Controllers (DC) shall be able to work in both ON-LINE and OFF-LINE mode should:
1. be able to monitor the state of the access point (open or closed) during preset time
frames, and detect locally any state of alarm
2. be able to authorize locally the access to card holders with valid codes during their
predetermined time zone,
3. to report all abnormal activities at the card reader or at the monitored point via a data
link or a dry contact closure,
4. to store in its buffer all recent activities until they are transmitted to the central station,
5. be down-loadable from the Central Host Server (CHS) with all the necessary
information concerning:
6. the card holders and the time zones they’ll be authorized to get through,
7. the inputs and the time zones during which they’ll be shunted
8. the outputs and the time zones during which they’ll be disabled
9. be overridable from the CHS such that activated outputs could be deactivated and vice-
versa.
10. have the anti-passback feature so as to inhibit multiple entries if not alternated with
exits.
11. Modular DCs shall be provided with their integration chassis complete with all
management and communication interfaces (Ethernet LAN).
B. Each DC shall have an Ethernet RJ45 port with TCP/IP settings to allow communication with
the CHS and other DCs.
C. Each DC shall have variable capacity features with a minimum of sixteen (16) spare input
points and four (4) spare outputs (or as indicated on drawings, which-ever is higher). The DC
local memory shall be of the non-volatile type with capability for access authorization data for
a minimum of 4,000 individuals. Local memory shall be capable of being expanded to a
minimum of 100 percent of its initial capacity. The DC shall be able to accommodate an
expansion module that increases the number of outputs to eight (8).
D. Integral battery backup power and provisions for uploading and downloading data between
each DC and CHS shall be provided.
E. DCs shall have an internal lithium battery to prevent loss of information when power is lost
for at least 12 months period.
F. Modular chassis shall be mounted in 19” racks (SSN panels) common to access or as
indicated on drawings.
G. DCs shall report to all other controllers located behind in case of LAN failure to force them to
hold to their alarms in their buffers until communication is reestablished.
1. Non-modular DCs are to be housed in lockable steel cabinets, with front access doors
only, if wall-mounted. Cabinets are to be totally enclosed, dead front type, protection
code IP 42 for indoor installations and IP 65 for outdoor installations, in accordance
with IEC 529, and are to be factory designed and assembled.

Neom community
2. CONSTRUCTION: box, trim and doors, are to be electro-galvanized sheet steel of

gauges not less than specified and in accordance with the Standards. Welded joints
are to be galvanized after manufacture. Gutter spaces are to conform to the Standards,
but are not to be less than 100 mm on all sides. Enclosure is to have predesigned
angles or threaded end studs to support and adjust mounting of interior cabinet
assembly.
3. TRIMS are to cover and overlap front shield, covering all terminals and bus
compartments, to form a dead front panel. Trims are to be fixed to cabinet/box by
quarter-turn clamps engaging flange of box (use of screws engaging holes in flange of
box is not acceptable). Screws where used are to be oval-head, countersunk and flush.
Trims for flush mounted panelboards are to overlap box and front shields by at least 20
mm. Trims for surface mounted panelboards are to be exactly sized to form flush fit to
box.
4. DOORS are to have concealed hinges integral with trim, and flush combination cylinder
lock and catch. Doors over 1000 mm high are to have vault-type handle and multiple
point latch mechanism. Locks are to be keyed alike.
5. FINISH: inner and outer surfaces of cabinet/boxes, trims, doors etc. are to be cleaned,
phosphatized, chrome passivated and treated with final thermosetting epoxy powder
modified by polyester resins providing high resistance to mechanical injury, heat, acid
and alkali solvents, grease, ageing and corrosion and of standard grey colour to the
approval of the Engineer.
6. DIRECTORIES: under glass, or an approved alternative durable arrangement, are to
be provided on inside face of doors, or in metal label holders when trim without doors
is specified. Directories are to be typed to identify cabinets and clearly indicate circuit
number and description of circuit.
7. OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES are to be heavy duty sheet steel cabinets, minimum 1.5
mm thick, fully weatherproofed (IP 65), without knockouts, but with removable
sealed/gasketed bottom gland plates and gasketed doors.
2.13 DC's PERFORMANCE
1. Each DC shall serve as the collection point for monitoring and controlling devices in a
particular security area. The DCs shall also provide power to devices down line.
2. The DCs shall be connected to all the Security System monitored points and readers
(any type) to collect and transmit status information to the CHS for processing. The
DCs shall buffer and retain status change information until transfer of data to the CHS
is verified. The buffer size should accommodate at lest 1000 transactions.
3. DCs shall be capable of being configured from the CHS for operation via readers (any
type) only, digital keypad only or readers (any type) and digital keypad in case digital
keypad is available.
4. When an ID badge/keycard is presented at a card reader, the encoded information shall
be compared with the stored data for authorized access. Access authorization
decisions are to be made locally at the card or its associated DC.
2.14 CARD READERS
1. Card readers shall consist of a solid-state static sensor head that is compatible with
only one (1) type of uniquely encoded ID badge/keycard and an electronic interface
box. If required on drawings, card readers shall be equipped with digital keypads.
2. Card readers range shall be 10~14cm minimum unless otherwise mentioned on

drawings. Long range readers range shall be 85~100cm minimum.
3. Card reader sensor head shall be housed in weatherproof enclosure equipped with a
tamper switch. Mounting screws for surface mounting are to be provided inside the
enclosure or, if exposed, are to be tamper-proof requiring a special tool for removal.

Neom community
4. Card readers shall be provided with separate visual indications that an ID

badge/keycard has been granted access or denied.
5. Card readers shall be provided in stainless steel body when indicated on drawings.
6. Esthetic design of the card readers shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
2.15 READER TECHNOLOGY
A. Proximity: Where the readers would be equipped with antennas that could pick up a card at
different ranges (from centimeters to meters) providing the best of all other technologies
except for being the most expensive of all. This technology is best suited for rough
environment and is particularly vandal and weather proof. Maintenance shall not be required.
2.16 AUTHORIZATION PROCEDURE
A. Authorization decisions include:

1. Unauthorized access requests and/or the presentation of an inactive, expired, lost,
stolen, un-returned or an improperly encoded ID badge /keycard / pincodes shall be
reported to the CHS. Access shall not be granted.
B. At fire emergency exit doors (where required on drawings):

1. The card reader or break-glass shall generate a command to temporarily change the
status of the associated balanced magnetic switch to “ACCESS” to permit unalarmed
entry/exit. The time duration of “ACCESS” shall reset and the “SECURE” status shall
begin as soon as the door closes after authorized entry/exit. As indicated NFPA 101
standard (Delayed-Egress Locks and Access-Controlled Egress Doors as indicated in
NFPA 7.2.1.6.1 and 7.2.1.6.2 respectively), the break-glass (referred to as MRD and
MBG on drawings) or presence sensor shall directly disable the door locks and notify
the DC.
C. At operational doors:
1. The card reader shall generate commands to release the associated electric strike or
magnetic lock and temporarily change the status of the associated door status sensor
to “ACCESS” to permit unalarmed entry. If the door is equipped with dual technology
sensors (presence sensors), the sensor shall initiate the sequence described above.
The time duration for “ACCESS” shall reset entry/exit.
2.17 ACTUATION TIME
A. The time periods for activating a local locking device and accessing the associated intrusion
detection device(s) shall be independently programmable. In the event two (2) or more
individuals utilize the same card reader or exit push-button, each valid request shall reset the
time duration for unlocking and “ACCESS” status to allow sufficient time for the unalarmed
entry/exit of each subsequent individual.
1. Failure of a portal to close within the preset ACCESS time shall be reported to the CHS.
2. In the event a portal is not within a pre-determined programmable CHS time after an
entry/exit request is granted, either locally via a card reader or exit push-button or
remotely from an operator console, the portal equipment shall reset and the event shall
be reported to the CHS.
2.18 DOOR HARDWARE ACCESSORIES
A. They are divided into locking Mechanisms (LM) and monitoring devices (MD).
1. The locking Mechanisms (LM) are:

Neom community
a. The Electric Door Releases that can handle a limited break force (~150N), and
are usually used indoors. There exist a large variety of devices to adapt to all
kind of frames (wooden, metallic, aluminum, ...). Those are used in fail-secure
mode.
b. The Electro-Magnetic Locks that can handle large forces (~5kN) but can never
work in Fail-Secure setups where any loss of power means an immediate
release of the door. Those are used in fail-safe mode.
B. The monitoring devices (MD) are:

1. Balanced Magnetic Door Contacts that are similar to Standard Magnetic Door Contacts
but besides detecting the absence of the magnetic field, they detect the presence of
any other magnetic field. This feature prevents intruders from disabling the contact by
applying a strong magnetic field from the outside to simulate the presence of the
magnet on the door.
2.19 PROXIMITY ACCESS CONTROL READER PERFORMANCE
A. The card reader shall read the encoded data from the access card and/or transponder and
transmit the data back to the access control panel (DCs), giving an audible and visual
indication of a properly read card.
B. The proximity card reader shall provide the following:

1. The card reader shall have a typical read range of 4" to 5.5" (10 - 14 cm). Long range
readers range shall be 85~100cm minimum.
2. The card reader shall be listed under UL 294 as an access control system unit
accessory, and shall have FCC & CE Mark certifications.
3. The card reader shall have separate terminal control points for two LEDs and an audible
indicator.
4. The card reader shall have a hold line that will buffer a card read until the panel has
asserted that the information can be sent up line.
5. The card reader shall have a card present line that will indicate that card data is ready
to send for clock and data applications.
6. The card reader shall have a re-present mode in which the card must be taken from
the reader field before being read again; to eliminate multiple reads from a single card
presentation.
7. The card reader shall have a built in anti-passback (multiple read) delay of one second.
8. The card reader shall an operating temperature of -10 to 50 degrees Celsius and an
operating humidity of 5-95% noncondensing.
9. The card reader shall communicate in a Wiegand protocol interface, and be compatible
with all standard access control systems.
2.20 ACCESS CONTROL PROXIMITY CARDS
A. The access control proximity cards shall provide the following:

1. The access card shall have a lifetime warranty.
2. The access card shall have up to 84 programmable bits of Wiegand formatted
information for universal compatibility with all Wiegand interface reader applications.
3. The access card shall be "Passive" (non-battery operated) proximity technology.
4. The access card shall have a permanent ink jet or laser engraved identification number
printed onto it. The card numbering options shall be:
5. Sequential Matching - The internal identification numbers and the external ink jet
numbers shall both be sequential and shall match (i.e. internal numbers 1100, external
ink jet numbers 1-100).

Neom community
6. Sequential Non-Matching - the internal identification numbers and the external ink jet
numbers will be sequential but they will not match (i.e. internal numbers 1-100, external
ink jet numbers 200-300).
7. Random Non-Matching - the internal identification number shall be random numbers,
the external ink jet numbers will be sequential, and the internal and external numbers
will not match (i.e. internal numbers 2, 7, 13, 18, etc., external ink jet numbers 1-100).
8. No External Card Numbering - the internal identification numbers are either sequential
or random, there are no external ink jet card numbers.
9. The access card shall be slot punched on the short edge of the card for a vertical/
portrait oriented photo, shall be offered with multicolor custom graphics, and be
compatible with most self adhesive photo pouches and PVC labels for use with a direct
print printer.
10. The access card shall have an operating temperature of -10 to 70 degrees Celsius and
shall have an operating relative humidity of 5-95% noncondensing.
11. The read range of the access card shall be extremely consistent, and not be affected
by body shielding or variable environmental conditions.
12. The access card shall be offered with over 137 billion unique codes.
2.21 DUAL TECHNOLOGY SENSORS (PRESENCE & MOVEMENT DETECTORS)
A. The dual technology sensors shall combine passive infrared (PIR) and microwave (MW)
technologies. The device shall use Dielectric Resonant Stabilized Oscillator (DRSO) circuitry
for microwave, along with Energy Frequency Analysis (EFA) and dual-element pyro-electric
sensors.
B. The contractor shall select different microwave circuits to provide for large area coverage
(about 70’ x 70') or long-range coverage (about 100' x 9 ') depending on the application.
C. The dual technology sensors shall also provide the following:

1. Microwave: Adjustable by potentiometer from 100% to 30%
2. LED Indicators: One for PIR, one for MW, one for alarm or trouble (selectable).
3. Mounting: Wall, ceiling (recessed or surface) or corner mounts.
D. Compliant to the requirements of NFPA 101 standard (Delayed-Egress Locks and Access-
Controlled Egress Doors as indicated in NFPA 7.2.1.6.1 and 7.2.1.6.2 respectively) when
used on means of egress.
2.22 MANUAL RELEASE DEVICE (MRD) AND MALFUNCTION BREAK-GLASS (MBG)
A. Are to have the following features:

1. Comply with the requirements of the operation described in NFPA 101 standard
(Delayed-Egress Locks and Access-Controlled Egress Doors as indicated in NFPA
7.2.1.6.1 and 7.2.1.6.2 respectively) including signage.
2. Vandal proof stainless-steel body
3. The unit shall incorporate a key operation facility for testing purposes and a specially
designed film fitted over the glass to prevent fragmentation when broken.
4. The unit shall incorporate an integral LED to activate upon breaking the glass/testing
the unit with a special key.
2.23 EGRESS BUTTONS
A. Are to have the following features:

1. Vandal Proof.
2. Stainless Steel faceplate. Esthetic design subject to the Engineer’s approval.
3. Rating as per access controllers’ manufacturer recommendations.

Neom community
4. Heavy-duty type with gold-plated contacts rated for five million operations, minimum.
2.25 BACK-UP BATTERIES AND CHARGERS
A. The access control system (provided with back-up batteries and chargers), upon a mains
power failure, shall force the gate barriers to open and remain in the open position until the
mains power is restored or the emergency generator is on-line. Each access control panel
shall have its independent back-up power suitable for powering all connected devices for the
indicated back-up time.
B. The back-up batteries of the access control system shall have the following specifications:
1. The battery block shall include sealed leak-proof, stand-by, maintenance-free,
stationary batteries. Other battery types shall not be accepted.
2. The nominal operating time provided by the battery block shall be 3 hours, for 100%
system utilization at the end of the discharge period.
3. The battery block shall be extremely low gassing such that no special precautions are
required.
4. The service life of the battery block shall exceed 10 years at 20 °c.
5. The battery block shall have a low self-discharge.
6. The batteries post bushings shall be sealed against electrolyte and atmospheric
oxygen.
C. The charging devices of the access control system shall have the following specifications:
1. Microprocessor-controlled charging (IU characteristic)
a. Battery charger: constant voltage, current limited type with electronic solid-state
controller. Voltage shall be controlled to within 2% of setting at up to 10% mains
supply variations.
b. Minimum charger efficiency: 85 percent.
c. Equalizing charge: automatically applied to battery every 90 days.
2. The charger shall be designed for a 90% recharge of a fully discharged battery set
within 15 hours.
3. Temperature based with automatic boost charging circuit. The charger voltage shall be
automatically adjusted with reference to ambient temperature for optimizing charging
& battery life.

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and to the approval of the Engineer.
Mount equipment in alignment with other fixtures and fix firmly in place with all supports and
fastenings secured.
B. Equipment is to be installed to prevent electro-static or other outside interference impairing

system performance.
C. Equipment is to be installed to be readily accessible for operation, maintenance and repair.

Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made, but no changes are to be made without
prior approval.
D. Make good surfaces of equipment damaged during installation, using touch-up paint provided
by equipment manufacturer, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Routing of access control cables (backbone of each door controller over the structured
cabling), power and control cables is to be in separate raceways.
F. Equipment manufacturer is to provide an Engineer and Technician qualified in the operation

of the system and equipment performance and the requirements of the specification, to assist
the Engineer to test and verify the system performance.
G. Provide diagnostic equipment required performing system tests and measurements.
3.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. The installation Contractor will be provided with 2 sets of drawings at the start of the project.
One set will be designated as the central location to document all as-built information as it
occurs throughout the project. The central set will be maintained by the Contractor’s foreman
on a daily basis, and will be available to the technical representative upon request during the
course of the project. Anticipated variations from the build-to drawings may include such
things as cable routing and actual outlet placement. No variations will be allowed to the
planned termination positions of horizontal and backbone cables or grounding conductors
unless approved in writing by the Owner.
B. The Contractor shall provide the central drawing set to the Owner at the conclusion of the
project. The marked up drawing set will accurately depict the as-built status of the system
including termination locations, cable routing, and all administration labeling for the cabling
system. In addition, a narrative will be provided that describes any areas of difficulty
encountered during the installation that could potentially cause problems to the IP Access
Control system.

A. The infrastructure of the IP access control system shall be the structured cabling system specified
in section 16715 “Telecommunication System” to the door controllers, and as per the
manufacturer’s specifications from the door controller to the peripheral devices.
A. Refer to section 16118 “RACEWAYS, BOXES AND FITTINGS” for related products and field
installation works.

Neom community
A. Refer to section 16120 “WIRES, CABLES AND RELATED ACCESSORIES” for related products
3.6 GROUNDING
A. Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions
B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment racks or cabinets. Isolate from power

results.
is complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary
tests.
D. Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice in writing when the system is ready

3.9 DEMONSTRATION
specified below:
1. Revise training requirements in subparagraphs below to suit Project and system.
as a training aid.
notice.

Neom community

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within one year of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting settings, controls, schedules and sensitivities to suit
actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three requested visits to project site for this
purpose.

Neom community
SECTION 16951 – LIGHTNING PROTECTIVE SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK AND OBLIGATIONS
A. Electrical work generally is to be in accordance with the requirements of section 16010.
B. The general requirements under Division 1 and 16 apply to work specified in this section.
C. Examine all the other sections of the specifications for requirements which may affect work
of this section.
D. Co-ordinate work with all other trades affecting or affected by activities of this section. Co-
operate with such other trades to assure the steady progress of all operations under the
Contract.
E. Waterproofing integrity restoration (to the satisfaction of the architect and the waterproofing
specialist) affected by the works described above (including earthing, grounding and lightning
protection earth electrodes, down conductors, bonding conductors….etc).
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes lightning protection systems for buildings and associated structures
and includes requirements for lightning protection systems components including, but not
limited to, the following:
1. Air Termination Network
2. Earth Termination Network
3. Bonding
4. Accessories
5. Transient Over voltage Protection for equipment
1.3 STANDARDS:
A. Work is to comply with NFC 17-102 edition 2011 covering high rise buildings.
1.4 GUARANTEES
A. Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this Section. However,
such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which
manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract
Documents.
B. All equipment and design shall be guaranteed against faulty materials and workmanship for
10 years.

Neom community
A. Installer Qualifications: engage an experienced Installer to install lightning protection

system. Refer Section 014000 “Quality Requirements”. Upon request, submit evidence of
such qualifications to the Architect.
B. Standards: BS 6651 “Protection of Structures against Lightning”.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:
A. Technical Data: submit data for approval including manufacturer's illustrated catalogues
with description and specification of component parts for air termination, conductors,
fasteners, joints (test links), earth point and connectors, wall inserts and bolts and any
accessories forming part of the lightning protective system.
1.7 SHOP AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS:
A. Submit drawings for approval including but not limited to, the followings:
1. Exact location and routing of roof conductors with indication of sleeves.
2. Exact routing of interconnecting conductors and bonding
3. Earth termination points and test points.
1.8 AS- BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide as- built drawings and indicate nature of soil, special earthing arrangements, date and
particulars of salting if used, test conditions and results obtained.
1.9 MANUFACTURERS
A. obtain equipment, manufactured specifically for lightning protection, from one of the following:
1. Helita (France)
2. Franklin (France)
3. Furse, W.J. and Co. (England)

Neom community
1.1 Manufacturers
A. Available Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
Franklin (France)
Furse, W.J. and Co. (England)
1.2 Technical Requirements
A. Air termination network is to consist of horizontal conductor around periphery (or

parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are higher than adjacent parts, unless they fall
in zone of protection of a higher conductor and as shown on the Drawings. Horizontal
conductors on roof are to be in a mesh as per code requirements and at least as shown on
the Drawings. All elements of lightning protective system are to be joined together.
B. Roof Conductors: is designed to let the lightning current flow to the earth termination
system. The roof conductors shall be made of 25x3mm flat copper conductors and installed
on top roof of the structure, fixed on the basis of one fastener (fix point) per meter, as
C. Earth Termination Network: is to consist of an earth rod at each down conductor, inter-
connected via earth termination loop as shown on the Drawings. Connection between rods
and loop conductors is to be via exothermic welding.
D. Inspection Earth Pits: is to be provided at the building corner rod for testing of the
resistance to earth of the system according to code requirements and as shown on the
Drawings.
E. Bonding: all metalwork in or on outside of structure is to be bonded to the lightning

protective system roof conductors. Metal work includes water pipes, tanks, sign structure,
communication supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, vents,
exterior metal staircases, metal window frames, vent pipes, steel doors or door frames and
main earthing terminal or bar of electrical installations.

Neom community
F. Metal work leaving or entering a structure and having system continuity (water piping, etc.)
is to be bonded as directly as possible to the earth termination, near point at which service
enters or leaves the structure, at nearest earth point or at nearest main earthing terminal or
bar of protective earthing system.
1.3 Lightning Protection System Components
A. Provide lightning protection system materials and components that comply with approved
manufacturer's standard design, in accordance with published product information.
B. Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps, fasteners,
grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other components required for a complete system
that meets the Standards.
C. Roof Conductors: 25x3mm bare, high conductivity, annealed stranded copper conductor,
with cross section as shown on the Drawings.
D. Air Terminal Rods: taper pointed copper, 15 mm diameter (min), 450 mm and 600 mm
length as shown on the Drawings.
E. Down Conductors: if embedded in walls or columns, the down conductor shall be made of
bare high conductivity annealed stranded copper conductor 70 mm2 cross section. If run
of building external walls, the down conductor shall be made of 25x3mm flat copper
conductors, fixed on the basis of one fastener (fix point) per meter.
F. Earth Rod: 19 mm diameter high strength, 3000 mm length low carbon steel core of high
tensile strength (600 N/mm2), grade 43A of BS 4360, with 99.99% pure electrolytic copper
molecularly bonded into steel core, 0.25 mm minimum thickness. Driving head is to be
high strength steel. Couplings are to be long length silicon bronze, grade CS101 of BS 2874,
internally threaded. Threads are to be rolled onto rod to ensure uniform layers of copper
and strength.
G. Inspection (Earth) Pit: precast concrete construction, with heavy duty cover matching
surroundings floor finish and with brass plate engraved 'Earth Pit Below' insert in cover.
One pit is to be provided for each earth rod.

Neom community
H. Earth Termination Network: consisting of earth rods interconnected with earth loop made
of bare standard copper conductors, directly buried in ground with top at least 0.8 m below
ground surface and 0.8m from the building as shown on the drawings.
I. Bonding Conductors: high conductivity, bare annealed soft drawn stranded copper cable.
J. Accessories including supports, joints, fasteners, clamps, bonds, test links etc. are to be
copper or copper alloy and specially manufactured for the purpose. Clamps and connectors
are to be specifically designed and sized for clamping and connecting to the various shapes
and surfaces of bonded metalwork. Bimetallic connectors are to be used between different
materials. Galvanized or plated steel nails, screws and bolts will not be accepted on copper
installations.
K. Surge Arresters: for the internal lightning protection system, class B/C (100KA) lightning
arresters shall be installed at incoming feeders of local power & generator sets and in
according to the relevant IEC standards. Class C (40KA) lightning arresters shall be
installed at each lighting panel, distribution panel, power panel, elevator panel and any other
secondary panel. 10KA lightning arresters shall be installed at each coaxial cable out of
MATV antennas, TV satellite systems, incoming telephone pair at MDF, audio interphone
main power supply, etc.
1.1 Installation of Lightning Protection Systems

Neom community
A. Install lightning protection systems as shown on Drawings, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions, and in compliance with applicable Standards or Codes
specified above.
B. Support roof conductors and down conductors using fasteners spaced at not more than
1000 mm centers horizontally and vertically, and fix by anchor bolts or lead inserts with
machined screws.
C. Bends in conductors are not to be less than 200-mm radius and are not to exceed 90-degree
turn.
D. Down conductors are to follow most direct path between air terminals and earth rod. Re-
entrant loops are not permissible.
E. Joints and Bonds: clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound. Protect
joints between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material, and with
overlapping joints not less than 20 mm long. Joints and bonds are to be as few as possible
and made mechanically and electrically effective by clamping, bolting or exothermic
welding. Effective cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds are not to be less than that of
main conductor.
F. Bond exposed metal parts of structure to lightning protective system if clearance between
any element of lightning system and metal part is less than 1800 mm or the distance allowed
by the Standard, whichever is smaller.
G. Inspection (Earth) pit is to extend 150 mm below top of earth rod. Cover earth rod
connector with suitable protective compound which can be easily removed for inspection.
Connector is not to be covered with backfill material and is to remain clean.
H. The overall resistance to earth electrode is not to exceed 10 ohms, measured in summer.
Additional earth rods connected with earth loop are to be provided, if needed.
1.2 Corrosion Protection
A. Use no combination of materials that may form an electrolytic couple of such nature that
corrosion is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently
excluded from the junction of such metals. W here unusual conditions exist that would

Neom community
cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors, use conductors with suitable protective

coatings.
1.3 Field Quality Control
A. Perform inspections of the lightning protection system installation in accordance with the
Standards. Provide Engineer with one copy and retain one copy at the project site
throughout construction for reference.
B. Document the inspections on Standard Forms. Provide one copy of each completed form
to the Engineer.
C. Provide advance notice of at least 24 hours to the Engineer before concealing lightning
protection system work.
D. Provide inspection and delivery certificates to the Engineer.
E. Provide Authority Certification of the system, obtaining necessary certifications and

signatures and preparing and handling necessary forms.
F. Tests on Site and Records
1. Resistance to earth of each isolated earthing point and of the complete bonded
installation is to be measured during the dry season and checked against specified resistance.
2. Electrical continuity of conductors, bonds etc. is to be checked by use of resistance

measuring instruments.

Neom community
SECTION 16970 - ELECTRICAL COMMISSIONING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section describes the requirements for start-up and commissioning for Division 16
installed work, including but not limited to:
1. Low voltage distribution system.
2. Emergency power system.
3. UPS system.
4. Fire alarm system.
5. Lighting system.
6. Lighting control system.
B. Provide full cooperation and assistance with Project Commissioning Coordinator per
Specifications Division 01, Section 01810 General Commissioning Requirements.
C. Assign personnel to interface and to assist the Project Commissioning Coordinator in all aspect
of commissioning activities as related to work of Division 16. Submit qualification of personnel
assigned for this work shall be reviewed and approved by the Project Commissioning
Coordinator.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)

B. Institute of Electrical Engineers, UK (IEE)
C. IEC – International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with provisions of Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Collaborate with the General Contractor to provide a complete commissioning and training
plan submittal for the electrical work.
A. Provide testing equipment and accessories that are free of defects and are certified for use.
B. Provide testing equipment with current calibration labels.
C. Comply with commissioning procedures to IEC, BS, and IEEE guidelines.
Incorporate manufacturer's recommend commission procedures for equipment.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate commissioning requirements noted in other Division 16 Sections.

Neom community
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment testing work is complete before starting functional performance of power
equipment.
B. Verify that operational manuals are complete and been approved by the Construction Manager
before starting functional performance testing.
C. Inspect equipment and confirm that it is clean and ready for operation. All shipping tags
removed, nameplates installed and equipment manuals in place.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide at least 1 journeyman electrician with tools and equipment necessary to perform
functional testing.
B. Provide equipment factory representative for this work when needed.
C. Provide certified testing agency personnel for this work when needed.
D. Provide any necessary temporary power provisions, diesel fuel, equipment and sundries to
complete this work.
3.3 POWER COMMISSIONING
A. Perform commissioning work after equipment is installed and system ready for operation.
B. Perform commissioning work in accordance with Power Check Lists and equipment
manufacturer's standard procedures and check lists, including but not limited to:
1. Verify test readings, such as:
a. Cable DC Hipot.
b. Ground fault protection.
c. Ground resistance.
d. Frequency.
e. Circuit breaker tripping. 2. Verify calibration of meters:
a. Kwhr meters.
b. Voltmeters.
c. Ammeters.
d. Frequency meters.
e. Circuit Breakers.
f. Fuses.
4. Verify operation of electronic power monitors.
5. Verify that total power system is performing time delays outlined in the design intent under
part and full load conditions..
3.4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. Perform commissioning work after alarm equipment is installed and system ready for operation.
B. Perform commissioning work in accordance to the manufacturer's standard procedures and
check lists, including but not limited to:
1. Verify tests such as:
a. Alarm db.
b. Detectors initiating signal.
c. Trouble lights.
2. Verify settings of
a. Smoke detectors.

Neom community
b. Heat detectors.
c. Duct detectors.
3. Verify readings of remote data, such as annunciator panel.
4. Verify operation of system modes, such:
a. Sprinkler supervisory alarm.
b. Kitchen hood extinguishing system.
c. Door hold open/release.
5. Verify that total alarm system is performing to provide conditions as outlined in the design
intent.
3.5 CHECKLIST - POWER DISTRIBUTION
A. Prior to Functional Performance Test:

1. System in place, including all components indicated, and tested.
2. Connected to utility company power system on a permanent basic.
3. Wiring installed in conduits or other raceways.
4. System checked for unwanted grounds, short circuits or open circuits.
5. Grounds installed as indicated.
6. Equipment connections properly torqued.
7. Equipment, where indicated, on housekeeping pads.
8. Equipment cleaned and shipping blocks removed.
9. Proper ventilation of electrical rooms.
10. Electrical rooms free of foreign pipes and ducts.
11. Equipment labeled.
12. Boxes and nameplates meet color coding requirements.
B. Personnel to be present or assist as required to Perform Functional Performance Test:
1. General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Control Contractor, and Electrical
Contractor, sub-contractors and specialty contractors as required.
2. Owner's Project Manager/Representative and/or Inspector of Record (I.O.R.).
3. Owner's maintenance staff, as desired.
4. Architect's Design Engineer(s).
C. Functional Performance Test: Demonstrate operation of normal power distribution system
per specifications including the following:
1. Activate system by connection to utility power.
2. Demonstrate draw out operation of circuit breakers.
3. Verify voltages and amperes at meters on switchgear.
4. Verify voltages and amperes at switchgear, substations, switchboards, motor control
centers, panelboards, transformers primary and secondary.
5. Verify voltages and amperes at mechanical motors and other major pieces of equipment.
D. Results:
1. If specified equipment performance is not verified, the General Contractor to have
corrections made and reschedule Functional performance Test as soon as possible after
corrective work is completed.
3.7 CHECKLIST - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
A. Prior to Functional Performance Test:

1. System in place, including all components indicated, and tested.
2. Connected to emergency power system.
3. Wiring is plenum rated where required.
4. Exposed Areas: Wiring installed in conduit.
5. System checked for grounds or breaks.

Neom community
6. Wiring installed in cable tray, or J-hooks, or bridal spring clips.

7. Cables have color coded identification tags.
8. Boxes and nameplates meet color coding requirements.
9. Verify system has been inspected and given approval by jurisdiction authority.
B. Personnel to be present or assist as required to perform Functional Performance Test:
1. General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, Control Contractor, Fire Alarm
Manufacturer's Representative, and Electrical Contractor, sub-contractors and specialty
contractors as required.
2. Owner's Project Manager/Representative.
3. Owner's maintenance staff, as desired.
4. Architect's Design Engineer’s).
C. Functional Performance Test: Demonstrate operation of fire alarm system per specifications
including the following:
1. Alarm initiating devices including pull stations, ceiling smoke detectors, duct smoke
detectors, heat detectors, and sprinkler alarm switches.
2. Air handling unit redirect upon alarm.
3. Verify tie-in and proper system operation with any off-site system monitoring.
4. Fire alarm system annunciator panel.
5. Alarm devices, visual and audible.
6. Central processing unit alphanumeric display and printer.
7. Verify system function upon loss of power.
D. Results:
1. If specified equipment performance is not verified, the General Contractor to have
corrections made and reschedule Functional Performance Test as soon as possible after
corrective work is completed.
E. Reports:
1. Submit reports of functional performance test (item C above) to the Construction
Manager.
3.8 TRAINING
A. At job completion, allot a period of not less than 24 hours for instruction of building operating
and maintenance personnel in the use of all systems. Include high voltage safety training
where medium voltage equipment is installed. This instruction time (24 hours) is in addition
to any instruction time called out in other Division 16 Sections.
B. Instruct all personnel at the same time. Contractor responsible for coordinating factory
representative arrangements.
C. Contractor responsible for training expenses incurred.

Electrical Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Electrical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEOM ADVANCED HEALTH CENTER

DESCRIPTION ELECTRICQL SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATION NO: 1600000

REVISION NO: REV. 0

DATE: 09 FEBRUARY 2021

SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 16010 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Power Supply and Distribution consisting of:

C. Lighting and Power Installations including:

E. Communication, life safety and low current systems consisting of:

Section 16010 Page 1 / 13

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.3.1 INSTALLATIONS GENERALLY

C. Installations are to be carried out by qualified personnel.

D. Provide accessories necessary to complete the installations, of the types specified or

Section 16010 Page 2 / 13

1.4 DESIGN CONDITIONS

A. Nominal characteristics of power supply and distribution are as follows:

D. KWH-METERING: public metering will be at medium voltage.

E. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: equipment, including transformers, switchgear, cables, relays,

I. STANDARDS: unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials are to be manufactured

Section 16010 Page 3 / 13

1.5 THE DRAWINGS

1.6 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

C. MANUFACTURERS' STANDARDS: equipment is to be the latest standard product of the

D. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS (Only western European, Japanese and North American

E. FACTORY ASSEMBLY: equipment generally is to be supplied in complete factory assembled

Section 16010 Page 4 / 13

F. STORAGE OF MATERIALS: equipment and materials are to be stored in an approved

H. WARRANTY: where required by the Specification, provide a warranty, signed by the

L. EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES are to be non-corroding, robust metal, inscribed in English, and

B. Coordination: Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related

Section 16010 Page 5 / 13

2. Provide complete original catalogues of product when relevant or when requested.

1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight, encircle, or

Section 16010 Page 6 / 13

E. Shop drawings are to be checked thoroughly and coordinated to avoid interference

F. Shop drawings and redesign shall be prepared electronically editable on AutoCAD

1.9 COORDINATED COMPOSITE DRAWINGS

A. Participate in site meetings to coordinate shop drawings between all construction

B. Submit coordinated composite drawings showing interference of all trades on one

1.10 AS BUILT DRAWINGS

Section 16010 Page 7 / 13

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B. Documentation directory: Submit an index of all O&M documents in a well-organized manner

E. Maintenance Manual: In addition to manufacturer supplied maintenance manuals, provide for

G. Construction documents include AS-built drawings, specifications, approved submittals,

1.12 GENERAL SUBMISSIONS

B. TECHNICAL LITERATURE is to include detailed manufacturers' specifications and original

Section 16010 Page 8 / 13

D. TEST CERTIFICATES AND REPORTS: where required by the Specification, submit

E. LABORATORY TESTS: if manufacturer's test certificates are

H. LABELLING SCHEDULE: submit for approval, prior to installation, a schedule of all

PART 2 - SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

A. CONSTRUCTION: electronic components of communication systems, security systems and

Section 16010 Page 9 / 13

B. TEMPERATURE LIMITS: manufacturer is to indicate maximum and minimum ambient

C. ALTERNATIVE ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT may be submitted for approval, provided such

D. PROTECTION: solid state equipment under normal conditions of operation is to withstand

E. INDICATOR LIGHTS shall be Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs).